1<!doctype html public "-//W30//DTD W3 HTML 2.0//EN"> 2 3<HTML> 4 5<!-- This file was generated using SDF 2.001 by 6 Ian Clatworthy (ianc@mincom.com). SDF is freely 7 available from http://www.mincom.com/mtr/sdf. --> 8 9<HEAD> 10<TITLE>OpenLDAP Software 2.4 Administrator's Guide</TITLE> 11</HEAD> 12<BODY> 13 14<DIV CLASS="header"> 15<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/"> 16<P><IMG SRC="../images/LDAPlogo.gif" ALIGN="Left" BORDER=0></P> 17</A> 18<DIV CLASS="navigate"> 19<P ALIGN="Center"><A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">Home</A> | <A HREF="../index.html">Catalog</A></P> 20</DIV> 21<BR CLEAR="Left"> 22</DIV> 23<DIV CLASS="title"> 24<H1 CLASS="doc-title">OpenLDAP Software 2.4 Administrator's Guide</H1> 25<ADDRESS CLASS="doc-author">The OpenLDAP Project <<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">http://www.openldap.org/</A>></ADDRESS> 26<ADDRESS CLASS="doc-modified">29 June 2010</ADDRESS> 27<BR CLEAR="All"> 28</DIV> 29<DIV CLASS="contents"> 30<HR> 31<H2>Table of Contents</H2> 32<UL> 33<A HREF="#Preface">Preface</A> 34<BR> 35<A HREF="#Introduction to OpenLDAP Directory Services">1. Introduction to OpenLDAP Directory Services</A><UL> 36<A HREF="#What is a directory service">1.1. What is a directory service?</A> 37<BR> 38<A HREF="#What is LDAP">1.2. What is LDAP?</A> 39<BR> 40<A HREF="#When should I use LDAP">1.3. When should I use LDAP?</A> 41<BR> 42<A HREF="#When should I not use LDAP">1.4. When should I not use LDAP?</A> 43<BR> 44<A HREF="#How does LDAP work">1.5. How does LDAP work?</A> 45<BR> 46<A HREF="#What about X.500">1.6. What about X.500?</A> 47<BR> 48<A HREF="#What is the difference between LDAPv2 and LDAPv3">1.7. What is the difference between LDAPv2 and LDAPv3?</A> 49<BR> 50<A HREF="#LDAP vs RDBMS">1.8. LDAP vs RDBMS</A> 51<BR> 52<A HREF="#What is slapd and what can it do">1.9. What is slapd and what can it do?</A></UL> 53<BR> 54<A HREF="#A Quick-Start Guide">2. A Quick-Start Guide</A> 55<BR> 56<A HREF="#The Big Picture - Configuration Choices">3. The Big Picture - Configuration Choices</A><UL> 57<A HREF="#Local Directory Service">3.1. Local Directory Service</A> 58<BR> 59<A HREF="#Local Directory Service with Referrals">3.2. Local Directory Service with Referrals</A> 60<BR> 61<A HREF="#Replicated Directory Service">3.3. Replicated Directory Service</A> 62<BR> 63<A HREF="#Distributed Local Directory Service">3.4. Distributed Local Directory Service</A></UL> 64<BR> 65<A HREF="#Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software">4. Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software</A><UL> 66<A HREF="#Obtaining and Extracting the Software">4.1. Obtaining and Extracting the Software</A> 67<BR> 68<A HREF="#Prerequisite software">4.2. Prerequisite software</A><UL> 69<A HREF="#{{TERM[expand]TLS}}">4.2.1. <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM></A> 70<BR> 71<A HREF="#{{TERM[expand]SASL}}">4.2.2. <TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM></A> 72<BR> 73<A HREF="#{{TERM[expand]Kerberos}}">4.2.3. <TERM>Kerberos Authentication Service</TERM></A> 74<BR> 75<A HREF="#Database Software">4.2.4. Database Software</A> 76<BR> 77<A HREF="#Threads">4.2.5. Threads</A> 78<BR> 79<A HREF="#TCP Wrappers">4.2.6. TCP Wrappers</A></UL> 80<BR> 81<A HREF="#Running configure">4.3. Running configure</A> 82<BR> 83<A HREF="#Building the Software">4.4. Building the Software</A> 84<BR> 85<A HREF="#Testing the Software">4.5. Testing the Software</A> 86<BR> 87<A HREF="#Installing the Software">4.6. Installing the Software</A></UL> 88<BR> 89<A HREF="#Configuring slapd">5. Configuring slapd</A><UL> 90<A HREF="#Configuration Layout">5.1. Configuration Layout</A> 91<BR> 92<A HREF="#Configuration Directives">5.2. Configuration Directives</A><UL> 93<A HREF="#cn=config">5.2.1. cn=config</A> 94<BR> 95<A HREF="#cn=module">5.2.2. cn=module</A> 96<BR> 97<A HREF="#cn=schema">5.2.3. cn=schema</A> 98<BR> 99<A HREF="#Backend-specific Directives">5.2.4. Backend-specific Directives</A> 100<BR> 101<A HREF="#Database-specific Directives">5.2.5. Database-specific Directives</A> 102<BR> 103<A HREF="#BDB and HDB Database Directives">5.2.6. BDB and HDB Database Directives</A></UL> 104<BR> 105<A HREF="#Configuration Example">5.3. Configuration Example</A> 106<BR> 107<A HREF="#Converting old style {{slapd.conf}}(5) file to {{cn=config}} format">5.4. Converting old style <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file to <EM>cn=config</EM> format</A></UL> 108<BR> 109<A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">6. The slapd Configuration File</A><UL> 110<A HREF="#Configuration File Format">6.1. Configuration File Format</A> 111<BR> 112<A HREF="#Configuration File Directives">6.2. Configuration File Directives</A><UL> 113<A HREF="#Global Directives">6.2.1. Global Directives</A> 114<BR> 115<A HREF="#General Backend Directives">6.2.2. General Backend Directives</A> 116<BR> 117<A HREF="#General Database Directives">6.2.3. General Database Directives</A> 118<BR> 119<A HREF="#BDB and HDB Database Directives">6.2.4. BDB and HDB Database Directives</A></UL> 120<BR> 121<A HREF="#Configuration File Example">6.3. Configuration File Example</A></UL> 122<BR> 123<A HREF="#Running slapd">7. Running slapd</A><UL> 124<A HREF="#Command-Line Options">7.1. Command-Line Options</A> 125<BR> 126<A HREF="#Starting slapd">7.2. Starting slapd</A> 127<BR> 128<A HREF="#Stopping slapd">7.3. Stopping slapd</A></UL> 129<BR> 130<A HREF="#Access Control">8. Access Control</A><UL> 131<A HREF="#Introduction">8.1. Introduction</A> 132<BR> 133<A HREF="#Access Control via Static Configuration">8.2. Access Control via Static Configuration</A><UL> 134<A HREF="#What to control access to">8.2.1. What to control access to</A> 135<BR> 136<A HREF="#Who to grant access to">8.2.2. Who to grant access to</A> 137<BR> 138<A HREF="#The access to grant">8.2.3. The access to grant</A> 139<BR> 140<A HREF="#Access Control Evaluation">8.2.4. Access Control Evaluation</A> 141<BR> 142<A HREF="#Access Control Examples">8.2.5. Access Control Examples</A></UL> 143<BR> 144<A HREF="#Access Control via Dynamic Configuration">8.3. Access Control via Dynamic Configuration</A><UL> 145<A HREF="#What to control access to">8.3.1. What to control access to</A> 146<BR> 147<A HREF="#Who to grant access to">8.3.2. Who to grant access to</A> 148<BR> 149<A HREF="#The access to grant">8.3.3. The access to grant</A> 150<BR> 151<A HREF="#Access Control Evaluation">8.3.4. Access Control Evaluation</A> 152<BR> 153<A HREF="#Access Control Examples">8.3.5. Access Control Examples</A> 154<BR> 155<A HREF="#Access Control Ordering">8.3.6. Access Control Ordering</A></UL> 156<BR> 157<A HREF="#Access Control Common Examples">8.4. Access Control Common Examples</A><UL> 158<A HREF="#Basic ACLs">8.4.1. Basic ACLs</A> 159<BR> 160<A HREF="#Matching Anonymous and Authenticated users">8.4.2. Matching Anonymous and Authenticated users</A> 161<BR> 162<A HREF="#Controlling rootdn access">8.4.3. Controlling rootdn access</A> 163<BR> 164<A HREF="#Managing access with Groups">8.4.4. Managing access with Groups</A> 165<BR> 166<A HREF="#Granting access to a subset of attributes">8.4.5. Granting access to a subset of attributes</A> 167<BR> 168<A HREF="#Allowing a user write to all entries below theirs">8.4.6. Allowing a user write to all entries below theirs</A> 169<BR> 170<A HREF="#Allowing entry creation">8.4.7. Allowing entry creation</A> 171<BR> 172<A HREF="#Tips for using regular expressions in Access Control">8.4.8. Tips for using regular expressions in Access Control</A> 173<BR> 174<A HREF="#Granting and Denying access based on security strength factors (ssf)">8.4.9. Granting and Denying access based on security strength factors (ssf)</A> 175<BR> 176<A HREF="#When things aren\'t working as expected">8.4.10. When things aren't working as expected</A></UL> 177<BR> 178<A HREF="#Sets - Granting rights based on relationships">8.5. Sets - Granting rights based on relationships</A><UL> 179<A HREF="#Groups of Groups">8.5.1. Groups of Groups</A> 180<BR> 181<A HREF="#Group ACLs without DN syntax">8.5.2. Group ACLs without DN syntax</A> 182<BR> 183<A HREF="#Following references">8.5.3. Following references</A></UL></UL> 184<BR> 185<A HREF="#Limits">9. Limits</A><UL> 186<A HREF="#Introduction">9.1. Introduction</A> 187<BR> 188<A HREF="#Soft and Hard limits">9.2. Soft and Hard limits</A> 189<BR> 190<A HREF="#Global Limits">9.3. Global Limits</A> 191<BR> 192<A HREF="#Per-Database Limits">9.4. Per-Database Limits</A><UL> 193<A HREF="#Specify who the limits apply to">9.4.1. Specify who the limits apply to</A> 194<BR> 195<A HREF="#Specify time limits">9.4.2. Specify time limits</A> 196<BR> 197<A HREF="#Specifying size limits">9.4.3. Specifying size limits</A> 198<BR> 199<A HREF="#Size limits and Paged Results">9.4.4. Size limits and Paged Results</A></UL> 200<BR> 201<A HREF="#Example Limit Configurations">9.5. Example Limit Configurations</A><UL> 202<A HREF="#Simple Global Limits">9.5.1. Simple Global Limits</A> 203<BR> 204<A HREF="#Global Hard and Soft Limits">9.5.2. Global Hard and Soft Limits</A> 205<BR> 206<A HREF="#Giving specific users larger limits">9.5.3. Giving specific users larger limits</A> 207<BR> 208<A HREF="#Limiting who can do paged searches">9.5.4. Limiting who can do paged searches</A></UL> 209<BR> 210<A HREF="#Further Information">9.6. Further Information</A></UL> 211<BR> 212<A HREF="#Database Creation and Maintenance Tools">10. Database Creation and Maintenance Tools</A><UL> 213<A HREF="#Creating a database over LDAP">10.1. Creating a database over LDAP</A> 214<BR> 215<A HREF="#Creating a database off-line">10.2. Creating a database off-line</A><UL> 216<A HREF="#The {{EX:slapadd}} program">10.2.1. The <TT>slapadd</TT> program</A> 217<BR> 218<A HREF="#The {{EX:slapindex}} program">10.2.2. The <TT>slapindex</TT> program</A> 219<BR> 220<A HREF="#The {{EX:slapcat}} program">10.2.3. The <TT>slapcat</TT> program</A></UL> 221<BR> 222<A HREF="#The LDIF text entry format">10.3. The LDIF text entry format</A></UL> 223<BR> 224<A HREF="#Backends">11. Backends</A><UL> 225<A HREF="#Berkeley DB Backends">11.1. Berkeley DB Backends</A><UL> 226<A HREF="#Overview">11.1.1. Overview</A> 227<BR> 228<A HREF="#back-bdb/back-hdb Configuration">11.1.2. back-bdb/back-hdb Configuration</A> 229<BR> 230<A HREF="#Further Information">11.1.3. Further Information</A></UL> 231<BR> 232<A HREF="#LDAP">11.2. LDAP</A><UL> 233<A HREF="#Overview">11.2.1. Overview</A> 234<BR> 235<A HREF="#back-ldap Configuration">11.2.2. back-ldap Configuration</A> 236<BR> 237<A HREF="#Further Information">11.2.3. Further Information</A></UL> 238<BR> 239<A HREF="#LDIF">11.3. LDIF</A><UL> 240<A HREF="#Overview">11.3.1. Overview</A> 241<BR> 242<A HREF="#back-ldif Configuration">11.3.2. back-ldif Configuration</A> 243<BR> 244<A HREF="#Further Information">11.3.3. Further Information</A></UL> 245<BR> 246<A HREF="#Metadirectory">11.4. Metadirectory</A><UL> 247<A HREF="#Overview">11.4.1. Overview</A> 248<BR> 249<A HREF="#back-meta Configuration">11.4.2. back-meta Configuration</A> 250<BR> 251<A HREF="#Further Information">11.4.3. Further Information</A></UL> 252<BR> 253<A HREF="#Monitor">11.5. Monitor</A><UL> 254<A HREF="#Overview">11.5.1. Overview</A> 255<BR> 256<A HREF="#back-monitor Configuration">11.5.2. back-monitor Configuration</A> 257<BR> 258<A HREF="#Further Information">11.5.3. Further Information</A></UL> 259<BR> 260<A HREF="#Null">11.6. Null</A><UL> 261<A HREF="#Overview">11.6.1. Overview</A> 262<BR> 263<A HREF="#back-null Configuration">11.6.2. back-null Configuration</A> 264<BR> 265<A HREF="#Further Information">11.6.3. Further Information</A></UL> 266<BR> 267<A HREF="#Passwd">11.7. Passwd</A><UL> 268<A HREF="#Overview">11.7.1. Overview</A> 269<BR> 270<A HREF="#back-passwd Configuration">11.7.2. back-passwd Configuration</A> 271<BR> 272<A HREF="#Further Information">11.7.3. Further Information</A></UL> 273<BR> 274<A HREF="#Perl/Shell">11.8. Perl/Shell</A><UL> 275<A HREF="#Overview">11.8.1. Overview</A> 276<BR> 277<A HREF="#back-perl/back-shell Configuration">11.8.2. back-perl/back-shell Configuration</A> 278<BR> 279<A HREF="#Further Information">11.8.3. Further Information</A></UL> 280<BR> 281<A HREF="#Relay">11.9. Relay</A><UL> 282<A HREF="#Overview">11.9.1. Overview</A> 283<BR> 284<A HREF="#back-relay Configuration">11.9.2. back-relay Configuration</A> 285<BR> 286<A HREF="#Further Information">11.9.3. Further Information</A></UL> 287<BR> 288<A HREF="#SQL">11.10. SQL</A><UL> 289<A HREF="#Overview">11.10.1. Overview</A> 290<BR> 291<A HREF="#back-sql Configuration">11.10.2. back-sql Configuration</A> 292<BR> 293<A HREF="#Further Information">11.10.3. Further Information</A></UL></UL> 294<BR> 295<A HREF="#Overlays">12. Overlays</A><UL> 296<A HREF="#Access Logging">12.1. Access Logging</A><UL> 297<A HREF="#Overview">12.1.1. Overview</A> 298<BR> 299<A HREF="#Access Logging Configuration">12.1.2. Access Logging Configuration</A> 300<BR> 301<A HREF="#Further Information">12.1.3. Further Information</A></UL> 302<BR> 303<A HREF="#Audit Logging">12.2. Audit Logging</A><UL> 304<A HREF="#Overview">12.2.1. Overview</A> 305<BR> 306<A HREF="#Audit Logging Configuration">12.2.2. Audit Logging Configuration</A> 307<BR> 308<A HREF="#Further Information">12.2.3. Further Information</A></UL> 309<BR> 310<A HREF="#Chaining">12.3. Chaining</A><UL> 311<A HREF="#Overview">12.3.1. Overview</A> 312<BR> 313<A HREF="#Chaining Configuration">12.3.2. Chaining Configuration</A> 314<BR> 315<A HREF="#Handling Chaining Errors">12.3.3. Handling Chaining Errors</A> 316<BR> 317<A HREF="#Read-Back of Chained Modifications">12.3.4. Read-Back of Chained Modifications</A> 318<BR> 319<A HREF="#Further Information">12.3.5. Further Information</A></UL> 320<BR> 321<A HREF="#Constraints">12.4. Constraints</A><UL> 322<A HREF="#Overview">12.4.1. Overview</A> 323<BR> 324<A HREF="#Constraint Configuration">12.4.2. Constraint Configuration</A> 325<BR> 326<A HREF="#Further Information">12.4.3. Further Information</A></UL> 327<BR> 328<A HREF="#Dynamic Directory Services">12.5. Dynamic Directory Services</A><UL> 329<A HREF="#Overview">12.5.1. Overview</A> 330<BR> 331<A HREF="#Dynamic Directory Service Configuration">12.5.2. Dynamic Directory Service Configuration</A> 332<BR> 333<A HREF="#Further Information">12.5.3. Further Information</A></UL> 334<BR> 335<A HREF="#Dynamic Groups">12.6. Dynamic Groups</A><UL> 336<A HREF="#Overview">12.6.1. Overview</A> 337<BR> 338<A HREF="#Dynamic Group Configuration">12.6.2. Dynamic Group Configuration</A></UL> 339<BR> 340<A HREF="#Dynamic Lists">12.7. Dynamic Lists</A><UL> 341<A HREF="#Overview">12.7.1. Overview</A> 342<BR> 343<A HREF="#Dynamic List Configuration">12.7.2. Dynamic List Configuration</A> 344<BR> 345<A HREF="#Further Information">12.7.3. Further Information</A></UL> 346<BR> 347<A HREF="#Reverse Group Membership Maintenance">12.8. Reverse Group Membership Maintenance</A><UL> 348<A HREF="#Overview">12.8.1. Overview</A> 349<BR> 350<A HREF="#Member Of Configuration">12.8.2. Member Of Configuration</A> 351<BR> 352<A HREF="#Further Information">12.8.3. Further Information</A></UL> 353<BR> 354<A HREF="#The Proxy Cache Engine">12.9. The Proxy Cache Engine</A><UL> 355<A HREF="#Overview">12.9.1. Overview</A> 356<BR> 357<A HREF="#Proxy Cache Configuration">12.9.2. Proxy Cache Configuration</A> 358<BR> 359<A HREF="#Further Information">12.9.3. Further Information</A></UL> 360<BR> 361<A HREF="#Password Policies">12.10. Password Policies</A><UL> 362<A HREF="#Overview">12.10.1. Overview</A> 363<BR> 364<A HREF="#Password Policy Configuration">12.10.2. Password Policy Configuration</A> 365<BR> 366<A HREF="#Further Information">12.10.3. Further Information</A></UL> 367<BR> 368<A HREF="#Referential Integrity">12.11. Referential Integrity</A><UL> 369<A HREF="#Overview">12.11.1. Overview</A> 370<BR> 371<A HREF="#Referential Integrity Configuration">12.11.2. Referential Integrity Configuration</A> 372<BR> 373<A HREF="#Further Information">12.11.3. Further Information</A></UL> 374<BR> 375<A HREF="#Return Code">12.12. Return Code</A><UL> 376<A HREF="#Overview">12.12.1. Overview</A> 377<BR> 378<A HREF="#Return Code Configuration">12.12.2. Return Code Configuration</A> 379<BR> 380<A HREF="#Further Information">12.12.3. Further Information</A></UL> 381<BR> 382<A HREF="#Rewrite/Remap">12.13. Rewrite/Remap</A><UL> 383<A HREF="#Overview">12.13.1. Overview</A> 384<BR> 385<A HREF="#Rewrite/Remap Configuration">12.13.2. Rewrite/Remap Configuration</A> 386<BR> 387<A HREF="#Further Information">12.13.3. Further Information</A></UL> 388<BR> 389<A HREF="#Sync Provider">12.14. Sync Provider</A><UL> 390<A HREF="#Overview">12.14.1. Overview</A> 391<BR> 392<A HREF="#Sync Provider Configuration">12.14.2. Sync Provider Configuration</A> 393<BR> 394<A HREF="#Further Information">12.14.3. Further Information</A></UL> 395<BR> 396<A HREF="#Translucent Proxy">12.15. Translucent Proxy</A><UL> 397<A HREF="#Overview">12.15.1. Overview</A> 398<BR> 399<A HREF="#Translucent Proxy Configuration">12.15.2. Translucent Proxy Configuration</A> 400<BR> 401<A HREF="#Further Information">12.15.3. Further Information</A></UL> 402<BR> 403<A HREF="#Attribute Uniqueness">12.16. Attribute Uniqueness</A><UL> 404<A HREF="#Overview">12.16.1. Overview</A> 405<BR> 406<A HREF="#Attribute Uniqueness Configuration">12.16.2. Attribute Uniqueness Configuration</A> 407<BR> 408<A HREF="#Further Information">12.16.3. Further Information</A></UL> 409<BR> 410<A HREF="#Value Sorting">12.17. Value Sorting</A><UL> 411<A HREF="#Overview">12.17.1. Overview</A> 412<BR> 413<A HREF="#Value Sorting Configuration">12.17.2. Value Sorting Configuration</A> 414<BR> 415<A HREF="#Further Information">12.17.3. Further Information</A></UL> 416<BR> 417<A HREF="#Overlay Stacking">12.18. Overlay Stacking</A><UL> 418<A HREF="#Overview">12.18.1. Overview</A> 419<BR> 420<A HREF="#Example Scenarios">12.18.2. Example Scenarios</A></UL></UL> 421<BR> 422<A HREF="#Schema Specification">13. Schema Specification</A><UL> 423<A HREF="#Distributed Schema Files">13.1. Distributed Schema Files</A> 424<BR> 425<A HREF="#Extending Schema">13.2. Extending Schema</A><UL> 426<A HREF="#Object Identifiers">13.2.1. Object Identifiers</A> 427<BR> 428<A HREF="#Naming Elements">13.2.2. Naming Elements</A> 429<BR> 430<A HREF="#Local schema file">13.2.3. Local schema file</A> 431<BR> 432<A HREF="#Attribute Type Specification">13.2.4. Attribute Type Specification</A> 433<BR> 434<A HREF="#Object Class Specification">13.2.5. Object Class Specification</A> 435<BR> 436<A HREF="#OID Macros">13.2.6. OID Macros</A></UL></UL> 437<BR> 438<A HREF="#Security Considerations">14. Security Considerations</A><UL> 439<A HREF="#Network Security">14.1. Network Security</A><UL> 440<A HREF="#Selective Listening">14.1.1. Selective Listening</A> 441<BR> 442<A HREF="#IP Firewall">14.1.2. IP Firewall</A> 443<BR> 444<A HREF="#TCP Wrappers">14.1.3. TCP Wrappers</A></UL> 445<BR> 446<A HREF="#Data Integrity and Confidentiality Protection">14.2. Data Integrity and Confidentiality Protection</A><UL> 447<A HREF="#Security Strength Factors">14.2.1. Security Strength Factors</A></UL> 448<BR> 449<A HREF="#Authentication Methods">14.3. Authentication Methods</A><UL> 450<A HREF="#"simple" method">14.3.1. "simple" method</A> 451<BR> 452<A HREF="#SASL method">14.3.2. SASL method</A></UL> 453<BR> 454<A HREF="#Password Storage">14.4. Password Storage</A><UL> 455<A HREF="#SSHA password storage scheme">14.4.1. SSHA password storage scheme</A> 456<BR> 457<A HREF="#CRYPT password storage scheme">14.4.2. CRYPT password storage scheme</A> 458<BR> 459<A HREF="#MD5 password storage scheme">14.4.3. MD5 password storage scheme</A> 460<BR> 461<A HREF="#SMD5 password storage scheme">14.4.4. SMD5 password storage scheme</A> 462<BR> 463<A HREF="#SHA password storage scheme">14.4.5. SHA password storage scheme</A> 464<BR> 465<A HREF="#SASL password storage scheme">14.4.6. SASL password storage scheme</A> 466<BR> 467<A HREF="#KERBEROS password storage scheme">14.4.7. KERBEROS password storage scheme</A></UL> 468<BR> 469<A HREF="#Pass-Through authentication">14.5. Pass-Through authentication</A><UL> 470<A HREF="#Configuring slapd to use an authentication provider">14.5.1. Configuring slapd to use an authentication provider</A> 471<BR> 472<A HREF="#Configuring saslauthd">14.5.2. Configuring saslauthd</A> 473<BR> 474<A HREF="#Testing pass-through authentication">14.5.3. Testing pass-through authentication</A></UL></UL> 475<BR> 476<A HREF="#Using SASL">15. Using SASL</A><UL> 477<A HREF="#SASL Security Considerations">15.1. SASL Security Considerations</A> 478<BR> 479<A HREF="#SASL Authentication">15.2. SASL Authentication</A><UL> 480<A HREF="#GSSAPI">15.2.1. GSSAPI</A> 481<BR> 482<A HREF="#KERBEROS_V4">15.2.2. KERBEROS_V4</A> 483<BR> 484<A HREF="#DIGEST-MD5">15.2.3. DIGEST-MD5</A> 485<BR> 486<A HREF="#Mapping Authentication Identities">15.2.4. Mapping Authentication Identities</A> 487<BR> 488<A HREF="#Direct Mapping">15.2.5. Direct Mapping</A> 489<BR> 490<A HREF="#Search-based mappings">15.2.6. Search-based mappings</A></UL> 491<BR> 492<A HREF="#SASL Proxy Authorization">15.3. SASL Proxy Authorization</A><UL> 493<A HREF="#Uses of Proxy Authorization">15.3.1. Uses of Proxy Authorization</A> 494<BR> 495<A HREF="#SASL Authorization Identities">15.3.2. SASL Authorization Identities</A> 496<BR> 497<A HREF="#Proxy Authorization Rules">15.3.3. Proxy Authorization Rules</A></UL></UL> 498<BR> 499<A HREF="#Using TLS">16. Using TLS</A><UL> 500<A HREF="#TLS Certificates">16.1. TLS Certificates</A><UL> 501<A HREF="#Server Certificates">16.1.1. Server Certificates</A> 502<BR> 503<A HREF="#Client Certificates">16.1.2. Client Certificates</A></UL> 504<BR> 505<A HREF="#TLS Configuration">16.2. TLS Configuration</A><UL> 506<A HREF="#Server Configuration">16.2.1. Server Configuration</A> 507<BR> 508<A HREF="#Client Configuration">16.2.2. Client Configuration</A></UL></UL> 509<BR> 510<A HREF="#Constructing a Distributed Directory Service">17. Constructing a Distributed Directory Service</A><UL> 511<A HREF="#Subordinate Knowledge Information">17.1. Subordinate Knowledge Information</A> 512<BR> 513<A HREF="#Superior Knowledge Information">17.2. Superior Knowledge Information</A> 514<BR> 515<A HREF="#The ManageDsaIT Control">17.3. The ManageDsaIT Control</A></UL> 516<BR> 517<A HREF="#Replication">18. Replication</A><UL> 518<A HREF="#Replication Technology">18.1. Replication Technology</A><UL> 519<A HREF="#LDAP Sync Replication">18.1.1. LDAP Sync Replication</A></UL> 520<BR> 521<A HREF="#Deployment Alternatives">18.2. Deployment Alternatives</A><UL> 522<A HREF="#Delta-syncrepl replication">18.2.1. Delta-syncrepl replication</A> 523<BR> 524<A HREF="#N-Way Multi-Master replication">18.2.2. N-Way Multi-Master replication</A> 525<BR> 526<A HREF="#MirrorMode replication">18.2.3. MirrorMode replication</A> 527<BR> 528<A HREF="#Syncrepl Proxy Mode">18.2.4. Syncrepl Proxy Mode</A></UL> 529<BR> 530<A HREF="#Configuring the different replication types">18.3. Configuring the different replication types</A><UL> 531<A HREF="#Syncrepl">18.3.1. Syncrepl</A> 532<BR> 533<A HREF="#Delta-syncrepl">18.3.2. Delta-syncrepl</A> 534<BR> 535<A HREF="#N-Way Multi-Master">18.3.3. N-Way Multi-Master</A> 536<BR> 537<A HREF="#MirrorMode">18.3.4. MirrorMode</A> 538<BR> 539<A HREF="#Syncrepl Proxy">18.3.5. Syncrepl Proxy</A></UL></UL> 540<BR> 541<A HREF="#Maintenance">19. Maintenance</A><UL> 542<A HREF="#Directory Backups">19.1. Directory Backups</A> 543<BR> 544<A HREF="#Berkeley DB Logs">19.2. Berkeley DB Logs</A> 545<BR> 546<A HREF="#Checkpointing">19.3. Checkpointing</A> 547<BR> 548<A HREF="#Migration">19.4. Migration</A></UL> 549<BR> 550<A HREF="#Monitoring">20. Monitoring</A><UL> 551<A HREF="#Monitor configuration via cn=config(5)">20.1. Monitor configuration via cn=config(5)</A> 552<BR> 553<A HREF="#Monitor configuration via slapd.conf(5)">20.2. Monitor configuration via slapd.conf(5)</A> 554<BR> 555<A HREF="#Accessing Monitoring Information">20.3. Accessing Monitoring Information</A> 556<BR> 557<A HREF="#Monitor Information">20.4. Monitor Information</A><UL> 558<A HREF="#Backends">20.4.1. Backends</A> 559<BR> 560<A HREF="#Connections">20.4.2. Connections</A> 561<BR> 562<A HREF="#Databases">20.4.3. Databases</A> 563<BR> 564<A HREF="#Listener">20.4.4. Listener</A> 565<BR> 566<A HREF="#Log">20.4.5. Log</A> 567<BR> 568<A HREF="#Operations">20.4.6. Operations</A> 569<BR> 570<A HREF="#Overlays">20.4.7. Overlays</A> 571<BR> 572<A HREF="#SASL">20.4.8. SASL</A> 573<BR> 574<A HREF="#Statistics">20.4.9. Statistics</A> 575<BR> 576<A HREF="#Threads">20.4.10. Threads</A> 577<BR> 578<A HREF="#Time">20.4.11. Time</A> 579<BR> 580<A HREF="#TLS">20.4.12. TLS</A> 581<BR> 582<A HREF="#Waiters">20.4.13. Waiters</A></UL></UL> 583<BR> 584<A HREF="#Tuning">21. Tuning</A><UL> 585<A HREF="#Performance Factors">21.1. Performance Factors</A><UL> 586<A HREF="#Memory">21.1.1. Memory</A> 587<BR> 588<A HREF="#Disks">21.1.2. Disks</A> 589<BR> 590<A HREF="#Network Topology">21.1.3. Network Topology</A> 591<BR> 592<A HREF="#Directory Layout Design">21.1.4. Directory Layout Design</A> 593<BR> 594<A HREF="#Expected Usage">21.1.5. Expected Usage</A></UL> 595<BR> 596<A HREF="#Indexes">21.2. Indexes</A><UL> 597<A HREF="#Understanding how a search works">21.2.1. Understanding how a search works</A> 598<BR> 599<A HREF="#What to index">21.2.2. What to index</A> 600<BR> 601<A HREF="#Presence indexing">21.2.3. Presence indexing</A></UL> 602<BR> 603<A HREF="#Logging">21.3. Logging</A><UL> 604<A HREF="#What log level to use">21.3.1. What log level to use</A> 605<BR> 606<A HREF="#What to watch out for">21.3.2. What to watch out for</A> 607<BR> 608<A HREF="#Improving throughput">21.3.3. Improving throughput</A></UL> 609<BR> 610<A HREF="#Caching">21.4. Caching</A><UL> 611<A HREF="#Berkeley DB Cache">21.4.1. Berkeley DB Cache</A> 612<BR> 613<A HREF="#{{slapd}}(8) Entry Cache (cachesize)">21.4.2. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) Entry Cache (cachesize)</A> 614<BR> 615<A HREF="#{{TERM:IDL}} Cache (idlcachesize)">21.4.3. <TERM>IDL</TERM> Cache (idlcachesize)</A> 616<BR> 617<A HREF="#{{slapd}}(8) Threads">21.4.4. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) Threads</A></UL></UL> 618<BR> 619<A HREF="#Troubleshooting">22. Troubleshooting</A><UL> 620<A HREF="#User or Software errors">22.1. User or Software errors?</A> 621<BR> 622<A HREF="#Checklist">22.2. Checklist</A> 623<BR> 624<A HREF="#OpenLDAP Bugs">22.3. OpenLDAP Bugs</A> 625<BR> 626<A HREF="#3rd party software error">22.4. 3rd party software error</A> 627<BR> 628<A HREF="#How to contact the OpenLDAP Project">22.5. How to contact the OpenLDAP Project</A> 629<BR> 630<A HREF="#How to present your problem">22.6. How to present your problem</A> 631<BR> 632<A HREF="#Debugging {{slapd}}(8)">22.7. Debugging <EM>slapd</EM>(8)</A> 633<BR> 634<A HREF="#Commercial Support">22.8. Commercial Support</A></UL> 635<BR> 636<A HREF="#Changes Since Previous Release">A. Changes Since Previous Release</A><UL> 637<A HREF="#New Guide Sections">A.1. New Guide Sections</A> 638<BR> 639<A HREF="#New Features and Enhancements in 2.4">A.2. New Features and Enhancements in 2.4</A><UL> 640<A HREF="#Better {{B:cn=config}} functionality">A.2.1. Better <B>cn=config</B> functionality</A> 641<BR> 642<A HREF="#Better {{B:cn=schema}} functionality">A.2.2. Better <B>cn=schema</B> functionality</A> 643<BR> 644<A HREF="#More sophisticated Syncrepl configurations">A.2.3. More sophisticated Syncrepl configurations</A> 645<BR> 646<A HREF="#N-Way Multimaster Replication">A.2.4. N-Way Multimaster Replication</A> 647<BR> 648<A HREF="#Replicating {{slapd}} Configuration (syncrepl and {{B:cn=config}})">A.2.5. Replicating <EM>slapd</EM> Configuration (syncrepl and <B>cn=config</B>)</A> 649<BR> 650<A HREF="#Push-Mode Replication">A.2.6. Push-Mode Replication</A> 651<BR> 652<A HREF="#More extensive TLS configuration control">A.2.7. More extensive TLS configuration control</A> 653<BR> 654<A HREF="#Performance enhancements">A.2.8. Performance enhancements</A> 655<BR> 656<A HREF="#New overlays">A.2.9. New overlays</A> 657<BR> 658<A HREF="#New features in existing Overlays">A.2.10. New features in existing Overlays</A> 659<BR> 660<A HREF="#New features in slapd">A.2.11. New features in slapd</A> 661<BR> 662<A HREF="#New features in libldap">A.2.12. New features in libldap</A> 663<BR> 664<A HREF="#New clients, tools and tool enhancements">A.2.13. New clients, tools and tool enhancements</A> 665<BR> 666<A HREF="#New build options">A.2.14. New build options</A></UL> 667<BR> 668<A HREF="#Obsolete Features Removed From 2.4">A.3. Obsolete Features Removed From 2.4</A><UL> 669<A HREF="#Slurpd">A.3.1. Slurpd</A> 670<BR> 671<A HREF="#back-ldbm">A.3.2. back-ldbm</A></UL></UL> 672<BR> 673<A HREF="#Upgrading from 2.3.x">B. Upgrading from 2.3.x</A><UL> 674<A HREF="#{{B:cn=config}} olc* attributes">B.1. <B>cn=config</B> olc* attributes</A> 675<BR> 676<A HREF="#ACLs: searches require privileges on the search base">B.2. ACLs: searches require privileges on the search base</A></UL> 677<BR> 678<A HREF="#Common errors encountered when using OpenLDAP Software">C. Common errors encountered when using OpenLDAP Software</A><UL> 679<A HREF="#Common causes of LDAP errors">C.1. Common causes of LDAP errors</A><UL> 680<A HREF="#ldap_*: Can\'t contact LDAP server">C.1.1. ldap_*: Can't contact LDAP server</A> 681<BR> 682<A HREF="#ldap_*: No such object">C.1.2. ldap_*: No such object</A> 683<BR> 684<A HREF="#ldap_*: Can\'t chase referral">C.1.3. ldap_*: Can't chase referral</A> 685<BR> 686<A HREF="#ldap_*: server is unwilling to perform">C.1.4. ldap_*: server is unwilling to perform</A> 687<BR> 688<A HREF="#ldap_*: Insufficient access">C.1.5. ldap_*: Insufficient access</A> 689<BR> 690<A HREF="#ldap_*: Invalid DN syntax">C.1.6. ldap_*: Invalid DN syntax</A> 691<BR> 692<A HREF="#ldap_*: Referral hop limit exceeded">C.1.7. ldap_*: Referral hop limit exceeded</A> 693<BR> 694<A HREF="#ldap_*: operations error">C.1.8. ldap_*: operations error</A> 695<BR> 696<A HREF="#ldap_*: other error">C.1.9. ldap_*: other error</A> 697<BR> 698<A HREF="#ldap_add/modify: Invalid syntax">C.1.10. ldap_add/modify: Invalid syntax</A> 699<BR> 700<A HREF="#ldap_add/modify: Object class violation">C.1.11. ldap_add/modify: Object class violation</A> 701<BR> 702<A HREF="#ldap_add: No such object">C.1.12. ldap_add: No such object</A> 703<BR> 704<A HREF="#ldap add: invalid structural object class chain">C.1.13. ldap add: invalid structural object class chain</A> 705<BR> 706<A HREF="#ldap_add: no structuralObjectClass operational attribute">C.1.14. ldap_add: no structuralObjectClass operational attribute</A> 707<BR> 708<A HREF="#ldap_add/modify/rename: Naming violation">C.1.15. ldap_add/modify/rename: Naming violation</A> 709<BR> 710<A HREF="#ldap_add/delete/modify/rename: no global superior knowledge">C.1.16. ldap_add/delete/modify/rename: no global superior knowledge</A> 711<BR> 712<A HREF="#ldap_bind: Insufficient access">C.1.17. ldap_bind: Insufficient access</A> 713<BR> 714<A HREF="#ldap_bind: Invalid credentials">C.1.18. ldap_bind: Invalid credentials</A> 715<BR> 716<A HREF="#ldap_bind: Protocol error">C.1.19. ldap_bind: Protocol error</A> 717<BR> 718<A HREF="#ldap_modify: cannot modify object class">C.1.20. ldap_modify: cannot modify object class</A> 719<BR> 720<A HREF="#ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: ..">C.1.21. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: ...</A> 721<BR> 722<A HREF="#ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such Object">C.1.22. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such Object</A> 723<BR> 724<A HREF="#ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such attribute">C.1.23. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such attribute</A> 725<BR> 726<A HREF="#ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Unknown authentication method">C.1.24. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Unknown authentication method</A> 727<BR> 728<A HREF="#ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Local error (82)">C.1.25. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Local error (82)</A> 729<BR> 730<A HREF="#ldap_search: Partial results and referral received">C.1.26. ldap_search: Partial results and referral received</A> 731<BR> 732<A HREF="#ldap_start_tls: Operations error">C.1.27. ldap_start_tls: Operations error</A></UL> 733<BR> 734<A HREF="#Other Errors">C.2. Other Errors</A><UL> 735<A HREF="#ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=34 (Numerical result out of range)">C.2.1. ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=34 (Numerical result out of range)</A> 736<BR> 737<A HREF="#ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=11 (Resource temporarily unavailable)">C.2.2. ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=11 (Resource temporarily unavailable)</A> 738<BR> 739<A HREF="#daemon: socket() failed errno=97 (Address family not supported)">C.2.3. daemon: socket() failed errno=97 (Address family not supported)</A> 740<BR> 741<A HREF="#GSSAPI: gss_acquire_cred: Miscellaneous failure; Permission denied;">C.2.4. GSSAPI: gss_acquire_cred: Miscellaneous failure; Permission denied;</A> 742<BR> 743<A HREF="#access from unknown denied">C.2.5. access from unknown denied</A> 744<BR> 745<A HREF="#ldap_read: want=# error=Resource temporarily unavailable">C.2.6. ldap_read: want=# error=Resource temporarily unavailable</A> 746<BR> 747<A HREF="#`make test\' fails">C.2.7. `make test' fails</A> 748<BR> 749<A HREF="#ldap_*: Internal (implementation specific) error (80) - additional info: entry index delete failed">C.2.8. ldap_*: Internal (implementation specific) error (80) - additional info: entry index delete failed</A> 750<BR> 751<A HREF="#ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Can\'t contact LDAP server (-1)">C.2.9. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Can't contact LDAP server (-1)</A></UL></UL> 752<BR> 753<A HREF="#Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions">D. Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions</A><UL> 754<A HREF="#Dependency Versions">D.1. Dependency Versions</A></UL> 755<BR> 756<A HREF="#Real World OpenLDAP Deployments and Examples">E. Real World OpenLDAP Deployments and Examples</A> 757<BR> 758<A HREF="#OpenLDAP Software Contributions">F. OpenLDAP Software Contributions</A><UL> 759<A HREF="#Client APIs">F.1. Client APIs</A><UL> 760<A HREF="#ldapc++">F.1.1. ldapc++</A> 761<BR> 762<A HREF="#ldaptcl">F.1.2. ldaptcl</A></UL> 763<BR> 764<A HREF="#Overlays">F.2. Overlays</A><UL> 765<A HREF="#acl">F.2.1. acl</A> 766<BR> 767<A HREF="#addpartial">F.2.2. addpartial</A> 768<BR> 769<A HREF="#allop">F.2.3. allop</A> 770<BR> 771<A HREF="#autogroup">F.2.4. autogroup</A> 772<BR> 773<A HREF="#comp_match">F.2.5. comp_match</A> 774<BR> 775<A HREF="#denyop">F.2.6. denyop</A> 776<BR> 777<A HREF="#dsaschema">F.2.7. dsaschema</A> 778<BR> 779<A HREF="#lastmod">F.2.8. lastmod</A> 780<BR> 781<A HREF="#nops">F.2.9. nops</A> 782<BR> 783<A HREF="#nssov">F.2.10. nssov</A> 784<BR> 785<A HREF="#passwd">F.2.11. passwd</A> 786<BR> 787<A HREF="#proxyOld">F.2.12. proxyOld</A> 788<BR> 789<A HREF="#smbk5pwd">F.2.13. smbk5pwd</A> 790<BR> 791<A HREF="#trace">F.2.14. trace</A> 792<BR> 793<A HREF="#usn">F.2.15. usn</A></UL> 794<BR> 795<A HREF="#Tools">F.3. Tools</A><UL> 796<A HREF="#Statistic Logging">F.3.1. Statistic Logging</A></UL> 797<BR> 798<A HREF="#SLAPI Plugins">F.4. SLAPI Plugins</A><UL> 799<A HREF="#addrdnvalues">F.4.1. addrdnvalues</A></UL></UL> 800<BR> 801<A HREF="#Configuration File Examples">G. Configuration File Examples</A><UL> 802<A HREF="#slapd.conf">G.1. slapd.conf</A> 803<BR> 804<A HREF="#ldap.conf">G.2. ldap.conf</A> 805<BR> 806<A HREF="#a-n-other.conf">G.3. a-n-other.conf</A></UL> 807<BR> 808<A HREF="#LDAP Result Codes">H. LDAP Result Codes</A><UL> 809<A HREF="#Non-Error Result Codes">H.1. Non-Error Result Codes</A> 810<BR> 811<A HREF="#Result Codes">H.2. Result Codes</A> 812<BR> 813<A HREF="#success (0)">H.3. success (0)</A> 814<BR> 815<A HREF="#operationsError (1)">H.4. operationsError (1)</A> 816<BR> 817<A HREF="#protocolError (2)">H.5. protocolError (2)</A> 818<BR> 819<A HREF="#timeLimitExceeded (3)">H.6. timeLimitExceeded (3)</A> 820<BR> 821<A HREF="#sizeLimitExceeded (4)">H.7. sizeLimitExceeded (4)</A> 822<BR> 823<A HREF="#compareFalse (5)">H.8. compareFalse (5)</A> 824<BR> 825<A HREF="#compareTrue (6)">H.9. compareTrue (6)</A> 826<BR> 827<A HREF="#authMethodNotSupported (7)">H.10. authMethodNotSupported (7)</A> 828<BR> 829<A HREF="#strongerAuthRequired (8)">H.11. strongerAuthRequired (8)</A> 830<BR> 831<A HREF="#referral (10)">H.12. referral (10)</A> 832<BR> 833<A HREF="#adminLimitExceeded (11)">H.13. adminLimitExceeded (11)</A> 834<BR> 835<A HREF="#unavailableCriticalExtension (12)">H.14. unavailableCriticalExtension (12)</A> 836<BR> 837<A HREF="#confidentialityRequired (13)">H.15. confidentialityRequired (13)</A> 838<BR> 839<A HREF="#saslBindInProgress (14)">H.16. saslBindInProgress (14)</A> 840<BR> 841<A HREF="#noSuchAttribute (16)">H.17. noSuchAttribute (16)</A> 842<BR> 843<A HREF="#undefinedAttributeType (17)">H.18. undefinedAttributeType (17)</A> 844<BR> 845<A HREF="#inappropriateMatching (18)">H.19. inappropriateMatching (18)</A> 846<BR> 847<A HREF="#constraintViolation (19)">H.20. constraintViolation (19)</A> 848<BR> 849<A HREF="#attributeOrValueExists (20)">H.21. attributeOrValueExists (20)</A> 850<BR> 851<A HREF="#invalidAttributeSyntax (21)">H.22. invalidAttributeSyntax (21)</A> 852<BR> 853<A HREF="#noSuchObject (32)">H.23. noSuchObject (32)</A> 854<BR> 855<A HREF="#aliasProblem (33)">H.24. aliasProblem (33)</A> 856<BR> 857<A HREF="#invalidDNSyntax (34)">H.25. invalidDNSyntax (34)</A> 858<BR> 859<A HREF="#aliasDereferencingProblem (36)">H.26. aliasDereferencingProblem (36)</A> 860<BR> 861<A HREF="#inappropriateAuthentication (48)">H.27. inappropriateAuthentication (48)</A> 862<BR> 863<A HREF="#invalidCredentials (49)">H.28. invalidCredentials (49)</A> 864<BR> 865<A HREF="#insufficientAccessRights (50)">H.29. insufficientAccessRights (50)</A> 866<BR> 867<A HREF="#busy (51)">H.30. busy (51)</A> 868<BR> 869<A HREF="#unavailable (52)">H.31. unavailable (52)</A> 870<BR> 871<A HREF="#unwillingToPerform (53)">H.32. unwillingToPerform (53)</A> 872<BR> 873<A HREF="#loopDetect (54)">H.33. loopDetect (54)</A> 874<BR> 875<A HREF="#namingViolation (64)">H.34. namingViolation (64)</A> 876<BR> 877<A HREF="#objectClassViolation (65)">H.35. objectClassViolation (65)</A> 878<BR> 879<A HREF="#notAllowedOnNonLeaf (66)">H.36. notAllowedOnNonLeaf (66)</A> 880<BR> 881<A HREF="#notAllowedOnRDN (67)">H.37. notAllowedOnRDN (67)</A> 882<BR> 883<A HREF="#entryAlreadyExists (68)">H.38. entryAlreadyExists (68)</A> 884<BR> 885<A HREF="#objectClassModsProhibited (69)">H.39. objectClassModsProhibited (69)</A> 886<BR> 887<A HREF="#affectsMultipleDSAs (71)">H.40. affectsMultipleDSAs (71)</A> 888<BR> 889<A HREF="#other (80)">H.41. other (80)</A></UL> 890<BR> 891<A HREF="#Glossary">I. Glossary</A><UL> 892<A HREF="#Terms">I.1. Terms</A> 893<BR> 894<A HREF="#Related Organizations">I.2. Related Organizations</A> 895<BR> 896<A HREF="#Related Products">I.3. Related Products</A> 897<BR> 898<A HREF="#References">I.4. References</A></UL> 899<BR> 900<A HREF="#Generic configure Instructions">J. Generic configure Instructions</A> 901<BR> 902<A HREF="#OpenLDAP Software Copyright Notices">K. OpenLDAP Software Copyright Notices</A><UL> 903<A HREF="#OpenLDAP Copyright Notice">K.1. OpenLDAP Copyright Notice</A> 904<BR> 905<A HREF="#Additional Copyright Notices">K.2. Additional Copyright Notices</A> 906<BR> 907<A HREF="#University of Michigan Copyright Notice">K.3. University of Michigan Copyright Notice</A></UL> 908<BR> 909<A HREF="#OpenLDAP Public License">L. OpenLDAP Public License</A></UL> 910</DIV> 911<DIV CLASS="main"> 912<P></P> 913<HR> 914<H1><A NAME="Preface">Preface</A></H1> 915<H2>Copyright</H2> 916<P>Copyright 1998-2008, The <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/foundation/">OpenLDAP Foundation</A>, <EM>All Rights Reserved</EM>.</P> 917<P>Copyright 1992-1996, Regents of the <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/">University of Michigan</A>, <EM>All Rights Reserved</EM>.</P> 918<P>This document is considered a part of OpenLDAP Software. This document is subject to terms of conditions set forth in <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Software Copyright Notices">OpenLDAP Software Copyright Notices</A> and the <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Public License">OpenLDAP Public License</A>. Complete copies of the notices and associated license can be found in Appendix K and L, respectively.</P> 919<P>Portions of OpenLDAP Software and this document may be copyright by other parties and/or subject to additional restrictions. Individual source files should be consulted for additional copyright notices.</P> 920<H2>Scope of this Document</H2> 921<P>This document provides a guide for installing OpenLDAP Software 2.4 (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/software/">http://www.openldap.org/software/</A>) on <TERM>UNIX</TERM> (and UNIX-like) systems. The document is aimed at experienced system administrators with basic understanding of <TERM>LDAP</TERM>-based directory services.</P> 922<P>This document is meant to be used in conjunction with other OpenLDAP information resources provided with the software package and on the project's site (<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/</A>) on the <TERM>World Wide Web</TERM>. The site makes available a number of resources.</P> 923<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 924<CAPTION ALIGN=top>OpenLDAP Resources</CAPTION> 925<TR CLASS="heading"> 926<TD> 927<STRONG>Resource</STRONG> 928</TD> 929<TD> 930<STRONG>URL</STRONG> 931</TD> 932</TR> 933<TR> 934<TD> 935Document Catalog 936</TD> 937<TD> 938<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/doc/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/doc/</A> 939</TD> 940</TR> 941<TR> 942<TD> 943Frequently Asked Questions 944</TD> 945<TD> 946<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/faq/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/faq/</A> 947</TD> 948</TR> 949<TR> 950<TD> 951Issue Tracking System 952</TD> 953<TD> 954<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/its/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/its/</A> 955</TD> 956</TR> 957<TR> 958<TD> 959Mailing Lists 960</TD> 961<TD> 962<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/lists/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/lists/</A> 963</TD> 964</TR> 965<TR> 966<TD> 967Manual Pages 968</TD> 969<TD> 970<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/software/man.cgi">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/software/man.cgi</A> 971</TD> 972</TR> 973<TR> 974<TD> 975Software Pages 976</TD> 977<TD> 978<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/software/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/software/</A> 979</TD> 980</TR> 981<TR> 982<TD> 983Support Pages 984</TD> 985<TD> 986<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/support/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/support/</A> 987</TD> 988</TR> 989</TABLE> 990 991<H2>Acknowledgments</H2> 992<P>The <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/project/">OpenLDAP Project</A> is comprised of a team of volunteers. This document would not be possible without their contribution of time and energy.</P> 993<P>The OpenLDAP Project would also like to thank the <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html">University of Michigan LDAP Team</A> for building the foundation of LDAP software and information to which OpenLDAP Software is built upon. This document is based upon University of Michigan document: <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/doc/guides/slapd/guide.pdf">The SLAPD and SLURPD Administrators Guide</A>.</P> 994<H2>Amendments</H2> 995<P>Suggested enhancements and corrections to this document should be submitted using the <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">OpenLDAP</A> <TERM>Issue Tracking System</TERM> (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/its/">http://www.openldap.org/its/</A>).</P> 996<H2>About this document</H2> 997<P>This document was produced using the <TERM>Simple Document Format</TERM> (<TERM>SDF</TERM>) documentation system (<A HREF="http://search.cpan.org/src/IANC/sdf-2.001/doc/catalog.html">http://search.cpan.org/src/IANC/sdf-2.001/doc/catalog.html</A>) developed by <EM>Ian Clatworthy</EM>. Tools for SDF are available from <A HREF="http://cpan.org/">CPAN</A> (<A HREF="http://search.cpan.org/search?query=SDF&mode=dist">http://search.cpan.org/search?query=SDF&mode=dist</A>).</P> 998<P></P> 999<HR> 1000<H1><A NAME="Introduction to OpenLDAP Directory Services">1. Introduction to OpenLDAP Directory Services</A></H1> 1001<P>This document describes how to build, configure, and operate <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">OpenLDAP</A> Software to provide directory services. This includes details on how to configure and run the Standalone <TERM>LDAP</TERM> Daemon, <EM>slapd</EM>(8). It is intended for new and experienced administrators alike. This section provides a basic introduction to directory services and, in particular, the directory services provided by <EM>slapd</EM>(8). This introduction is only intended to provide enough information so one might get started learning about <TERM>LDAP</TERM>, <TERM>X.500</TERM>, and directory services.</P> 1002<H2><A NAME="What is a directory service">1.1. What is a directory service?</A></H2> 1003<P>A directory is a specialized database specifically designed for searching and browsing, in additional to supporting basic lookup and update functions.</P> 1004<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 1005<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>A directory is defined by some as merely a database optimized for read access. This definition, at best, is overly simplistic. 1006<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 1007<P>Directories tend to contain descriptive, attribute-based information and support sophisticated filtering capabilities. Directories generally do not support complicated transaction or roll-back schemes found in database management systems designed for handling high-volume complex updates. Directory updates are typically simple all-or-nothing changes, if they are allowed at all. Directories are generally tuned to give quick response to high-volume lookup or search operations. They may have the ability to replicate information widely in order to increase availability and reliability, while reducing response time. When directory information is replicated, temporary inconsistencies between the replicas may be okay, as long as inconsistencies are resolved in a timely manner.</P> 1008<P>There are many different ways to provide a directory service. Different methods allow different kinds of information to be stored in the directory, place different requirements on how that information can be referenced, queried and updated, how it is protected from unauthorized access, etc. Some directory services are <EM>local</EM>, providing service to a restricted context (e.g., the finger service on a single machine). Other services are global, providing service to a much broader context (e.g., the entire Internet). Global services are usually <EM>distributed</EM>, meaning that the data they contain is spread across many machines, all of which cooperate to provide the directory service. Typically a global service defines a uniform <EM>namespace</EM> which gives the same view of the data no matter where you are in relation to the data itself.</P> 1009<P>A web directory, such as provided by the <EM>Open Directory Project</EM> <<A HREF="http://dmoz.org">http://dmoz.org</A>>, is a good example of a directory service. These services catalog web pages and are specifically designed to support browsing and searching.</P> 1010<P>While some consider the Internet <TERM>Domain Name System</TERM> (DNS) is an example of a globally distributed directory service, DNS is not browseable nor searchable. It is more properly described as a globally distributed <EM>lookup</EM> service.</P> 1011<H2><A NAME="What is LDAP">1.2. What is LDAP?</A></H2> 1012<P><TERM>LDAP</TERM> stands for <TERM>Lightweight Directory Access Protocol</TERM>. As the name suggests, it is a lightweight protocol for accessing directory services, specifically <TERM>X.500</TERM>-based directory services. LDAP runs over <TERM>TCP</TERM>/<TERM>IP</TERM> or other connection oriented transfer services. LDAP is an <A HREF="http://www.ietf.org/">IETF</A> Standard Track protocol and is specified in "Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) Technical Specification Road Map" <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4510.txt">RFC4510</A>.</P> 1013<P>This section gives an overview of LDAP from a user's perspective.</P> 1014<P><EM>What kind of information can be stored in the directory?</EM> The LDAP information model is based on <EM>entries</EM>. An entry is a collection of attributes that has a globally-unique <TERM>Distinguished Name</TERM> (DN). The DN is used to refer to the entry unambiguously. Each of the entry's attributes has a <EM>type</EM> and one or more <EM>values</EM>. The types are typically mnemonic strings, like "<TT>cn</TT>" for common name, or "<TT>mail</TT>" for email address. The syntax of values depend on the attribute type. For example, a <TT>cn</TT> attribute might contain the value <TT>Babs Jensen</TT>. A <TT>mail</TT> attribute might contain the value "<TT>babs@example.com</TT>". A <TT>jpegPhoto</TT> attribute would contain a photograph in the <TERM>JPEG</TERM> (binary) format.</P> 1015<P><EM>How is the information arranged?</EM> In LDAP, directory entries are arranged in a hierarchical tree-like structure. Traditionally, this structure reflected the geographic and/or organizational boundaries. Entries representing countries appear at the top of the tree. Below them are entries representing states and national organizations. Below them might be entries representing organizational units, people, printers, documents, or just about anything else you can think of. Figure 1.1 shows an example LDAP directory tree using traditional naming.</P> 1016<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="intro_tree.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 1017<P ALIGN="Center">Figure 1.1: LDAP directory tree (traditional naming)</P> 1018<P>The tree may also be arranged based upon Internet domain names. This naming approach is becoming increasing popular as it allows for directory services to be located using the <EM>DNS</EM>. Figure 1.2 shows an example LDAP directory tree using domain-based naming.</P> 1019<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="intro_dctree.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 1020<P ALIGN="Center">Figure 1.2: LDAP directory tree (Internet naming)</P> 1021<P>In addition, LDAP allows you to control which attributes are required and allowed in an entry through the use of a special attribute called <TT>objectClass</TT>. The values of the <TT>objectClass</TT> attribute determine the <EM>schema</EM> rules the entry must obey.</P> 1022<P><EM>How is the information referenced?</EM> An entry is referenced by its distinguished name, which is constructed by taking the name of the entry itself (called the <TERM>Relative Distinguished Name</TERM> or RDN) and concatenating the names of its ancestor entries. For example, the entry for Barbara Jensen in the Internet naming example above has an RDN of <TT>uid=babs</TT> and a DN of <TT>uid=babs,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com</TT>. The full DN format is described in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4514.txt">RFC4514</A>, "LDAP: String Representation of Distinguished Names."</P> 1023<P><EM>How is the information accessed?</EM> LDAP defines operations for interrogating and updating the directory. Operations are provided for adding and deleting an entry from the directory, changing an existing entry, and changing the name of an entry. Most of the time, though, LDAP is used to search for information in the directory. The LDAP search operation allows some portion of the directory to be searched for entries that match some criteria specified by a search filter. Information can be requested from each entry that matches the criteria.</P> 1024<P>For example, you might want to search the entire directory subtree at and below <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> for people with the name <TT>Barbara Jensen</TT>, retrieving the email address of each entry found. LDAP lets you do this easily. Or you might want to search the entries directly below the <TT>st=California,c=US</TT> entry for organizations with the string <TT>Acme</TT> in their name, and that have a fax number. LDAP lets you do this too. The next section describes in more detail what you can do with LDAP and how it might be useful to you.</P> 1025<P><EM>How is the information protected from unauthorized access?</EM> Some directory services provide no protection, allowing anyone to see the information. LDAP provides a mechanism for a client to authenticate, or prove its identity to a directory server, paving the way for rich access control to protect the information the server contains. LDAP also supports data security (integrity and confidentiality) services.</P> 1026<H2><A NAME="When should I use LDAP">1.3. When should I use LDAP?</A></H2> 1027<P>This is a very good question. In general, you should use a Directory server when you require data to be centrally managed, stored and accessible via standards based methods.</P> 1028<P>Some common examples found throughout the industry are, but not limited to:</P> 1029<UL> 1030<LI>Machine Authentication 1031<LI>User Authentication 1032<LI>User/System Groups 1033<LI>Address book 1034<LI>Organization Representation 1035<LI>Asset Tracking 1036<LI>Telephony Information Store 1037<LI>User resource management 1038<LI>E-mail address lookups 1039<LI>Application Configuration store 1040<LI>PBX Configuration store 1041<LI>etc.....</UL> 1042<P>There are various <A HREF="#Distributed Schema Files">Distributed Schema Files</A> that are standards based, but you can always create your own <A HREF="#Schema Specification">Schema Specification</A>.</P> 1043<P>There are always new ways to use a Directory and apply LDAP principles to address certain problems, therefore there is no simple answer to this question.</P> 1044<P>If in doubt, join the general LDAP forum for non-commercial discussions and information relating to LDAP at: <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/mailinglist.html">http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/mailinglist.html</A> and ask</P> 1045<H2><A NAME="When should I not use LDAP">1.4. When should I not use LDAP?</A></H2> 1046<P>When you start finding yourself bending the directory to do what you require, maybe a redesign is needed. Or if you only require one application to use and manipulate your data (for discussion of LDAP vs RDBMS, please read the <A HREF="#LDAP vs RDBMS">LDAP vs RDBMS</A> section).</P> 1047<P>It will become obvious when LDAP is the right tool for the job.</P> 1048<H2><A NAME="How does LDAP work">1.5. How does LDAP work?</A></H2> 1049<P>LDAP utilizes a <EM>client-server model</EM>. One or more LDAP servers contain the data making up the directory information tree (<TERM>DIT</TERM>). The client connects to servers and asks it a question. The server responds with an answer and/or with a pointer to where the client can get additional information (typically, another LDAP server). No matter which LDAP server a client connects to, it sees the same view of the directory; a name presented to one LDAP server references the same entry it would at another LDAP server. This is an important feature of a global directory service.</P> 1050<H2><A NAME="What about X.500">1.6. What about X.500?</A></H2> 1051<P>Technically, <TERM>LDAP</TERM> is a directory access protocol to an <TERM>X.500</TERM> directory service, the <TERM>OSI</TERM> directory service. Initially, LDAP clients accessed gateways to the X.500 directory service. This gateway ran LDAP between the client and gateway and X.500's <TERM>Directory Access Protocol</TERM> (<TERM>DAP</TERM>) between the gateway and the X.500 server. DAP is a heavyweight protocol that operates over a full OSI protocol stack and requires a significant amount of computing resources. LDAP is designed to operate over <TERM>TCP</TERM>/<TERM>IP</TERM> and provides most of the functionality of DAP at a much lower cost.</P> 1052<P>While LDAP is still used to access X.500 directory service via gateways, LDAP is now more commonly directly implemented in X.500 servers.</P> 1053<P>The Standalone LDAP Daemon, or <EM>slapd</EM>(8), can be viewed as a <EM>lightweight</EM> X.500 directory server. That is, it does not implement the X.500's DAP nor does it support the complete X.500 models.</P> 1054<P>If you are already running a X.500 DAP service and you want to continue to do so, you can probably stop reading this guide. This guide is all about running LDAP via <EM>slapd</EM>(8), without running X.500 DAP. If you are not running X.500 DAP, want to stop running X.500 DAP, or have no immediate plans to run X.500 DAP, read on.</P> 1055<P>It is possible to replicate data from an LDAP directory server to a X.500 DAP <TERM>DSA</TERM>. This requires an LDAP/DAP gateway. OpenLDAP Software does not include such a gateway.</P> 1056<H2><A NAME="What is the difference between LDAPv2 and LDAPv3">1.7. What is the difference between LDAPv2 and LDAPv3?</A></H2> 1057<P>LDAPv3 was developed in the late 1990's to replace LDAPv2. LDAPv3 adds the following features to LDAP:</P> 1058<UL> 1059<LI>Strong authentication and data security services via <TERM>SASL</TERM> 1060<LI>Certificate authentication and data security services via <TERM>TLS</TERM> (SSL) 1061<LI>Internationalization through the use of Unicode 1062<LI>Referrals and Continuations 1063<LI>Schema Discovery 1064<LI>Extensibility (controls, extended operations, and more)</UL> 1065<P>LDAPv2 is historic (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3494.txt">RFC3494</A>). As most <EM>so-called</EM> LDAPv2 implementations (including <EM>slapd</EM>(8)) do not conform to the LDAPv2 technical specification, interoperability amongst implementations claiming LDAPv2 support is limited. As LDAPv2 differs significantly from LDAPv3, deploying both LDAPv2 and LDAPv3 simultaneously is quite problematic. LDAPv2 should be avoided. LDAPv2 is disabled by default.</P> 1066<H2><A NAME="LDAP vs RDBMS">1.8. LDAP vs RDBMS</A></H2> 1067<P>This question is raised many times, in different forms. The most common, however, is: <EM>Why doesn't OpenLDAP drop Berkeley DB and use a relational database management system (RDBMS) instead?</EM> In general, expecting that the sophisticated algorithms implemented by commercial-grade RDBMS would make <EM>OpenLDAP</EM> be faster or somehow better and, at the same time, permitting sharing of data with other applications.</P> 1068<P>The short answer is that use of an embedded database and custom indexing system allows OpenLDAP to provide greater performance and scalability without loss of reliability. OpenLDAP uses Berkeley DB concurrent / transactional database software. This is the same software used by leading commercial directory software.</P> 1069<P>Now for the long answer. We are all confronted all the time with the choice RDBMSes vs. directories. It is a hard choice and no simple answer exists.</P> 1070<P>It is tempting to think that having a RDBMS backend to the directory solves all problems. However, it is a pig. This is because the data models are very different. Representing directory data with a relational database is going to require splitting data into multiple tables.</P> 1071<P>Think for a moment about the person objectclass. Its definition requires attribute types objectclass, sn and cn and allows attribute types userPassword, telephoneNumber, seeAlso and description. All of these attributes are multivalued, so a normalization requires putting each attribute type in a separate table.</P> 1072<P>Now you have to decide on appropriate keys for those tables. The primary key might be a combination of the DN, but this becomes rather inefficient on most database implementations.</P> 1073<P>The big problem now is that accessing data from one entry requires seeking on different disk areas. On some applications this may be OK but in many applications performance suffers.</P> 1074<P>The only attribute types that can be put in the main table entry are those that are mandatory and single-value. You may add also the optional single-valued attributes and set them to NULL or something if not present.</P> 1075<P>But wait, the entry can have multiple objectclasses and they are organized in an inheritance hierarchy. An entry of objectclass organizationalPerson now has the attributes from person plus a few others and some formerly optional attribute types are now mandatory.</P> 1076<P>What to do? Should we have different tables for the different objectclasses? This way the person would have an entry on the person table, another on organizationalPerson, etc. Or should we get rid of person and put everything on the second table?</P> 1077<P>But what do we do with a filter like (cn=*) where cn is an attribute type that appears in many, many objectclasses. Should we search all possible tables for matching entries? Not very attractive.</P> 1078<P>Once this point is reached, three approaches come to mind. One is to do full normalization so that each attribute type, no matter what, has its own separate table. The simplistic approach where the DN is part of the primary key is extremely wasteful, and calls for an approach where the entry has a unique numeric id that is used instead for the keys and a main table that maps DNs to ids. The approach, anyway, is very inefficient when several attribute types from one or more entries are requested. Such a database, though cumbersomely, can be managed from SQL applications.</P> 1079<P>The second approach is to put the whole entry as a blob in a table shared by all entries regardless of the objectclass and have additional tables that act as indices for the first table. Index tables are not database indices, but are fully managed by the LDAP server-side implementation. However, the database becomes unusable from SQL. And, thus, a fully fledged database system provides little or no advantage. The full generality of the database is unneeded. Much better to use something light and fast, like Berkeley DB.</P> 1080<P>A completely different way to see this is to give up any hopes of implementing the directory data model. In this case, LDAP is used as an access protocol to data that provides only superficially the directory data model. For instance, it may be read only or, where updates are allowed, restrictions are applied, such as making single-value attribute types that would allow for multiple values. Or the impossibility to add new objectclasses to an existing entry or remove one of those present. The restrictions span the range from allowed restrictions (that might be elsewhere the result of access control) to outright violations of the data model. It can be, however, a method to provide LDAP access to preexisting data that is used by other applications. But in the understanding that we don't really have a "directory".</P> 1081<P>Existing commercial LDAP server implementations that use a relational database are either from the first kind or the third. I don't know of any implementation that uses a relational database to do inefficiently what BDB does efficiently. For those who are interested in "third way" (exposing EXISTING data from RDBMS as LDAP tree, having some limitations compared to classic LDAP model, but making it possible to interoperate between LDAP and SQL applications):</P> 1082<P>OpenLDAP includes back-sql - the backend that makes it possible. It uses ODBC + additional metainformation about translating LDAP queries to SQL queries in your RDBMS schema, providing different levels of access - from read-only to full access depending on RDBMS you use, and your schema.</P> 1083<P>For more information on concept and limitations, see <EM>slapd-sql</EM>(5) man page, or the <A HREF="#Backends">Backends</A> section. There are also several examples for several RDBMSes in <TT>back-sql/rdbms_depend/*</TT> subdirectories.</P> 1084<H2><A NAME="What is slapd and what can it do">1.9. What is slapd and what can it do?</A></H2> 1085<P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) is an LDAP directory server that runs on many different platforms. You can use it to provide a directory service of your very own. Your directory can contain pretty much anything you want to put in it. You can connect it to the global LDAP directory service, or run a service all by yourself. Some of slapd's more interesting features and capabilities include:</P> 1086<P><B>LDAPv3</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> implements version 3 of <TERM>Lightweight Directory Access Protocol</TERM>. <EM>slapd</EM> supports LDAP over both <TERM>IPv4</TERM> and <TERM>IPv6</TERM> and Unix <TERM>IPC</TERM>.</P> 1087<P><B><TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM></B>: <EM>slapd</EM> supports strong authentication and data security (integrity and confidentiality) services through the use of SASL. <EM>slapd</EM>'s SASL implementation utilizes <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">Cyrus SASL</A> software which supports a number of mechanisms including <TERM>DIGEST-MD5</TERM>, <TERM>EXTERNAL</TERM>, and <TERM>GSSAPI</TERM>.</P> 1088<P><B><TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM></B>: <EM>slapd</EM> supports certificate-based authentication and data security (integrity and confidentiality) services through the use of TLS (or SSL). <EM>slapd</EM>'s TLS implementation can utilize either <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL</A> or <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/">GnuTLS</A> software.</P> 1089<P><B>Topology control</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> can be configured to restrict access at the socket layer based upon network topology information. This feature utilizes <EM>TCP wrappers</EM>.</P> 1090<P><B>Access control</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> provides a rich and powerful access control facility, allowing you to control access to the information in your database(s). You can control access to entries based on LDAP authorization information, <TERM>IP</TERM> address, domain name and other criteria. <EM>slapd</EM> supports both <EM>static</EM> and <EM>dynamic</EM> access control information.</P> 1091<P><B>Internationalization</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> supports Unicode and language tags.</P> 1092<P><B>Choice of database backends</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> comes with a variety of different database backends you can choose from. They include <TERM>BDB</TERM>, a high-performance transactional database backend; <TERM>HDB</TERM>, a hierarchical high-performance transactional backend; <EM>SHELL</EM>, a backend interface to arbitrary shell scripts; and PASSWD, a simple backend interface to the <EM>passwd</EM>(5) file. The BDB and HDB backends utilize <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/">Oracle</A> <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">Berkeley DB</A>.</P> 1093<P><B>Multiple database instances</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> can be configured to serve multiple databases at the same time. This means that a single <EM>slapd</EM> server can respond to requests for many logically different portions of the LDAP tree, using the same or different database backends.</P> 1094<P><B>Generic modules API</B>: If you require even more customization, <EM>slapd</EM> lets you write your own modules easily. <EM>slapd</EM> consists of two distinct parts: a front end that handles protocol communication with LDAP clients; and modules which handle specific tasks such as database operations. Because these two pieces communicate via a well-defined <TERM>C</TERM> <TERM>API</TERM>, you can write your own customized modules which extend <EM>slapd</EM> in numerous ways. Also, a number of <EM>programmable database</EM> modules are provided. These allow you to expose external data sources to <EM>slapd</EM> using popular programming languages (<A HREF="http://www.perl.org/">Perl</A>, <EM>shell</EM>, and <TERM>SQL</TERM>).</P> 1095<P><B>Threads</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> is threaded for high performance. A single multi-threaded <EM>slapd</EM> process handles all incoming requests using a pool of threads. This reduces the amount of system overhead required while providing high performance.</P> 1096<P><B>Replication</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> can be configured to maintain shadow copies of directory information. This <EM>single-master/multiple-slave</EM> replication scheme is vital in high-volume environments where a single <EM>slapd</EM> installation just doesn't provide the necessary availability or reliability. For extremely demanding environments where a single point of failure is not acceptable, <EM>multi-master</EM> replication is also available. <EM>slapd</EM> includes support for <EM>LDAP Sync</EM>-based replication.</P> 1097<P><B>Proxy Cache</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> can be configured as a caching LDAP proxy service.</P> 1098<P><B>Configuration</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> is highly configurable through a single configuration file which allows you to change just about everything you'd ever want to change. Configuration options have reasonable defaults, making your job much easier. Configuration can also be performed dynamically using LDAP itself, which greatly improves manageability.</P> 1099<P></P> 1100<HR> 1101<H1><A NAME="A Quick-Start Guide">2. A Quick-Start Guide</A></H1> 1102<P>The following is a quick start guide to OpenLDAP Software 2.4, including the Standalone <TERM>LDAP</TERM> Daemon, <EM>slapd</EM>(8).</P> 1103<P>It is meant to walk you through the basic steps needed to install and configure <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/software/">OpenLDAP Software</A>. It should be used in conjunction with the other chapters of this document, manual pages, and other materials provided with the distribution (e.g. the <TT>INSTALL</TT> document) or on the <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">OpenLDAP</A> web site (<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org">http://www.OpenLDAP.org</A>), in particular the OpenLDAP Software <TERM>FAQ</TERM> (<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/faq/?file=2">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/faq/?file=2</A>).</P> 1104<P>If you intend to run OpenLDAP Software seriously, you should review all of this document before attempting to install the software.</P> 1105<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 1106<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>This quick start guide does not use strong authentication nor any integrity or confidential protection services. These services are described in other chapters of the OpenLDAP Administrator's Guide. 1107<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 1108<UL> 1109 </UL><OL> 1110<LI><B>Get the software</B> 1111<BR> 1112You can obtain a copy of the software by following the instructions on the OpenLDAP Software download page (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/software/download/">http://www.openldap.org/software/download/</A>). It is recommended that new users start with the latest <EM>release</EM>. 1113<BR> 1114 1115<LI><B>Unpack the distribution</B> 1116<BR> 1117Pick a directory for the source to live under, change directory to there, and unpack the distribution using the following commands:<UL> 1118<TT>gunzip -c openldap-VERSION.tgz | tar xvfB -</TT></UL> 1119<BR> 1120then relocate yourself into the distribution directory:<UL> 1121<TT>cd openldap-VERSION</TT></UL> 1122<BR> 1123You'll have to replace <TT>VERSION</TT> with the version name of the release. 1124<BR> 1125 1126<LI><B>Review documentation</B> 1127<BR> 1128You should now review the <TT>COPYRIGHT</TT>, <TT>LICENSE</TT>, <TT>README</TT> and <TT>INSTALL</TT> documents provided with the distribution. The <TT>COPYRIGHT</TT> and <TT>LICENSE</TT> provide information on acceptable use, copying, and limitation of warranty of OpenLDAP Software. 1129<BR> 1130 1131<BR> 1132You should also review other chapters of this document. In particular, the <A HREF="#Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software">Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software</A> chapter of this document provides detailed information on prerequisite software and installation procedures. 1133<BR> 1134 1135<LI><B>Run <TT>configure</TT></B> 1136<BR> 1137You will need to run the provided <TT>configure</TT> script to <EM>configure</EM> the distribution for building on your system. The <TT>configure</TT> script accepts many command line options that enable or disable optional software features. Usually the defaults are okay, but you may want to change them. To get a complete list of options that <TT>configure</TT> accepts, use the <TT>--help</TT> option:<UL> 1138<TT>./configure --help</TT></UL> 1139<BR> 1140However, given that you are using this guide, we'll assume you are brave enough to just let <TT>configure</TT> determine what's best:<UL> 1141<TT>./configure</TT></UL> 1142<BR> 1143Assuming <TT>configure</TT> doesn't dislike your system, you can proceed with building the software. If <TT>configure</TT> did complain, well, you'll likely need to go to the Software FAQ <EM>Installation</EM> section (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/?file=8">http://www.openldap.org/faq/?file=8</A>) and/or actually read the <A HREF="#Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software">Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software</A> chapter of this document. 1144<BR> 1145 1146<LI><B>Build the software</B>. 1147<BR> 1148The next step is to build the software. This step has two parts, first we construct dependencies and then we compile the software:<UL> 1149<TT>make depend</TT> 1150<BR> 1151<TT>make</TT></UL> 1152<BR> 1153Both makes should complete without error. 1154<BR> 1155 1156<LI><B>Test the build</B>. 1157<BR> 1158To ensure a correct build, you should run the test suite (it only takes a few minutes):<UL> 1159<TT>make test</TT></UL> 1160<BR> 1161Tests which apply to your configuration will run and they should pass. Some tests, such as the replication test, may be skipped. 1162<BR> 1163 1164<LI><B>Install the software</B>. 1165<BR> 1166You are now ready to install the software; this usually requires <EM>super-user</EM> privileges:<UL> 1167<TT>su root -c 'make install'</TT></UL> 1168<BR> 1169Everything should now be installed under <TT>/usr/local</TT> (or whatever installation prefix was used by <TT>configure</TT>). 1170<BR> 1171 1172<LI><B>Edit the configuration file</B>. 1173<BR> 1174Use your favorite editor to edit the provided <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) example (usually installed as <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.conf</TT>) to contain a BDB database definition of the form:<UL> 1175<TT>database bdb</TT> 1176<BR> 1177<TT>suffix "dc=<MY-DOMAIN>,dc=<COM>"</TT> 1178<BR> 1179<TT>rootdn "cn=Manager,dc=<MY-DOMAIN>,dc=<COM>"</TT> 1180<BR> 1181<TT>rootpw secret</TT> 1182<BR> 1183<TT>directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data</TT></UL> 1184<BR> 1185Be sure to replace <TT><MY-DOMAIN></TT> and <TT><COM></TT> with the appropriate domain components of your domain name. For example, for <TT>example.com</TT>, use:<UL> 1186<TT>database bdb</TT> 1187<BR> 1188<TT>suffix "dc=example,dc=com"</TT> 1189<BR> 1190<TT>rootdn "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com"</TT> 1191<BR> 1192<TT>rootpw secret</TT> 1193<BR> 1194<TT>directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data</TT></UL> 1195<BR> 1196If your domain contains additional components, such as <TT>eng.uni.edu.eu</TT>, use:<UL> 1197<TT>database bdb</TT> 1198<BR> 1199<TT>suffix "dc=eng,dc=uni,dc=edu,dc=eu"</TT> 1200<BR> 1201<TT>rootdn "cn=Manager,dc=eng,dc=uni,dc=edu,dc=eu"</TT> 1202<BR> 1203<TT>rootpw secret</TT> 1204<BR> 1205<TT>directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data</TT></UL> 1206<BR> 1207Details regarding configuring <EM>slapd</EM>(8) can be found in the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) manual page and the <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> chapter of this document. Note that the specified directory must exist prior to starting <EM>slapd</EM>(8). 1208<BR> 1209 1210<LI><B>Start SLAPD</B>. 1211<BR> 1212You are now ready to start the Standalone LDAP Daemon, <EM>slapd</EM>(8), by running the command:<UL> 1213<TT>su root -c /usr/local/libexec/slapd</TT></UL> 1214<BR> 1215To check to see if the server is running and configured correctly, you can run a search against it with <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1). By default, <EM>ldapsearch</EM> is installed as <TT>/usr/local/bin/ldapsearch</TT>:<UL> 1216<TT>ldapsearch -x -b '' -s base '(objectclass=*)' namingContexts</TT></UL> 1217<BR> 1218Note the use of single quotes around command parameters to prevent special characters from being interpreted by the shell. This should return:<UL> 1219<TT>dn:</TT> 1220<BR> 1221<TT>namingContexts: dc=example,dc=com</TT></UL> 1222<BR> 1223Details regarding running <EM>slapd</EM>(8) can be found in the <EM>slapd</EM>(8) manual page and the <A HREF="#Running slapd">Running slapd</A> chapter of this document. 1224<BR> 1225 1226<LI><B>Add initial entries to your directory</B>. 1227<BR> 1228You can use <EM>ldapadd</EM>(1) to add entries to your LDAP directory. <EM>ldapadd</EM> expects input in <TERM>LDIF</TERM> form. We'll do it in two steps:<OL> 1229<LI>create an LDIF file 1230<LI>run ldapadd</OL> 1231<BR> 1232Use your favorite editor and create an LDIF file that contains:<UL> 1233<TT>dn: dc=<MY-DOMAIN>,dc=<COM></TT> 1234<BR> 1235<TT>objectclass: dcObject</TT> 1236<BR> 1237<TT>objectclass: organization</TT> 1238<BR> 1239<TT>o: <MY ORGANIZATION></TT> 1240<BR> 1241<TT>dc: <MY-DOMAIN></TT> 1242<BR> 1243<TT></TT> 1244<BR> 1245<TT>dn: cn=Manager,dc=<MY-DOMAIN>,dc=<COM></TT> 1246<BR> 1247<TT>objectclass: organizationalRole</TT> 1248<BR> 1249<TT>cn: Manager</TT></UL> 1250<BR> 1251Be sure to replace <TT><MY-DOMAIN></TT> and <TT><COM></TT> with the appropriate domain components of your domain name. <TT><MY ORGANIZATION></TT> should be replaced with the name of your organization. When you cut and paste, be sure to trim any leading and trailing whitespace from the example.<UL> 1252<TT>dn: dc=example,dc=com</TT> 1253<BR> 1254<TT>objectclass: dcObject</TT> 1255<BR> 1256<TT>objectclass: organization</TT> 1257<BR> 1258<TT>o: Example Company</TT> 1259<BR> 1260<TT>dc: example</TT> 1261<BR> 1262<TT></TT> 1263<BR> 1264<TT>dn: cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com</TT> 1265<BR> 1266<TT>objectclass: organizationalRole</TT> 1267<BR> 1268<TT>cn: Manager</TT></UL> 1269<BR> 1270Now, you may run <EM>ldapadd</EM>(1) to insert these entries into your directory.<UL> 1271<TT>ldapadd -x -D "cn=Manager,dc=<MY-DOMAIN>,dc=<COM>" -W -f example.ldif</TT></UL> 1272<BR> 1273Be sure to replace <TT><MY-DOMAIN></TT> and <TT><COM></TT> with the appropriate domain components of your domain name. You will be prompted for the "<TT>secret</TT>" specified in <TT>slapd.conf</TT>. For example, for <TT>example.com</TT>, use:<UL> 1274<TT>ldapadd -x -D "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com" -W -f example.ldif</TT></UL> 1275<BR> 1276where <TT>example.ldif</TT> is the file you created above.<UL> 1277<TT> </TT></UL> 1278<BR> 1279Additional information regarding directory creation can be found in the <A HREF="#Database Creation and Maintenance Tools">Database Creation and Maintenance Tools</A> chapter of this document. 1280<BR> 1281 1282<LI><B>See if it works</B>. 1283<BR> 1284Now we're ready to verify the added entries are in your directory. You can use any LDAP client to do this, but our example uses the <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) tool. Remember to replace <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> with the correct values for your site:<UL> 1285<TT>ldapsearch -x -b 'dc=example,dc=com' '(objectclass=*)'</TT></UL> 1286<BR> 1287This command will search for and retrieve every entry in the database.</OL> 1288<P>You are now ready to add more entries using <EM>ldapadd</EM>(1) or another LDAP client, experiment with various configuration options, backend arrangements, etc..</P> 1289<P>Note that by default, the <EM>slapd</EM>(8) database grants <EM>read access to everybody</EM> excepting the <EM>super-user</EM> (as specified by the <TT>rootdn</TT> configuration directive). It is highly recommended that you establish controls to restrict access to authorized users. Access controls are discussed in the <A HREF="#Access Control">Access Control</A> chapter. You are also encouraged to read the <A HREF="#Security Considerations">Security Considerations</A>, <A HREF="#Using SASL">Using SASL</A> and <A HREF="#Using TLS">Using TLS</A> sections.</P> 1290<P>The following chapters provide more detailed information on making, installing, and running <EM>slapd</EM>(8).</P> 1291<P></P> 1292<HR> 1293<H1><A NAME="The Big Picture - Configuration Choices">3. The Big Picture - Configuration Choices</A></H1> 1294<P>This section gives a brief overview of various <TERM>LDAP</TERM> directory configurations, and how your Standalone LDAP Daemon <EM>slapd</EM>(8) fits in with the rest of the world.</P> 1295<H2><A NAME="Local Directory Service">3.1. Local Directory Service</A></H2> 1296<P>In this configuration, you run a <EM>slapd</EM>(8) instance which provides directory service for your local domain only. It does not interact with other directory servers in any way. This configuration is shown in Figure 3.1.</P> 1297<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="config_local.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 1298<P ALIGN="Center">Figure 3.1: Local service configuration.</P> 1299<P>Use this configuration if you are just starting out (it's the one the quick-start guide makes for you) or if you want to provide a local service and are not interested in connecting to the rest of the world. It's easy to upgrade to another configuration later if you want.</P> 1300<H2><A NAME="Local Directory Service with Referrals">3.2. Local Directory Service with Referrals</A></H2> 1301<P>In this configuration, you run a <EM>slapd</EM>(8) instance which provides directory service for your local domain and configure it to return referrals to other servers capable of handling requests. You may run this service (or services) yourself or use one provided to you. This configuration is shown in Figure 3.2.</P> 1302<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="config_ref.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 1303<P ALIGN="Center">Figure 3.2: Local service with referrals</P> 1304<P>Use this configuration if you want to provide local service and participate in the Global Directory, or you want to delegate responsibility for <EM>subordinate</EM> entries to another server.</P> 1305<H2><A NAME="Replicated Directory Service">3.3. Replicated Directory Service</A></H2> 1306<P>slapd(8) includes support for <EM>LDAP Sync</EM>-based replication, called <EM>syncrepl</EM>, which may be used to maintain shadow copies of directory information on multiple directory servers. In its most basic configuration, the <EM>master</EM> is a syncrepl provider and one or more <EM>slave</EM> (or <EM>shadow</EM>) are syncrepl consumers. An example master-slave configuration is shown in figure 3.3. Multi-Master configurations are also supported.</P> 1307<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="config_repl.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 1308<P ALIGN="Center">Figure 3.3: Replicated Directory Services</P> 1309<P>This configuration can be used in conjunction with either of the first two configurations in situations where a single <EM>slapd</EM>(8) instance does not provide the required reliability or availability.</P> 1310<H2><A NAME="Distributed Local Directory Service">3.4. Distributed Local Directory Service</A></H2> 1311<P>In this configuration, the local service is partitioned into smaller services, each of which may be replicated, and <EM>glued</EM> together with <EM>superior</EM> and <EM>subordinate</EM> referrals.</P> 1312<P></P> 1313<HR> 1314<H1><A NAME="Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software">4. Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software</A></H1> 1315<P>This chapter details how to build and install the <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">OpenLDAP</A> Software package including <EM>slapd</EM>(8), the Standalone <TERM>LDAP</TERM> Daemon. Building and installing OpenLDAP Software requires several steps: installing prerequisite software, configuring OpenLDAP Software itself, making, and finally installing. The following sections describe this process in detail.</P> 1316<H2><A NAME="Obtaining and Extracting the Software">4.1. Obtaining and Extracting the Software</A></H2> 1317<P>You can obtain OpenLDAP Software from the project's download page at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/software/download/">http://www.openldap.org/software/download/</A> or directly from the project's <TERM>FTP</TERM> service at <A HREF="ftp://ftp.openldap.org/pub/OpenLDAP/">ftp://ftp.openldap.org/pub/OpenLDAP/</A>.</P> 1318<P>The project makes available two series of packages for <EM>general use</EM>. The project makes <EM>releases</EM> as new features and bug fixes come available. Though the project takes steps to improve stability of these releases, it is common for problems to arise only after <EM>release</EM>. The <EM>stable</EM> release is the latest <EM>release</EM> which has demonstrated stability through general use.</P> 1319<P>Users of OpenLDAP Software can choose, depending on their desire for the <EM>latest features</EM> versus <EM>demonstrated stability</EM>, the most appropriate series to install.</P> 1320<P>After downloading OpenLDAP Software, you need to extract the distribution from the compressed archive file and change your working directory to the top directory of the distribution:</P> 1321<UL> 1322<TT>gunzip -c openldap-VERSION.tgz | tar xf -</TT> 1323<BR> 1324<TT>cd openldap-VERSION</TT></UL> 1325<P>You'll have to replace <TT>VERSION</TT> with the version name of the release.</P> 1326<P>You should now review the <TT>COPYRIGHT</TT>, <TT>LICENSE</TT>, <TT>README</TT> and <TT>INSTALL</TT> documents provided with the distribution. The <TT>COPYRIGHT</TT> and <TT>LICENSE</TT> provide information on acceptable use, copying, and limitation of warranty of OpenLDAP Software. The <TT>README</TT> and <TT>INSTALL</TT> documents provide detailed information on prerequisite software and installation procedures.</P> 1327<H2><A NAME="Prerequisite software">4.2. Prerequisite software</A></H2> 1328<P>OpenLDAP Software relies upon a number of software packages distributed by third parties. Depending on the features you intend to use, you may have to download and install a number of additional software packages. This section details commonly needed third party software packages you might have to install. However, for an up-to-date prerequisite information, the <TT>README</TT> document should be consulted. Note that some of these third party packages may depend on additional software packages. Install each package per the installation instructions provided with it.</P> 1329<H3><A NAME="{{TERM[expand]TLS}}">4.2.1. <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM></A></H3> 1330<P>OpenLDAP clients and servers require installation of either <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL</A> or <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/">GnuTLS</A> <TERM>TLS</TERM> libraries to provide <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM> services. Though some operating systems may provide these libraries as part of the base system or as an optional software component, OpenSSL and GnuTLS often require separate installation.</P> 1331<P>OpenSSL is available from <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">http://www.openssl.org/</A>. GnuTLS is available from <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/">http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/</A>.</P> 1332<P>OpenLDAP Software will not be fully LDAPv3 compliant unless OpenLDAP's <TT>configure</TT> detects a usable TLS library.</P> 1333<H3><A NAME="{{TERM[expand]SASL}}">4.2.2. <TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM></A></H3> 1334<P>OpenLDAP clients and servers require installation of <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">Cyrus SASL</A> libraries to provide <TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM> services. Though some operating systems may provide this library as part of the base system or as an optional software component, Cyrus SASL often requires separate installation.</P> 1335<P>Cyrus SASL is available from <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html</A>. Cyrus SASL will make use of OpenSSL and Kerberos/GSSAPI libraries if preinstalled.</P> 1336<P>OpenLDAP Software will not be fully LDAPv3 compliant unless OpenLDAP's configure detects a usable Cyrus SASL installation.</P> 1337<H3><A NAME="{{TERM[expand]Kerberos}}">4.2.3. <TERM>Kerberos Authentication Service</TERM></A></H3> 1338<P>OpenLDAP clients and servers support <TERM>Kerberos</TERM> authentication services. In particular, OpenLDAP supports the Kerberos V <TERM>GSS-API</TERM> <TERM>SASL</TERM> authentication mechanism known as the <TERM>GSSAPI</TERM> mechanism. This feature requires, in addition to Cyrus SASL libraries, either <A HREF="http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/">Heimdal</A> or <A HREF="http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/">MIT Kerberos</A> V libraries.</P> 1339<P>Heimdal Kerberos is available from <A HREF="http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/">http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/</A>. MIT Kerberos is available from <A HREF="http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/">http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/</A>.</P> 1340<P>Use of strong authentication services, such as those provided by Kerberos, is highly recommended.</P> 1341<H3><A NAME="Database Software">4.2.4. Database Software</A></H3> 1342<P>OpenLDAP's <EM>slapd</EM>(8) <TERM>BDB</TERM> and <TERM>HDB</TERM> primary database backends require <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/">Oracle Corporation</A> <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">Berkeley DB</A>. If not available at configure time, you will not be able to build <EM>slapd</EM>(8) with these primary database backends.</P> 1343<P>Your operating system may provide a supported version of <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">Berkeley DB</A> in the base system or as an optional software component. If not, you'll have to obtain and install it yourself.</P> 1344<P><A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">Berkeley DB</A> is available from <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/">Oracle Corporation</A>'s Berkeley DB download page <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/software/products/berkeley-db/index.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/software/products/berkeley-db/index.html</A>.</P> 1345<P>There are several versions available. Generally, the most recent release (with published patches) is recommended. This package is required if you wish to use the <TERM>BDB</TERM> or <TERM>HDB</TERM> database backends.</P> 1346<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 1347<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Please see <A HREF="#Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions">Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions</A> for more information. 1348<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 1349<H3><A NAME="Threads">4.2.5. Threads</A></H3> 1350<P>OpenLDAP is designed to take advantage of threads. OpenLDAP supports POSIX <EM>pthreads</EM>, Mach <EM>CThreads</EM>, and a number of other varieties. <TT>configure</TT> will complain if it cannot find a suitable thread subsystem. If this occurs, please consult the <TT>Software|Installation|Platform Hints</TT> section of the OpenLDAP FAQ <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/">http://www.openldap.org/faq/</A>.</P> 1351<H3><A NAME="TCP Wrappers">4.2.6. TCP Wrappers</A></H3> 1352<P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports TCP Wrappers (IP level access control filters) if preinstalled. Use of TCP Wrappers or other IP-level access filters (such as those provided by an IP-level firewall) is recommended for servers containing non-public information.</P> 1353<H2><A NAME="Running configure">4.3. Running configure</A></H2> 1354<P>Now you should probably run the <TT>configure</TT> script with the <TT>--help</TT> option. This will give you a list of options that you can change when building OpenLDAP. Many of the features of OpenLDAP can be enabled or disabled using this method.</P> 1355<PRE> 1356 ./configure --help 1357</PRE> 1358<P>The <TT>configure</TT> script will also look at various environment variables for certain settings. These environment variables include:</P> 1359<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 1360<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 4.1: Environment Variables</CAPTION> 1361<TR CLASS="heading"> 1362<TD> 1363<STRONG>Variable</STRONG> 1364</TD> 1365<TD> 1366<STRONG>Description</STRONG> 1367</TD> 1368</TR> 1369<TR> 1370<TD> 1371<TT>CC</TT> 1372</TD> 1373<TD> 1374Specify alternative C Compiler 1375</TD> 1376</TR> 1377<TR> 1378<TD> 1379<TT>CFLAGS</TT> 1380</TD> 1381<TD> 1382Specify additional compiler flags 1383</TD> 1384</TR> 1385<TR> 1386<TD> 1387<TT>CPPFLAGS</TT> 1388</TD> 1389<TD> 1390Specify C Preprocessor flags 1391</TD> 1392</TR> 1393<TR> 1394<TD> 1395<TT>LDFLAGS</TT> 1396</TD> 1397<TD> 1398Specify linker flags 1399</TD> 1400</TR> 1401<TR> 1402<TD> 1403<TT>LIBS</TT> 1404</TD> 1405<TD> 1406Specify additional libraries 1407</TD> 1408</TR> 1409</TABLE> 1410 1411<P>Now run the configure script with any desired configuration options or environment variables.</P> 1412<PRE> 1413 [[env] settings] ./configure [options] 1414</PRE> 1415<P>As an example, let's assume that we want to install OpenLDAP with BDB backend and TCP Wrappers support. By default, BDB is enabled and TCP Wrappers is not. So, we just need to specify <TT>--with-wrappers</TT> to include TCP Wrappers support:</P> 1416<PRE> 1417 ./configure --with-wrappers 1418</PRE> 1419<P>However, this will fail to locate dependent software not installed in system directories. For example, if TCP Wrappers headers and libraries are installed in <TT>/usr/local/include</TT> and <TT>/usr/local/lib</TT> respectively, the <TT>configure</TT> script should be called as follows:</P> 1420<PRE> 1421 env CPPFLAGS="-I/usr/local/include" LDFLAGS="-L/usr/local/lib" \ 1422 ./configure --with-wrappers 1423</PRE> 1424<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 1425<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Some shells, such as those derived from the Bourne <EM>sh</EM>(1), do not require use of the <EM>env</EM>(1) command. In some cases, environmental variables have to be specified using alternative syntaxes. 1426<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 1427<P>The <TT>configure</TT> script will normally auto-detect appropriate settings. If you have problems at this stage, consult any platform specific hints and check your <TT>configure</TT> options, if any.</P> 1428<H2><A NAME="Building the Software">4.4. Building the Software</A></H2> 1429<P>Once you have run the <TT>configure</TT> script the last line of output should be:</P> 1430<PRE> 1431 Please "make depend" to build dependencies 1432</PRE> 1433<P>If the last line of output does not match, <TT>configure</TT> has failed, and you will need to review its output to determine what went wrong. You should not proceed until <TT>configure</TT> completes successfully.</P> 1434<P>To build dependencies, run:</P> 1435<PRE> 1436 make depend 1437</PRE> 1438<P>Now build the software, this step will actually compile OpenLDAP.</P> 1439<PRE> 1440 make 1441</PRE> 1442<P>You should examine the output of this command carefully to make sure everything is built correctly. Note that this command builds the LDAP libraries and associated clients as well as <EM>slapd</EM>(8).</P> 1443<H2><A NAME="Testing the Software">4.5. Testing the Software</A></H2> 1444<P>Once the software has been properly configured and successfully made, you should run the test suite to verify the build.</P> 1445<PRE> 1446 make test 1447</PRE> 1448<P>Tests which apply to your configuration will run and they should pass. Some tests, such as the replication test, may be skipped if not supported by your configuration.</P> 1449<H2><A NAME="Installing the Software">4.6. Installing the Software</A></H2> 1450<P>Once you have successfully tested the software, you are ready to install it. You will need to have write permission to the installation directories you specified when you ran configure. By default OpenLDAP Software is installed in <TT>/usr/local</TT>. If you changed this setting with the <TT>--prefix</TT> configure option, it will be installed in the location you provided.</P> 1451<P>Typically, the installation requires <EM>super-user</EM> privileges. From the top level OpenLDAP source directory, type:</P> 1452<PRE> 1453 su root -c 'make install' 1454</PRE> 1455<P>and enter the appropriate password when requested.</P> 1456<P>You should examine the output of this command carefully to make sure everything is installed correctly. You will find the configuration files for <EM>slapd</EM>(8) in <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap</TT> by default. See the chapter <A HREF="#Configuring slapd">Configuring slapd</A> for additional information.</P> 1457<P></P> 1458<HR> 1459<H1><A NAME="Configuring slapd">5. Configuring slapd</A></H1> 1460<P>Once the software has been built and installed, you are ready to configure <EM>slapd</EM>(8) for use at your site.</P> 1461<P>Unlike previous OpenLDAP releases, the slapd(8) runtime configuration in 2.3 (and later) is fully LDAP-enabled and can be managed using the standard LDAP operations with data in <TERM>LDIF</TERM>. The LDAP configuration engine allows all of slapd's configuration options to be changed on the fly, generally without requiring a server restart for the changes to take effect.</P> 1462<P>The old style <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file is still supported, but must be converted to the new <EM>slapd-config</EM>(5) format to allow runtime changes to be saved. While the old style configuration uses a single file, normally installed as <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.conf</TT>, the new style uses a slapd backend database to store the configuration. The configuration database normally resides in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.d</TT> directory. An alternate configuration directory (or file) can be specified via a command-line option to <EM>slapd</EM>(8).</P> 1463<P>This chapter briefly discusses converting to the new style configuration, then describes the general format of the configuration system, followed by a detailed description of commonly used config settings.</P> 1464<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 1465<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>some of the backends and of the distributed overlays do not support runtime configuration yet. In those cases, the old style <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file must be used. 1466<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 1467<H2><A NAME="Configuration Layout">5.1. Configuration Layout</A></H2> 1468<P>The slapd configuration is stored as a special LDAP directory with a predefined schema and DIT. There are specific objectClasses used to carry global configuration options, schema definitions, backend and database definitions, and assorted other items. A sample config tree is shown in Figure 5.1.</P> 1469<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="config_dit.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 1470<P ALIGN="Center">Figure 5.1: Sample configuration tree.</P> 1471<P>Other objects may be part of the configuration but were omitted from the illustration for clarity.</P> 1472<P>The <EM>slapd-config</EM> configuration tree has a very specific structure. The root of the tree is named <TT>cn=config</TT> and contains global configuration settings. Additional settings are contained in separate child entries:</P> 1473<UL> 1474<LI>Dynamically loaded modules<UL> 1475These may only be used if the <TT>--enable-modules</TT> option was used to configure the software.</UL> 1476<LI>Schema definitions<UL> 1477The <TT>cn=schema,cn=config</TT> entry contains the system schema (all the schema that is hard-coded in slapd). 1478<BR> 1479Child entries of <TT>cn=schema,cn=config</TT> contain user schema as loaded from config files or added at runtime.</UL> 1480<LI>Backend-specific configuration 1481<LI>Database-specific configuration<UL> 1482Overlays are defined in children of the Database entry. 1483<BR> 1484Databases and Overlays may also have other miscellaneous children.</UL></UL> 1485<P>The usual rules for LDIF files apply to the configuration information: Comment lines beginning with a '<TT>#</TT>' character are ignored. If a line begins with a single space, it is considered a continuation of the previous line (even if the previous line is a comment) and the single leading space is removed. Entries are separated by blank lines.</P> 1486<P>The general layout of the config LDIF is as follows:</P> 1487<PRE> 1488 # global configuration settings 1489 dn: cn=config 1490 objectClass: olcGlobal 1491 cn: config 1492 <global config settings> 1493 1494 # schema definitions 1495 dn: cn=schema,cn=config 1496 objectClass: olcSchemaConfig 1497 cn: schema 1498 <system schema> 1499 1500 dn: cn={X}core,cn=schema,cn=config 1501 objectClass: olcSchemaConfig 1502 cn: {X}core 1503 <core schema> 1504 1505 # additional user-specified schema 1506 ... 1507 1508 # backend definitions 1509 dn: olcBackend=<typeA>,cn=config 1510 objectClass: olcBackendConfig 1511 olcBackend: <typeA> 1512 <backend-specific settings> 1513 1514 # database definitions 1515 dn: olcDatabase={X}<typeA>,cn=config 1516 objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig 1517 olcDatabase: {X}<typeA> 1518 <database-specific settings> 1519 1520 # subsequent definitions and settings 1521 ... 1522</PRE> 1523<P>Some of the entries listed above have a numeric index <TT>"{X}"</TT> in their names. While most configuration settings have an inherent ordering dependency (i.e., one setting must take effect before a subsequent one may be set), LDAP databases are inherently unordered. The numeric index is used to enforce a consistent ordering in the configuration database, so that all ordering dependencies are preserved. In most cases the index does not have to be provided; it will be automatically generated based on the order in which entries are created.</P> 1524<P>Configuration directives are specified as values of individual attributes. Most of the attributes and objectClasses used in the slapd configuration have a prefix of <TT>"olc"</TT> (OpenLDAP Configuration) in their names. Generally there is a one-to-one correspondence between the attributes and the old-style <TT>slapd.conf</TT> configuration keywords, using the keyword as the attribute name, with the "olc" prefix attached.</P> 1525<P>A configuration directive may take arguments. If so, the arguments are separated by whitespace. If an argument contains whitespace, the argument should be enclosed in double quotes <TT>"like this"</TT>. In the descriptions that follow, arguments that should be replaced by actual text are shown in brackets <TT><></TT>.</P> 1526<P>The distribution contains an example configuration file that will be installed in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap</TT> directory. A number of files containing schema definitions (attribute types and object classes) are also provided in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/schema</TT> directory.</P> 1527<H2><A NAME="Configuration Directives">5.2. Configuration Directives</A></H2> 1528<P>This section details commonly used configuration directives. For a complete list, see the <EM>slapd-config</EM>(5) manual page. This section will treat the configuration directives in a top-down order, starting with the global directives in the <TT>cn=config</TT> entry. Each directive will be described along with its default value (if any) and an example of its use.</P> 1529<H3><A NAME="cn=config">5.2.1. cn=config</A></H3> 1530<P>Directives contained in this entry generally apply to the server as a whole. Most of them are system or connection oriented, not database related. This entry must have the <TT>olcGlobal</TT> objectClass.</P> 1531<H4><A NAME="olcIdleTimeout: <integer>">5.2.1.1. olcIdleTimeout: <integer></A></H4> 1532<P>Specify the number of seconds to wait before forcibly closing an idle client connection. A value of 0, the default, disables this feature.</P> 1533<H4><A NAME="olcLogLevel: <level>">5.2.1.2. olcLogLevel: <level></A></H4> 1534<P>This directive specifies the level at which debugging statements and operation statistics should be syslogged (currently logged to the <EM>syslogd</EM>(8) <TT>LOG_LOCAL4</TT> facility). You must have configured OpenLDAP <TT>--enable-debug</TT> (the default) for this to work (except for the two statistics levels, which are always enabled). Log levels may be specified as integers or by keyword. Multiple log levels may be used and the levels are additive. To display what levels correspond to what kind of debugging, invoke slapd with <TT>-d?</TT> or consult the table below. The possible values for <level> are:</P> 1535<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 1536<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 5.1: Debugging Levels</CAPTION> 1537<TR CLASS="heading"> 1538<TD ALIGN='Right'> 1539<STRONG>Level</STRONG> 1540</TD> 1541<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1542<STRONG>Keyword</STRONG> 1543</TD> 1544<TD> 1545<STRONG>Description</STRONG> 1546</TD> 1547</TR> 1548<TR> 1549<TD ALIGN='Right'> 1550-1 1551</TD> 1552<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1553any 1554</TD> 1555<TD> 1556enable all debugging 1557</TD> 1558</TR> 1559<TR> 1560<TD ALIGN='Right'> 15610 1562</TD> 1563<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1564 1565</TD> 1566<TD> 1567no debugging 1568</TD> 1569</TR> 1570<TR> 1571<TD ALIGN='Right'> 15721 1573</TD> 1574<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1575(0x1 trace) 1576</TD> 1577<TD> 1578trace function callss 1579</TD> 1580</TR> 1581<TR> 1582<TD ALIGN='Right'> 15832 1584</TD> 1585<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1586(0x2 packets) 1587</TD> 1588<TD> 1589debug packet handling 1590</TD> 1591</TR> 1592<TR> 1593<TD ALIGN='Right'> 15944 1595</TD> 1596<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1597(0x4 args) 1598</TD> 1599<TD> 1600heavy trace debugging 1601</TD> 1602</TR> 1603<TR> 1604<TD ALIGN='Right'> 16058 1606</TD> 1607<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1608(0x8 conns) 1609</TD> 1610<TD> 1611connection management 1612</TD> 1613</TR> 1614<TR> 1615<TD ALIGN='Right'> 161616 1617</TD> 1618<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1619(0x10 BER) 1620</TD> 1621<TD> 1622print out packets sent and received 1623</TD> 1624</TR> 1625<TR> 1626<TD ALIGN='Right'> 162732 1628</TD> 1629<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1630(0x20 filter) 1631</TD> 1632<TD> 1633search filter processing 1634</TD> 1635</TR> 1636<TR> 1637<TD ALIGN='Right'> 163864 1639</TD> 1640<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1641(0x40 config) 1642</TD> 1643<TD> 1644configuration processing 1645</TD> 1646</TR> 1647<TR> 1648<TD ALIGN='Right'> 1649128 1650</TD> 1651<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1652(0x80 ACL) 1653</TD> 1654<TD> 1655access control list processing 1656</TD> 1657</TR> 1658<TR> 1659<TD ALIGN='Right'> 1660256 1661</TD> 1662<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1663(0x100 stats) 1664</TD> 1665<TD> 1666stats log connections/operations/results 1667</TD> 1668</TR> 1669<TR> 1670<TD ALIGN='Right'> 1671512 1672</TD> 1673<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1674(0x200 stats2) 1675</TD> 1676<TD> 1677stats log entries sent 1678</TD> 1679</TR> 1680<TR> 1681<TD ALIGN='Right'> 16821024 1683</TD> 1684<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1685(0x400 shell) 1686</TD> 1687<TD> 1688print communication with shell backends 1689</TD> 1690</TR> 1691<TR> 1692<TD ALIGN='Right'> 16932048 1694</TD> 1695<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1696(0x800 parse) 1697</TD> 1698<TD> 1699print entry parsing debugging 1700</TD> 1701</TR> 1702<TR> 1703<TD ALIGN='Right'> 170416384 1705</TD> 1706<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1707(0x4000 sync) 1708</TD> 1709<TD> 1710syncrepl consumer processing 1711</TD> 1712</TR> 1713<TR> 1714<TD ALIGN='Right'> 171532768 1716</TD> 1717<TD ALIGN='Left'> 1718(0x8000 none) 1719</TD> 1720<TD> 1721only messages that get logged whatever log level is set 1722</TD> 1723</TR> 1724</TABLE> 1725 1726<P>The desired log level can be input as a single integer that combines the (ORed) desired levels, both in decimal or in hexadecimal notation, as a list of integers (that are ORed internally), or as a list of the names that are shown between brackets, such that</P> 1727<PRE> 1728 olcLogLevel 129 1729 olcLogLevel 0x81 1730 olcLogLevel 128 1 1731 olcLogLevel 0x80 0x1 1732 olcLogLevel acl trace 1733</PRE> 1734<P>are equivalent.</P> 1735<P>Examples:</P> 1736<PRE> 1737 olcLogLevel -1 1738</PRE> 1739<P>This will cause lots and lots of debugging information to be logged.</P> 1740<PRE> 1741 olcLogLevel conns filter 1742</PRE> 1743<P>Just log the connection and search filter processing.</P> 1744<PRE> 1745 olcLogLevel none 1746</PRE> 1747<P>Log those messages that are logged regardless of the configured loglevel. This differs from setting the log level to 0, when no logging occurs. At least the <TT>None</TT> level is required to have high priority messages logged.</P> 1748<P>Default:</P> 1749<PRE> 1750 olcLogLevel stats 1751</PRE> 1752<P>Basic stats logging is configured by default. However, if no olcLogLevel is defined, no logging occurs (equivalent to a 0 level).</P> 1753<H4><A NAME="olcReferral <URI>">5.2.1.3. olcReferral <URI></A></H4> 1754<P>This directive specifies the referral to pass back when slapd cannot find a local database to handle a request.</P> 1755<P>Example:</P> 1756<PRE> 1757 olcReferral: ldap://root.openldap.org 1758</PRE> 1759<P>This will refer non-local queries to the global root LDAP server at the OpenLDAP Project. Smart LDAP clients can re-ask their query at that server, but note that most of these clients are only going to know how to handle simple LDAP URLs that contain a host part and optionally a distinguished name part.</P> 1760<H4><A NAME="Sample Entry">5.2.1.4. Sample Entry</A></H4> 1761<PRE> 1762dn: cn=config 1763objectClass: olcGlobal 1764cn: config 1765olcIdleTimeout: 30 1766olcLogLevel: Stats 1767olcReferral: ldap://root.openldap.org 1768</PRE> 1769<H3><A NAME="cn=module">5.2.2. cn=module</A></H3> 1770<P>If support for dynamically loaded modules was enabled when configuring slapd, <TT>cn=module</TT> entries may be used to specify sets of modules to load. Module entries must have the <TT>olcModuleList</TT> objectClass.</P> 1771<H4><A NAME="olcModuleLoad: <filename>">5.2.2.1. olcModuleLoad: <filename></A></H4> 1772<P>Specify the name of a dynamically loadable module to load. The filename may be an absolute path name or a simple filename. Non-absolute names are searched for in the directories specified by the <TT>olcModulePath</TT> directive.</P> 1773<H4><A NAME="olcModulePath: <pathspec>">5.2.2.2. olcModulePath: <pathspec></A></H4> 1774<P>Specify a list of directories to search for loadable modules. Typically the path is colon-separated but this depends on the operating system.</P> 1775<H4><A NAME="Sample Entries">5.2.2.3. Sample Entries</A></H4> 1776<PRE> 1777dn: cn=module{0},cn=config 1778objectClass: olcModuleList 1779cn: module{0} 1780olcModuleLoad: /usr/local/lib/smbk5pwd.la 1781 1782dn: cn=module{1},cn=config 1783objectClass: olcModuleList 1784cn: module{1} 1785olcModulePath: /usr/local/lib:/usr/local/lib/slapd 1786olcModuleLoad: accesslog.la 1787olcModuleLoad: pcache.la 1788</PRE> 1789<H3><A NAME="cn=schema">5.2.3. cn=schema</A></H3> 1790<P>The cn=schema entry holds all of the schema definitions that are hard-coded in slapd. As such, the values in this entry are generated by slapd so no schema values need to be provided in the config file. The entry must still be defined though, to serve as a base for the user-defined schema to add in underneath. Schema entries must have the <TT>olcSchemaConfig</TT> objectClass.</P> 1791<H4><A NAME="olcAttributeTypes: <{{REF:RFC4512}} Attribute Type Description>"> </A>5.2.3.1. olcAttributeTypes: <<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> Attribute Type Description></H4> 1792<P>This directive defines an attribute type. Please see the <A HREF="#Schema Specification">Schema Specification</A> chapter for information regarding how to use this directive.</P> 1793<H4><A NAME="olcObjectClasses: <{{REF:RFC4512}} Object Class Description>"> </A>5.2.3.2. olcObjectClasses: <<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> Object Class Description></H4> 1794<P>This directive defines an object class. Please see the <A HREF="#Schema Specification">Schema Specification</A> chapter for information regarding how to use this directive.</P> 1795<H4><A NAME="Sample Entries">5.2.3.3. Sample Entries</A></H4> 1796<PRE> 1797dn: cn=schema,cn=config 1798objectClass: olcSchemaConfig 1799cn: schema 1800 1801dn: cn=test,cn=schema,cn=config 1802objectClass: olcSchemaConfig 1803cn: test 1804olcAttributeTypes: ( 1.1.1 1805 NAME 'testAttr' 1806 EQUALITY integerMatch 1807 SYNTAX 1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.27 ) 1808olcAttributeTypes: ( 1.1.2 NAME 'testTwo' EQUALITY caseIgnoreMatch 1809 SUBSTR caseIgnoreSubstringsMatch SYNTAX 1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.44 ) 1810olcObjectClasses: ( 1.1.3 NAME 'testObject' 1811 MAY ( testAttr $ testTwo ) AUXILIARY ) 1812</PRE> 1813<H3><A NAME="Backend-specific Directives">5.2.4. Backend-specific Directives</A></H3> 1814<P>Backend directives apply to all database instances of the same type and, depending on the directive, may be overridden by database directives. Backend entries must have the <TT>olcBackendConfig</TT> objectClass.</P> 1815<H4><A NAME="olcBackend: <type>">5.2.4.1. olcBackend: <type></A></H4> 1816<P>This directive names a backend-specific configuration entry. <TT><type></TT> should be one of the supported backend types listed in Table 5.2.</P> 1817<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 1818<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 5.2: Database Backends</CAPTION> 1819<TR CLASS="heading"> 1820<TD> 1821<STRONG>Types</STRONG> 1822</TD> 1823<TD> 1824<STRONG>Description</STRONG> 1825</TD> 1826</TR> 1827<TR> 1828<TD> 1829<TT>bdb</TT> 1830</TD> 1831<TD> 1832Berkeley DB transactional backend 1833</TD> 1834</TR> 1835<TR> 1836<TD> 1837<TT>config</TT> 1838</TD> 1839<TD> 1840Slapd configuration backend 1841</TD> 1842</TR> 1843<TR> 1844<TD> 1845<TT>dnssrv</TT> 1846</TD> 1847<TD> 1848DNS SRV backend 1849</TD> 1850</TR> 1851<TR> 1852<TD> 1853<TT>hdb</TT> 1854</TD> 1855<TD> 1856Hierarchical variant of bdb backend 1857</TD> 1858</TR> 1859<TR> 1860<TD> 1861<TT>ldap</TT> 1862</TD> 1863<TD> 1864Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (Proxy) backend 1865</TD> 1866</TR> 1867<TR> 1868<TD> 1869<TT>ldif</TT> 1870</TD> 1871<TD> 1872Lightweight Data Interchange Format backend 1873</TD> 1874</TR> 1875<TR> 1876<TD> 1877<TT>meta</TT> 1878</TD> 1879<TD> 1880Meta Directory backend 1881</TD> 1882</TR> 1883<TR> 1884<TD> 1885<TT>monitor</TT> 1886</TD> 1887<TD> 1888Monitor backend 1889</TD> 1890</TR> 1891<TR> 1892<TD> 1893<TT>passwd</TT> 1894</TD> 1895<TD> 1896Provides read-only access to <EM>passwd</EM>(5) 1897</TD> 1898</TR> 1899<TR> 1900<TD> 1901<TT>perl</TT> 1902</TD> 1903<TD> 1904Perl Programmable backend 1905</TD> 1906</TR> 1907<TR> 1908<TD> 1909<TT>shell</TT> 1910</TD> 1911<TD> 1912Shell (extern program) backend 1913</TD> 1914</TR> 1915<TR> 1916<TD> 1917<TT>sql</TT> 1918</TD> 1919<TD> 1920SQL Programmable backend 1921</TD> 1922</TR> 1923</TABLE> 1924 1925<P>Example:</P> 1926<PRE> 1927 olcBackend: bdb 1928</PRE> 1929<P>There are no other directives defined for this entry. Specific backend types may define additional attributes for their particular use but so far none have ever been defined. As such, these directives usually do not appear in any actual configurations.</P> 1930<H4><A NAME="Sample Entry">5.2.4.2. Sample Entry</A></H4> 1931<PRE> 1932 dn: olcBackend=bdb,cn=config 1933 objectClass: olcBackendConfig 1934 olcBackend: bdb 1935</PRE> 1936<H3><A NAME="Database-specific Directives">5.2.5. Database-specific Directives</A></H3> 1937<P>Directives in this section are supported by every type of database. Database entries must have the <TT>olcDatabaseConfig</TT> objectClass.</P> 1938<H4><A NAME="olcDatabase: [{<index>}]<type>">5.2.5.1. olcDatabase: [{<index>}]<type></A></H4> 1939<P>This directive names a specific database instance. The numeric {<index>} may be provided to distinguish multiple databases of the same type. Usually the index can be omitted, and slapd will generate it automatically. <TT><type></TT> should be one of the supported backend types listed in Table 5.2 or the <TT>frontend</TT> type.</P> 1940<P>The <TT>frontend</TT> is a special database that is used to hold database-level options that should be applied to all the other databases. Subsequent database definitions may also override some frontend settings.</P> 1941<P>The <TT>config</TT> database is also special; both the <TT>config</TT> and the <TT>frontend</TT> databases are always created implicitly even if they are not explicitly configured, and they are created before any other databases.</P> 1942<P>Example:</P> 1943<PRE> 1944 olcDatabase: bdb 1945</PRE> 1946<P>This marks the beginning of a new <TERM>BDB</TERM> database instance.</P> 1947<H4><A NAME="olcAccess: to <what> [ by <who> [<accesslevel>] [<control>] ]+">5.2.5.2. olcAccess: to <what> [ by <who> [<accesslevel>] [<control>] ]+</A></H4> 1948<P>This directive grants access (specified by <accesslevel>) to a set of entries and/or attributes (specified by <what>) by one or more requestors (specified by <who>). See the <A HREF="#Access Control">Access Control</A> section of this guide for basic usage.</P> 1949<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 1950<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>If no <TT>olcAccess</TT> directives are specified, the default access control policy, <TT>to * by * read</TT>, allows all users (both authenticated and anonymous) read access. 1951<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 1952<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 1953<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Access controls defined in the frontend are appended to all other databases' controls. 1954<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 1955<H4><A NAME="olcReadonly { TRUE | FALSE }">5.2.5.3. olcReadonly { TRUE | FALSE }</A></H4> 1956<P>This directive puts the database into "read-only" mode. Any attempts to modify the database will return an "unwilling to perform" error.</P> 1957<P>Default:</P> 1958<PRE> 1959 olcReadonly: FALSE 1960</PRE> 1961<H4><A NAME="olcRootDN: <DN>">5.2.5.4. olcRootDN: <DN></A></H4> 1962<P>This directive specifies the DN that is not subject to access control or administrative limit restrictions for operations on this database. The DN need not refer to an entry in this database or even in the directory. The DN may refer to a SASL identity.</P> 1963<P>Entry-based Example:</P> 1964<PRE> 1965 olcRootDN: "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com" 1966</PRE> 1967<P>SASL-based Example:</P> 1968<PRE> 1969 olcRootDN: "uid=root,cn=example.com,cn=digest-md5,cn=auth" 1970</PRE> 1971<P>See the <A HREF="#SASL Authentication">SASL Authentication</A> section for information on SASL authentication identities.</P> 1972<H4><A NAME="olcRootPW: <password>">5.2.5.5. olcRootPW: <password></A></H4> 1973<P>This directive can be used to specify a password for the DN for the rootdn (when the rootdn is set to a DN within the database).</P> 1974<P>Example:</P> 1975<PRE> 1976 olcRootPW: secret 1977</PRE> 1978<P>It is also permissible to provide a hash of the password in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2307.txt">RFC2307</A> form. <EM>slappasswd</EM>(8) may be used to generate the password hash.</P> 1979<P>Example:</P> 1980<PRE> 1981 olcRootPW: {SSHA}ZKKuqbEKJfKSXhUbHG3fG8MDn9j1v4QN 1982</PRE> 1983<P>The hash was generated using the command <TT>slappasswd -s secret</TT>.</P> 1984<H4><A NAME="olcSizeLimit: <integer>">5.2.5.6. olcSizeLimit: <integer></A></H4> 1985<P>This directive specifies the maximum number of entries to return from a search operation.</P> 1986<P>Default:</P> 1987<PRE> 1988 olcSizeLimit: 500 1989</PRE> 1990<P>See the <A HREF="#Limits">Limits</A> section of this guide and slapd-config(5) for more details.</P> 1991<H4><A NAME="olcSuffix: <dn suffix>">5.2.5.7. olcSuffix: <dn suffix></A></H4> 1992<P>This directive specifies the DN suffix of queries that will be passed to this backend database. Multiple suffix lines can be given, and usually at least one is required for each database definition. (Some backend types, such as <TT>frontend</TT> and <TT>monitor</TT> use a hard-coded suffix which may not be overridden in the configuration.)</P> 1993<P>Example:</P> 1994<PRE> 1995 olcSuffix: "dc=example,dc=com" 1996</PRE> 1997<P>Queries with a DN ending in "dc=example,dc=com" will be passed to this backend.</P> 1998<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 1999<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>When the backend to pass a query to is selected, slapd looks at the suffix value(s) in each database definition in the order in which they were configured. Thus, if one database suffix is a prefix of another, it must appear after it in the configuration. 2000<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 2001<H4><A NAME="olcSyncrepl">5.2.5.8. olcSyncrepl</A></H4> 2002<PRE> 2003 olcSyncrepl: rid=<replica ID> 2004 provider=ldap[s]://<hostname>[:port] 2005 [type=refreshOnly|refreshAndPersist] 2006 [interval=dd:hh:mm:ss] 2007 [retry=[<retry interval> <# of retries>]+] 2008 searchbase=<base DN> 2009 [filter=<filter str>] 2010 [scope=sub|one|base] 2011 [attrs=<attr list>] 2012 [attrsonly] 2013 [sizelimit=<limit>] 2014 [timelimit=<limit>] 2015 [schemachecking=on|off] 2016 [bindmethod=simple|sasl] 2017 [binddn=<DN>] 2018 [saslmech=<mech>] 2019 [authcid=<identity>] 2020 [authzid=<identity>] 2021 [credentials=<passwd>] 2022 [realm=<realm>] 2023 [secprops=<properties>] 2024 [starttls=yes|critical] 2025 [tls_cert=<file>] 2026 [tls_key=<file>] 2027 [tls_cacert=<file>] 2028 [tls_cacertdir=<path>] 2029 [tls_reqcert=never|allow|try|demand] 2030 [tls_ciphersuite=<ciphers>] 2031 [tls_crlcheck=none|peer|all] 2032 [logbase=<base DN>] 2033 [logfilter=<filter str>] 2034 [syncdata=default|accesslog|changelog] 2035</PRE> 2036<P>This directive specifies the current database as a replica of the master content by establishing the current <EM>slapd</EM>(8) as a replication consumer site running a syncrepl replication engine. The master database is located at the replication provider site specified by the <TT>provider</TT> parameter. The replica database is kept up-to-date with the master content using the LDAP Content Synchronization protocol. See <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt">RFC4533</A> for more information on the protocol.</P> 2037<P>The <TT>rid</TT> parameter is used for identification of the current <TT>syncrepl</TT> directive within the replication consumer server, where <TT><replica ID></TT> uniquely identifies the syncrepl specification described by the current <TT>syncrepl</TT> directive. <TT><replica ID></TT> is non-negative and is no more than three decimal digits in length.</P> 2038<P>The <TT>provider</TT> parameter specifies the replication provider site containing the master content as an LDAP URI. The <TT>provider</TT> parameter specifies a scheme, a host and optionally a port where the provider slapd instance can be found. Either a domain name or IP address may be used for <hostname>. Examples are <TT>ldap://provider.example.com:389</TT> or <TT>ldaps://192.168.1.1:636</TT>. If <port> is not given, the standard LDAP port number (389 or 636) is used. Note that the syncrepl uses a consumer-initiated protocol, and hence its specification is located at the consumer site, whereas the <TT>replica</TT> specification is located at the provider site. <TT>syncrepl</TT> and <TT>replica</TT> directives define two independent replication mechanisms. They do not represent the replication peers of each other.</P> 2039<P>The content of the syncrepl replica is defined using a search specification as its result set. The consumer slapd will send search requests to the provider slapd according to the search specification. The search specification includes <TT>searchbase</TT>, <TT>scope</TT>, <TT>filter</TT>, <TT>attrs</TT>, <TT>attrsonly</TT>, <TT>sizelimit</TT>, and <TT>timelimit</TT> parameters as in the normal search specification. The <TT>searchbase</TT> parameter has no default value and must always be specified. The <TT>scope</TT> defaults to <TT>sub</TT>, the <TT>filter</TT> defaults to <TT>(objectclass=*)</TT>, <TT>attrs</TT> defaults to <TT>"*,+"</TT> to replicate all user and operational attributes, and <TT>attrsonly</TT> is unset by default. Both <TT>sizelimit</TT> and <TT>timelimit</TT> default to "unlimited", and only positive integers or "unlimited" may be specified.</P> 2040<P>The <TERM>LDAP Content Synchronization</TERM> protocol has two operation types: <TT>refreshOnly</TT> and <TT>refreshAndPersist</TT>. The operation type is specified by the <TT>type</TT> parameter. In the <TT>refreshOnly</TT> operation, the next synchronization search operation is periodically rescheduled at an interval time after each synchronization operation finishes. The interval is specified by the <TT>interval</TT> parameter. It is set to one day by default. In the <TT>refreshAndPersist</TT> operation, a synchronization search remains persistent in the provider <EM>slapd</EM> instance. Further updates to the master replica will generate <TT>searchResultEntry</TT> to the consumer slapd as the search responses to the persistent synchronization search.</P> 2041<P>If an error occurs during replication, the consumer will attempt to reconnect according to the retry parameter which is a list of the <retry interval> and <# of retries> pairs. For example, retry="60 10 300 3" lets the consumer retry every 60 seconds for the first 10 times and then retry every 300 seconds for the next three times before stop retrying. + in <# of retries> means indefinite number of retries until success.</P> 2042<P>The schema checking can be enforced at the LDAP Sync consumer site by turning on the <TT>schemachecking</TT> parameter. If it is turned on, every replicated entry will be checked for its schema as the entry is stored into the replica content. Every entry in the replica should contain those attributes required by the schema definition. If it is turned off, entries will be stored without checking schema conformance. The default is off.</P> 2043<P>The <TT>binddn</TT> parameter gives the DN to bind as for the syncrepl searches to the provider slapd. It should be a DN which has read access to the replication content in the master database.</P> 2044<P>The <TT>bindmethod</TT> is <TT>simple</TT> or <TT>sasl</TT>, depending on whether simple password-based authentication or <TERM>SASL</TERM> authentication is to be used when connecting to the provider <EM>slapd</EM> instance.</P> 2045<P>Simple authentication should not be used unless adequate data integrity and confidentiality protections are in place (e.g. TLS or IPsec). Simple authentication requires specification of <TT>binddn</TT> and <TT>credentials</TT> parameters.</P> 2046<P>SASL authentication is generally recommended. SASL authentication requires specification of a mechanism using the <TT>saslmech</TT> parameter. Depending on the mechanism, an authentication identity and/or credentials can be specified using <TT>authcid</TT> and <TT>credentials</TT>, respectively. The <TT>authzid</TT> parameter may be used to specify an authorization identity.</P> 2047<P>The <TT>realm</TT> parameter specifies a realm which a certain mechanisms authenticate the identity within. The <TT>secprops</TT> parameter specifies Cyrus SASL security properties.</P> 2048<P>The <TT>starttls</TT> parameter specifies use of the StartTLS extended operation to establish a TLS session before authenticating to the provider. If the <TT>critical</TT> argument is supplied, the session will be aborted if the StartTLS request fails. Otherwise the syncrepl session continues without TLS. Note that the main slapd TLS settings are not used by the syncrepl engine; by default the TLS parameters from a <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) configuration file will be used. TLS settings may be specified here, in which case any <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) settings will be completely ignored.</P> 2049<P>Rather than replicating whole entries, the consumer can query logs of data modifications. This mode of operation is referred to as <EM>delta syncrepl</EM>. In addition to the above parameters, the <TT>logbase</TT> and <TT>logfilter</TT> parameters must be set appropriately for the log that will be used. The <TT>syncdata</TT> parameter must be set to either <TT>"accesslog"</TT> if the log conforms to the <EM>slapo-accesslog</EM>(5) log format, or <TT>"changelog"</TT> if the log conforms to the obsolete <EM>changelog</EM> format. If the <TT>syncdata</TT> parameter is omitted or set to <TT>"default"</TT> then the log parameters are ignored.</P> 2050<P>The <EM>syncrepl</EM> replication mechanism is supported by the <EM>bdb</EM> and <EM>hdb</EM> backends.</P> 2051<P>See the <A HREF="#LDAP Sync Replication">LDAP Sync Replication</A> chapter of this guide for more information on how to use this directive.</P> 2052<H4><A NAME="olcTimeLimit: <integer>">5.2.5.9. olcTimeLimit: <integer></A></H4> 2053<P>This directive specifies the maximum number of seconds (in real time) slapd will spend answering a search request. If a request is not finished in this time, a result indicating an exceeded timelimit will be returned.</P> 2054<P>Default:</P> 2055<PRE> 2056 olcTimeLimit: 3600 2057</PRE> 2058<P>See the <A HREF="#Limits">Limits</A> section of this guide and slapd-config(5) for more details.</P> 2059<H4><A NAME="olcUpdateref: <URL>">5.2.5.10. olcUpdateref: <URL></A></H4> 2060<P>This directive is only applicable in a slave slapd. It specifies the URL to return to clients which submit update requests upon the replica. If specified multiple times, each <TERM>URL</TERM> is provided.</P> 2061<P>Example:</P> 2062<PRE> 2063 olcUpdateref: ldap://master.example.net 2064</PRE> 2065<H4><A NAME="Sample Entries">5.2.5.11. Sample Entries</A></H4> 2066<PRE> 2067dn: olcDatabase=frontend,cn=config 2068objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig 2069objectClass: olcFrontendConfig 2070olcDatabase: frontend 2071olcReadOnly: FALSE 2072 2073dn: olcDatabase=config,cn=config 2074objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig 2075olcDatabase: config 2076olcRootDN: cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com 2077</PRE> 2078<H3><A NAME="BDB and HDB Database Directives">5.2.6. BDB and HDB Database Directives</A></H3> 2079<P>Directives in this category apply to both the <TERM>BDB</TERM> and the <TERM>HDB</TERM> database. They are used in an olcDatabase entry in addition to the generic database directives defined above. For a complete reference of BDB/HDB configuration directives, see <EM>slapd-bdb</EM>(5). In addition to the <TT>olcDatabaseConfig</TT> objectClass, BDB and HDB database entries must have the <TT>olcBdbConfig</TT> and <TT>olcHdbConfig</TT> objectClass, respectively.</P> 2080<H4><A NAME="olcDbDirectory: <directory>">5.2.6.1. olcDbDirectory: <directory></A></H4> 2081<P>This directive specifies the directory where the BDB files containing the database and associated indices live.</P> 2082<P>Default:</P> 2083<PRE> 2084 olcDbDirectory: /usr/local/var/openldap-data 2085</PRE> 2086<H4><A NAME="olcDbCachesize: <integer>">5.2.6.2. olcDbCachesize: <integer></A></H4> 2087<P>This directive specifies the size in entries of the in-memory cache maintained by the BDB backend database instance.</P> 2088<P>Default:</P> 2089<PRE> 2090 olcDbCachesize: 1000 2091</PRE> 2092<H4><A NAME="olcDbCheckpoint: <kbyte> <min>">5.2.6.3. olcDbCheckpoint: <kbyte> <min></A></H4> 2093<P>This directive specifies how often to checkpoint the BDB transaction log. A checkpoint operation flushes the database buffers to disk and writes a checkpoint record in the log. The checkpoint will occur if either <kbyte> data has been written or <min> minutes have passed since the last checkpoint. Both arguments default to zero, in which case they are ignored. When the <min> argument is non-zero, an internal task will run every <min> minutes to perform the checkpoint. See the Berkeley DB reference guide for more details.</P> 2094<P>Example:</P> 2095<PRE> 2096 olcDbCheckpoint: 1024 10 2097</PRE> 2098<H4><A NAME="olcDbConfig: <DB_CONFIG setting>">5.2.6.4. olcDbConfig: <DB_CONFIG setting></A></H4> 2099<P>This attribute specifies a configuration directive to be placed in the <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT> file of the database directory. At server startup time, if no such file exists yet, the <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT> file will be created and the settings in this attribute will be written to it. If the file exists, its contents will be read and displayed in this attribute. The attribute is multi-valued, to accommodate multiple configuration directives. No default is provided, but it is essential to use proper settings here to get the best server performance.</P> 2100<P>Any changes made to this attribute will be written to the <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT> file and will cause the database environment to be reset so the changes can take immediate effect. If the environment cache is large and has not been recently checkpointed, this reset operation may take a long time. It may be advisable to manually perform a single checkpoint using the Berkeley DB <EM>db_checkpoint</EM> utility before using LDAP Modify to change this attribute.</P> 2101<P>Example:</P> 2102<PRE> 2103 olcDbConfig: set_cachesize 0 10485760 0 2104 olcDbConfig: set_lg_bsize 2097512 2105 olcDbConfig: set_lg_dir /var/tmp/bdb-log 2106 olcDbConfig: set_flags DB_LOG_AUTOREMOVE 2107</PRE> 2108<P>In this example, the BDB cache is set to 10MB, the BDB transaction log buffer size is set to 2MB, and the transaction log files are to be stored in the /var/tmp/bdb-log directory. Also a flag is set to tell BDB to delete transaction log files as soon as their contents have been checkpointed and they are no longer needed. Without this setting the transaction log files will continue to accumulate until some other cleanup procedure removes them. See the Berkeley DB documentation for the <TT>db_archive</TT> command for details. For a complete list of Berkeley DB flags please see - <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/api_c/env_set_flags.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/api_c/env_set_flags.html</A></P> 2109<P>Ideally the BDB cache must be at least as large as the working set of the database, the log buffer size should be large enough to accommodate most transactions without overflowing, and the log directory must be on a separate physical disk from the main database files. And both the database directory and the log directory should be separate from disks used for regular system activities such as the root, boot, or swap filesystems. See the FAQ-o-Matic and the Berkeley DB documentation for more details.</P> 2110<H4><A NAME="olcDbNosync: { TRUE | FALSE }">5.2.6.5. olcDbNosync: { TRUE | FALSE }</A></H4> 2111<P>This option causes on-disk database contents to not be immediately synchronized with in memory changes upon change. Setting this option to <TT>TRUE</TT> may improve performance at the expense of data integrity. This directive has the same effect as using</P> 2112<PRE> 2113 olcDbConfig: set_flags DB_TXN_NOSYNC 2114</PRE> 2115<H4><A NAME="olcDbIDLcacheSize: <integer>">5.2.6.6. olcDbIDLcacheSize: <integer></A></H4> 2116<P>Specify the size of the in-memory index cache, in index slots. The default is zero. A larger value will speed up frequent searches of indexed entries. The optimal size will depend on the data and search characteristics of the database, but using a number three times the entry cache size is a good starting point.</P> 2117<P>Example:</P> 2118<PRE> 2119 olcDbIDLcacheSize: 3000 2120</PRE> 2121<H4><A NAME="olcDbIndex: {<attrlist> | default} [pres,eq,approx,sub,none]">5.2.6.7. olcDbIndex: {<attrlist> | default} [pres,eq,approx,sub,none]</A></H4> 2122<P>This directive specifies the indices to maintain for the given attribute. If only an <TT><attrlist></TT> is given, the default indices are maintained. The index keywords correspond to the common types of matches that may be used in an LDAP search filter.</P> 2123<P>Example:</P> 2124<PRE> 2125 olcDbIndex: default pres,eq 2126 olcDbIndex: uid 2127 olcDbIndex: cn,sn pres,eq,sub 2128 olcDbIndex: objectClass eq 2129</PRE> 2130<P>The first line sets the default set of indices to maintain to present and equality. The second line causes the default (pres,eq) set of indices to be maintained for the <TT>uid</TT> attribute type. The third line causes present, equality, and substring indices to be maintained for <TT>cn</TT> and <TT>sn</TT> attribute types. The fourth line causes an equality index for the <TT>objectClass</TT> attribute type.</P> 2131<P>There is no index keyword for inequality matches. Generally these matches do not use an index. However, some attributes do support indexing for inequality matches, based on the equality index.</P> 2132<P>A substring index can be more explicitly specified as <TT>subinitial</TT>, <TT>subany</TT>, or <TT>subfinal</TT>, corresponding to the three possible components of a substring match filter. A subinitial index only indexes substrings that appear at the beginning of an attribute value. A subfinal index only indexes substrings that appear at the end of an attribute value, while subany indexes substrings that occur anywhere in a value.</P> 2133<P>Note that by default, setting an index for an attribute also affects every subtype of that attribute. E.g., setting an equality index on the <TT>name</TT> attribute causes <TT>cn</TT>, <TT>sn</TT>, and every other attribute that inherits from <TT>name</TT> to be indexed.</P> 2134<P>By default, no indices are maintained. It is generally advised that minimally an equality index upon objectClass be maintained.</P> 2135<PRE> 2136 olcDbindex: objectClass eq 2137</PRE> 2138<P>Additional indices should be configured corresponding to the most common searches that are used on the database. Presence indexing should not be configured for an attribute unless the attribute occurs very rarely in the database, and presence searches on the attribute occur very frequently during normal use of the directory. Most applications don't use presence searches, so usually presence indexing is not very useful.</P> 2139<P>If this setting is changed while slapd is running, an internal task will be run to generate the changed index data. All server operations can continue as normal while the indexer does its work. If slapd is stopped before the index task completes, indexing will have to be manually completed using the slapindex tool.</P> 2140<H4><A NAME="olcDbLinearIndex: { TRUE | FALSE }">5.2.6.8. olcDbLinearIndex: { TRUE | FALSE }</A></H4> 2141<P>If this setting is <TT>TRUE</TT> slapindex will index one attribute at a time. The default settings is <TT>FALSE</TT> in which case all indexed attributes of an entry are processed at the same time. When enabled, each indexed attribute is processed individually, using multiple passes through the entire database. This option improves slapindex performance when the database size exceeds the BDB cache size. When the BDB cache is large enough, this option is not needed and will decrease performance. Also by default, slapadd performs full indexing and so a separate slapindex run is not needed. With this option, slapadd does no indexing and slapindex must be used.</P> 2142<H4><A NAME="olcDbMode: { <octal> | <symbolic> }">5.2.6.9. olcDbMode: { <octal> | <symbolic> }</A></H4> 2143<P>This directive specifies the file protection mode that newly created database index files should have. This can be in the form <TT>0600</TT> or <TT>-rw-------</TT></P> 2144<P>Default:</P> 2145<PRE> 2146 olcDbMode: 0600 2147</PRE> 2148<H4><A NAME="olcDbSearchStack: <integer>">5.2.6.10. olcDbSearchStack: <integer></A></H4> 2149<P>Specify the depth of the stack used for search filter evaluation. Search filters are evaluated on a stack to accommodate nested <TT>AND</TT> / <TT>OR</TT> clauses. An individual stack is allocated for each server thread. The depth of the stack determines how complex a filter can be evaluated without requiring any additional memory allocation. Filters that are nested deeper than the search stack depth will cause a separate stack to be allocated for that particular search operation. These separate allocations can have a major negative impact on server performance, but specifying too much stack will also consume a great deal of memory. Each search uses 512K bytes per level on a 32-bit machine, or 1024K bytes per level on a 64-bit machine. The default stack depth is 16, thus 8MB or 16MB per thread is used on 32 and 64 bit machines, respectively. Also the 512KB size of a single stack slot is set by a compile-time constant which may be changed if needed; the code must be recompiled for the change to take effect.</P> 2150<P>Default:</P> 2151<PRE> 2152 olcDbSearchStack: 16 2153</PRE> 2154<H4><A NAME="olcDbShmKey: <integer>">5.2.6.11. olcDbShmKey: <integer></A></H4> 2155<P>Specify a key for a shared memory BDB environment. By default the BDB environment uses memory mapped files. If a non-zero value is specified, it will be used as the key to identify a shared memory region that will house the environment.</P> 2156<P>Example:</P> 2157<PRE> 2158 olcDbShmKey: 42 2159</PRE> 2160<H4><A NAME="Sample Entry">5.2.6.12. Sample Entry</A></H4> 2161<PRE> 2162dn: olcDatabase=hdb,cn=config 2163objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig 2164objectClass: olcHdbConfig 2165olcDatabase: hdb 2166olcSuffix: "dc=example,dc=com" 2167olcDbDirectory: /usr/local/var/openldap-data 2168olcDbCacheSize: 1000 2169olcDbCheckpoint: 1024 10 2170olcDbConfig: set_cachesize 0 10485760 0 2171olcDbConfig: set_lg_bsize 2097152 2172olcDbConfig: set_lg_dir /var/tmp/bdb-log 2173olcDbConfig: set_flags DB_LOG_AUTOREMOVE 2174olcDbIDLcacheSize: 3000 2175olcDbIndex: objectClass eq 2176</PRE> 2177<H2><A NAME="Configuration Example">5.3. Configuration Example</A></H2> 2178<P>The following is an example configuration, interspersed with explanatory text. It defines two databases to handle different parts of the <TERM>X.500</TERM> tree; both are <TERM>BDB</TERM> database instances. The line numbers shown are provided for reference only and are not included in the actual file. First, the global configuration section:</P> 2179<PRE> 2180 1. # example config file - global configuration entry 2181 2. dn: cn=config 2182 3. objectClass: olcGlobal 2183 4. cn: config 2184 5. olcReferral: ldap://root.openldap.org 2185 6. 2186</PRE> 2187<P>Line 1 is a comment. Lines 2-4 identify this as the global configuration entry. The <TT>olcReferral:</TT> directive on line 5 means that queries not local to one of the databases defined below will be referred to the LDAP server running on the standard port (389) at the host <TT>root.openldap.org</TT>. Line 6 is a blank line, indicating the end of this entry.</P> 2188<PRE> 2189 7. # internal schema 2190 8. dn: cn=schema,cn=config 2191 9. objectClass: olcSchemaConfig 2192 10. cn: schema 2193 11. 2194</PRE> 2195<P>Line 7 is a comment. Lines 8-10 identify this as the root of the schema subtree. The actual schema definitions in this entry are hardcoded into slapd so no additional attributes are specified here. Line 11 is a blank line, indicating the end of this entry.</P> 2196<PRE> 2197 12. # include the core schema 2198 13. include: file:///usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.ldif 2199 14. 2200</PRE> 2201<P>Line 12 is a comment. Line 13 is an LDIF include directive which accesses the <EM>core</EM> schema definitions in LDIF format. Line 14 is a blank line.</P> 2202<P>Next comes the database definitions. The first database is the special <TT>frontend</TT> database whose settings are applied globally to all the other databases.</P> 2203<PRE> 2204 15. # global database parameters 2205 16. dn: olcDatabase=frontend,cn=config 2206 17. objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig 2207 18. olcDatabase: frontend 2208 19. olcAccess: to * by * read 2209 20. 2210</PRE> 2211<P>Line 15 is a comment. Lines 16-18 identify this entry as the global database entry. Line 19 is a global access control. It applies to all entries (after any applicable database-specific access controls).</P> 2212<P>The next entry defines a BDB backend that will handle queries for things in the "dc=example,dc=com" portion of the tree. Indices are to be maintained for several attributes, and the <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute is to be protected from unauthorized access.</P> 2213<PRE> 2214 21. # BDB definition for example.com 2215 22. dn: olcDatabase=bdb,cn=config 2216 23. objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig 2217 24. objectClass: olcBdbConfig 2218 25. olcDatabase: bdb 2219 26. olcSuffix: "dc=example,dc=com" 2220 27. olcDbDirectory: /usr/local/var/openldap-data 2221 28. olcRootDN: "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com" 2222 29. olcRootPW: secret 2223 30. olcDbIndex: uid pres,eq 2224 31. olcDbIndex: cn,sn,uid pres,eq,approx,sub 2225 32. olcDbIndex: objectClass eq 2226 33. olcAccess: to attrs=userPassword 2227 34. by self write 2228 35. by anonymous auth 2229 36. by dn.base="cn=Admin,dc=example,dc=com" write 2230 37. by * none 2231 38. olcAccess: to * 2232 39. by self write 2233 40. by dn.base="cn=Admin,dc=example,dc=com" write 2234 41. by * read 2235 42. 2236</PRE> 2237<P>Line 21 is a comment. Lines 22-25 identify this entry as a BDB database configuration entry. Line 26 specifies the DN suffix for queries to pass to this database. Line 27 specifies the directory in which the database files will live.</P> 2238<P>Lines 28 and 29 identify the database <EM>super-user</EM> entry and associated password. This entry is not subject to access control or size or time limit restrictions.</P> 2239<P>Lines 30 through 32 indicate the indices to maintain for various attributes.</P> 2240<P>Lines 33 through 41 specify access control for entries in this database. For all applicable entries, the <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute is writable by the entry itself and by the "admin" entry. It may be used for authentication/authorization purposes, but is otherwise not readable. All other attributes are writable by the entry and the "admin" entry, but may be read by all users (authenticated or not).</P> 2241<P>Line 42 is a blank line, indicating the end of this entry.</P> 2242<P>The next section of the example configuration file defines another BDB database. This one handles queries involving the <TT>dc=example,dc=net</TT> subtree but is managed by the same entity as the first database. Note that without line 52, the read access would be allowed due to the global access rule at line 19.</P> 2243<PRE> 2244 43. # BDB definition for example.net 2245 44. dn: olcDatabase=bdb,cn=config 2246 45. objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig 2247 46. objectClass: olcBdbConfig 2248 47. olcDatabase: bdb 2249 48. olcSuffix: "dc=example,dc=net" 2250 49. olcDbDirectory: /usr/local/var/openldap-data-net 2251 50. olcRootDN: "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com" 2252 51. olcDbIndex: objectClass eq 2253 52. olcAccess: to * by users read 2254</PRE> 2255<H2><A NAME="Converting old style {{slapd.conf}}(5) file to {{cn=config}} format">5.4. Converting old style <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file to <EM>cn=config</EM> format</A></H2> 2256<P>An existing <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file can be converted to the new format using <EM>slaptest</EM>(8) or any of the slap tools:</P> 2257<PRE> 2258 slaptest -f /usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.conf -F /usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.d 2259</PRE> 2260<P>You can then discard the old <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file. Make sure to launch <EM>slapd</EM>(8) with the <EM>-F</EM> option to specify the configuration directory.</P> 2261<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 2262<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>When converting from the slapd.conf format to slapd.d format, any included files will also be integrated into the resulting configuration database. 2263<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 2264<P></P> 2265<HR> 2266<H1><A NAME="The slapd Configuration File">6. The slapd Configuration File</A></H1> 2267<P>Once the software has been built and installed, you are ready to configure <EM>slapd</EM>(8) for use at your site. The slapd runtime configuration is primarily accomplished through the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file, normally installed in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap</TT> directory.</P> 2268<P>An alternate configuration file location can be specified via a command-line option to <EM>slapd</EM>(8). This chapter describes the general format of the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) configuration file, followed by a detailed description of commonly used config file directives.</P> 2269<H2><A NAME="Configuration File Format">6.1. Configuration File Format</A></H2> 2270<P>The <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file consists of three types of configuration information: global, backend specific, and database specific. Global information is specified first, followed by information associated with a particular backend type, which is then followed by information associated with a particular database instance. Global directives can be overridden in backend and/or database directives, and backend directives can be overridden by database directives.</P> 2271<P>Blank lines and comment lines beginning with a '<TT>#</TT>' character are ignored. If a line begins with whitespace, it is considered a continuation of the previous line (even if the previous line is a comment).</P> 2272<P>The general format of slapd.conf is as follows:</P> 2273<PRE> 2274 # global configuration directives 2275 <global config directives> 2276 2277 # backend definition 2278 backend <typeA> 2279 <backend-specific directives> 2280 2281 # first database definition & config directives 2282 database <typeA> 2283 <database-specific directives> 2284 2285 # second database definition & config directives 2286 database <typeB> 2287 <database-specific directives> 2288 2289 # second database definition & config directives 2290 database <typeA> 2291 <database-specific directives> 2292 2293 # subsequent backend & database definitions & config directives 2294 ... 2295</PRE> 2296<P>A configuration directive may take arguments. If so, they are separated by whitespace. If an argument contains whitespace, the argument should be enclosed in double quotes <TT>"like this"</TT>. If an argument contains a double quote or a backslash character `<TT>\</TT>', the character should be preceded by a backslash character `<TT>\</TT>'.</P> 2297<P>The distribution contains an example configuration file that will be installed in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap</TT> directory. A number of files containing schema definitions (attribute types and object classes) are also provided in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/schema</TT> directory.</P> 2298<H2><A NAME="Configuration File Directives">6.2. Configuration File Directives</A></H2> 2299<P>This section details commonly used configuration directives. For a complete list, see the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) manual page. This section separates the configuration file directives into global, backend-specific and data-specific categories, describing each directive and its default value (if any), and giving an example of its use.</P> 2300<H3><A NAME="Global Directives">6.2.1. Global Directives</A></H3> 2301<P>Directives described in this section apply to all backends and databases unless specifically overridden in a backend or database definition. Arguments that should be replaced by actual text are shown in brackets <TT><></TT>.</P> 2302<H4><A NAME="access to <what> [ by <who> [<accesslevel>] [<control>] ]+">6.2.1.1. access to <what> [ by <who> [<accesslevel>] [<control>] ]+</A></H4> 2303<P>This directive grants access (specified by <accesslevel>) to a set of entries and/or attributes (specified by <what>) by one or more requestors (specified by <who>). See the <A HREF="#Access Control">Access Control</A> section of this guide for basic usage.</P> 2304<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 2305<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>If no <TT>access</TT> directives are specified, the default access control policy, <TT>access to * by * read</TT>, allows all both authenticated and anonymous users read access. 2306<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 2307<H4><A NAME="attributetype <{{REF:RFC4512}} Attribute Type Description>"> </A>6.2.1.2. attributetype <<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> Attribute Type Description></H4> 2308<P>This directive defines an attribute type. Please see the <A HREF="#Schema Specification">Schema Specification</A> chapter for information regarding how to use this directive.</P> 2309<H4><A NAME="idletimeout <integer>">6.2.1.3. idletimeout <integer></A></H4> 2310<P>Specify the number of seconds to wait before forcibly closing an idle client connection. An idletimeout of 0, the default, disables this feature.</P> 2311<H4><A NAME="include <filename>">6.2.1.4. include <filename></A></H4> 2312<P>This directive specifies that slapd should read additional configuration information from the given file before continuing with the next line of the current file. The included file should follow the normal slapd config file format. The file is commonly used to include files containing schema specifications.</P> 2313<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 2314<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>You should be careful when using this directive - there is no small limit on the number of nested include directives, and no loop detection is done. 2315<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 2316<H4><A NAME="loglevel <integer>">6.2.1.5. loglevel <integer></A></H4> 2317<P>This directive specifies the level at which debugging statements and operation statistics should be syslogged (currently logged to the <EM>syslogd</EM>(8) <TT>LOG_LOCAL4</TT> facility). You must have configured OpenLDAP <TT>--enable-debug</TT> (the default) for this to work (except for the two statistics levels, which are always enabled). Log levels may be specified as integers or by keyword. Multiple log levels may be used and the levels are additive. To display what numbers correspond to what kind of debugging, invoke slapd with <TT>-d?</TT> or consult the table below. The possible values for <integer> are:</P> 2318<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 2319<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 6.1: Debugging Levels</CAPTION> 2320<TR CLASS="heading"> 2321<TD ALIGN='Right'> 2322<STRONG>Level</STRONG> 2323</TD> 2324<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2325<STRONG>Keyword</STRONG> 2326</TD> 2327<TD> 2328<STRONG>Description</STRONG> 2329</TD> 2330</TR> 2331<TR> 2332<TD ALIGN='Right'> 2333-1 2334</TD> 2335<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2336any 2337</TD> 2338<TD> 2339enable all debugging 2340</TD> 2341</TR> 2342<TR> 2343<TD ALIGN='Right'> 23440 2345</TD> 2346<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2347 2348</TD> 2349<TD> 2350no debugging 2351</TD> 2352</TR> 2353<TR> 2354<TD ALIGN='Right'> 23551 2356</TD> 2357<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2358(0x1 trace) 2359</TD> 2360<TD> 2361trace function calls 2362</TD> 2363</TR> 2364<TR> 2365<TD ALIGN='Right'> 23662 2367</TD> 2368<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2369(0x2 packets) 2370</TD> 2371<TD> 2372debug packet handling 2373</TD> 2374</TR> 2375<TR> 2376<TD ALIGN='Right'> 23774 2378</TD> 2379<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2380(0x4 args) 2381</TD> 2382<TD> 2383heavy trace debugging 2384</TD> 2385</TR> 2386<TR> 2387<TD ALIGN='Right'> 23888 2389</TD> 2390<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2391(0x8 conns) 2392</TD> 2393<TD> 2394connection management 2395</TD> 2396</TR> 2397<TR> 2398<TD ALIGN='Right'> 239916 2400</TD> 2401<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2402(0x10 BER) 2403</TD> 2404<TD> 2405print out packets sent and received 2406</TD> 2407</TR> 2408<TR> 2409<TD ALIGN='Right'> 241032 2411</TD> 2412<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2413(0x20 filter) 2414</TD> 2415<TD> 2416search filter processing 2417</TD> 2418</TR> 2419<TR> 2420<TD ALIGN='Right'> 242164 2422</TD> 2423<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2424(0x40 config) 2425</TD> 2426<TD> 2427configuration processing 2428</TD> 2429</TR> 2430<TR> 2431<TD ALIGN='Right'> 2432128 2433</TD> 2434<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2435(0x80 ACL) 2436</TD> 2437<TD> 2438access control list processing 2439</TD> 2440</TR> 2441<TR> 2442<TD ALIGN='Right'> 2443256 2444</TD> 2445<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2446(0x100 stats) 2447</TD> 2448<TD> 2449stats log connections/operations/results 2450</TD> 2451</TR> 2452<TR> 2453<TD ALIGN='Right'> 2454512 2455</TD> 2456<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2457(0x200 stats2) 2458</TD> 2459<TD> 2460stats log entries sent 2461</TD> 2462</TR> 2463<TR> 2464<TD ALIGN='Right'> 24651024 2466</TD> 2467<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2468(0x400 shell) 2469</TD> 2470<TD> 2471print communication with shell backends 2472</TD> 2473</TR> 2474<TR> 2475<TD ALIGN='Right'> 24762048 2477</TD> 2478<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2479(0x800 parse) 2480</TD> 2481<TD> 2482print entry parsing debugging 2483</TD> 2484</TR> 2485<TR> 2486<TD ALIGN='Right'> 248716384 2488</TD> 2489<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2490(0x4000 sync) 2491</TD> 2492<TD> 2493syncrepl consumer processing 2494</TD> 2495</TR> 2496<TR> 2497<TD ALIGN='Right'> 249832768 2499</TD> 2500<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2501(0x8000 none) 2502</TD> 2503<TD> 2504only messages that get logged whatever log level is set 2505</TD> 2506</TR> 2507</TABLE> 2508 2509<P>The desired log level can be input as a single integer that combines the (ORed) desired levels, both in decimal or in hexadecimal notation, as a list of integers (that are ORed internally), or as a list of the names that are shown between brackets, such that</P> 2510<PRE> 2511 loglevel 129 2512 loglevel 0x81 2513 loglevel 128 1 2514 loglevel 0x80 0x1 2515 loglevel acl trace 2516</PRE> 2517<P>are equivalent.</P> 2518<P>Examples:</P> 2519<PRE> 2520 loglevel -1 2521</PRE> 2522<P>This will cause lots and lots of debugging information to be logged.</P> 2523<PRE> 2524 loglevel conns filter 2525</PRE> 2526<P>Just log the connection and search filter processing.</P> 2527<PRE> 2528 loglevel none 2529</PRE> 2530<P>Log those messages that are logged regardless of the configured loglevel. This differs from setting the log level to 0, when no logging occurs. At least the <TT>None</TT> level is required to have high priority messages logged.</P> 2531<P>Default:</P> 2532<PRE> 2533 loglevel stats 2534</PRE> 2535<P>Basic stats logging is configured by default. However, if no loglevel is defined, no logging occurs (equivalent to a 0 level).</P> 2536<H4><A NAME="objectclass <{{REF:RFC4512}} Object Class Description>"> </A>6.2.1.6. objectclass <<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> Object Class Description></H4> 2537<P>This directive defines an object class. Please see the <A HREF="#Schema Specification">Schema Specification</A> chapter for information regarding how to use this directive.</P> 2538<H4><A NAME="referral <URI>">6.2.1.7. referral <URI></A></H4> 2539<P>This directive specifies the referral to pass back when slapd cannot find a local database to handle a request.</P> 2540<P>Example:</P> 2541<PRE> 2542 referral ldap://root.openldap.org 2543</PRE> 2544<P>This will refer non-local queries to the global root LDAP server at the OpenLDAP Project. Smart LDAP clients can re-ask their query at that server, but note that most of these clients are only going to know how to handle simple LDAP URLs that contain a host part and optionally a distinguished name part.</P> 2545<H4><A NAME="sizelimit <integer>">6.2.1.8. sizelimit <integer></A></H4> 2546<P>This directive specifies the maximum number of entries to return from a search operation.</P> 2547<P>Default:</P> 2548<PRE> 2549 sizelimit 500 2550</PRE> 2551<P>See the <A HREF="#Limits">Limits</A> section of this guide and slapd.conf(5) for more details.</P> 2552<H4><A NAME="timelimit <integer>">6.2.1.9. timelimit <integer></A></H4> 2553<P>This directive specifies the maximum number of seconds (in real time) slapd will spend answering a search request. If a request is not finished in this time, a result indicating an exceeded timelimit will be returned.</P> 2554<P>Default:</P> 2555<PRE> 2556 timelimit 3600 2557</PRE> 2558<P>See the <A HREF="#Limits">Limits</A> section of this guide and slapd.conf(5) for more details.</P> 2559<H3><A NAME="General Backend Directives">6.2.2. General Backend Directives</A></H3> 2560<P>Directives in this section apply only to the backend in which they are defined. They are supported by every type of backend. Backend directives apply to all databases instances of the same type and, depending on the directive, may be overridden by database directives.</P> 2561<H4><A NAME="backend <type>">6.2.2.1. backend <type></A></H4> 2562<P>This directive marks the beginning of a backend declaration. <TT><type></TT> should be one of the supported backend types listed in Table 6.2.</P> 2563<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 2564<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 5.2: Database Backends</CAPTION> 2565<TR CLASS="heading"> 2566<TD> 2567<STRONG>Types</STRONG> 2568</TD> 2569<TD> 2570<STRONG>Description</STRONG> 2571</TD> 2572</TR> 2573<TR> 2574<TD> 2575<TT>bdb</TT> 2576</TD> 2577<TD> 2578Berkeley DB transactional backend 2579</TD> 2580</TR> 2581<TR> 2582<TD> 2583<TT>dnssrv</TT> 2584</TD> 2585<TD> 2586DNS SRV backend 2587</TD> 2588</TR> 2589<TR> 2590<TD> 2591<TT>hdb</TT> 2592</TD> 2593<TD> 2594Hierarchical variant of bdb backend 2595</TD> 2596</TR> 2597<TR> 2598<TD> 2599<TT>ldap</TT> 2600</TD> 2601<TD> 2602Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (Proxy) backend 2603</TD> 2604</TR> 2605<TR> 2606<TD> 2607<TT>meta</TT> 2608</TD> 2609<TD> 2610Meta Directory backend 2611</TD> 2612</TR> 2613<TR> 2614<TD> 2615<TT>monitor</TT> 2616</TD> 2617<TD> 2618Monitor backend 2619</TD> 2620</TR> 2621<TR> 2622<TD> 2623<TT>passwd</TT> 2624</TD> 2625<TD> 2626Provides read-only access to <EM>passwd</EM>(5) 2627</TD> 2628</TR> 2629<TR> 2630<TD> 2631<TT>perl</TT> 2632</TD> 2633<TD> 2634Perl Programmable backend 2635</TD> 2636</TR> 2637<TR> 2638<TD> 2639<TT>shell</TT> 2640</TD> 2641<TD> 2642Shell (extern program) backend 2643</TD> 2644</TR> 2645<TR> 2646<TD> 2647<TT>sql</TT> 2648</TD> 2649<TD> 2650SQL Programmable backend 2651</TD> 2652</TR> 2653</TABLE> 2654 2655<P>Example:</P> 2656<PRE> 2657 backend bdb 2658</PRE> 2659<P>This marks the beginning of a new <TERM>BDB</TERM> backend definition.</P> 2660<H3><A NAME="General Database Directives">6.2.3. General Database Directives</A></H3> 2661<P>Directives in this section apply only to the database in which they are defined. They are supported by every type of database.</P> 2662<H4><A NAME="database <type>">6.2.3.1. database <type></A></H4> 2663<P>This directive marks the beginning of a database instance declaration. <TT><type></TT> should be one of the supported backend types listed in Table 6.2.</P> 2664<P>Example:</P> 2665<PRE> 2666 database bdb 2667</PRE> 2668<P>This marks the beginning of a new <TERM>BDB</TERM> database instance declaration.</P> 2669<H4><A NAME="limits <who> <limit> [<limit> [...]]">6.2.3.2. limits <who> <limit> [<limit> [...]]</A></H4> 2670<P>Specify time and size limits based on who initiated an operation.</P> 2671<P>See the <A HREF="#Limits">Limits</A> section of this guide and slapd.conf(5) for more details.</P> 2672<H4><A NAME="readonly { on | off }">6.2.3.3. readonly { on | off }</A></H4> 2673<P>This directive puts the database into "read-only" mode. Any attempts to modify the database will return an "unwilling to perform" error.</P> 2674<P>Default:</P> 2675<PRE> 2676 readonly off 2677</PRE> 2678<H4><A NAME="rootdn <DN>">6.2.3.4. rootdn <DN></A></H4> 2679<P>This directive specifies the DN that is not subject to access control or administrative limit restrictions for operations on this database. The DN need not refer to an entry in this database or even in the directory. The DN may refer to a SASL identity.</P> 2680<P>Entry-based Example:</P> 2681<PRE> 2682 rootdn "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com" 2683</PRE> 2684<P>SASL-based Example:</P> 2685<PRE> 2686 rootdn "uid=root,cn=example.com,cn=digest-md5,cn=auth" 2687</PRE> 2688<P>See the <A HREF="#SASL Authentication">SASL Authentication</A> section for information on SASL authentication identities.</P> 2689<H4><A NAME="rootpw <password>">6.2.3.5. rootpw <password></A></H4> 2690<P>This directive can be used to specifies a password for the DN for the rootdn (when the rootdn is set to a DN within the database).</P> 2691<P>Example:</P> 2692<PRE> 2693 rootpw secret 2694</PRE> 2695<P>It is also permissible to provide hash of the password in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2307.txt">RFC2307</A> form. <EM>slappasswd</EM>(8) may be used to generate the password hash.</P> 2696<P>Example:</P> 2697<PRE> 2698 rootpw {SSHA}ZKKuqbEKJfKSXhUbHG3fG8MDn9j1v4QN 2699</PRE> 2700<P>The hash was generated using the command <TT>slappasswd -s secret</TT>.</P> 2701<H4><A NAME="suffix <dn suffix>">6.2.3.6. suffix <dn suffix></A></H4> 2702<P>This directive specifies the DN suffix of queries that will be passed to this backend database. Multiple suffix lines can be given, and at least one is required for each database definition.</P> 2703<P>Example:</P> 2704<PRE> 2705 suffix "dc=example,dc=com" 2706</PRE> 2707<P>Queries with a DN ending in "dc=example,dc=com" will be passed to this backend.</P> 2708<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 2709<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>When the backend to pass a query to is selected, slapd looks at the suffix line(s) in each database definition in the order they appear in the file. Thus, if one database suffix is a prefix of another, it must appear after it in the config file. 2710<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 2711<H4><A NAME="syncrepl">6.2.3.7. syncrepl</A></H4> 2712<PRE> 2713 syncrepl rid=<replica ID> 2714 provider=ldap[s]://<hostname>[:port] 2715 [type=refreshOnly|refreshAndPersist] 2716 [interval=dd:hh:mm:ss] 2717 [retry=[<retry interval> <# of retries>]+] 2718 searchbase=<base DN> 2719 [filter=<filter str>] 2720 [scope=sub|one|base] 2721 [attrs=<attr list>] 2722 [attrsonly] 2723 [sizelimit=<limit>] 2724 [timelimit=<limit>] 2725 [schemachecking=on|off] 2726 [bindmethod=simple|sasl] 2727 [binddn=<DN>] 2728 [saslmech=<mech>] 2729 [authcid=<identity>] 2730 [authzid=<identity>] 2731 [credentials=<passwd>] 2732 [realm=<realm>] 2733 [secprops=<properties>] 2734 [starttls=yes|critical] 2735 [tls_cert=<file>] 2736 [tls_key=<file>] 2737 [tls_cacert=<file>] 2738 [tls_cacertdir=<path>] 2739 [tls_reqcert=never|allow|try|demand] 2740 [tls_ciphersuite=<ciphers>] 2741 [tls_crlcheck=none|peer|all] 2742 [logbase=<base DN>] 2743 [logfilter=<filter str>] 2744 [syncdata=default|accesslog|changelog] 2745</PRE> 2746<P>This directive specifies the current database as a replica of the master content by establishing the current <EM>slapd</EM>(8) as a replication consumer site running a syncrepl replication engine. The master database is located at the replication provider site specified by the <TT>provider</TT> parameter. The replica database is kept up-to-date with the master content using the LDAP Content Synchronization protocol. See <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt">RFC4533</A> for more information on the protocol.</P> 2747<P>The <TT>rid</TT> parameter is used for identification of the current <TT>syncrepl</TT> directive within the replication consumer server, where <TT><replica ID></TT> uniquely identifies the syncrepl specification described by the current <TT>syncrepl</TT> directive. <TT><replica ID></TT> is non-negative and is no more than three decimal digits in length.</P> 2748<P>The <TT>provider</TT> parameter specifies the replication provider site containing the master content as an LDAP URI. The <TT>provider</TT> parameter specifies a scheme, a host and optionally a port where the provider slapd instance can be found. Either a domain name or IP address may be used for <hostname>. Examples are <TT>ldap://provider.example.com:389</TT> or <TT>ldaps://192.168.1.1:636</TT>. If <port> is not given, the standard LDAP port number (389 or 636) is used. Note that the syncrepl uses a consumer-initiated protocol, and hence its specification is located at the consumer site, whereas the <TT>replica</TT> specification is located at the provider site. <TT>syncrepl</TT> and <TT>replica</TT> directives define two independent replication mechanisms. They do not represent the replication peers of each other.</P> 2749<P>The content of the syncrepl replica is defined using a search specification as its result set. The consumer slapd will send search requests to the provider slapd according to the search specification. The search specification includes <TT>searchbase</TT>, <TT>scope</TT>, <TT>filter</TT>, <TT>attrs</TT>, <TT>attrsonly</TT>, <TT>sizelimit</TT>, and <TT>timelimit</TT> parameters as in the normal search specification. The <TT>searchbase</TT> parameter has no default value and must always be specified. The <TT>scope</TT> defaults to <TT>sub</TT>, the <TT>filter</TT> defaults to <TT>(objectclass=*)</TT>, <TT>attrs</TT> defaults to <TT>"*,+"</TT> to replicate all user and operational attributes, and <TT>attrsonly</TT> is unset by default. Both <TT>sizelimit</TT> and <TT>timelimit</TT> default to "unlimited", and only positive integers or "unlimited" may be specified.</P> 2750<P>The <TERM>LDAP Content Synchronization</TERM> protocol has two operation types: <TT>refreshOnly</TT> and <TT>refreshAndPersist</TT>. The operation type is specified by the <TT>type</TT> parameter. In the <TT>refreshOnly</TT> operation, the next synchronization search operation is periodically rescheduled at an interval time after each synchronization operation finishes. The interval is specified by the <TT>interval</TT> parameter. It is set to one day by default. In the <TT>refreshAndPersist</TT> operation, a synchronization search remains persistent in the provider <EM>slapd</EM> instance. Further updates to the master replica will generate <TT>searchResultEntry</TT> to the consumer slapd as the search responses to the persistent synchronization search.</P> 2751<P>If an error occurs during replication, the consumer will attempt to reconnect according to the retry parameter which is a list of the <retry interval> and <# of retries> pairs. For example, retry="60 10 300 3" lets the consumer retry every 60 seconds for the first 10 times and then retry every 300 seconds for the next three times before stop retrying. + in <# of retries> means indefinite number of retries until success.</P> 2752<P>The schema checking can be enforced at the LDAP Sync consumer site by turning on the <TT>schemachecking</TT> parameter. If it is turned on, every replicated entry will be checked for its schema as the entry is stored into the replica content. Every entry in the replica should contain those attributes required by the schema definition. If it is turned off, entries will be stored without checking schema conformance. The default is off.</P> 2753<P>The <TT>binddn</TT> parameter gives the DN to bind as for the syncrepl searches to the provider slapd. It should be a DN which has read access to the replication content in the master database.</P> 2754<P>The <TT>bindmethod</TT> is <TT>simple</TT> or <TT>sasl</TT>, depending on whether simple password-based authentication or <TERM>SASL</TERM> authentication is to be used when connecting to the provider <EM>slapd</EM> instance.</P> 2755<P>Simple authentication should not be used unless adequate data integrity and confidentiality protections are in place (e.g. TLS or IPsec). Simple authentication requires specification of <TT>binddn</TT> and <TT>credentials</TT> parameters.</P> 2756<P>SASL authentication is generally recommended. SASL authentication requires specification of a mechanism using the <TT>saslmech</TT> parameter. Depending on the mechanism, an authentication identity and/or credentials can be specified using <TT>authcid</TT> and <TT>credentials</TT>, respectively. The <TT>authzid</TT> parameter may be used to specify an authorization identity.</P> 2757<P>The <TT>realm</TT> parameter specifies a realm which a certain mechanisms authenticate the identity within. The <TT>secprops</TT> parameter specifies Cyrus SASL security properties.</P> 2758<P>The <TT>starttls</TT> parameter specifies use of the StartTLS extended operation to establish a TLS session before authenticating to the provider. If the <TT>critical</TT> argument is supplied, the session will be aborted if the StartTLS request fails. Otherwise the syncrepl session continues without TLS. Note that the main slapd TLS settings are not used by the syncrepl engine; by default the TLS parameters from a <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) configuration file will be used. TLS settings may be specified here, in which case any <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) settings will be completely ignored.</P> 2759<P>Rather than replicating whole entries, the consumer can query logs of data modifications. This mode of operation is referred to as <EM>delta syncrepl</EM>. In addition to the above parameters, the <TT>logbase</TT> and <TT>logfilter</TT> parameters must be set appropriately for the log that will be used. The <TT>syncdata</TT> parameter must be set to either <TT>"accesslog"</TT> if the log conforms to the <EM>slapo-accesslog</EM>(5) log format, or <TT>"changelog"</TT> if the log conforms to the obsolete <EM>changelog</EM> format. If the <TT>syncdata</TT> parameter is omitted or set to <TT>"default"</TT> then the log parameters are ignored.</P> 2760<P>The <EM>syncrepl</EM> replication mechanism is supported by the <EM>bdb</EM> and <EM>hdb</EM> backends.</P> 2761<P>See the <A HREF="#LDAP Sync Replication">LDAP Sync Replication</A> chapter of this guide for more information on how to use this directive.</P> 2762<H4><A NAME="updateref <URL>">6.2.3.8. updateref <URL></A></H4> 2763<P>This directive is only applicable in a <EM>slave</EM> (or <EM>shadow</EM>) <EM>slapd</EM>(8) instance. It specifies the URL to return to clients which submit update requests upon the replica. If specified multiple times, each <TERM>URL</TERM> is provided.</P> 2764<P>Example:</P> 2765<PRE> 2766 updateref ldap://master.example.net 2767</PRE> 2768<H3><A NAME="BDB and HDB Database Directives">6.2.4. BDB and HDB Database Directives</A></H3> 2769<P>Directives in this category only apply to both the <TERM>BDB</TERM> and the <TERM>HDB</TERM> database. That is, they must follow a "database bdb" or "database hdb" line and come before any subsequent "backend" or "database" line. For a complete reference of BDB/HDB configuration directives, see <EM>slapd-bdb</EM>(5).</P> 2770<H4><A NAME="directory <directory>">6.2.4.1. directory <directory></A></H4> 2771<P>This directive specifies the directory where the BDB files containing the database and associated indices live.</P> 2772<P>Default:</P> 2773<PRE> 2774 directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data 2775</PRE> 2776<H2><A NAME="Configuration File Example">6.3. Configuration File Example</A></H2> 2777<P>The following is an example configuration file, interspersed with explanatory text. It defines two databases to handle different parts of the <TERM>X.500</TERM> tree; both are <TERM>BDB</TERM> database instances. The line numbers shown are provided for reference only and are not included in the actual file. First, the global configuration section:</P> 2778<PRE> 2779 1. # example config file - global configuration section 2780 2. include /usr/local/etc/schema/core.schema 2781 3. referral ldap://root.openldap.org 2782 4. access to * by * read 2783</PRE> 2784<P>Line 1 is a comment. Line 2 includes another config file which contains <EM>core</EM> schema definitions. The <TT>referral</TT> directive on line 3 means that queries not local to one of the databases defined below will be referred to the LDAP server running on the standard port (389) at the host <TT>root.openldap.org</TT>.</P> 2785<P>Line 4 is a global access control. It applies to all entries (after any applicable database-specific access controls).</P> 2786<P>The next section of the configuration file defines a BDB backend that will handle queries for things in the "dc=example,dc=com" portion of the tree. The database is to be replicated to two slave slapds, one on truelies, the other on judgmentday. Indices are to be maintained for several attributes, and the <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute is to be protected from unauthorized access.</P> 2787<PRE> 2788 5. # BDB definition for the example.com 2789 6. database bdb 2790 7. suffix "dc=example,dc=com" 2791 8. directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data 2792 9. rootdn "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com" 2793 10. rootpw secret 2794 11. # indexed attribute definitions 2795 12. index uid pres,eq 2796 13. index cn,sn,uid pres,eq,approx,sub 2797 14. index objectClass eq 2798 15. # database access control definitions 2799 16. access to attrs=userPassword 2800 17. by self write 2801 18. by anonymous auth 2802 19. by dn.base="cn=Admin,dc=example,dc=com" write 2803 20. by * none 2804 21. access to * 2805 22. by self write 2806 23. by dn.base="cn=Admin,dc=example,dc=com" write 2807 24. by * read 2808</PRE> 2809<P>Line 5 is a comment. The start of the database definition is marked by the database keyword on line 6. Line 7 specifies the DN suffix for queries to pass to this database. Line 8 specifies the directory in which the database files will live.</P> 2810<P>Lines 9 and 10 identify the database <EM>super-user</EM> entry and associated password. This entry is not subject to access control or size or time limit restrictions.</P> 2811<P>Lines 12 through 14 indicate the indices to maintain for various attributes.</P> 2812<P>Lines 16 through 24 specify access control for entries in this database. For all applicable entries, the <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute is writable by the entry itself and by the "admin" entry. It may be used for authentication/authorization purposes, but is otherwise not readable. All other attributes are writable by the entry and the "admin" entry, but may be read by all users (authenticated or not).</P> 2813<P>The next section of the example configuration file defines another BDB database. This one handles queries involving the <TT>dc=example,dc=net</TT> subtree but is managed by the same entity as the first database. Note that without line 39, the read access would be allowed due to the global access rule at line 4.</P> 2814<PRE> 2815 33. # BDB definition for example.net 2816 34. database bdb 2817 35. suffix "dc=example,dc=net" 2818 36. directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data-net 2819 37. rootdn "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com" 2820 38. index objectClass eq 2821 39. access to * by users read 2822</PRE> 2823<P></P> 2824<HR> 2825<H1><A NAME="Running slapd">7. Running slapd</A></H1> 2826<P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) is designed to be run as a standalone service. This allows the server to take advantage of caching, manage concurrency issues with underlying databases, and conserve system resources. Running from <EM>inetd</EM>(8) is <EM>NOT</EM> an option.</P> 2827<H2><A NAME="Command-Line Options">7.1. Command-Line Options</A></H2> 2828<P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports a number of command-line options as detailed in the manual page. This section details a few commonly used options.</P> 2829<PRE> 2830 -f <filename> 2831</PRE> 2832<P>This option specifies an alternate configuration file for slapd. The default is normally <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.conf</TT>.</P> 2833<PRE> 2834 -F <slapd-config-directory> 2835</PRE> 2836<P>Specifies the slapd configuration directory. The default is <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.d</TT>.</P> 2837<P>If both <TT>-f</TT> and <TT>-F</TT> are specified, the config file will be read and converted to config directory format and written to the specified directory. If neither option is specified, slapd will attempt to read the default config directory before trying to use the default config file. If a valid config directory exists then the default config file is ignored. All of the slap tools that use the config options observe this same behavior.</P> 2838<PRE> 2839 -h <URLs> 2840</PRE> 2841<P>This option specifies alternative listener configurations. The default is <TT>ldap:///</TT> which implies <TERM>LDAP</TERM> over <TERM>TCP</TERM> on all interfaces on the default LDAP port 389. You can specify specific host-port pairs or other protocol schemes (such as <TT>ldaps://</TT> or <TT>ldapi://</TT>). For example, <TT>-h "ldaps:// ldap://127.0.0.1:666"</TT> will create two listeners: one for the (non-standard) <TT>ldaps://</TT> scheme on all interfaces on the default <TT>ldaps://</TT> port 636, and one for the standard <TT>ldap://</TT> scheme on the <TT>localhost</TT> (<EM>loopback</EM>) interface on port 666. Hosts may be specified using using hostnames or <TERM>IPv4</TERM> or <TERM>IPv6</TERM> addresses. Port values must be numeric.</P> 2842<PRE> 2843 -n <service-name> 2844</PRE> 2845<P>This option specifies the service name used for logging and other purposes. The default service name is <TT>slapd</TT>.</P> 2846<PRE> 2847 -l <syslog-local-user> 2848</PRE> 2849<P>This option specifies the local user for the <EM>syslog</EM>(8) facility. Values can be <TT>LOCAL0</TT>, <TT>LOCAL1</TT>, <TT>LOCAL2</TT>, ..., and <TT>LOCAL7</TT>. The default is <TT>LOCAL4</TT>. This option may not be supported on all systems.</P> 2850<PRE> 2851 -u user -g group 2852</PRE> 2853<P>These options specify the user and group, respectively, to run as. <TT>user</TT> can be either a user name or uid. <TT>group</TT> can be either a group name or gid.</P> 2854<PRE> 2855 -r directory 2856</PRE> 2857<P>This option specifies a run-time directory. slapd will <EM>chroot</EM>(2) to this directory after opening listeners but before reading any configuration files or initializing any backends.</P> 2858<UL> 2859</UL> 2860<PRE> 2861 -d <level> | ? 2862</PRE> 2863<P>This option sets the slapd debug level to <level>. When level is a `?' character, the various debugging levels are printed and slapd exits, regardless of any other options you give it. Current debugging levels are</P> 2864<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 2865<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 7.1: Debugging Levels</CAPTION> 2866<TR CLASS="heading"> 2867<TD ALIGN='Right'> 2868<STRONG>Level</STRONG> 2869</TD> 2870<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2871<STRONG>Keyword</STRONG> 2872</TD> 2873<TD> 2874<STRONG>Description</STRONG> 2875</TD> 2876</TR> 2877<TR> 2878<TD ALIGN='Right'> 2879-1 2880</TD> 2881<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2882any 2883</TD> 2884<TD> 2885enable all debugging 2886</TD> 2887</TR> 2888<TR> 2889<TD ALIGN='Right'> 28900 2891</TD> 2892<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2893 2894</TD> 2895<TD> 2896no debugging 2897</TD> 2898</TR> 2899<TR> 2900<TD ALIGN='Right'> 29011 2902</TD> 2903<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2904(0x1 trace) 2905</TD> 2906<TD> 2907trace function calls 2908</TD> 2909</TR> 2910<TR> 2911<TD ALIGN='Right'> 29122 2913</TD> 2914<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2915(0x2 packets) 2916</TD> 2917<TD> 2918debug packet handling 2919</TD> 2920</TR> 2921<TR> 2922<TD ALIGN='Right'> 29234 2924</TD> 2925<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2926(0x4 args) 2927</TD> 2928<TD> 2929heavy trace debugging 2930</TD> 2931</TR> 2932<TR> 2933<TD ALIGN='Right'> 29348 2935</TD> 2936<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2937(0x8 conns) 2938</TD> 2939<TD> 2940connection management 2941</TD> 2942</TR> 2943<TR> 2944<TD ALIGN='Right'> 294516 2946</TD> 2947<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2948(0x10 BER) 2949</TD> 2950<TD> 2951print out packets sent and received 2952</TD> 2953</TR> 2954<TR> 2955<TD ALIGN='Right'> 295632 2957</TD> 2958<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2959(0x20 filter) 2960</TD> 2961<TD> 2962search filter processing 2963</TD> 2964</TR> 2965<TR> 2966<TD ALIGN='Right'> 296764 2968</TD> 2969<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2970(0x40 config) 2971</TD> 2972<TD> 2973configuration processing 2974</TD> 2975</TR> 2976<TR> 2977<TD ALIGN='Right'> 2978128 2979</TD> 2980<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2981(0x80 ACL) 2982</TD> 2983<TD> 2984access control list processing 2985</TD> 2986</TR> 2987<TR> 2988<TD ALIGN='Right'> 2989256 2990</TD> 2991<TD ALIGN='Left'> 2992(0x100 stats) 2993</TD> 2994<TD> 2995stats log connections/operations/results 2996</TD> 2997</TR> 2998<TR> 2999<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3000512 3001</TD> 3002<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3003(0x200 stats2) 3004</TD> 3005<TD> 3006stats log entries sent 3007</TD> 3008</TR> 3009<TR> 3010<TD ALIGN='Right'> 30111024 3012</TD> 3013<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3014(0x400 shell) 3015</TD> 3016<TD> 3017print communication with shell backends 3018</TD> 3019</TR> 3020<TR> 3021<TD ALIGN='Right'> 30222048 3023</TD> 3024<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3025(0x800 parse) 3026</TD> 3027<TD> 3028print entry parsing debugging 3029</TD> 3030</TR> 3031<TR> 3032<TD ALIGN='Right'> 303316384 3034</TD> 3035<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3036(0x4000 sync) 3037</TD> 3038<TD> 3039syncrepl consumer processing 3040</TD> 3041</TR> 3042<TR> 3043<TD ALIGN='Right'> 304432768 3045</TD> 3046<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3047(0x8000 none) 3048</TD> 3049<TD> 3050only messages that get logged whatever log level is set 3051</TD> 3052</TR> 3053</TABLE> 3054 3055<P>You may enable multiple levels by specifying the debug option once for each desired level. Or, since debugging levels are additive, you can do the math yourself. That is, if you want to trace function calls and watch the config file being processed, you could set level to the sum of those two levels (in this case, <TT> -d 65</TT>). Or, you can let slapd do the math, (e.g. <TT> -d 1 -d 64</TT>). Consult <TT><ldap_log.h></TT> for more details.</P> 3056<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 3057<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>slapd must have been compiled with <TT>--enable-debug</TT> defined for any debugging information beyond the two stats levels to be available (the default). 3058<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 3059<H2><A NAME="Starting slapd">7.2. Starting slapd</A></H2> 3060<P>In general, slapd is run like this:</P> 3061<PRE> 3062 /usr/local/libexec/slapd [<option>]* 3063</PRE> 3064<P>where <TT>/usr/local/libexec</TT> is determined by <TT>configure</TT> and <option> is one of the options described above (or in <EM>slapd</EM>(8)). Unless you have specified a debugging level (including level <TT>0</TT>), slapd will automatically fork and detach itself from its controlling terminal and run in the background.</P> 3065<H2><A NAME="Stopping slapd">7.3. Stopping slapd</A></H2> 3066<P>To kill off <EM>slapd</EM>(8) safely, you should give a command like this</P> 3067<PRE> 3068 kill -INT `cat /usr/local/var/slapd.pid` 3069</PRE> 3070<P>where <TT>/usr/local/var</TT> is determined by <TT>configure</TT>.</P> 3071<P>Killing slapd by a more drastic method may cause information loss or database corruption.</P> 3072<P></P> 3073<HR> 3074<H1><A NAME="Access Control">8. Access Control</A></H1> 3075<H2><A NAME="Introduction">8.1. Introduction</A></H2> 3076<P>As the directory gets populated with more and more data of varying sensitivity, controlling the kinds of access granted to the directory becomes more and more critical. For instance, the directory may contain data of a confidential nature that you may need to protect by contract or by law. Or, if using the directory to control access to other services, inappropriate access to the directory may create avenues of attack to your sites security that result in devastating damage to your assets.</P> 3077<P>Access to your directory can be configured via two methods, the first using <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> and the second using the <EM>slapd-config</EM>(5) format (<A HREF="#Configuring slapd">Configuring slapd</A>).</P> 3078<P>The default access control policy is allow read by all clients. Regardless of what access control policy is defined, the <EM>rootdn</EM> is always allowed full rights (i.e. auth, search, compare, read and write) on everything and anything.</P> 3079<P>As a consequence, it's useless (and results in a performance penalty) to explicitly list the <EM>rootdn</EM> among the <EM><by></EM> clauses.</P> 3080<P>The following sections will describe Access Control Lists in more details and follow with some examples and recommendations.</P> 3081<H2><A NAME="Access Control via Static Configuration">8.2. Access Control via Static Configuration</A></H2> 3082<P>Access to entries and attributes is controlled by the access configuration file directive. The general form of an access line is:</P> 3083<PRE> 3084 <access directive> ::= access to <what> 3085 [by <who> [<access>] [<control>] ]+ 3086 <what> ::= * | 3087 [dn[.<basic-style>]=<regex> | dn.<scope-style>=<DN>] 3088 [filter=<ldapfilter>] [attrs=<attrlist>] 3089 <basic-style> ::= regex | exact 3090 <scope-style> ::= base | one | subtree | children 3091 <attrlist> ::= <attr> [val[.<basic-style>]=<regex>] | <attr> , <attrlist> 3092 <attr> ::= <attrname> | entry | children 3093 <who> ::= * | [anonymous | users | self 3094 | dn[.<basic-style>]=<regex> | dn.<scope-style>=<DN>] 3095 [dnattr=<attrname>] 3096 [group[/<objectclass>[/<attrname>][.<basic-style>]]=<regex>] 3097 [peername[.<basic-style>]=<regex>] 3098 [sockname[.<basic-style>]=<regex>] 3099 [domain[.<basic-style>]=<regex>] 3100 [sockurl[.<basic-style>]=<regex>] 3101 [set=<setspec>] 3102 [aci=<attrname>] 3103 <access> ::= [self]{<level>|<priv>} 3104 <level> ::= none | disclose | auth | compare | search | read | write | manage 3105 <priv> ::= {=|+|-}{m|w|r|s|c|x|d|0}+ 3106 <control> ::= [stop | continue | break] 3107</PRE> 3108<P>where the <what> part selects the entries and/or attributes to which the access applies, the <TT><who></TT> part specifies which entities are granted access, and the <TT><access></TT> part specifies the access granted. Multiple <TT><who> <access> <control></TT> triplets are supported, allowing many entities to be granted different access to the same set of entries and attributes. Not all of these access control options are described here; for more details see the <EM>slapd.access</EM>(5) man page.</P> 3109<H3><A NAME="What to control access to">8.2.1. What to control access to</A></H3> 3110<P>The <what> part of an access specification determines the entries and attributes to which the access control applies. Entries are commonly selected in two ways: by DN and by filter. The following qualifiers select entries by DN:</P> 3111<PRE> 3112 to * 3113 to dn[.<basic-style>]=<regex> 3114 to dn.<scope-style>=<DN> 3115</PRE> 3116<P>The first form is used to select all entries. The second form may be used to select entries by matching a regular expression against the target entry's <EM>normalized DN</EM>. (The second form is not discussed further in this document.) The third form is used to select entries which are within the requested scope of DN. The <DN> is a string representation of the Distinguished Name, as described in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4514.txt">RFC4514</A>.</P> 3117<P>The scope can be either <TT>base</TT>, <TT>one</TT>, <TT>subtree</TT>, or <TT>children</TT>. Where <TT>base</TT> matches only the entry with provided DN, <TT>one</TT> matches the entries whose parent is the provided DN, <TT>subtree</TT> matches all entries in the subtree whose root is the provided DN, and <TT>children</TT> matches all entries under the DN (but not the entry named by the DN).</P> 3118<P>For example, if the directory contained entries named:</P> 3119<PRE> 3120 0: o=suffix 3121 1: cn=Manager,o=suffix 3122 2: ou=people,o=suffix 3123 3: uid=kdz,ou=people,o=suffix 3124 4: cn=addresses,uid=kdz,ou=people,o=suffix 3125 5: uid=hyc,ou=people,o=suffix 3126</PRE> 3127<P>Then:</P> 3128<UL> 3129<TT>dn.base="ou=people,o=suffix"</TT> match 2; 3130<BR> 3131<TT>dn.one="ou=people,o=suffix"</TT> match 3, and 5; 3132<BR> 3133<TT>dn.subtree="ou=people,o=suffix"</TT> match 2, 3, 4, and 5; and 3134<BR> 3135<TT>dn.children="ou=people,o=suffix"</TT> match 3, 4, and 5.</UL> 3136<P>Entries may also be selected using a filter:</P> 3137<PRE> 3138 to filter=<ldap filter> 3139</PRE> 3140<P>where <ldap filter> is a string representation of an LDAP search filter, as described in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4515.txt">RFC4515</A>. For example:</P> 3141<PRE> 3142 to filter=(objectClass=person) 3143</PRE> 3144<P>Note that entries may be selected by both DN and filter by including both qualifiers in the <what> clause.</P> 3145<PRE> 3146 to dn.one="ou=people,o=suffix" filter=(objectClass=person) 3147</PRE> 3148<P>Attributes within an entry are selected by including a comma-separated list of attribute names in the <what> selector:</P> 3149<PRE> 3150 attrs=<attribute list> 3151</PRE> 3152<P>A specific value of an attribute is selected by using a single attribute name and also using a value selector:</P> 3153<PRE> 3154 attrs=<attribute> val[.<style>]=<regex> 3155</PRE> 3156<P>There are two special <EM>pseudo</EM> attributes <TT>entry</TT> and <TT>children</TT>. To read (and hence return) a target entry, the subject must have <TT>read</TT> access to the target's <EM>entry</EM> attribute. To perform a search, the subject must have <TT>search</TT> access to the search base's <EM>entry</EM> attribute. To add or delete an entry, the subject must have <TT>write</TT> access to the entry's <TT>entry</TT> attribute AND must have <TT>write</TT> access to the entry's parent's <TT>children</TT> attribute. To rename an entry, the subject must have <TT>write</TT> access to entry's <TT>entry</TT> attribute AND have <TT>write</TT> access to both the old parent's and new parent's <TT>children</TT> attributes. The complete examples at the end of this section should help clear things up.</P> 3157<P>Lastly, there is a special entry selector <TT>"*"</TT> that is used to select any entry. It is used when no other <TT><what></TT> selector has been provided. It's equivalent to "<TT>dn=.*</TT>"</P> 3158<H3><A NAME="Who to grant access to">8.2.2. Who to grant access to</A></H3> 3159<P>The <who> part identifies the entity or entities being granted access. Note that access is granted to "entities" not "entries." The following table summarizes entity specifiers:</P> 3160<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 3161<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 6.3: Access Entity Specifiers</CAPTION> 3162<TR CLASS="heading"> 3163<TD> 3164<STRONG>Specifier</STRONG> 3165</TD> 3166<TD> 3167<STRONG>Entities</STRONG> 3168</TD> 3169</TR> 3170<TR> 3171<TD> 3172<TT>*</TT> 3173</TD> 3174<TD> 3175All, including anonymous and authenticated users 3176</TD> 3177</TR> 3178<TR> 3179<TD> 3180<TT>anonymous</TT> 3181</TD> 3182<TD> 3183Anonymous (non-authenticated) users 3184</TD> 3185</TR> 3186<TR> 3187<TD> 3188<TT>users</TT> 3189</TD> 3190<TD> 3191Authenticated users 3192</TD> 3193</TR> 3194<TR> 3195<TD> 3196<TT>self</TT> 3197</TD> 3198<TD> 3199User associated with target entry 3200</TD> 3201</TR> 3202<TR> 3203<TD> 3204<TT>dn[.<basic-style>]=<regex></TT> 3205</TD> 3206<TD> 3207Users matching a regular expression 3208</TD> 3209</TR> 3210<TR> 3211<TD> 3212<TT>dn.<scope-style>=<DN></TT> 3213</TD> 3214<TD> 3215Users within scope of a DN 3216</TD> 3217</TR> 3218</TABLE> 3219 3220<P>The DN specifier behaves much like <what> clause DN specifiers.</P> 3221<P>Other control factors are also supported. For example, a <TT><who></TT> can be restricted by an entry listed in a DN-valued attribute in the entry to which the access applies:</P> 3222<PRE> 3223 dnattr=<dn-valued attribute name> 3224</PRE> 3225<P>The dnattr specification is used to give access to an entry whose DN is listed in an attribute of the entry (e.g., give access to a group entry to whoever is listed as the owner of the group entry).</P> 3226<P>Some factors may not be appropriate in all environments (or any). For example, the domain factor relies on IP to domain name lookups. As these can easily be spoofed, the domain factor should be avoided.</P> 3227<H3><A NAME="The access to grant">8.2.3. The access to grant</A></H3> 3228<P>The kind of <access> granted can be one of the following:</P> 3229<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 3230<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 6.4: Access Levels</CAPTION> 3231<TR CLASS="heading"> 3232<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3233<STRONG>Level</STRONG> 3234</TD> 3235<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3236<STRONG>Privileges</STRONG> 3237</TD> 3238<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3239<STRONG>Description</STRONG> 3240</TD> 3241</TR> 3242<TR> 3243<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3244<TT>none =</TT> 3245</TD> 3246<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3247<TT>0</TT> 3248</TD> 3249<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3250no access 3251</TD> 3252</TR> 3253<TR> 3254<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3255<TT>disclose =</TT> 3256</TD> 3257<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3258<TT>d</TT> 3259</TD> 3260<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3261needed for information disclosure on error 3262</TD> 3263</TR> 3264<TR> 3265<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3266<TT>auth =</TT> 3267</TD> 3268<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3269<TT>dx</TT> 3270</TD> 3271<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3272needed to authenticate (bind) 3273</TD> 3274</TR> 3275<TR> 3276<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3277<TT>compare =</TT> 3278</TD> 3279<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3280<TT>cdx</TT> 3281</TD> 3282<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3283needed to compare 3284</TD> 3285</TR> 3286<TR> 3287<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3288<TT>search =</TT> 3289</TD> 3290<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3291<TT>scdx</TT> 3292</TD> 3293<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3294needed to apply search filters 3295</TD> 3296</TR> 3297<TR> 3298<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3299<TT>read =</TT> 3300</TD> 3301<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3302<TT>rscdx</TT> 3303</TD> 3304<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3305needed to read search results 3306</TD> 3307</TR> 3308<TR> 3309<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3310<TT>write =</TT> 3311</TD> 3312<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3313<TT>wrscdx</TT> 3314</TD> 3315<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3316needed to modify/rename 3317</TD> 3318</TR> 3319<TR> 3320<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3321<TT>manage =</TT> 3322</TD> 3323<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3324<TT>mwrscdx</TT> 3325</TD> 3326<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3327needed to manage 3328</TD> 3329</TR> 3330</TABLE> 3331 3332<P>Each level implies all lower levels of access. So, for example, granting someone <TT>write</TT> access to an entry also grants them <TT>read</TT>, <TT>search</TT>, <TT>compare</TT>, <TT>auth</TT> and <TT>disclose</TT> access. However, one may use the privileges specifier to grant specific permissions.</P> 3333<H3><A NAME="Access Control Evaluation">8.2.4. Access Control Evaluation</A></H3> 3334<P>When evaluating whether some requester should be given access to an entry and/or attribute, slapd compares the entry and/or attribute to the <TT><what></TT> selectors given in the configuration file. For each entry, access controls provided in the database which holds the entry (or the global access directives if not held in any database) apply first, followed by the global access directives. However, when dealing with an access list, because the global access list is effectively appended to each per-database list, if the resulting list is non-empty then the access list will end with an implicit <TT>access to * by * none</TT> directive. If there are no access directives applicable to a backend, then a default read is used.</P> 3335<P>Within this priority, access directives are examined in the order in which they appear in the config file. Slapd stops with the first <TT><what></TT> selector that matches the entry and/or attribute. The corresponding access directive is the one slapd will use to evaluate access.</P> 3336<P>Next, slapd compares the entity requesting access to the <TT><who></TT> selectors within the access directive selected above in the order in which they appear. It stops with the first <TT><who></TT> selector that matches the requester. This determines the access the entity requesting access has to the entry and/or attribute.</P> 3337<P>Finally, slapd compares the access granted in the selected <TT><access></TT> clause to the access requested by the client. If it allows greater or equal access, access is granted. Otherwise, access is denied.</P> 3338<P>The order of evaluation of access directives makes their placement in the configuration file important. If one access directive is more specific than another in terms of the entries it selects, it should appear first in the config file. Similarly, if one <TT><who></TT> selector is more specific than another it should come first in the access directive. The access control examples given below should help make this clear.</P> 3339<H3><A NAME="Access Control Examples">8.2.5. Access Control Examples</A></H3> 3340<P>The access control facility described above is quite powerful. This section shows some examples of its use for descriptive purposes.</P> 3341<P>A simple example:</P> 3342<PRE> 3343 access to * by * read 3344</PRE> 3345<P>This access directive grants read access to everyone.</P> 3346<PRE> 3347 access to * 3348 by self write 3349 by anonymous auth 3350 by * read 3351</PRE> 3352<P>This directive allows the user to modify their entry, allows anonymous to authentication against these entries, and allows all others to read these entries. Note that only the first <TT>by <who></TT> clause which matches applies. Hence, the anonymous users are granted <TT>auth</TT>, not <TT>read</TT>. The last clause could just as well have been "<TT>by users read</TT>".</P> 3353<P>It is often desirable to restrict operations based upon the level of protection in place. The following shows how security strength factors (SSF) can be used.</P> 3354<PRE> 3355 access to * 3356 by ssf=128 self write 3357 by ssf=64 anonymous auth 3358 by ssf=64 users read 3359</PRE> 3360<P>This directive allows users to modify their own entries if security protections have of strength 128 or better have been established, allows authentication access to anonymous users, and read access when 64 or better security protections have been established. If client has not establish sufficient security protections, the implicit <TT>by * none</TT> clause would be applied.</P> 3361<P>The following example shows the use of a style specifiers to select the entries by DN in two access directives where ordering is significant.</P> 3362<PRE> 3363 access to dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" 3364 by * search 3365 access to dn.children="dc=com" 3366 by * read 3367</PRE> 3368<P>Read access is granted to entries under the <TT>dc=com</TT> subtree, except for those entries under the <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> subtree, to which search access is granted. No access is granted to <TT>dc=com</TT> as neither access directive matches this DN. If the order of these access directives was reversed, the trailing directive would never be reached, since all entries under <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> are also under <TT>dc=com</TT> entries.</P> 3369<P>Also note that if no <TT>access to</TT> directive matches or no <TT>by <who></TT> clause, <B>access is denied</B>. That is, every <TT>access to</TT> directive ends with an implicit <TT>by * none</TT> clause. When dealing with an access list, because the global access list is effectively appended to each per-database list, if the resulting list is non-empty then the access list will end with an implicit <TT>access to * by * none</TT> directive. If there are no access directives applicable to a backend, then a default read is used.</P> 3370<P>The next example again shows the importance of ordering, both of the access directives and the <TT>by <who></TT> clauses. It also shows the use of an attribute selector to grant access to a specific attribute and various <TT><who></TT> selectors.</P> 3371<PRE> 3372 access to dn.subtree="dc=example,dc=com" attrs=homePhone 3373 by self write 3374 by dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" search 3375 by peername.regex=IP:10\..+ read 3376 access to dn.subtree="dc=example,dc=com" 3377 by self write 3378 by dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" search 3379 by anonymous auth 3380</PRE> 3381<P>This example applies to entries in the "<TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT>" subtree. To all attributes except <TT>homePhone</TT>, an entry can write to itself, entries under <TT>example.com</TT> entries can search by them, anybody else has no access (implicit <TT>by * none</TT>) excepting for authentication/authorization (which is always done anonymously). The <TT>homePhone</TT> attribute is writable by the entry, searchable by entries under <TT>example.com</TT>, readable by clients connecting from network 10, and otherwise not readable (implicit <TT>by * none</TT>). All other access is denied by the implicit <TT>access to * by * none</TT>.</P> 3382<P>Sometimes it is useful to permit a particular DN to add or remove itself from an attribute. For example, if you would like to create a group and allow people to add and remove only their own DN from the member attribute, you could accomplish it with an access directive like this:</P> 3383<PRE> 3384 access to attrs=member,entry 3385 by dnattr=member selfwrite 3386</PRE> 3387<P>The dnattr <TT><who></TT> selector says that the access applies to entries listed in the <TT>member</TT> attribute. The <TT>selfwrite</TT> access selector says that such members can only add or delete their own DN from the attribute, not other values. The addition of the entry attribute is required because access to the entry is required to access any of the entry's attributes.</P> 3388<H2><A NAME="Access Control via Dynamic Configuration">8.3. Access Control via Dynamic Configuration</A></H2> 3389<P>Access to slapd entries and attributes is controlled by the olcAccess attribute, whose values are a sequence of access directives. The general form of the olcAccess configuration is:</P> 3390<PRE> 3391 olcAccess: <access directive> 3392 <access directive> ::= to <what> 3393 [by <who> [<access>] [<control>] ]+ 3394 <what> ::= * | 3395 [dn[.<basic-style>]=<regex> | dn.<scope-style>=<DN>] 3396 [filter=<ldapfilter>] [attrs=<attrlist>] 3397 <basic-style> ::= regex | exact 3398 <scope-style> ::= base | one | subtree | children 3399 <attrlist> ::= <attr> [val[.<basic-style>]=<regex>] | <attr> , <attrlist> 3400 <attr> ::= <attrname> | entry | children 3401 <who> ::= * | [anonymous | users | self 3402 | dn[.<basic-style>]=<regex> | dn.<scope-style>=<DN>] 3403 [dnattr=<attrname>] 3404 [group[/<objectclass>[/<attrname>][.<basic-style>]]=<regex>] 3405 [peername[.<basic-style>]=<regex>] 3406 [sockname[.<basic-style>]=<regex>] 3407 [domain[.<basic-style>]=<regex>] 3408 [sockurl[.<basic-style>]=<regex>] 3409 [set=<setspec>] 3410 [aci=<attrname>] 3411 <access> ::= [self]{<level>|<priv>} 3412 <level> ::= none | disclose | auth | compare | search | read | write | manage 3413 <priv> ::= {=|+|-}{m|w|r|s|c|x|d|0}+ 3414 <control> ::= [stop | continue | break] 3415</PRE> 3416<P>where the <what> part selects the entries and/or attributes to which the access applies, the <TT><who></TT> part specifies which entities are granted access, and the <TT><access></TT> part specifies the access granted. Multiple <TT><who> <access> <control></TT> triplets are supported, allowing many entities to be granted different access to the same set of entries and attributes. Not all of these access control options are described here; for more details see the <EM>slapd.access</EM>(5) man page.</P> 3417<H3><A NAME="What to control access to">8.3.1. What to control access to</A></H3> 3418<P>The <what> part of an access specification determines the entries and attributes to which the access control applies. Entries are commonly selected in two ways: by DN and by filter. The following qualifiers select entries by DN:</P> 3419<PRE> 3420 to * 3421 to dn[.<basic-style>]=<regex> 3422 to dn.<scope-style>=<DN> 3423</PRE> 3424<P>The first form is used to select all entries. The second form may be used to select entries by matching a regular expression against the target entry's <EM>normalized DN</EM>. (The second form is not discussed further in this document.) The third form is used to select entries which are within the requested scope of DN. The <DN> is a string representation of the Distinguished Name, as described in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4514.txt">RFC4514</A>.</P> 3425<P>The scope can be either <TT>base</TT>, <TT>one</TT>, <TT>subtree</TT>, or <TT>children</TT>. Where <TT>base</TT> matches only the entry with provided DN, <TT>one</TT> matches the entries whose parent is the provided DN, <TT>subtree</TT> matches all entries in the subtree whose root is the provided DN, and <TT>children</TT> matches all entries under the DN (but not the entry named by the DN).</P> 3426<P>For example, if the directory contained entries named:</P> 3427<PRE> 3428 0: o=suffix 3429 1: cn=Manager,o=suffix 3430 2: ou=people,o=suffix 3431 3: uid=kdz,ou=people,o=suffix 3432 4: cn=addresses,uid=kdz,ou=people,o=suffix 3433 5: uid=hyc,ou=people,o=suffix 3434</PRE> 3435<P>Then:</P> 3436<UL> 3437<TT>dn.base="ou=people,o=suffix"</TT> match 2; 3438<BR> 3439<TT>dn.one="ou=people,o=suffix"</TT> match 3, and 5; 3440<BR> 3441<TT>dn.subtree="ou=people,o=suffix"</TT> match 2, 3, 4, and 5; and 3442<BR> 3443<TT>dn.children="ou=people,o=suffix"</TT> match 3, 4, and 5.</UL> 3444<P>Entries may also be selected using a filter:</P> 3445<PRE> 3446 to filter=<ldap filter> 3447</PRE> 3448<P>where <ldap filter> is a string representation of an LDAP search filter, as described in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4515.txt">RFC4515</A>. For example:</P> 3449<PRE> 3450 to filter=(objectClass=person) 3451</PRE> 3452<P>Note that entries may be selected by both DN and filter by including both qualifiers in the <what> clause.</P> 3453<PRE> 3454 to dn.one="ou=people,o=suffix" filter=(objectClass=person) 3455</PRE> 3456<P>Attributes within an entry are selected by including a comma-separated list of attribute names in the <what> selector:</P> 3457<PRE> 3458 attrs=<attribute list> 3459</PRE> 3460<P>A specific value of an attribute is selected by using a single attribute name and also using a value selector:</P> 3461<PRE> 3462 attrs=<attribute> val[.<style>]=<regex> 3463</PRE> 3464<P>There are two special <EM>pseudo</EM> attributes <TT>entry</TT> and <TT>children</TT>. To read (and hence return) a target entry, the subject must have <TT>read</TT> access to the target's <EM>entry</EM> attribute. To perform a search, the subject must have <TT>search</TT> access to the search base's <EM>entry</EM> attribute. To add or delete an entry, the subject must have <TT>write</TT> access to the entry's <TT>entry</TT> attribute AND must have <TT>write</TT> access to the entry's parent's <TT>children</TT> attribute. To rename an entry, the subject must have <TT>write</TT> access to entry's <TT>entry</TT> attribute AND have <TT>write</TT> access to both the old parent's and new parent's <TT>children</TT> attributes. The complete examples at the end of this section should help clear things up.</P> 3465<P>Lastly, there is a special entry selector <TT>"*"</TT> that is used to select any entry. It is used when no other <TT><what></TT> selector has been provided. It's equivalent to "<TT>dn=.*</TT>"</P> 3466<H3><A NAME="Who to grant access to">8.3.2. Who to grant access to</A></H3> 3467<P>The <who> part identifies the entity or entities being granted access. Note that access is granted to "entities" not "entries." The following table summarizes entity specifiers:</P> 3468<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 3469<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 5.3: Access Entity Specifiers</CAPTION> 3470<TR CLASS="heading"> 3471<TD> 3472<STRONG>Specifier</STRONG> 3473</TD> 3474<TD> 3475<STRONG>Entities</STRONG> 3476</TD> 3477</TR> 3478<TR> 3479<TD> 3480<TT>*</TT> 3481</TD> 3482<TD> 3483All, including anonymous and authenticated users 3484</TD> 3485</TR> 3486<TR> 3487<TD> 3488<TT>anonymous</TT> 3489</TD> 3490<TD> 3491Anonymous (non-authenticated) users 3492</TD> 3493</TR> 3494<TR> 3495<TD> 3496<TT>users</TT> 3497</TD> 3498<TD> 3499Authenticated users 3500</TD> 3501</TR> 3502<TR> 3503<TD> 3504<TT>self</TT> 3505</TD> 3506<TD> 3507User associated with target entry 3508</TD> 3509</TR> 3510<TR> 3511<TD> 3512<TT>dn[.<basic-style>]=<regex></TT> 3513</TD> 3514<TD> 3515Users matching a regular expression 3516</TD> 3517</TR> 3518<TR> 3519<TD> 3520<TT>dn.<scope-style>=<DN></TT> 3521</TD> 3522<TD> 3523Users within scope of a DN 3524</TD> 3525</TR> 3526</TABLE> 3527 3528<P>The DN specifier behaves much like <what> clause DN specifiers.</P> 3529<P>Other control factors are also supported. For example, a <TT><who></TT> can be restricted by an entry listed in a DN-valued attribute in the entry to which the access applies:</P> 3530<PRE> 3531 dnattr=<dn-valued attribute name> 3532</PRE> 3533<P>The dnattr specification is used to give access to an entry whose DN is listed in an attribute of the entry (e.g., give access to a group entry to whoever is listed as the owner of the group entry).</P> 3534<P>Some factors may not be appropriate in all environments (or any). For example, the domain factor relies on IP to domain name lookups. As these can easily be spoofed, the domain factor should be avoided.</P> 3535<H3><A NAME="The access to grant">8.3.3. The access to grant</A></H3> 3536<P>The kind of <access> granted can be one of the following:</P> 3537<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 3538<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 5.4: Access Levels</CAPTION> 3539<TR CLASS="heading"> 3540<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3541<STRONG>Level</STRONG> 3542</TD> 3543<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3544<STRONG>Privileges</STRONG> 3545</TD> 3546<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3547<STRONG>Description</STRONG> 3548</TD> 3549</TR> 3550<TR> 3551<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3552<TT>none</TT> 3553</TD> 3554<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3555<TT>=0</TT> 3556</TD> 3557<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3558no access 3559</TD> 3560</TR> 3561<TR> 3562<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3563<TT>disclose</TT> 3564</TD> 3565<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3566<TT>=d</TT> 3567</TD> 3568<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3569needed for information disclosure on error 3570</TD> 3571</TR> 3572<TR> 3573<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3574<TT>auth</TT> 3575</TD> 3576<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3577<TT>=dx</TT> 3578</TD> 3579<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3580needed to authenticate (bind) 3581</TD> 3582</TR> 3583<TR> 3584<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3585<TT>compare</TT> 3586</TD> 3587<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3588<TT>=cdx</TT> 3589</TD> 3590<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3591needed to compare 3592</TD> 3593</TR> 3594<TR> 3595<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3596<TT>search</TT> 3597</TD> 3598<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3599<TT>=scdx</TT> 3600</TD> 3601<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3602needed to apply search filters 3603</TD> 3604</TR> 3605<TR> 3606<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3607<TT>read</TT> 3608</TD> 3609<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3610<TT>=rscdx</TT> 3611</TD> 3612<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3613needed to read search results 3614</TD> 3615</TR> 3616<TR> 3617<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3618<TT>write</TT> 3619</TD> 3620<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3621<TT>=wrscdx</TT> 3622</TD> 3623<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3624needed to modify/rename 3625</TD> 3626</TR> 3627<TR> 3628<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3629<TT>manage</TT> 3630</TD> 3631<TD ALIGN='Right'> 3632<TT>=mwrscdx</TT> 3633</TD> 3634<TD ALIGN='Left'> 3635needed to manage 3636</TD> 3637</TR> 3638</TABLE> 3639 3640<P>Each level implies all lower levels of access. So, for example, granting someone <TT>write</TT> access to an entry also grants them <TT>read</TT>, <TT>search</TT>, <TT>compare</TT>, <TT>auth</TT> and <TT>disclose</TT> access. However, one may use the privileges specifier to grant specific permissions.</P> 3641<H3><A NAME="Access Control Evaluation">8.3.4. Access Control Evaluation</A></H3> 3642<P>When evaluating whether some requester should be given access to an entry and/or attribute, slapd compares the entry and/or attribute to the <TT><what></TT> selectors given in the configuration. For each entry, access controls provided in the database which holds the entry (or the global access directives if not held in any database) apply first, followed by the global access directives (which are held in the <TT>frontend</TT> database definition). However, when dealing with an access list, because the global access list is effectively appended to each per-database list, if the resulting list is non-empty then the access list will end with an implicit <TT>access to * by * none</TT> directive. If there are no access directives applicable to a backend, then a default read is used.</P> 3643<P>Within this priority, access directives are examined in the order in which they appear in the configuration attribute. Slapd stops with the first <TT><what></TT> selector that matches the entry and/or attribute. The corresponding access directive is the one slapd will use to evaluate access.</P> 3644<P>Next, slapd compares the entity requesting access to the <TT><who></TT> selectors within the access directive selected above in the order in which they appear. It stops with the first <TT><who></TT> selector that matches the requester. This determines the access the entity requesting access has to the entry and/or attribute.</P> 3645<P>Finally, slapd compares the access granted in the selected <TT><access></TT> clause to the access requested by the client. If it allows greater or equal access, access is granted. Otherwise, access is denied.</P> 3646<P>The order of evaluation of access directives makes their placement in the configuration file important. If one access directive is more specific than another in terms of the entries it selects, it should appear first in the configuration. Similarly, if one <TT><who></TT> selector is more specific than another it should come first in the access directive. The access control examples given below should help make this clear.</P> 3647<H3><A NAME="Access Control Examples">8.3.5. Access Control Examples</A></H3> 3648<P>The access control facility described above is quite powerful. This section shows some examples of its use for descriptive purposes.</P> 3649<P>A simple example:</P> 3650<PRE> 3651 olcAccess: to * by * read 3652</PRE> 3653<P>This access directive grants read access to everyone.</P> 3654<PRE> 3655 olcAccess: to * 3656 by self write 3657 by anonymous auth 3658 by * read 3659</PRE> 3660<P>This directive allows the user to modify their entry, allows anonymous to authenticate against these entries, and allows all others to read these entries. Note that only the first <TT>by <who></TT> clause which matches applies. Hence, the anonymous users are granted <TT>auth</TT>, not <TT>read</TT>. The last clause could just as well have been "<TT>by users read</TT>".</P> 3661<P>It is often desirable to restrict operations based upon the level of protection in place. The following shows how security strength factors (SSF) can be used.</P> 3662<PRE> 3663 olcAccess: to * 3664 by ssf=128 self write 3665 by ssf=64 anonymous auth 3666 by ssf=64 users read 3667</PRE> 3668<P>This directive allows users to modify their own entries if security protections of strength 128 or better have been established, allows authentication access to anonymous users, and read access when strength 64 or better security protections have been established. If the client has not establish sufficient security protections, the implicit <TT>by * none</TT> clause would be applied.</P> 3669<P>The following example shows the use of style specifiers to select the entries by DN in two access directives where ordering is significant.</P> 3670<PRE> 3671 olcAccess: to dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" 3672 by * search 3673 olcAccess: to dn.children="dc=com" 3674 by * read 3675</PRE> 3676<P>Read access is granted to entries under the <TT>dc=com</TT> subtree, except for those entries under the <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> subtree, to which search access is granted. No access is granted to <TT>dc=com</TT> as neither access directive matches this DN. If the order of these access directives was reversed, the trailing directive would never be reached, since all entries under <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> are also under <TT>dc=com</TT> entries.</P> 3677<P>Also note that if no <TT>olcAccess: to</TT> directive matches or no <TT>by <who></TT> clause, <B>access is denied</B>. When dealing with an access list, because the global access list is effectively appended to each per-database list, if the resulting list is non-empty then the access list will end with an implicit <TT>access to * by * none</TT> directive. If there are no access directives applicable to a backend, then a default read is used.</P> 3678<P>The next example again shows the importance of ordering, both of the access directives and the <TT>by <who></TT> clauses. It also shows the use of an attribute selector to grant access to a specific attribute and various <TT><who></TT> selectors.</P> 3679<PRE> 3680 olcAccess: to dn.subtree="dc=example,dc=com" attrs=homePhone 3681 by self write 3682 by dn.children=dc=example,dc=com" search 3683 by peername.regex=IP:10\..+ read 3684 olcAccess: to dn.subtree="dc=example,dc=com" 3685 by self write 3686 by dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" search 3687 by anonymous auth 3688</PRE> 3689<P>This example applies to entries in the "<TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT>" subtree. To all attributes except <TT>homePhone</TT>, an entry can write to itself, entries under <TT>example.com</TT> entries can search by them, anybody else has no access (implicit <TT>by * none</TT>) excepting for authentication/authorization (which is always done anonymously). The <TT>homePhone</TT> attribute is writable by the entry, searchable by entries under <TT>example.com</TT>, readable by clients connecting from network 10, and otherwise not readable (implicit <TT>by * none</TT>). All other access is denied by the implicit <TT>access to * by * none</TT>.</P> 3690<P>Sometimes it is useful to permit a particular DN to add or remove itself from an attribute. For example, if you would like to create a group and allow people to add and remove only their own DN from the member attribute, you could accomplish it with an access directive like this:</P> 3691<PRE> 3692 olcAccess: to attrs=member,entry 3693 by dnattr=member selfwrite 3694</PRE> 3695<P>The dnattr <TT><who></TT> selector says that the access applies to entries listed in the <TT>member</TT> attribute. The <TT>selfwrite</TT> access selector says that such members can only add or delete their own DN from the attribute, not other values. The addition of the entry attribute is required because access to the entry is required to access any of the entry's attributes.</P> 3696<H3><A NAME="Access Control Ordering">8.3.6. Access Control Ordering</A></H3> 3697<P>Since the ordering of <TT>olcAccess</TT> directives is essential to their proper evaluation, but LDAP attributes normally do not preserve the ordering of their values, OpenLDAP uses a custom schema extension to maintain a fixed ordering of these values. This ordering is maintained by prepending a <TT>"{X}"</TT> numeric index to each value, similarly to the approach used for ordering the configuration entries. These index tags are maintained automatically by slapd and do not need to be specified when originally defining the values. For example, when you create the settings</P> 3698<PRE> 3699 olcAccess: to attrs=member,entry 3700 by dnattr=member selfwrite 3701 olcAccess: to dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" 3702 by * search 3703 olcAccess: to dn.children="dc=com" 3704 by * read 3705</PRE> 3706<P>when you read them back using slapcat or ldapsearch they will contain</P> 3707<PRE> 3708 olcAccess: {0}to attrs=member,entry 3709 by dnattr=member selfwrite 3710 olcAccess: {1}to dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" 3711 by * search 3712 olcAccess: {2}to dn.children="dc=com" 3713 by * read 3714</PRE> 3715<P>The numeric index may be used to specify a particular value to change when using ldapmodify to edit the access rules. This index can be used instead of (or in addition to) the actual access value. Using this numeric index is very helpful when multiple access rules are being managed.</P> 3716<P>For example, if we needed to change the second rule above to grant write access instead of search, we could try this LDIF:</P> 3717<PRE> 3718 changetype: modify 3719 delete: olcAccess 3720 olcAccess: to dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" by * search 3721 - 3722 add: olcAccess 3723 olcAccess: to dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" by * write 3724 - 3725</PRE> 3726<P>But this example <B>will not</B> guarantee that the existing values remain in their original order, so it will most likely yield a broken security configuration. Instead, the numeric index should be used:</P> 3727<PRE> 3728 changetype: modify 3729 delete: olcAccess 3730 olcAccess: {1} 3731 - 3732 add: olcAccess 3733 olcAccess: {1}to dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" by * write 3734 - 3735</PRE> 3736<P>This example deletes whatever rule is in value #1 of the <TT>olcAccess</TT> attribute (regardless of its value) and adds a new value that is explicitly inserted as value #1. The result will be</P> 3737<PRE> 3738 olcAccess: {0}to attrs=member,entry 3739 by dnattr=member selfwrite 3740 olcAccess: {1}to dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" 3741 by * write 3742 olcAccess: {2}to dn.children="dc=com" 3743 by * read 3744</PRE> 3745<P>which is exactly what was intended.</P> 3746<H2><A NAME="Access Control Common Examples">8.4. Access Control Common Examples</A></H2> 3747<H3><A NAME="Basic ACLs">8.4.1. Basic ACLs</A></H3> 3748<P>Generally one should start with some basic ACLs such as:</P> 3749<PRE> 3750 access to attr=userPassword 3751 by self =xw 3752 by anonymous auth 3753 by * none 3754 3755 3756 access to * 3757 by self write 3758 by users read 3759 by * none 3760</PRE> 3761<P>The first ACL allows users to update (but not read) their passwords, anonymous users to authenticate against this attribute, and (implicitly) denying all access to others.</P> 3762<P>The second ACL allows users full access to their entry, authenticated users read access to anything, and (implicitly) denying all access to others (in this case, anonymous users).</P> 3763<H3><A NAME="Matching Anonymous and Authenticated users">8.4.2. Matching Anonymous and Authenticated users</A></H3> 3764<P>An anonymous user has a empty DN. While the <EM>dn.exact=""</EM> or <EM>dn.regex="^$"</EM> could be used, <EM>slapd</EM>(8)) offers an anonymous shorthand which should be used instead.</P> 3765<PRE> 3766 access to * 3767 by anonymous none 3768 by * read 3769</PRE> 3770<P>denies all access to anonymous users while granting others read.</P> 3771<P>Authenticated users have a subject DN. While <EM>dn.regex=".+"</EM> will match any authenticated user, OpenLDAP provides the users short hand which should be used instead.</P> 3772<PRE> 3773 access to * 3774 by users read 3775 by * none 3776</PRE> 3777<P>This ACL grants read permissions to authenticated users while denying others (i.e.: anonymous users).</P> 3778<H3><A NAME="Controlling rootdn access">8.4.3. Controlling rootdn access</A></H3> 3779<P>You could specify the <EM>rootdn</EM> in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) or {[slapd.d}} without specifying a <EM>rootpw</EM>. Then you have to add an actual directory entry with the same dn, e.g.:</P> 3780<PRE> 3781 dn: cn=Manager,o=MyOrganization 3782 cn: Manager 3783 sn: Manager 3784 objectClass: person 3785 objectClass: top 3786 userPassword: {SSHA}someSSHAdata 3787</PRE> 3788<P>Then binding as the <EM>rootdn</EM> will require a regular bind to that DN, which in turn requires auth access to that entry's DN and <EM>userPassword</EM>, and this can be restricted via ACLs. E.g.:</P> 3789<PRE> 3790 access to dn.base="cn=Manager,o=MyOrganization" 3791 by peername.regex=127\.0\.0\.1 auth 3792 by peername.regex=192\.168\.0\..* auth 3793 by users none 3794 by * none 3795</PRE> 3796<P>The ACLs above will only allow binding using rootdn from localhost and 192.168.0.0/24.</P> 3797<H3><A NAME="Managing access with Groups">8.4.4. Managing access with Groups</A></H3> 3798<P>There are a few ways to do this. One approach is illustrated here. Consider the following DIT layout:</P> 3799<PRE> 3800 +-dc=example,dc=com 3801 +---cn=administrators,dc=example,dc=com 3802 +---cn=fred blogs,dc=example,dc=com 3803</PRE> 3804<P>and the following group object (in LDIF format):</P> 3805<PRE> 3806 dn: cn=administrators,dc=example,dc=com 3807 cn: administrators of this region 3808 objectclass: groupOfNames (important for the group acl feature) 3809 member: cn=fred blogs,dc=example,dc=com 3810 member: cn=somebody else,dc=example,dc=com 3811</PRE> 3812<P>One can then grant access to the members of this this group by adding appropriate <EM>by group</EM> clause to an access directive in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5). For instance,</P> 3813<PRE> 3814 access to dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" 3815 by self write 3816 by group.exact="cn=Administrators,dc=example,dc=com" write 3817 by * auth 3818</PRE> 3819<P>Like by {[dn}} clauses, one can also use <EM>expand</EM> to expand the group name based upon the regular expression matching of the target, that is, the to <EM>dn.regex</EM>). For instance,</P> 3820<PRE> 3821 access to dn.regex="(.+,)?ou=People,(dc=[^,]+,dc=[^,]+)$" 3822 attrs=children,entry,uid 3823 by group.expand="cn=Managers,$2" write 3824 by users read 3825 by * auth 3826</PRE> 3827<P>The above illustration assumed that the group members are to be found in the <EM>member</EM> attribute type of the <EM>groupOfNames</EM> object class. If you need to use a different group object and/or a different attribute type then use the following <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) (abbreviated) syntax:</P> 3828<PRE> 3829 access to <what> 3830 by group/<objectclass>/<attributename>=<DN> <access> 3831</PRE> 3832<P>For example:</P> 3833<PRE> 3834 access to * 3835 by group/organizationalRole/roleOccupant="cn=Administrator,dc=example,dc=com" write 3836</PRE> 3837<P>In this case, we have an ObjectClass <EM>organizationalRole</EM> which contains the administrator DN's in the <EM>roleOccupant</EM> attribute. For instance:</P> 3838<PRE> 3839 dn: cn=Administrator,dc=example,dc=com 3840 cn: Administrator 3841 objectclass: organizationalRole 3842 roleOccupant: cn=Jane Doe,dc=example,dc=com 3843</PRE> 3844<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 3845<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>the specified member attribute type MUST be of DN or <EM>NameAndOptionalUID</EM> syntax, and the specified object class SHOULD allow the attribute type. 3846<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 3847<P>Dynamic Groups are also supported in Access Control. Please see <EM>slapo-dynlist</EM>(5) and the <A HREF="#Dynamic Lists">Dynamic Lists</A> overlay section.</P> 3848<H3><A NAME="Granting access to a subset of attributes">8.4.5. Granting access to a subset of attributes</A></H3> 3849<P>You can grant access to a set of attributes by specifying a list of attribute names in the ACL <EM>to</EM> clause. To be useful, you also need to grant access to the <EM>entry</EM> itself. Also note how <EM>children</EM> controls the ability to add, delete, and rename entries.</P> 3850<PRE> 3851 # mail: self may write, authenticated users may read 3852 access to attrs=mail 3853 by self write 3854 by users read 3855 by * none 3856 3857 # cn, sn: self my write, all may read 3858 access to attrs=cn,sn 3859 by self write 3860 by * read 3861 3862 # immediate children: only self can add/delete entries under this entry 3863 access to attrs=children 3864 by self write 3865 3866 # entry itself: self may write, all may read 3867 access to attrs=entry 3868 by self write 3869 by * read 3870 3871 # other attributes: self may write, others have no access 3872 access to * 3873 by self write 3874 by * none 3875</PRE> 3876<P>ObjectClass names may also be specified in this list, which will affect all the attributes that are required and/or allowed by that <EM>objectClass</EM>. Actually, names in <EM>attrlist</EM> that are prefixed by <EM>@</EM> are directly treated as objectClass names. A name prefixed by <EM>!</EM> is also treated as an objectClass, but in this case the access rule affects the attributes that are not required nor allowed by that <EM>objectClass</EM>.</P> 3877<H3><A NAME="Allowing a user write to all entries below theirs">8.4.6. Allowing a user write to all entries below theirs</A></H3> 3878<P>For a setup where a user can write to its own record and to all of its children:</P> 3879<PRE> 3880 access to dn.regex="(.+,)?(uid=[^,]+,o=Company)$" 3881 by dn.exact,expand="$2" write 3882 by anonymous auth 3883</PRE> 3884<P>(Add more examples for above)</P> 3885<H3><A NAME="Allowing entry creation">8.4.7. Allowing entry creation</A></H3> 3886<P>Let's say, you have it like this:</P> 3887<PRE> 3888 o=<basedn> 3889 ou=domains 3890 associatedDomain=<somedomain> 3891 ou=users 3892 uid=<someuserid> 3893 uid=<someotheruserid> 3894 ou=addressbooks 3895 uid=<someuserid> 3896 cn=<someone> 3897 cn=<someoneelse> 3898</PRE> 3899<P>and, for another domain <someotherdomain>:</P> 3900<PRE> 3901 o=<basedn> 3902 ou=domains 3903 associatedDomain=<someotherdomain> 3904 ou=users 3905 uid=<someuserid> 3906 uid=<someotheruserid> 3907 ou=addressbooks 3908 uid=<someotheruserid> 3909 cn=<someone> 3910 cn=<someoneelse> 3911</PRE> 3912<P>then, if you wanted user <EM>uid=<someuserid></EM> to <B>ONLY</B> create an entry for its own thing, you could write an ACL like this:</P> 3913<PRE> 3914 # this rule lets users of "associatedDomain=<matcheddomain>" 3915 # write under "ou=addressbook,associatedDomain=<matcheddomain>,ou=domains,o=<basedn>", 3916 # i.e. a user can write ANY entry below its domain's address book; 3917 # this permission is necessary, but not sufficient, the next 3918 # will restrict this permission further 3919 3920 3921 access to dn.regex="^ou=addressbook,associatedDomain=([^,]+),ou=domains,o=<basedn>$" attrs=children 3922 by dn.regex="^uid=([^,]+),ou=users,associatedDomain=$1,ou=domains,o=<basedn>$$" write 3923 by * none 3924 3925 3926 # Note that above the "by" clause needs a "regex" style to make sure 3927 # it expands to a DN that starts with a "uid=<someuserid>" pattern 3928 # while substituting the associatedDomain submatch from the "what" clause. 3929 3930 3931 # This rule lets a user with "uid=<matcheduid>" of "<associatedDomain=matcheddomain>" 3932 # write (i.e. add, modify, delete) the entry whose DN is exactly 3933 # "uid=<matcheduid>,ou=addressbook,associatedDomain=<matcheddomain>,ou=domains,o=<basedn>" 3934 # and ANY entry as subtree of it 3935 3936 3937 access to dn.regex="^(.+,)?uid=([^,]+),ou=addressbook,associatedDomain=([^,]+),ou=domains,o=<basedn>$" 3938 by dn.exact,expand="uid=$2,ou=users,associatedDomain=$3,ou=domains,o=<basedn>" write 3939 by * none 3940 3941 3942 # Note that above the "by" clause uses the "exact" style with the "expand" 3943 # modifier because now the whole pattern can be rebuilt by means of the 3944 # submatches from the "what" clause, so a "regex" compilation and evaluation 3945 # is no longer required. 3946</PRE> 3947<H3><A NAME="Tips for using regular expressions in Access Control">8.4.8. Tips for using regular expressions in Access Control</A></H3> 3948<P>Always use <EM>dn.regex=<pattern></EM> when you intend to use regular expression matching. <EM>dn=<pattern></EM> alone defaults to <EM>dn.exact<pattern></EM>.</P> 3949<P>Use <EM>(.+)</EM> instead of <EM>(.*)</EM> when you want at least one char to be matched. <EM>(.*)</EM> matches the empty string as well.</P> 3950<P>Don't use regular expressions for matches that can be done otherwise in a safer and cheaper manner. Examples:</P> 3951<PRE> 3952 dn.regex=".*dc=example,dc=com" 3953</PRE> 3954<P>is unsafe and expensive:</P> 3955<UL> 3956<LI>unsafe because any string containing <EM>dc=example,dc=com </EM>will match, not only those that end with the desired pattern; use <EM>.*dc=example,dc=com$</EM> instead. 3957<LI>unsafe also because it would allow any <EM>attributeType</EM> ending with <EM>dc</EM> as naming attribute for the first RDN in the string, e.g. a custom attributeType <EM>mydc</EM> would match as well. If you really need a regular expression that allows just <EM>dc=example,dc=com</EM> or any of its subtrees, use <EM>^(.+,)?dc=example,dc=com$</EM>, which means: anything to the left of dc=..., if any (the question mark after the pattern within brackets), must end with a comma; 3958<LI>expensive because if you don't need submatches, you could use scoping styles, e.g.</UL> 3959<PRE> 3960 dn.subtree="dc=example,dc=com" 3961</PRE> 3962<P>to include <EM>dc=example,dc=com</EM> in the matching patterns,</P> 3963<PRE> 3964 dn.children="dc=example,dc=com" 3965</PRE> 3966<P>to exclude <EM>dc=example,dc=com</EM> from the matching patterns, or</P> 3967<PRE> 3968 dn.onelevel="dc=example,dc=com" 3969</PRE> 3970<P>to allow exactly one sublevel matches only.</P> 3971<P>Always use <EM>^</EM> and <EM>$</EM> in regexes, whenever appropriate, because <EM>ou=(.+),ou=(.+),ou=addressbooks,o=basedn</EM> will match <EM>something=bla,ou=xxx,ou=yyy,ou=addressbooks,o=basedn,ou=addressbooks,o=basedn,dc=some,dc=org</EM></P> 3972<P>Always use <EM>([^,]+)</EM> to indicate exactly one RDN, because <EM>(.+)</EM> can include any number of RDNs; e.g. <EM>ou=(.+),dc=example,dc=com</EM> will match <EM>ou=My,o=Org,dc=example,dc=com</EM>, which might not be what you want.</P> 3973<P>Never add the rootdn to the by clauses. ACLs are not even processed for operations performed with rootdn identity (otherwise there would be no reason to define a rootdn at all).</P> 3974<P>Use shorthands. The user directive matches authenticated users and the anonymous directive matches anonymous users.</P> 3975<P>Don't use the <EM>dn.regex</EM> form for <by> clauses if all you need is scoping and/or substring replacement; use scoping styles (e.g. <EM>exact</EM>, <EM>onelevel</EM>, <EM>children</EM> or <EM>subtree</EM>) and the style modifier expand to cause substring expansion.</P> 3976<P>For instance,</P> 3977<PRE> 3978 access to dn.regex=".+,dc=([^,]+),dc=([^,]+)$" 3979 by dn.regex="^[^,],ou=Admin,dc=$1,dc=$2$$" write 3980</PRE> 3981<P>although correct, can be safely and efficiently replaced by</P> 3982<PRE> 3983 access to dn.regex=".+,(dc=[^,]+,dc=[^,]+)$" 3984 by dn.onelevel,expand="ou=Admin,$1" write 3985</PRE> 3986<P>where the regex in the <EM><what></EM> clause is more compact, and the one in the <EM><by></EM> clause is replaced by a much more efficient scoping style of onelevel with substring expansion.</P> 3987<H3><A NAME="Granting and Denying access based on security strength factors (ssf)">8.4.9. Granting and Denying access based on security strength factors (ssf)</A></H3> 3988<P>You can restrict access based on the security strength factor (SSF)</P> 3989<PRE> 3990 access to dn="cn=example,cn=edu" 3991 by * ssf=256 read 3992</PRE> 3993<P>0 (zero) implies no protection, 1 implies integrity protection only, 56 DES or other weak ciphers, 112 triple DES and other strong ciphers, 128 RC4, Blowfish and other modern strong ciphers.</P> 3994<P>Other possibilities:</P> 3995<PRE> 3996 transport_ssf=<n> 3997 tls_ssf=<n> 3998 sasl_ssf=<n> 3999</PRE> 4000<P>256 is recommended.</P> 4001<P>See <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) for information on <EM>ssf</EM>.</P> 4002<H3><A NAME="When things aren\'t working as expected">8.4.10. When things aren't working as expected</A></H3> 4003<P>Consider this example:</P> 4004<PRE> 4005 access to * 4006 by anonymous auth 4007 4008 access to * 4009 by self write 4010 4011 access to * 4012 by users read 4013</PRE> 4014<P>You may think this will allow any user to login, to read everything and change his own data if he is logged in. But in this example only the login works and an ldapsearch returns no data. The Problem is that SLAPD goes through its access config line by line and stops as soon as it finds a match in the part of the access rule.(here: <EM>to *</EM>)</P> 4015<P>To get what we wanted the file has to read:</P> 4016<PRE> 4017 access to * 4018 by anonymous auth 4019 by self write 4020 by users read 4021</PRE> 4022<P>The general rule is: "special access rules first, generic access rules last"</P> 4023<P>See also <EM>slapd.access</EM>(8), loglevel 128 and <EM>slapacl</EM>(8) for debugging information.</P> 4024<H2><A NAME="Sets - Granting rights based on relationships">8.5. Sets - Granting rights based on relationships</A></H2> 4025<P>Sets are best illustrated via examples. The following sections will present a few set ACL examples in order to facilitate their understanding.</P> 4026<P>(Sets in Access Controls FAQ Entry: <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/1133.html">http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/1133.html</A>)</P> 4027<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 4028<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Sets are considered experimental. 4029<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 4030<H3><A NAME="Groups of Groups">8.5.1. Groups of Groups</A></H3> 4031<P>The OpenLDAP ACL for groups doesn't expand groups within groups, which are groups that have another group as a member. For example:</P> 4032<PRE> 4033 dn: cn=sudoadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com 4034 cn: sudoadm 4035 objectClass: groupOfNames 4036 member: uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com 4037 member: cn=accountadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com 4038 4039 dn: cn=accountadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com 4040 cn: accountadm 4041 objectClass: groupOfNames 4042 member: uid=mary,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com 4043</PRE> 4044<P>If we use standard group ACLs with the above entries and allow members of the <TT>sudoadm</TT> group to write somewhere, <TT>mary</TT> won't be included:</P> 4045<PRE> 4046 access to dn.subtree="ou=sudoers,dc=example,dc=com" 4047 by group.exact="cn=sudoadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com" write 4048 by * read 4049</PRE> 4050<P>With sets we can make the ACL be recursive and consider group within groups. So for each member that is a group, it is further expanded:</P> 4051<PRE> 4052 access to dn.subtree="ou=sudoers,dc=example,dc=com" 4053 by set="[cn=sudoadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com]/member* & user" write 4054 by * read 4055</PRE> 4056<P>This set ACL means: take the <TT>cn=sudoadm</TT> DN, check its <TT>member</TT> attribute(s) (where the "<TT>*</TT>" means recursively) and intersect the result with the authenticated user's DN. If the result is non-empty, the ACL is considered a match and write access is granted.</P> 4057<P>The following drawing explains how this set is built:</P> 4058<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="set-recursivegroup.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 4059<P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Populating a recursive group set</P> 4060<P>First we get the <TT>uid=john</TT> DN. This entry doesn't have a <TT>member</TT> attribute, so the expansion stops here. Now we get to <TT>cn=accountadm</TT>. This one does have a <TT>member</TT> attribute, which is <TT>uid=mary</TT>. The <TT>uid=mary</TT> entry, however, doesn't have member, so we stop here again. The end comparison is:</P> 4061<PRE> 4062 {"uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com","uid=mary,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com"} & user 4063</PRE> 4064<P>If the authenticated user's DN is any one of those two, write access is granted. So this set will include <TT>mary</TT> in the <TT>sudoadm</TT> group and she will be allowed the write access.</P> 4065<H3><A NAME="Group ACLs without DN syntax">8.5.2. Group ACLs without DN syntax</A></H3> 4066<P>The traditional group ACLs, and even the previous example about recursive groups, require that the members are specified as DNs instead of just usernames.</P> 4067<P>With sets, however, it's also possible to use simple names in group ACLs, as this example will show.</P> 4068<P>Let's say we want to allow members of the <TT>sudoadm</TT> group to write to the <TT>ou=suders</TT> branch of our tree. But our group definition now is using <TT>memberUid</TT> for the group members:</P> 4069<PRE> 4070 dn: cn=sudoadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com 4071 cn: sudoadm 4072 objectClass: posixGroup 4073 gidNumber: 1000 4074 memberUid: john 4075</PRE> 4076<P>With this type of group, we can't use group ACLs. But with a set ACL we can grant the desired access:</P> 4077<PRE> 4078 access to dn.subtree="ou=sudoers,dc=example,dc=com" 4079 by set="[cn=sudoadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com]/memberUid & user/uid" write 4080 by * read 4081</PRE> 4082<P>We use a simple intersection where we compare the <TT>uid</TT> attribute of the connecting (and authenticated) user with the <TT>memberUid</TT> attributes of the group. If they match, the intersection is non-empty and the ACL will grant write access.</P> 4083<P>This drawing illustrates this set when the connecting user is authenticated as <TT>uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com</TT>:</P> 4084<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="set-memberUid.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 4085<P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Sets with <TT>memberUid</TT></P> 4086<P>In this case, it's a match. If it were <TT>mary</TT> authenticating, however, she would be denied write access to <TT>ou=sudoers</TT> because her <TT>uid</TT> attribute is not listed in the group's <TT>memberUid</TT>.</P> 4087<H3><A NAME="Following references">8.5.3. Following references</A></H3> 4088<P>We will now show a quite powerful example of what can be done with sets. This example tends to make OpenLDAP administrators smile after they have understood it and its implications.</P> 4089<P>Let's start with an user entry:</P> 4090<PRE> 4091 dn: uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com 4092 uid: john 4093 objectClass: inetOrgPerson 4094 givenName: John 4095 sn: Smith 4096 cn: john 4097 manager: uid=mary,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com 4098</PRE> 4099<P>Writing an ACL to allow the manager to update some attributes is quite simple using sets:</P> 4100<PRE> 4101 access to dn.exact="uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com" 4102 attrs=carLicense,homePhone,mobile,pager,telephoneNumber 4103 by self write 4104 by set="this/manager & user" write 4105 by * read 4106</PRE> 4107<P>In that set, <TT>this</TT> expands to the entry being accessed, so that <TT>this/manager</TT> expands to <TT>uid=mary,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com</TT> when john's entry is accessed. If the manager herself is accessing John's entry, the ACL will match and write access to those attributes will be granted.</P> 4108<P>So far, this same behavior can be obtained with the <TT>dnattr</TT> keyword. With sets, however, we can further enhance this ACL. Let's say we want to allow the secretary of the manager to also update these attributes. This is how we do it:</P> 4109<PRE> 4110 access to dn.exact="uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com" 4111 attrs=carLicense,homePhone,mobile,pager,telephoneNumber 4112 by self write 4113 by set="this/manager & user" write 4114 by set="this/manager/secretary & user" write 4115 by * read 4116</PRE> 4117<P>Now we need a picture to help explain what is happening here (entries shortened for clarity):</P> 4118<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="set-following-references.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 4119<P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Sets jumping through entries</P> 4120<P>In this example, Jane is the secretary of Mary, which is the manager of John. This whole relationship is defined with the <TT>manager</TT> and <TT>secretary</TT> attributes, which are both of the distinguishedName syntax (i.e., full DNs). So, when the <TT>uid=john</TT> entry is being accessed, the <TT>this/manager/secretary</TT> set becomes <TT>{"uid=jane,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com"</TT>} (follow the references in the picture):</P> 4121<PRE> 4122 this = [uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com] 4123 this/manager = \ 4124 [uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com]/manager = uid=mary,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com 4125 this/manager/secretary = \ 4126 [uid=mary,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com]/secretary = uid=jane,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com 4127</PRE> 4128<P>The end result is that when Jane accesses John's entry, she will be granted write access to the specified attributes. Better yet, this will happen to any entry she accesses which has Mary as the manager.</P> 4129<P>This is all cool and nice, but perhaps gives to much power to secretaries. Maybe we need to further restrict it. For example, let's only allow executive secretaries to have this power:</P> 4130<PRE> 4131 access to dn.exact="uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com" 4132 attrs=carLicense,homePhone,mobile,pager,telephoneNumber 4133 by self write 4134 by set="this/manager & user" write 4135 by set="this/manager/secretary & 4136 [cn=executive,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com]/member* & 4137 user" write 4138 by * read 4139</PRE> 4140<P>It's almost the same ACL as before, but we now also require that the connecting user be a member of the (possibly nested) <TT>cn=executive</TT> group.</P> 4141<P></P> 4142<HR> 4143<H1><A NAME="Limits">9. Limits</A></H1> 4144<H2><A NAME="Introduction">9.1. Introduction</A></H2> 4145<P>It is usually desirable to limit the server resources that can be consumed by each LDAP client. OpenLDAP provides two sets of limits: a size limit, which can restrict the <EM>number</EM> of entries that a client can retrieve in a single operation, and a time limit which restricts the length of time that an operation may continue. Both types of limit can be given different values depending on who initiated the operation.</P> 4146<H2><A NAME="Soft and Hard limits">9.2. Soft and Hard limits</A></H2> 4147<P>The server administrator can specify both <EM>soft limits</EM> and <EM>hard limits</EM>. Soft limits can be thought of as being the default limit value. Hard limits cannot be exceeded by ordinary LDAP users.</P> 4148<P>LDAP clients can specify their own size and time limits when issuing search operations. This feature has been present since the earliest version of X.500.</P> 4149<P>If the client specifies a limit then the lower of the requested value and the <EM>hard limit</EM> will become the limit for the operation.</P> 4150<P>If the client does not specify a limit then the server applies the <EM>soft limit</EM>.</P> 4151<P>Soft and Hard limits are often referred to together as <EM>administrative limits</EM>. Thus, if an LDAP client requests a search that would return more results than the limits allow it will get an <EM>adminLimitExceeded</EM> error. Note that the server will usually return some results even if the limit has been exceeded: this feature is useful to clients that just want to check for the existence of some entries without needing to see them all.</P> 4152<P>The <EM>rootdn</EM> is not subject to any limits.</P> 4153<H2><A NAME="Global Limits">9.3. Global Limits</A></H2> 4154<P>Limits specified in the global part of the server configuration act as defaults which are used if no database has more specific limits set.</P> 4155<P>In a <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) configuration the keywords are <TT>sizelimit</TT> and <TT>timelimit</TT>. When using the <EM>slapd config</EM> backend, the corresponding attributes are <TT>olcSizeLimit</TT> and <TT>olcTimeLimit</TT>. The syntax of these values are the same in both cases.</P> 4156<P>The simple form sets both soft and hard limits to the same value:</P> 4157<PRE> 4158 sizelimit {<integer>|unlimited} 4159 timelimit {<integer>|unlimited} 4160</PRE> 4161<P>The default sizelimit is 500 entries and the default timelimit is 3600 seconds.</P> 4162<P>An extended form allows soft and hard limits to be set separately:</P> 4163<PRE> 4164 sizelimit size[.{soft|hard|unchecked}]=<integer> [...] 4165 timelimit time[.{soft|hard}]=<integer> [...] 4166</PRE> 4167<P>Thus, to set a soft sizelimit of 10 entries and a hard limit of 75 entries:</P> 4168<PRE> 4169 sizelimit size.soft=10 size.hard=75 4170</PRE> 4171<P>The <EM>unchecked</EM> keyword sets a limit on how many entries the server will examine once it has created an initial set of candidate results by using indices. This can be very important in a large directory, as a search that cannot be satisfied from an index might cause the server to examine millions of entries, therefore always make sure the correct indexes are configured.</P> 4172<H2><A NAME="Per-Database Limits">9.4. Per-Database Limits</A></H2> 4173<P>Each database can have its own set of limits that override the global ones. The syntax is more flexible, and it allows different limits to be applied to different entities. Note that an <EM>entity</EM> is different from an <EM>entry</EM>: the term <EM>entity</EM> is used here to indicate the ID of the person or process that has initiated the LDAP operation.</P> 4174<P>In a <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) configuration the keyword is <TT>limits</TT>. When using the <EM>slapd config</EM> backend, the corresponding attribute is <TT>olcLimits</TT>. The syntax of the values is the same in both cases.</P> 4175<PRE> 4176 limits <who> <limit> [<limit> [...]] 4177</PRE> 4178<P>The <EM>limits</EM> clause can be specified multiple times to apply different limits to different initiators. The server examines each clause in turn until it finds one that matches the ID that requested the operation. If no match is found, the global limits will be used.</P> 4179<H3><A NAME="Specify who the limits apply to">9.4.1. Specify who the limits apply to</A></H3> 4180<P>The <TT><who></TT> part of the <EM>limits</EM> clause can take any of these values:</P> 4181<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 4182<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table ZZZ.ZZZ: Entity Specifiers</CAPTION> 4183<TR CLASS="heading"> 4184<TD> 4185<STRONG>Specifier</STRONG> 4186</TD> 4187<TD> 4188<STRONG>Entities</STRONG> 4189</TD> 4190</TR> 4191<TR> 4192<TD> 4193<TT>*</TT> 4194</TD> 4195<TD> 4196All, including anonymous and authenticated users 4197</TD> 4198</TR> 4199<TR> 4200<TD> 4201<TT>anonymous</TT> 4202</TD> 4203<TD> 4204Anonymous (non-authenticated) users 4205</TD> 4206</TR> 4207<TR> 4208<TD> 4209<TT>users</TT> 4210</TD> 4211<TD> 4212Authenticated users 4213</TD> 4214</TR> 4215<TR> 4216<TD> 4217<TT>self</TT> 4218</TD> 4219<TD> 4220User associated with target entry 4221</TD> 4222</TR> 4223<TR> 4224<TD> 4225<TT>dn[.<basic-style>]=<regex></TT> 4226</TD> 4227<TD> 4228Users matching a regular expression 4229</TD> 4230</TR> 4231<TR> 4232<TD> 4233<TT>dn.<scope-style>=<DN></TT> 4234</TD> 4235<TD> 4236Users within scope of a DN 4237</TD> 4238</TR> 4239<TR> 4240<TD> 4241<TT>group[/oc[/at]]=<pattern></TT> 4242</TD> 4243<TD> 4244Members of a group 4245</TD> 4246</TR> 4247</TABLE> 4248 4249<P>The rules for specifying <TT><who></TT> are the same as those used in access-control rules.</P> 4250<H3><A NAME="Specify time limits">9.4.2. Specify time limits</A></H3> 4251<P>The syntax for time limits is</P> 4252<PRE> 4253 time[.{soft|hard}]=<integer> 4254</PRE> 4255<P>where integer is the number of seconds slapd will spend answering a search request.</P> 4256<P>If neither <EM>soft</EM> nor <EM>hard</EM> is specified, the value is used for both, e.g.:</P> 4257<PRE> 4258 limits anonymous time=27 4259</PRE> 4260<P>The value <EM>unlimited</EM> may be used to remove the hard time limit entirely, e.g.:</P> 4261<PRE> 4262 limits dn.exact="cn=anyuser,dc=example,dc=org" time.hard=unlimited 4263</PRE> 4264<H3><A NAME="Specifying size limits">9.4.3. Specifying size limits</A></H3> 4265<P>The syntax for size limit is</P> 4266<PRE> 4267 size[.{soft|hard|unchecked}]=<integer> 4268</PRE> 4269<P>where <TT><integer></TT> is the maximum number of entries slapd will return when answering a search request.</P> 4270<P>Soft, hard, and "unchecked" limits are available, with the same meanings described for the global limits configuration above.</P> 4271<H3><A NAME="Size limits and Paged Results">9.4.4. Size limits and Paged Results</A></H3> 4272<P>If the LDAP client adds the <EM>pagedResultsControl</EM> to the search operation, the hard size limit is used by default, because the request for a specific page size is considered an explicit request for a limitation on the number of entries to be returned. However, the size limit applies to the total count of entries returned within the search, and not to a single page.</P> 4273<P>Additional size limits may be enforced for paged searches.</P> 4274<P>The <TT>size.pr</TT> limit controls the maximum page size:</P> 4275<PRE> 4276 size.pr={<integer>|noEstimate|unlimited} 4277</PRE> 4278<P><TT><integer></TT> is the maximum page size if no explicit size is set. <TT>noEstimate</TT> has no effect in the current implementation as the server does not return an estimate of the result size anyway. <TT>unlimited</TT> indicates that no limit is applied to the maximum page size.</P> 4279<P>The <TT>size.prtotal</TT> limit controls the total number of entries that can be returned by a paged search. By default the limit is the same as the normal <TT>size.hard</TT> limit.</P> 4280<PRE> 4281 size.prtotal={<integer>|unlimited|disabled} 4282</PRE> 4283<P><TT>unlimited</TT> removes the limit on the number of entries that can be returned by a paged search. <TT>disabled</TT> can be used to selectively disable paged result searches.</P> 4284<H2><A NAME="Example Limit Configurations">9.5. Example Limit Configurations</A></H2> 4285<H3><A NAME="Simple Global Limits">9.5.1. Simple Global Limits</A></H3> 4286<P>This simple global configuration fragment applies size and time limits to all searches by all users except <EM>rootdn</EM>. It limits searches to 50 results and sets an overall time limit of 10 seconds.</P> 4287<PRE> 4288 sizelimit 50 4289 timelimit 10 4290</PRE> 4291<H3><A NAME="Global Hard and Soft Limits">9.5.2. Global Hard and Soft Limits</A></H3> 4292<P>It is sometimes useful to limit the size of result sets but to allow clients to request a higher limit where needed. This can be achieved by setting separate hard and soft limits.</P> 4293<PRE> 4294 sizelimit size.soft=5 size.hard=100 4295</PRE> 4296<P>To prevent clients from doing very inefficient non-indexed searches, add the <EM>unchecked</EM> limit:</P> 4297<PRE> 4298 sizelimit size.soft=5 size.hard=100 size.unchecked=100 4299</PRE> 4300<H3><A NAME="Giving specific users larger limits">9.5.3. Giving specific users larger limits</A></H3> 4301<P>Having set appropriate default limits in the global configuration, you may want to give certain users the ability to retrieve larger result sets. Here is a way to do that in the per-database configuration:</P> 4302<PRE> 4303 limits dn.exact="cn=anyuser,dc=example,dc=org" size=100000 4304 limits dn.exact="cn=personnel,dc=example,dc=org" size=100000 4305 limits dn.exact="cn=dirsync,dc=example,dc=org" size=100000 4306</PRE> 4307<P>It is generally best to avoid mentioning specific users in the server configuration. A better way is to give the higher limits to a group:</P> 4308<PRE> 4309 limits group/groupOfNames/member="cn=bigwigs,dc=example,dc=org" size=100000 4310</PRE> 4311<H3><A NAME="Limiting who can do paged searches">9.5.4. Limiting who can do paged searches</A></H3> 4312<P>It may be required that certain applications need very large result sets that they retrieve using paged searches, but that you do not want ordinary LDAP users to use the pagedResults control. The <EM>pr</EM> and <EM>prtotal</EM> limits can help:</P> 4313<PRE> 4314 limits group/groupOfNames/member="cn=dirsync,dc=example,dc=org" size.prtotal=unlimited 4315 limits users size.soft=5 size.hard=100 size.prtotal=disabled 4316 limits anonymous size.soft=2 size.hard=5 size.prtotal=disabled 4317</PRE> 4318<H2><A NAME="Further Information">9.6. Further Information</A></H2> 4319<P>For further information please see <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5), <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) and <EM>slapd.access</EM>(5)</P> 4320<P></P> 4321<HR> 4322<H1><A NAME="Database Creation and Maintenance Tools">10. Database Creation and Maintenance Tools</A></H1> 4323<P>This section tells you how to create a slapd database from scratch, and how to do trouble shooting if you run into problems. There are two ways to create a database. First, you can create the database on-line using <TERM>LDAP</TERM>. With this method, you simply start up slapd and add entries using the LDAP client of your choice. This method is fine for relatively small databases (a few hundred or thousand entries, depending on your requirements). This method works for database types which support updates.</P> 4324<P>The second method of database creation is to do it off-line using special utilities provided with <EM>slapd</EM>(8). This method is best if you have many thousands of entries to create, which would take an unacceptably long time using the LDAP method, or if you want to ensure the database is not accessed while it is being created. Note that not all database types support these utilities.</P> 4325<H2><A NAME="Creating a database over LDAP">10.1. Creating a database over LDAP</A></H2> 4326<P>With this method, you use the LDAP client of your choice (e.g., the <EM>ldapadd</EM>(1)) to add entries, just like you would once the database is created. You should be sure to set the following options in the configuration file before starting <EM>slapd</EM>(8).</P> 4327<PRE> 4328 suffix <dn> 4329</PRE> 4330<P>As described in the <A HREF="#General Database Directives">General Database Directives</A> section, this option defines which entries are to be held by this database. You should set this to the DN of the root of the subtree you are trying to create. For example:</P> 4331<PRE> 4332 suffix "dc=example,dc=com" 4333</PRE> 4334<P>You should be sure to specify a directory where the index files should be created:</P> 4335<PRE> 4336 directory <directory> 4337</PRE> 4338<P>For example:</P> 4339<PRE> 4340 directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data 4341</PRE> 4342<P>You need to create this directory with appropriate permissions such that slapd can write to it.</P> 4343<P>You need to configure slapd so that you can connect to it as a directory user with permission to add entries. You can configure the directory to support a special <EM>super-user</EM> or <EM>root</EM> user just for this purpose. This is done through the following two options in the database definition:</P> 4344<PRE> 4345 rootdn <dn> 4346 rootpw <passwd> 4347</PRE> 4348<P>For example:</P> 4349<PRE> 4350 rootdn "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com" 4351 rootpw secret 4352</PRE> 4353<P>These options specify a DN and password that can be used to authenticate as the <EM>super-user</EM> entry of the database (i.e., the entry allowed to do anything). The DN and password specified here will always work, regardless of whether the entry named actually exists or has the password given. This solves the chicken-and-egg problem of how to authenticate and add entries before any entries yet exist.</P> 4354<P>Finally, you should make sure that the database definition contains the index definitions you want:</P> 4355<PRE> 4356 index {<attrlist> | default} [pres,eq,approx,sub,none] 4357</PRE> 4358<P>For example, to index the <TT>cn</TT>, <TT>sn</TT>, <TT>uid</TT> and <TT>objectclass</TT> attributes, the following <TT>index</TT> directives could be used:</P> 4359<PRE> 4360 index cn,sn,uid pres,eq,approx,sub 4361 index objectClass eq 4362</PRE> 4363<P>This would create presence, equality, approximate, and substring indices for the <TT>cn</TT>, <TT>sn</TT>, and <TT>uid</TT> attributes and an equality index for the <TT>objectClass</TT> attribute. Note that not all index types are available with all attribute types. See <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> section for more information on this option.</P> 4364<P>Once you have configured things to your liking, start up slapd, connect with your LDAP client, and start adding entries. For example, to add an organization entry and an organizational role entry using the <I>ldapadd</I> tool, you could create an <TERM>LDIF</TERM> file called <TT>entries.ldif</TT> with the contents:</P> 4365<PRE> 4366 # Organization for Example Corporation 4367 dn: dc=example,dc=com 4368 objectClass: dcObject 4369 objectClass: organization 4370 dc: example 4371 o: Example Corporation 4372 description: The Example Corporation 4373 4374 # Organizational Role for Directory Manager 4375 dn: cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com 4376 objectClass: organizationalRole 4377 cn: Manager 4378 description: Directory Manager 4379</PRE> 4380<P>and then use a command like this to actually create the entry:</P> 4381<PRE> 4382 ldapadd -f entries.ldif -x -D "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com" -w secret 4383</PRE> 4384<P>The above command assumes settings provided in the above examples.</P> 4385<H2><A NAME="Creating a database off-line">10.2. Creating a database off-line</A></H2> 4386<P>The second method of database creation is to do it off-line, using the slapd database tools described below. This method is best if you have many thousands of entries to create, which would take an unacceptably long time to add using the LDAP method described above. These tools read the slapd configuration file and an input file containing a text representation of the entries to add. For database types which support the tools, they produce the database files directly (otherwise you must use the on-line method above). There are several important configuration options you will want to be sure and set in the config file database definition first:</P> 4387<PRE> 4388 suffix <dn> 4389</PRE> 4390<P>As described in the <A HREF="#General Database Directives">General Database Directives</A> section, this option defines which entries are to be held by this database. You should set this to the DN of the root of the subtree you are trying to create. For example:</P> 4391<PRE> 4392 suffix "dc=example,dc=com" 4393</PRE> 4394<P>You should be sure to specify a directory where the index files should be created:</P> 4395<PRE> 4396 directory <directory> 4397</PRE> 4398<P>For example:</P> 4399<PRE> 4400 directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data 4401</PRE> 4402<P>Finally, you need to specify which indices you want to build. This is done by one or more index options.</P> 4403<PRE> 4404 index {<attrlist> | default} [pres,eq,approx,sub,none] 4405</PRE> 4406<P>For example:</P> 4407<PRE> 4408 index cn,sn,uid pres,eq,approx,sub 4409 index objectClass eq 4410</PRE> 4411<P>This would create presence, equality, approximate, and substring indices for the <TT>cn</TT>, <TT>sn</TT>, and <TT>uid</TT> attributes and an equality index for the <TT>objectClass</TT> attribute. Note that not all index types are available with all attribute types. See <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> section for more information on this option.</P> 4412<H3><A NAME="The {{EX:slapadd}} program">10.2.1. The <TT>slapadd</TT> program</A></H3> 4413<P>Once you've configured things to your liking, you create the primary database and associated indices by running the <EM>slapadd</EM>(8) program:</P> 4414<PRE> 4415 slapadd -l <inputfile> -f <slapdconfigfile> 4416 [-d <debuglevel>] [-n <integer>|-b <suffix>] 4417</PRE> 4418<P>The arguments have the following meanings:</P> 4419<PRE> 4420 -l <inputfile> 4421</PRE> 4422<P>Specifies the <TERM>LDIF</TERM> input file containing the entries to add in text form (described below in the <A HREF="#The LDIF text entry format">The LDIF text entry format</A> section).</P> 4423<PRE> 4424 -f <slapdconfigfile> 4425</PRE> 4426<P>Specifies the slapd configuration file that tells where to create the indices, what indices to create, etc.</P> 4427<PRE> 4428 -F <slapdconfdirectory> 4429</PRE> 4430<P>Specifies a config directory. If both <TT>-f</TT> and <TT>-F</TT> are specified, the config file will be read and converted to config directory format and written to the specified directory. If neither option is specified, an attempt to read the default config directory will be made before trying to use the default config file. If a valid config directory exists then the default config file is ignored. If dryrun mode is also specified, no conversion will occur.</P> 4431<PRE> 4432 -d <debuglevel> 4433</PRE> 4434<P>Turn on debugging, as specified by <TT><debuglevel></TT>. The debug levels are the same as for slapd. See the <A HREF="#Command-Line Options">Command-Line Options</A> section in <A HREF="#Running slapd">Running slapd</A>.</P> 4435<PRE> 4436 -n <databasenumber> 4437</PRE> 4438<P>An optional argument that specifies which database to modify. The first database listed in the configuration file is <TT>1</TT>, the second <TT>2</TT>, etc. By default, the first database in the configuration file is used. Should not be used in conjunction with <TT>-b</TT>.</P> 4439<PRE> 4440 -b <suffix> 4441</PRE> 4442<P>An optional argument that specifies which database to modify. The provided suffix is matched against a database <TT>suffix</TT> directive to determine the database number. Should not be used in conjunction with <TT>-n</TT>.</P> 4443<H3><A NAME="The {{EX:slapindex}} program">10.2.2. The <TT>slapindex</TT> program</A></H3> 4444<P>Sometimes it may be necessary to regenerate indices (such as after modifying <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5)). This is possible using the <EM>slapindex</EM>(8) program. <EM>slapindex</EM> is invoked like this</P> 4445<PRE> 4446 slapindex -f <slapdconfigfile> 4447 [-d <debuglevel>] [-n <databasenumber>|-b <suffix>] 4448</PRE> 4449<P>Where the <TT>-f</TT>, <TT>-d</TT>, <TT>-n</TT> and <TT>-b</TT> options are the same as for the <EM>slapadd</EM>(1) program. <EM>slapindex</EM> rebuilds all indices based upon the current database contents.</P> 4450<H3><A NAME="The {{EX:slapcat}} program">10.2.3. The <TT>slapcat</TT> program</A></H3> 4451<P>The <TT>slapcat</TT> program is used to dump the database to an <TERM>LDIF</TERM> file. This can be useful when you want to make a human-readable backup of your database or when you want to edit your database off-line. The program is invoked like this:</P> 4452<PRE> 4453 slapcat -l <filename> -f <slapdconfigfile> 4454 [-d <debuglevel>] [-n <databasenumber>|-b <suffix>] 4455</PRE> 4456<P>where <TT>-n</TT> or <TT>-b</TT> is used to select the database in the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) specified using <TT>-f</TT>. The corresponding <TERM>LDIF</TERM> output is written to standard output or to the file specified using the <TT>-l</TT> option.</P> 4457<H2><A NAME="The LDIF text entry format">10.3. The LDIF text entry format</A></H2> 4458<P>The <TERM>LDAP Data Interchange Format</TERM> (LDIF) is used to represent LDAP entries in a simple text format. This section provides a brief description of the LDIF entry format which complements <EM>ldif</EM>(5) and the technical specification <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2849.txt">RFC2849</A>.</P> 4459<P>The basic form of an entry is:</P> 4460<PRE> 4461 # comment 4462 dn: <distinguished name> 4463 <attrdesc>: <attrvalue> 4464 <attrdesc>: <attrvalue> 4465 4466 ... 4467</PRE> 4468<P>Lines starting with a '<TT>#</TT>' character are comments. An attribute description may be a simple attribute type like <TT>cn</TT> or <TT>objectClass</TT> or <TT>1.2.3</TT> (an <TERM>OID</TERM> associated with an attribute type) or may include options such as <TT>cn;lang_en_US</TT> or <TT>userCertificate;binary</TT>.</P> 4469<P>A line may be continued by starting the next line with a <EM>single</EM> space or tab character. For example:</P> 4470<PRE> 4471 dn: cn=Barbara J Jensen,dc=example,dc= 4472 com 4473 cn: Barbara J 4474 Jensen 4475</PRE> 4476<P>is equivalent to:</P> 4477<PRE> 4478 dn: cn=Barbara J Jensen,dc=example,dc=com 4479 cn: Barbara J Jensen 4480</PRE> 4481<P>Multiple attribute values are specified on separate lines. e.g.,</P> 4482<PRE> 4483 cn: Barbara J Jensen 4484 cn: Babs Jensen 4485</PRE> 4486<P>If an <TT><attrvalue></TT> contains non-printing characters or begins with a space, a colon ('<TT>:</TT>'), or a less than ('<TT><</TT>'), the <TT><attrdesc></TT> is followed by a double colon and the base64 encoding of the value. For example, the value "<TT> begins with a space</TT>" would be encoded like this:</P> 4487<PRE> 4488 cn:: IGJlZ2lucyB3aXRoIGEgc3BhY2U= 4489</PRE> 4490<P>You can also specify a <TERM>URL</TERM> containing the attribute value. For example, the following specifies the <TT>jpegPhoto</TT> value should be obtained from the file <TT>/path/to/file.jpeg</TT>.</P> 4491<PRE> 4492 cn:< file:///path/to/file.jpeg 4493</PRE> 4494<P>Multiple entries within the same LDIF file are separated by blank lines. Here's an example of an LDIF file containing three entries.</P> 4495<PRE> 4496 # Barbara's Entry 4497 dn: cn=Barbara J Jensen,dc=example,dc=com 4498 cn: Barbara J Jensen 4499 cn: Babs Jensen 4500 objectClass: person 4501 sn: Jensen 4502 4503 # Bjorn's Entry 4504 dn: cn=Bjorn J Jensen,dc=example,dc=com 4505 cn: Bjorn J Jensen 4506 cn: Bjorn Jensen 4507 objectClass: person 4508 sn: Jensen 4509 # Base64 encoded JPEG photo 4510 jpegPhoto:: /9j/4AAQSkZJRgABAAAAAQABAAD/2wBDABALD 4511 A4MChAODQ4SERATGCgaGBYWGDEjJR0oOjM9PDkzODdASFxOQ 4512 ERXRTc4UG1RV19iZ2hnPk1xeXBkeFxlZ2P/2wBDARESEhgVG 4513 4514 # Jennifer's Entry 4515 dn: cn=Jennifer J Jensen,dc=example,dc=com 4516 cn: Jennifer J Jensen 4517 cn: Jennifer Jensen 4518 objectClass: person 4519 sn: Jensen 4520 # JPEG photo from file 4521 jpegPhoto:< file:///path/to/file.jpeg 4522</PRE> 4523<P>Notice that the <TT>jpegPhoto</TT> in Bjorn's entry is base 64 encoded and the <TT>jpegPhoto</TT> in Jennifer's entry is obtained from the location indicated by the URL.</P> 4524<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 4525<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Trailing spaces are not trimmed from values in an LDIF file. Nor are multiple internal spaces compressed. If you don't want them in your data, don't put them there. 4526<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 4527<P></P> 4528<HR> 4529<H1><A NAME="Backends">11. Backends</A></H1> 4530<P>Backends do the actual work of storing or retrieving data in response to LDAP requests. Backends may be compiled statically into <EM>slapd</EM>, or when module support is enabled, they may be dynamically loaded.</P> 4531<P>If your installation uses dynamic modules, you may need to add the relevant <EM>moduleload</EM> directives to the examples that follow. The name of the module for a backend is usually of the form:</P> 4532<PRE> 4533 back_<backend name>.la 4534</PRE> 4535<P>So for example, if you need to load the <EM>hdb</EM> backend, you would configure</P> 4536<PRE> 4537 moduleload back_hdb.la 4538</PRE> 4539<H2><A NAME="Berkeley DB Backends">11.1. Berkeley DB Backends</A></H2> 4540<H3><A NAME="Overview">11.1.1. Overview</A></H3> 4541<P>The <EM>bdb</EM> backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is the recommended primary backend for a normal <EM>slapd</EM> database. It uses the Oracle Berkeley DB (<TERM>BDB</TERM>) package to store data. It makes extensive use of indexing and caching (see the <A HREF="#Tuning">Tuning</A> section) to speed data access.</P> 4542<P><EM>hdb</EM> is a variant of the <EM>bdb</EM> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout which supports subtree renames. It is otherwise identical to the <EM>bdb</EM> behavior, and all the same configuration options apply.</P> 4543<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 4544<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>An <EM>hdb</EM> database needs a large <EM>idlcachesize</EM> for good search performance, typically three times the <EM>cachesize</EM> (entry cache size) or larger. 4545<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 4546<H3><A NAME="back-bdb/back-hdb Configuration">11.1.2. back-bdb/back-hdb Configuration</A></H3> 4547<P>MORE LATER</P> 4548<H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.1.3. Further Information</A></H3> 4549<P><EM>slapd-bdb</EM>(5)</P> 4550<H2><A NAME="LDAP">11.2. LDAP</A></H2> 4551<H3><A NAME="Overview">11.2.1. Overview</A></H3> 4552<P>The LDAP backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is not an actual database; instead it acts as a proxy to forward incoming requests to another LDAP server. While processing requests it will also chase referrals, so that referrals are fully processed instead of being returned to the <EM>slapd</EM> client.</P> 4553<P>Sessions that explicitly <EM>Bind</EM> to the <EM>back-ldap</EM> database always create their own private connection to the remote LDAP server. Anonymous sessions will share a single anonymous connection to the remote server. For sessions bound through other mechanisms, all sessions with the same DN will share the same connection. This connection pooling strategy can enhance the proxy's efficiency by reducing the overhead of repeatedly making/breaking multiple connections.</P> 4554<P>The ldap database can also act as an information service, i.e. the identity of locally authenticated clients is asserted to the remote server, possibly in some modified form. For this purpose, the proxy binds to the remote server with some administrative identity, and, if required, authorizes the asserted identity.</P> 4555<P>It is heavily used by a lot of other <A HREF="#Backends">Backends</A> and <A HREF="#Overlays">Overlays</A>.</P> 4556<H3><A NAME="back-ldap Configuration">11.2.2. back-ldap Configuration</A></H3> 4557<P>As previously mentioned, <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> is used behind the scenes by many other <A HREF="#Backends">Backends</A> and <A HREF="#Overlays">Overlays</A>. Some of them merely provide a few configuration directive themselves, but have available to the administrator the whole of the <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> options.</P> 4558<P>For example, the <A HREF="#Translucent Proxy">Translucent Proxy</A>, which retrieves entries from a remote LDAP server that can be partially overridden by the defined database, has only four specific <EM>translucent-</EM> directives, but can be configured using any of the normal <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> options. See {[slapo-translucent(5)}} for details.</P> 4559<P>Other <A HREF="#Overlays">Overlays</A> allow you to tag directives in front of a normal <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> directive. For example, the <EM>slapo-chain(5)</EM> overlay does this:</P> 4560<P><EM>"There are very few chain overlay specific directives; however, directives related to the instances of the ldap backend that may be implicitly instantiated by the overlay may assume a special meaning when used in conjunction with this overlay. They are described in slapd-ldap(5), and they also need to be prefixed by chain-."</EM></P> 4561<P>You may have also seen the <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> backend used and described in the <A HREF="#Push Based">Push Based</A> <A HREF="#Replication">Replication</A> section of the guide.</P> 4562<P>It should therefore be obvious that the <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> backend is extremely flexible and heavily used throughout the OpenLDAP Suite.</P> 4563<P>The following is a very simple example, but already the power of the <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> backend is seen by use of a <EM>uri list</EM>:</P> 4564<PRE> 4565 database ldap 4566 suffix "dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 4567 rootdn "cn=slapd-ldap" 4568 uri ldap://localhost/ ldap://remotehost ldap://remotehost2 4569</PRE> 4570<P>The URI list is space or comma-separated. Whenever the server that responds is not the first one in the list, the list is rearranged and the responsive server is moved to the head, so that it will be first contacted the next time a connection needs be created.</P> 4571<P>This feature can be used to provide a form of load balancing when using <A HREF="#MirrorMode replication">MirrorMode replication</A>.</P> 4572<H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.2.3. Further Information</A></H3> 4573<P><EM>slapd-ldap</EM>(5)</P> 4574<H2><A NAME="LDIF">11.3. LDIF</A></H2> 4575<H3><A NAME="Overview">11.3.1. Overview</A></H3> 4576<P>The LDIF backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is a basic storage backend that stores entries in text files in LDIF format, and exploits the filesystem to create the tree structure of the database. It is intended as a cheap, low performance easy to use backend.</P> 4577<P>When using the <EM>cn=config</EM> dynamic configuration database with persistent storage, the configuration data is stored using this backend. See <EM>slapd-config</EM>(5) for more information</P> 4578<H3><A NAME="back-ldif Configuration">11.3.2. back-ldif Configuration</A></H3> 4579<P>Like many other backends, the LDIF backend can be instantiated with very few configuration lines:</P> 4580<PRE> 4581 include ./schema/core.schema 4582 4583 database ldif 4584 directory "./ldif" 4585 suffix "dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 4586 rootdn "cn=LDIF,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 4587 rootpw LDIF 4588</PRE> 4589<P>If we add the <EM>dcObject</EM> for <EM>dc=suretecsystems,dc=com</EM>, you can see how this is added behind the scenes on the file system:</P> 4590<PRE> 4591 dn: dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 4592 objectClass: dcObject 4593 objectClass: organization 4594 dc: suretecsystems 4595 o: Suretec Systems Ltd 4596</PRE> 4597<P>Now we add it to the directory:</P> 4598<PRE> 4599 ldapadd -x -H ldap://localhost:9011 -f suretec.ldif -D "cn=LDIF,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" -w LDIF 4600 adding new entry "dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 4601</PRE> 4602<P>And inside <TT>./ldif</TT> we have:</P> 4603<PRE> 4604 ls ./ldif 4605 dc=suretecsystems,dc=com.ldif 4606</PRE> 4607<P>which again contains:</P> 4608<PRE> 4609 cat ldif/dc\=suretecsystems\,dc\=com.ldif 4610 4611 dn: dc=suretecsystems 4612 objectClass: dcObject 4613 objectClass: organization 4614 dc: suretecsystems 4615 o: Suretec Systems Ltd. 4616 structuralObjectClass: organization 4617 entryUUID: 2134b714-e3a1-102c-9a15-f96ee263886d 4618 creatorsName: cn=LDIF,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 4619 createTimestamp: 20080711142643Z 4620 entryCSN: 20080711142643.661124Z#000000#000#000000 4621 modifiersName: cn=LDIF,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 4622 modifyTimestamp: 20080711142643Z 4623</PRE> 4624<P>This is the complete format you would get when exporting your directory using <TT>slapcat</TT> etc.</P> 4625<H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.3.3. Further Information</A></H3> 4626<P><EM>slapd-ldif</EM>(5)</P> 4627<H2><A NAME="Metadirectory">11.4. Metadirectory</A></H2> 4628<H3><A NAME="Overview">11.4.1. Overview</A></H3> 4629<P>The meta backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) performs basic LDAP proxying with respect to a set of remote LDAP servers, called "targets". The information contained in these servers can be presented as belonging to a single Directory Information Tree (<TERM>DIT</TERM>).</P> 4630<P>A basic knowledge of the functionality of the <EM>slapd-ldap</EM>(5) backend is recommended. This backend has been designed as an enhancement of the ldap backend. The two backends share many features (actually they also share portions of code). While the ldap backend is intended to proxy operations directed to a single server, the meta backend is mainly intended for proxying of multiple servers and possibly naming context masquerading.</P> 4631<P>These features, although useful in many scenarios, may result in excessive overhead for some applications, so its use should be carefully considered.</P> 4632<H3><A NAME="back-meta Configuration">11.4.2. back-meta Configuration</A></H3> 4633<P>LATER</P> 4634<H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.4.3. Further Information</A></H3> 4635<P><EM>slapd-meta</EM>(5)</P> 4636<H2><A NAME="Monitor">11.5. Monitor</A></H2> 4637<H3><A NAME="Overview">11.5.1. Overview</A></H3> 4638<P>The monitor backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is not an actual database; if enabled, it is automatically generated and dynamically maintained by slapd with information about the running status of the daemon.</P> 4639<P>To inspect all monitor information, issue a subtree search with base <EM>cn=Monitor</EM>, requesting that attributes "+" and "*" are returned. The monitor backend produces mostly operational attributes, and LDAP only returns operational attributes that are explicitly requested. Requesting attribute "+" is an extension which requests all operational attributes.</P> 4640<P>See the <A HREF="#Monitoring">Monitoring</A> section.</P> 4641<H3><A NAME="back-monitor Configuration">11.5.2. back-monitor Configuration</A></H3> 4642<P>The monitor database can be instantiated only once, i.e. only one occurrence of "database monitor" can occur in the <EM>slapd.conf(5)</EM> file. Also the suffix is automatically set to <EM>"cn=Monitor"</EM>.</P> 4643<P>You can however set a <EM>rootdn</EM> and <EM>rootpw</EM>. The following is all that is needed to instantiate a monitor backend:</P> 4644<PRE> 4645 include ./schema/core.schema 4646 4647 database monitor 4648 rootdn "cn=monitoring,cn=Monitor" 4649 rootpw monitoring 4650</PRE> 4651<P>You can also apply Access Control to this database like any other database, for example:</P> 4652<PRE> 4653 access to dn.subtree="cn=Monitor" 4654 by dn.exact="uid=Admin,dc=my,dc=org" write 4655 by users read 4656 by * none 4657</PRE> 4658<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 4659<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The <TT>core.schema</TT> must be loaded for the monitor database to work. 4660<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 4661<P>A small example of the data returned via <EM>ldapsearch</EM> would be:</P> 4662<PRE> 4663 ldapsearch -x -H ldap://localhost:9011 -b 'cn=Monitor' 4664 # extended LDIF 4665 # 4666 # LDAPv3 4667 # base <cn=Monitor> with scope subtree 4668 # filter: (objectclass=*) 4669 # requesting: ALL 4670 # 4671 4672 # Monitor 4673 dn: cn=Monitor 4674 objectClass: monitorServer 4675 cn: Monitor 4676 description: This subtree contains monitoring/managing objects. 4677 description: This object contains information about this server. 4678 description: Most of the information is held in operational attributes, which 4679 must be explicitly requested. 4680 4681 # Backends, Monitor 4682 dn: cn=Backends,cn=Monitor 4683 objectClass: monitorContainer 4684 cn: Backends 4685 description: This subsystem contains information about available backends. 4686</PRE> 4687<P>Please see the <A HREF="#Monitoring">Monitoring</A> section for complete examples of information available via this backend.</P> 4688<H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.5.3. Further Information</A></H3> 4689<P><EM>slapd-monitor</EM>(5)</P> 4690<H2><A NAME="Null">11.6. Null</A></H2> 4691<H3><A NAME="Overview">11.6.1. Overview</A></H3> 4692<P>The Null backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is surely the most useful part of slapd:</P> 4693<UL> 4694<LI>Searches return success but no entries. 4695<LI>Compares return compareFalse. 4696<LI>Updates return success (unless readonly is on) but do nothing. 4697<LI>Binds other than as the rootdn fail unless the database option "bind on" is given. 4698<LI>The slapadd(8) and slapcat(8) tools are equally exciting.</UL> 4699<P>Inspired by the <TT>/dev/null</TT> device.</P> 4700<H3><A NAME="back-null Configuration">11.6.2. back-null Configuration</A></H3> 4701<P>This has to be one of the shortest configurations you'll ever do. In order to test this, your <TT>slapd.conf</TT> file would look like:</P> 4702<PRE> 4703 database null 4704 suffix "cn=Nothing" 4705 bind on 4706</PRE> 4707<P><EM>bind on</EM> means:</P> 4708<P><EM>"Allow binds as any DN in this backend's suffix, with any password. The default is "off"."</EM></P> 4709<P>To test this backend with <EM>ldapsearch</EM>:</P> 4710<PRE> 4711 ldapsearch -x -H ldap://localhost:9011 -D "uid=none,cn=Nothing" -w testing -b 'cn=Nothing' 4712 # extended LDIF 4713 # 4714 # LDAPv3 4715 # base <cn=Nothing> with scope subtree 4716 # filter: (objectclass=*) 4717 # requesting: ALL 4718 # 4719 4720 # search result 4721 search: 2 4722 result: 0 Success 4723 4724 # numResponses: 1 4725</PRE> 4726<H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.6.3. Further Information</A></H3> 4727<P><EM>slapd-null</EM>(5)</P> 4728<H2><A NAME="Passwd">11.7. Passwd</A></H2> 4729<H3><A NAME="Overview">11.7.1. Overview</A></H3> 4730<P>The PASSWD backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) serves up the user account information listed in the system <EM>passwd</EM>(5) file (defaulting to <TT>/etc/passwd</TT>).</P> 4731<P>This backend is provided for demonstration purposes only. The DN of each entry is "uid=<username>,<suffix>".</P> 4732<H3><A NAME="back-passwd Configuration">11.7.2. back-passwd Configuration</A></H3> 4733<P>The configuration using <TT>slapd.conf</TT> a slightly longer, but not much. For example:</P> 4734<PRE> 4735 include ./schema/core.schema 4736 4737 database passwd 4738 suffix "cn=passwd" 4739</PRE> 4740<P>Again, testing this with <EM>ldapsearch</EM> would result in something like:</P> 4741<PRE> 4742 ldapsearch -x -H ldap://localhost:9011 -b 'cn=passwd' 4743 # extended LDIF 4744 # 4745 # LDAPv3 4746 # base <cn=passwd> with scope subtree 4747 # filter: (objectclass=*) 4748 # requesting: ALL 4749 # 4750 4751 # passwd 4752 dn: cn=passwd 4753 cn: passwd 4754 objectClass: organizationalUnit 4755 4756 # root, passwd 4757 dn: uid=root,cn=passwd 4758 objectClass: person 4759 objectClass: uidObject 4760 uid: root 4761 cn: root 4762 sn: root 4763 description: root 4764</PRE> 4765<H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.7.3. Further Information</A></H3> 4766<P><EM>slapd-passwd</EM>(5)</P> 4767<H2><A NAME="Perl/Shell">11.8. Perl/Shell</A></H2> 4768<H3><A NAME="Overview">11.8.1. Overview</A></H3> 4769<P>The Perl backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) works by embedding a <EM>perl</EM>(1) interpreter into <EM>slapd</EM>(8). Any perl database section of the configuration file <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) must then specify what Perl module to use. Slapd then creates a new Perl object that handles all the requests for that particular instance of the backend.</P> 4770<P>The Shell backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) executes external programs to implement operations, and is designed to make it easy to tie an existing database to the slapd front-end. This backend is is primarily intended to be used in prototypes.</P> 4771<H3><A NAME="back-perl/back-shell Configuration">11.8.2. back-perl/back-shell Configuration</A></H3> 4772<P>LATER</P> 4773<H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.8.3. Further Information</A></H3> 4774<P><EM>slapd-shell</EM>(5) and <EM>slapd-perl</EM>(5)</P> 4775<H2><A NAME="Relay">11.9. Relay</A></H2> 4776<H3><A NAME="Overview">11.9.1. Overview</A></H3> 4777<P>The primary purpose of this <EM>slapd</EM>(8) backend is to map a naming context defined in a database running in the same <EM>slapd</EM>(8) instance into a virtual naming context, with attributeType and objectClass manipulation, if required. It requires the rwm overlay.</P> 4778<P>This backend and the above mentioned overlay are experimental.</P> 4779<H3><A NAME="back-relay Configuration">11.9.2. back-relay Configuration</A></H3> 4780<P>LATER</P> 4781<H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.9.3. Further Information</A></H3> 4782<P><EM>slapd-relay</EM>(5)</P> 4783<H2><A NAME="SQL">11.10. SQL</A></H2> 4784<H3><A NAME="Overview">11.10.1. Overview</A></H3> 4785<P>The primary purpose of this <EM>slapd</EM>(8) backend is to PRESENT information stored in some RDBMS as an LDAP subtree without any programming (some SQL and maybe stored procedures can't be considered programming, anyway ;).</P> 4786<P>That is, for example, when you (some ISP) have account information you use in an RDBMS, and want to use modern solutions that expect such information in LDAP (to authenticate users, make email lookups etc.). Or you want to synchronize or distribute information between different sites/applications that use RDBMSes and/or LDAP. Or whatever else...</P> 4787<P>It is <B>NOT</B> designed as a general-purpose backend that uses RDBMS instead of BerkeleyDB (as the standard BDB backend does), though it can be used as such with several limitations. Please see <A HREF="#LDAP vs RDBMS">LDAP vs RDBMS</A> for discussion.</P> 4788<P>The idea is to use some meta-information to translate LDAP queries to SQL queries, leaving relational schema untouched, so that old applications can continue using it without any modifications. This allows SQL and LDAP applications to interoperate without replication, and exchange data as needed.</P> 4789<P>The SQL backend is designed to be tunable to virtually any relational schema without having to change source (through that meta-information mentioned). Also, it uses ODBC to connect to RDBMSes, and is highly configurable for SQL dialects RDBMSes may use, so it may be used for integration and distribution of data on different RDBMSes, OSes, hosts etc., in other words, in highly heterogeneous environments.</P> 4790<P>This backend is experimental.</P> 4791<H3><A NAME="back-sql Configuration">11.10.2. back-sql Configuration</A></H3> 4792<P>This backend has to be one of the most abused and complex backends there is. Therefore, we will go through a simple, small example that comes with the OpenLDAP source and can be found in <TT>servers/slapd/back-sql/rdbms_depend/README</TT></P> 4793<P>For this example we will be using PostgreSQL.</P> 4794<P>First, we add to <TT>/etc/odbc.ini</TT> a block of the form:</P> 4795<PRE> 4796 [example] <=== 4797 Description = Example for OpenLDAP's back-sql 4798 Driver = PostgreSQL 4799 Trace = No 4800 Database = example <=== 4801 Servername = localhost 4802 UserName = manager <=== 4803 Password = secret <=== 4804 Port = 5432 4805 ;Protocol = 6.4 4806 ReadOnly = No 4807 RowVersioning = No 4808 ShowSystemTables = No 4809 ShowOidColumn = No 4810 FakeOidIndex = No 4811 ConnSettings = 4812</PRE> 4813<P>The relevant information for our test setup is highlighted with '<===' on the right above.</P> 4814<P>Next, we add to <TT>/etc/odbcinst.ini</TT> a block of the form:</P> 4815<PRE> 4816 [PostgreSQL] 4817 Description = ODBC for PostgreSQL 4818 Driver = /usr/lib/libodbcpsql.so 4819 Setup = /usr/lib/libodbcpsqlS.so 4820 FileUsage = 1 4821</PRE> 4822<P>We will presume you know how to create a database and user in PostgreSQL and how to set a password. Also, we'll presume you can populate the 'example' database you've just created with the following files, as found in <TT>servers/slapd/back-sql/rdbms_depend/pgsql </TT></P> 4823<PRE> 4824 backsql_create.sql, testdb_create.sql, testdb_data.sql, testdb_metadata.sql 4825</PRE> 4826<P>Lastly, run the test:</P> 4827<PRE> 4828 [root@localhost]# cd $SOURCES/tests 4829 [root@localhost]# SLAPD_USE_SQL=pgsql ./run sql-test000 4830</PRE> 4831<P>Briefly, you should see something like (cut short for space):</P> 4832<PRE> 4833 Cleaning up test run directory leftover from previous run. 4834 Running ./scripts/sql-test000-read... 4835 running defines.sh 4836 Starting slapd on TCP/IP port 9011... 4837 Testing SQL backend read operations... 4838 Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start... 4839 Testing correct bind... dn:cn=Mitya Kovalev,dc=example,dc=com 4840 Testing incorrect bind (should fail)... ldap_bind: Invalid credentials (49) 4841 4842 ...... 4843 4844 Filtering original ldif... 4845 Comparing filter output... 4846 >>>>> Test succeeded 4847</PRE> 4848<P>The test is basically readonly; this can be performed by all RDBMSes (listed above).</P> 4849<P>There is another test, sql-test900-write, which is currently enabled only for PostgreSQL and IBM db2.</P> 4850<P>Using <TT>sql-test000</TT>, files in <TT>servers/slapd/back-sql/rdbms_depend/pgsql/</TT> and the man page, you should be set.</P> 4851<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 4852<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>This backend is experimental. 4853<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 4854<H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.10.3. Further Information</A></H3> 4855<P><EM>slapd-sql</EM>(5) and <TT>servers/slapd/back-sql/rdbms_depend/README</TT></P> 4856<P></P> 4857<HR> 4858<H1><A NAME="Overlays">12. Overlays</A></H1> 4859<P>Overlays are software components that provide hooks to functions analogous to those provided by backends, which can be stacked on top of the backend calls and as callbacks on top of backend responses to alter their behavior.</P> 4860<P>Overlays may be compiled statically into <EM>slapd</EM>, or when module support is enabled, they may be dynamically loaded. Most of the overlays are only allowed to be configured on individual databases.</P> 4861<P>Some can be stacked on the <TT>frontend</TT> as well, for global use. This means that they can be executed after a request is parsed and validated, but right before the appropriate database is selected. The main purpose is to affect operations regardless of the database they will be handled by, and, in some cases, to influence the selection of the database by massaging the request DN.</P> 4862<P>Essentially, overlays represent a means to:</P> 4863<UL> 4864<LI>customize the behavior of existing backends without changing the backend code and without requiring one to write a new custom backend with complete functionality 4865<LI>write functionality of general usefulness that can be applied to different backend types</UL> 4866<P>When using <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5), overlays that are configured before any other databases are considered global, as mentioned above. In fact they are implicitly stacked on top of the <TT>frontend</TT> database. They can also be explicitly configured as such:</P> 4867<PRE> 4868 database frontend 4869 overlay <overlay name> 4870</PRE> 4871<P>Overlays are usually documented by separate specific man pages in section 5; the naming convention is</P> 4872<PRE> 4873 slapo-<overlay name> 4874</PRE> 4875<P>All distributed core overlays have a man page. Feel free to contribute to any, if you think there is anything missing in describing the behavior of the component and the implications of all the related configuration directives.</P> 4876<P>Official overlays are located in</P> 4877<PRE> 4878 servers/slapd/overlays/ 4879</PRE> 4880<P>That directory also contains the file slapover.txt, which describes the rationale of the overlay implementation, and may serve as a guideline for the development of custom overlays.</P> 4881<P>Contribware overlays are located in</P> 4882<PRE> 4883 contrib/slapd-modules/<overlay name>/ 4884</PRE> 4885<P>along with other types of run-time loadable components; they are officially distributed, but not maintained by the project.</P> 4886<P>All the current overlays in OpenLDAP are listed and described in detail in the following sections.</P> 4887<H2><A NAME="Access Logging">12.1. Access Logging</A></H2> 4888<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.1.1. Overview</A></H3> 4889<P>This overlay can record accesses to a given backend database on another database.</P> 4890<P>This allows all of the activity on a given database to be reviewed using arbitrary LDAP queries, instead of just logging to local flat text files. Configuration options are available for selecting a subset of operation types to log, and to automatically prune older log records from the logging database. Log records are stored with audit schema to assure their readability whether viewed as LDIF or in raw form.</P> 4891<P>It is also used for <A HREF="#delta-syncrepl replication">delta-syncrepl replication</A></P> 4892<H3><A NAME="Access Logging Configuration">12.1.2. Access Logging Configuration</A></H3> 4893<P>The following is a basic example that implements Access Logging:</P> 4894<PRE> 4895 database bdb 4896 suffix dc=example,dc=com 4897 ... 4898 overlay accesslog 4899 logdb cn=log 4900 logops writes reads 4901 logold (objectclass=person) 4902 4903 database bdb 4904 suffix cn=log 4905 ... 4906 index reqStart eq 4907 access to * 4908 by dn.base="cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com" read 4909</PRE> 4910<P>The following is an example used for <A HREF="#delta-syncrepl replication">delta-syncrepl replication</A>:</P> 4911<PRE> 4912 database hdb 4913 suffix cn=accesslog 4914 directory /usr/local/var/openldap-accesslog 4915 rootdn cn=accesslog 4916 index default eq 4917 index entryCSN,objectClass,reqEnd,reqResult,reqStart 4918</PRE> 4919<P>Accesslog overlay definitions for the primary db</P> 4920<PRE> 4921 database bdb 4922 suffix dc=example,dc=com 4923 ... 4924 overlay accesslog 4925 logdb cn=accesslog 4926 logops writes 4927 logsuccess TRUE 4928 # scan the accesslog DB every day, and purge entries older than 7 days 4929 logpurge 07+00:00 01+00:00 4930</PRE> 4931<P>An example search result against <B>cn=accesslog</B> might look like:</P> 4932<PRE> 4933 [ghenry@suretec ghenry]# ldapsearch -x -b cn=accesslog 4934 # extended LDIF 4935 # 4936 # LDAPv3 4937 # base <cn=accesslog> with scope subtree 4938 # filter: (objectclass=*) 4939 # requesting: ALL 4940 # 4941 4942 # accesslog 4943 dn: cn=accesslog 4944 objectClass: auditContainer 4945 cn: accesslog 4946 4947 # 20080110163829.000004Z, accesslog 4948 dn: reqStart=20080110163829.000004Z,cn=accesslog 4949 objectClass: auditModify 4950 reqStart: 20080110163829.000004Z 4951 reqEnd: 20080110163829.000005Z 4952 reqType: modify 4953 reqSession: 196696 4954 reqAuthzID: cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 4955 reqDN: uid=suretec-46022f8$,ou=Users,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 4956 reqResult: 0 4957 reqMod: sambaPwdCanChange:- ###CENSORED### 4958 reqMod: sambaPwdCanChange:+ ###CENSORED### 4959 reqMod: sambaNTPassword:- ###CENSORED### 4960 reqMod: sambaNTPassword:+ ###CENSORED### 4961 reqMod: sambaPwdLastSet:- ###CENSORED### 4962 reqMod: sambaPwdLastSet:+ ###CENSORED### 4963 reqMod: entryCSN:= 20080110163829.095157Z#000000#000#000000 4964 reqMod: modifiersName:= cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 4965 reqMod: modifyTimestamp:= 20080110163829Z 4966 4967 # search result 4968 search: 2 4969 result: 0 Success 4970 4971 # numResponses: 3 4972 # numEntries: 2 4973</PRE> 4974<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.1.3. Further Information</A></H3> 4975<P><EM>slapo-accesslog(5)</EM> and the <A HREF="#delta-syncrepl replication">delta-syncrepl replication</A> section.</P> 4976<H2><A NAME="Audit Logging">12.2. Audit Logging</A></H2> 4977<P>The Audit Logging overlay can be used to record all changes on a given backend database to a specified log file.</P> 4978<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.2.1. Overview</A></H3> 4979<P>If the need arises whereby changes need to be logged as standard LDIF, then the auditlog overlay <B>slapo-auditlog (5)</B> can be used. Full examples are available in the man page <B>slapo-auditlog (5)</B></P> 4980<H3><A NAME="Audit Logging Configuration">12.2.2. Audit Logging Configuration</A></H3> 4981<P>If the directory is running vi <TT>slapd.d</TT>, then the following LDIF could be used to add the overlay to the overlay list in <B>cn=config</B> and set what file the <TERM>LDIF</TERM> gets logged to (adjust to suit)</P> 4982<PRE> 4983 dn: olcOverlay=auditlog,olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config 4984 changetype: add 4985 objectClass: olcOverlayConfig 4986 objectClass: olcAuditLogConfig 4987 olcOverlay: auditlog 4988 olcAuditlogFile: /tmp/auditlog.ldif 4989</PRE> 4990<P>In this example for testing, we are logging changes to <TT>/tmp/auditlog.ldif</TT></P> 4991<P>A typical <TERM>LDIF</TERM> file created by <B>slapo-auditlog(5)</B> would look like:</P> 4992<PRE> 4993 # add 1196797576 dc=suretecsystems,dc=com cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 4994 dn: dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 4995 changetype: add 4996 objectClass: dcObject 4997 objectClass: organization 4998 dc: suretecsystems 4999 o: Suretec Systems Ltd. 5000 structuralObjectClass: organization 5001 entryUUID: 1606f8f8-f06e-1029-8289-f0cc9d81e81a 5002 creatorsName: cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5003 modifiersName: cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5004 createTimestamp: 20051123130912Z 5005 modifyTimestamp: 20051123130912Z 5006 entryCSN: 20051123130912.000000Z#000001#000#000000 5007 auditContext: cn=accesslog 5008 # end add 1196797576 5009 5010 # add 1196797577 dc=suretecsystems,dc=com cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5011 dn: ou=Groups,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5012 changetype: add 5013 objectClass: top 5014 objectClass: organizationalUnit 5015 ou: Groups 5016 structuralObjectClass: organizationalUnit 5017 entryUUID: 160aaa2a-f06e-1029-828a-f0cc9d81e81a 5018 creatorsName: cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5019 modifiersName: cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5020 createTimestamp: 20051123130912Z 5021 modifyTimestamp: 20051123130912Z 5022 entryCSN: 20051123130912.000000Z#000002#000#000000 5023 # end add 1196797577 5024</PRE> 5025<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.2.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5026<P><EM>slapo-auditlog(5)</EM></P> 5027<H2><A NAME="Chaining">12.3. Chaining</A></H2> 5028<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.3.1. Overview</A></H3> 5029<P>The chain overlay provides basic chaining capability to the underlying database.</P> 5030<P>What is chaining? It indicates the capability of a DSA to follow referrals on behalf of the client, so that distributed systems are viewed as a single virtual DSA by clients that are otherwise unable to "chase" (i.e. follow) referrals by themselves.</P> 5031<P>The chain overlay is built on top of the ldap backend; it is compiled by default when <B>--enable-ldap</B>.</P> 5032<H3><A NAME="Chaining Configuration">12.3.2. Chaining Configuration</A></H3> 5033<P>In order to demonstrate how this overlay works, we shall discuss a typical scenario which might be one master server and three Syncrepl slaves.</P> 5034<P>On each replica, add this near the top of the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file (global), before any database definitions:</P> 5035<PRE> 5036 overlay chain 5037 chain-uri "ldap://ldapmaster.example.com" 5038 chain-idassert-bind bindmethod="simple" 5039 binddn="cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com" 5040 credentials="<secret>" 5041 mode="self" 5042 chain-tls start 5043 chain-return-error TRUE 5044</PRE> 5045<P>Add this below your <EM>syncrepl</EM> statement:</P> 5046<PRE> 5047 updateref "ldap://ldapmaster.example.com/" 5048</PRE> 5049<P>The <B>chain-tls</B> statement enables TLS from the slave to the ldap master. The DITs are exactly the same between these machines, therefore whatever user bound to the slave will also exist on the master. If that DN does not have update privileges on the master, nothing will happen.</P> 5050<P>You will need to restart the slave after these <EM>slapd.conf</EM> changes. Then, if you are using <EM>loglevel stats</EM> (256), you can monitor an <EM>ldapmodify</EM> on the slave and the master. (If you're using <EM>cn=config</EM> no restart is required.)</P> 5051<P>Now start an <EM>ldapmodify</EM> on the slave and watch the logs. You should expect something like:</P> 5052<PRE> 5053 Sep 6 09:27:25 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 fd=31 ACCEPT from IP=143.199.102.216:45181 (IP=143.199.102.216:389) 5054 Sep 6 09:27:25 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=0 STARTTLS 5055 Sep 6 09:27:25 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=0 RESULT oid= err=0 text= 5056 Sep 6 09:27:25 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 fd=31 TLS established tls_ssf=256 ssf=256 5057 Sep 6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=1 BIND dn="uid=user1,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com" method=128 5058 Sep 6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=1 BIND dn="uid=user1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com" mech=SIMPLE ssf=0 5059 Sep 6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=1 RESULT tag=97 err=0 text= 5060 Sep 6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=2 MOD dn="uid=user1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com" 5061 Sep 6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=2 MOD attr=mail 5062 Sep 6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=2 RESULT tag=103 err=0 text= 5063 Sep 6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=3 UNBIND 5064 Sep 6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 fd=31 closed 5065 Sep 6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: syncrepl_entry: LDAP_RES_SEARCH_ENTRY(LDAP_SYNC_MODIFY) 5066 Sep 6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: syncrepl_entry: be_search (0) 5067 Sep 6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: syncrepl_entry: uid=user1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com 5068 Sep 6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: syncrepl_entry: be_modify (0) 5069</PRE> 5070<P>And on the master you will see this:</P> 5071<PRE> 5072 Sep 6 09:23:57 ldapmaster slapd[2961]: conn=55902 op=3 PROXYAUTHZ dn="uid=user1,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com" 5073 Sep 6 09:23:57 ldapmaster slapd[2961]: conn=55902 op=3 MOD dn="uid=user1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com" 5074 Sep 6 09:23:57 ldapmaster slapd[2961]: conn=55902 op=3 MOD attr=mail 5075 Sep 6 09:23:57 ldapmaster slapd[2961]: conn=55902 op=3 RESULT tag=103 err=0 text= 5076</PRE> 5077<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 5078<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>You can clearly see the PROXYAUTHZ line on the master, indicating the proper identity assertion for the update on the master. Also note the slave immediately receiving the Syncrepl update from the master. 5079<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 5080<H3><A NAME="Handling Chaining Errors">12.3.3. Handling Chaining Errors</A></H3> 5081<P>By default, if chaining fails, the original referral is returned to the client under the assumption that the client might want to try and follow the referral.</P> 5082<P>With the following directive however, if the chaining fails at the provider side, the actual error is returned to the client.</P> 5083<PRE> 5084 chain-return-error TRUE 5085</PRE> 5086<H3><A NAME="Read-Back of Chained Modifications">12.3.4. Read-Back of Chained Modifications</A></H3> 5087<P>Occasionally, applications want to read back the data that they just wrote. If a modification requested to a shadow server was silently chained to its producer, an immediate read could result in receiving data not yet synchronized. In those cases, clients should use the <B>dontusecopy</B> control to ensure they are directed to the authoritative source for that piece of data.</P> 5088<P>This control usually causes a referral to the actual source of the data to be returned. However, when the <EM>slapo-chain(5)</EM> overlay is used, it intercepts the referral being returned in response to the <B>dontusecopy</B> control, and tries to fetch the requested data.</P> 5089<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.3.5. Further Information</A></H3> 5090<P><EM>slapo-chain(5)</EM></P> 5091<H2><A NAME="Constraints">12.4. Constraints</A></H2> 5092<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.4.1. Overview</A></H3> 5093<P>This overlay enforces a regular expression constraint on all values of specified attributes during an LDAP modify request that contains add or modify commands. It is used to enforce a more rigorous syntax when the underlying attribute syntax is too general.</P> 5094<H3><A NAME="Constraint Configuration">12.4.2. Constraint Configuration</A></H3> 5095<P>Configuration via <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) would look like:</P> 5096<PRE> 5097 overlay constraint 5098 constraint_attribute mail regex ^[[:alnum:]]+@mydomain.com$ 5099 constraint_attribute title uri 5100 ldap:///dc=catalog,dc=example,dc=com?title?sub?(objectClass=titleCatalog) 5101</PRE> 5102<P>A specification like the above would reject any <EM>mail</EM> attribute which did not look like <EM><alpha-numeric string>@mydomain.com</EM>.</P> 5103<P>It would also reject any title attribute whose values were not listed in the title attribute of any <EM>titleCatalog</EM> entries in the given scope.</P> 5104<P>An example for use with <EM>cn=config</EM>:</P> 5105<PRE> 5106 dn: olcOverlay=constraint,olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config 5107 changetype: add 5108 objectClass: olcOverlayConfig 5109 objectClass: olcConstraintConfig 5110 olcOverlay: constraint 5111 olcConstraintAttribute: mail regex ^[[:alnum:]]+@mydomain.com$ 5112 olcConstraintAttribute: title uri ldap:///dc=catalog,dc=example,dc=com?title?sub?(objectClass=titleCatalog) 5113</PRE> 5114<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.4.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5115<P><EM>slapo-constraint(5)</EM></P> 5116<H2><A NAME="Dynamic Directory Services">12.5. Dynamic Directory Services</A></H2> 5117<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.5.1. Overview</A></H3> 5118<P>The <EM>dds</EM> overlay to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) implements dynamic objects as per <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2589.txt">RFC2589</A>. The name <EM>dds</EM> stands for Dynamic Directory Services. It allows to define dynamic objects, characterized by the <EM>dynamicObject</EM> objectClass.</P> 5119<P>Dynamic objects have a limited lifetime, determined by a time-to-live (TTL) that can be refreshed by means of a specific refresh extended operation. This operation allows to set the Client Refresh Period (CRP), namely the period between refreshes that is required to preserve the dynamic object from expiration. The expiration time is computed by adding the requested TTL to the current time. When dynamic objects reach the end of their lifetime without being further refreshed, they are automatically <EM>deleted</EM>. There is no guarantee of immediate deletion, so clients should not count on it.</P> 5120<H3><A NAME="Dynamic Directory Service Configuration">12.5.2. Dynamic Directory Service Configuration</A></H3> 5121<P>A usage of dynamic objects might be to implement dynamic meetings; in this case, all the participants to the meeting are allowed to refresh the meeting object, but only the creator can delete it (otherwise it will be deleted when the TTL expires).</P> 5122<P>If we add the overlay to an example database, specifying a Max TTL of 1 day, a min of 10 seconds, with a default TTL of 1 hour. We'll also specify an interval of 120 (less than 60s might be too small) seconds between expiration checks and a tolerance of 5 second (lifetime of a dynamic object will be <EM>entryTtl + tolerance</EM>).</P> 5123<PRE> 5124 overlay dds 5125 dds-max-ttl 1d 5126 dds-min-ttl 10s 5127 dds-default-ttl 1h 5128 dds-interval 120s 5129 dds-tolerance 5s 5130</PRE> 5131<P>and add an index:</P> 5132<PRE> 5133 entryExpireTimestamp 5134</PRE> 5135<P>Creating a meeting is as simple as adding the following:</P> 5136<PRE> 5137 dn: cn=OpenLDAP Documentation Meeting,ou=Meetings,dc=example,dc=com 5138 objectClass: groupOfNames 5139 objectClass: dynamicObject 5140 cn: OpenLDAP Documentation Meeting 5141 member: uid=ghenry,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com 5142 member: uid=hyc,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com 5143</PRE> 5144<H4><A NAME="Dynamic Directory Service ACLs">12.5.2.1. Dynamic Directory Service ACLs</A></H4> 5145<P>Allow users to start a meeting and to join it; restrict refresh to the <EM>member</EM>; restrict delete to the creator:</P> 5146<PRE> 5147 access to attrs=userPassword 5148 by self write 5149 by * read 5150 5151 access to dn.base="ou=Meetings,dc=example,dc=com" 5152 attrs=children 5153 by users write 5154 5155 access to dn.onelevel="ou=Meetings,dc=example,dc=com" 5156 attrs=entry 5157 by dnattr=creatorsName write 5158 by * read 5159 5160 access to dn.onelevel="ou=Meetings,dc=example,dc=com" 5161 attrs=participant 5162 by dnattr=creatorsName write 5163 by users selfwrite 5164 by * read 5165 5166 access to dn.onelevel="ou=Meetings,dc=example,dc=com" 5167 attrs=entryTtl 5168 by dnattr=member manage 5169 by * read 5170</PRE> 5171<P>In simple terms, the user who created the <EM>OpenLDAP Documentation Meeting</EM> can add new attendees, refresh the meeting using (basically complete control):</P> 5172<PRE> 5173 ldapexop -x -H ldap://ldaphost "refresh" "cn=OpenLDAP Documentation Meeting,ou=Meetings,dc=example,dc=com" "120" -D "uid=ghenry,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com" -W 5174</PRE> 5175<P>Any user can join the meeting, but not add another attendee, but they can refresh the meeting. The ACLs above are quite straight forward to understand.</P> 5176<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.5.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5177<P><EM>slapo-dds(5)</EM></P> 5178<H2><A NAME="Dynamic Groups">12.6. Dynamic Groups</A></H2> 5179<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.6.1. Overview</A></H3> 5180<P>This overlay extends the Compare operation to detect members of a dynamic group. This overlay is now deprecated as all of its functions are available using the <A HREF="#Dynamic Lists">Dynamic Lists</A> overlay.</P> 5181<H3><A NAME="Dynamic Group Configuration">12.6.2. Dynamic Group Configuration</A></H3> 5182<H2><A NAME="Dynamic Lists">12.7. Dynamic Lists</A></H2> 5183<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.7.1. Overview</A></H3> 5184<P>This overlay allows expansion of dynamic groups and lists. Instead of having the group members or list attributes hard coded, this overlay allows us to define an LDAP search whose results will make up the group or list.</P> 5185<H3><A NAME="Dynamic List Configuration">12.7.2. Dynamic List Configuration</A></H3> 5186<P>This module can behave both as a dynamic list and dynamic group, depending on the configuration. The syntax is as follows:</P> 5187<PRE> 5188 overlay dynlist 5189 dynlist-attrset <group-oc> <URL-ad> [member-ad] 5190</PRE> 5191<P>The parameters to the <TT>dynlist-attrset</TT> directive have the following meaning:</P> 5192<UL> 5193<LI><TT><group-oc></TT>: specifies which object class triggers the subsequent LDAP search. Whenever an entry with this object class is retrieved, the search is performed. 5194<LI><TT><URL-ad></TT>: is the name of the attribute which holds the search URI. It has to be a subtype of <TT>labeledURI</TT>. The attributes and values present in the search result are added to the entry unless <TT>member-ad</TT> is used (see below). 5195<LI><TT>member-ad</TT>: if present, changes the overlay behavior into a dynamic group. Instead of inserting the results of the search in the entry, the distinguished name of the results are added as values of this attribute.</UL> 5196<P>Here is an example which will allow us to have an email alias which automatically expands to all user's emails according to our LDAP filter:</P> 5197<P>In <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5):</P> 5198<PRE> 5199 overlay dynlist 5200 dynlist-attrset nisMailAlias labeledURI 5201</PRE> 5202<P>This means that whenever an entry which has the <TT>nisMailAlias</TT> object class is retrieved, the search specified in the <TT>labeledURI</TT> attribute is performed.</P> 5203<P>Let's say we have this entry in our directory:</P> 5204<PRE> 5205 cn=all,ou=aliases,dc=example,dc=com 5206 cn: all 5207 objectClass: nisMailAlias 5208 labeledURI: ldap:///ou=People,dc=example,dc=com?mail?one?(objectClass=inetOrgPerson) 5209</PRE> 5210<P>If this entry is retrieved, the search specified in <TT>labeledURI</TT> will be performed and the results will be added to the entry just as if they have always been there. In this case, the search filter selects all entries directly under <TT>ou=People</TT> that have the <TT>inetOrgPerson</TT> object class and retrieves the <TT>mail</TT> attribute, if it exists.</P> 5211<P>This is what gets added to the entry when we have two users under <TT>ou=People</TT> that match the filter:</P> 5212<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="allmail-en.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 5213<P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Dynamic List for all emails</P> 5214<P>The configuration for a dynamic group is similar. Let's see an example which would automatically populate an <TT>allusers</TT> group with all the user accounts in the directory.</P> 5215<P>In <TT>slapd.conf</TT>(5):</P> 5216<PRE> 5217 include /path/to/dyngroup.schema 5218 ... 5219 overlay dynlist 5220 dynlist-attrset groupOfURLs labeledURI member 5221</PRE> 5222<OL> 5223<LI> 5224<LI>Note: We must include the <TT>dyngroup.schema</TT> file that defines the 5225<LI><TT>groupOfURLs</TT> objectClass used in this example.</OL> 5226<P>Let's apply it to the following entry:</P> 5227<PRE> 5228 cn=allusers,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com 5229 cn: all 5230 objectClass: groupOfURLs 5231 labeledURI: ldap:///ou=people,dc=example,dc=com??one?(objectClass=inetOrgPerson) 5232</PRE> 5233<P>The behavior is similar to the dynamic list configuration we had before: whenever an entry with the <TT>groupOfURLs</TT> object class is retrieved, the search specified in the <TT>labeledURI</TT> attribute is performed. But this time, only the distinguished names of the results are added, and as values of the <TT>member</TT> attribute.</P> 5234<P>This is what we get:</P> 5235<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="allusersgroup-en.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 5236<P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Dynamic Group for all users</P> 5237<P>Note that a side effect of this scheme of dynamic groups is that the members need to be specified as full DNs. So, if you are planning in using this for <TT>posixGroup</TT>s, be sure to use RFC2307bis and some attribute which can hold distinguished names. The <TT>memberUid</TT> attribute used in the <TT>posixGroup</TT> object class can hold only names, not DNs, and is therefore not suitable for dynamic groups.</P> 5238<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.7.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5239<P><EM>slapo-dynlist(5)</EM></P> 5240<H2><A NAME="Reverse Group Membership Maintenance">12.8. Reverse Group Membership Maintenance</A></H2> 5241<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.8.1. Overview</A></H3> 5242<P>In some scenarios, it may be desirable for a client to be able to determine which groups an entry is a member of, without performing an additional search. Examples of this are applications using the <TERM>DIT</TERM> for access control based on group authorization.</P> 5243<P>The <B>memberof</B> overlay updates an attribute (by default <B>memberOf</B>) whenever changes occur to the membership attribute (by default <B>member</B>) of entries of the objectclass (by default <B>groupOfNames</B>) configured to trigger updates.</P> 5244<P>Thus, it provides maintenance of the list of groups an entry is a member of, when usual maintenance of groups is done by modifying the members on the group entry.</P> 5245<H3><A NAME="Member Of Configuration">12.8.2. Member Of Configuration</A></H3> 5246<P>The typical use of this overlay requires just enabling the overlay for a specific database. For example, with the following minimal slapd.conf:</P> 5247<PRE> 5248 include /usr/share/openldap/schema/core.schema 5249 include /usr/share/openldap/schema/cosine.schema 5250 5251 authz-regexp "gidNumber=0\\\+uidNumber=0,cn=peercred,cn=external,cn=auth" 5252 "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com" 5253 database bdb 5254 suffix "dc=example,dc=com" 5255 rootdn "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com" 5256 rootpw secret 5257 directory /var/lib/ldap2.4 5258 checkpoint 256 5 5259 index objectClass eq 5260 index uid eq,sub 5261 5262 overlay memberof 5263</PRE> 5264<P>adding the following ldif:</P> 5265<PRE> 5266 cat memberof.ldif 5267 dn: dc=example,dc=com 5268 objectclass: domain 5269 dc: example 5270 5271 dn: ou=Group,dc=example,dc=com 5272 objectclass: organizationalUnit 5273 ou: Group 5274 5275 dn: ou=People,dc=example,dc=com 5276 objectclass: organizationalUnit 5277 ou: People 5278 5279 dn: uid=test1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com 5280 objectclass: account 5281 uid: test1 5282 5283 dn: cn=testgroup,ou=Group,dc=example,dc=com 5284 objectclass: groupOfNames 5285 cn: testgroup 5286 member: uid=test1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com 5287</PRE> 5288<P>Results in the following output from a search on the test1 user:</P> 5289<PRE> 5290 # ldapsearch -LL -Y EXTERNAL -H ldapi:/// "(uid=test1)" -b dc=example,dc=com memberOf 5291 SASL/EXTERNAL authentication started 5292 SASL username: gidNumber=0+uidNumber=0,cn=peercred,cn=external,cn=auth 5293 SASL SSF: 0 5294 version: 1 5295 5296 dn: uid=test1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com 5297 memberOf: cn=testgroup,ou=Group,dc=example,dc=com 5298</PRE> 5299<P>Note that the <B>memberOf</B> attribute is an operational attribute, so it must be requested explicitly.</P> 5300<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.8.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5301<P><EM>slapo-memberof(5)</EM></P> 5302<H2><A NAME="The Proxy Cache Engine">12.9. The Proxy Cache Engine</A></H2> 5303<P><TERM>LDAP</TERM> servers typically hold one or more subtrees of a <TERM>DIT</TERM>. Replica (or shadow) servers hold shadow copies of entries held by one or more master servers. Changes are propagated from the master server to replica (slave) servers using LDAP Sync replication. An LDAP cache is a special type of replica which holds entries corresponding to search filters instead of subtrees.</P> 5304<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.9.1. Overview</A></H3> 5305<P>The proxy cache extension of slapd is designed to improve the responsiveness of the ldap and meta backends. It handles a search request (query) by first determining whether it is contained in any cached search filter. Contained requests are answered from the proxy cache's local database. Other requests are passed on to the underlying ldap or meta backend and processed as usual.</P> 5306<P>E.g. <TT>(shoesize>=9)</TT> is contained in <TT>(shoesize>=8)</TT> and <TT>(sn=Richardson)</TT> is contained in <TT>(sn=Richards*)</TT></P> 5307<P>Correct matching rules and syntaxes are used while comparing assertions for query containment. To simplify the query containment problem, a list of cacheable "templates" (defined below) is specified at configuration time. A query is cached or answered only if it belongs to one of these templates. The entries corresponding to cached queries are stored in the proxy cache local database while its associated meta information (filter, scope, base, attributes) is stored in main memory.</P> 5308<P>A template is a prototype for generating LDAP search requests. Templates are described by a prototype search filter and a list of attributes which are required in queries generated from the template. The representation for prototype filter is similar to <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4515.txt">RFC4515</A>, except that the assertion values are missing. Examples of prototype filters are: (sn=),(&(sn=)(givenname=)) which are instantiated by search filters (sn=Doe) and (&(sn=Doe)(givenname=John)) respectively.</P> 5309<P>The cache replacement policy removes the least recently used (LRU) query and entries belonging to only that query. Queries are allowed a maximum time to live (TTL) in the cache thus providing weak consistency. A background task periodically checks the cache for expired queries and removes them.</P> 5310<P>The Proxy Cache paper (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/pub/kapurva/proxycaching.pdf">http://www.openldap.org/pub/kapurva/proxycaching.pdf</A>) provides design and implementation details.</P> 5311<H3><A NAME="Proxy Cache Configuration">12.9.2. Proxy Cache Configuration</A></H3> 5312<P>The cache configuration specific directives described below must appear after a <TT>overlay proxycache</TT> directive within a <TT>"database meta"</TT> or <TT>database ldap</TT> section of the server's <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file.</P> 5313<H4><A NAME="Setting cache parameters">12.9.2.1. Setting cache parameters</A></H4> 5314<PRE> 5315 proxyCache <DB> <maxentries> <nattrsets> <entrylimit> <period> 5316</PRE> 5317<P>This directive enables proxy caching and sets general cache parameters. The <DB> parameter specifies which underlying database is to be used to hold cached entries. It should be set to <TT>bdb</TT> or <TT>hdb</TT>. The <maxentries> parameter specifies the total number of entries which may be held in the cache. The <nattrsets> parameter specifies the total number of attribute sets (as specified by the <TT>proxyAttrSet</TT> directive) that may be defined. The <entrylimit> parameter specifies the maximum number of entries in a cacheable query. The <period> specifies the consistency check period (in seconds). In each period, queries with expired TTLs are removed.</P> 5318<H4><A NAME="Defining attribute sets">12.9.2.2. Defining attribute sets</A></H4> 5319<PRE> 5320 proxyAttrset <index> <attrs...> 5321</PRE> 5322<P>Used to associate a set of attributes to an index. Each attribute set is associated with an index number from 0 to <numattrsets>-1. These indices are used by the proxyTemplate directive to define cacheable templates.</P> 5323<H4><A NAME="Specifying cacheable templates">12.9.2.3. Specifying cacheable templates</A></H4> 5324<PRE> 5325 proxyTemplate <prototype_string> <attrset_index> <TTL> 5326</PRE> 5327<P>Specifies a cacheable template and the "time to live" (in sec) <TTL> for queries belonging to the template. A template is described by its prototype filter string and set of required attributes identified by <attrset_index>.</P> 5328<H4><A NAME="Example">12.9.2.4. Example</A></H4> 5329<P>An example <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) database section for a caching server which proxies for the <TT>"dc=example,dc=com"</TT> subtree held at server <TT>ldap.example.com</TT>.</P> 5330<PRE> 5331 database ldap 5332 suffix "dc=example,dc=com" 5333 rootdn "dc=example,dc=com" 5334 uri ldap://ldap.example.com/ 5335 overlay proxycache 5336 proxycache bdb 100000 1 1000 100 5337 proxyAttrset 0 mail postaladdress telephonenumber 5338 proxyTemplate (sn=) 0 3600 5339 proxyTemplate (&(sn=)(givenName=)) 0 3600 5340 proxyTemplate (&(departmentNumber=)(secretary=*)) 0 3600 5341 5342 cachesize 20 5343 directory ./testrun/db.2.a 5344 index objectClass eq 5345 index cn,sn,uid,mail pres,eq,sub 5346</PRE> 5347<H5><A NAME="Cacheable Queries">12.9.2.4.1. Cacheable Queries</A></H5> 5348<P>A LDAP search query is cacheable when its filter matches one of the templates as defined in the "proxyTemplate" statements and when it references only the attributes specified in the corresponding attribute set. In the example above the attribute set number 0 defines that only the attributes: <TT>mail postaladdress telephonenumber</TT> are cached for the following proxyTemplates.</P> 5349<H5><A NAME="Examples:">12.9.2.4.2. Examples:</A></H5> 5350<PRE> 5351 Filter: (&(sn=Richard*)(givenName=jack)) 5352 Attrs: mail telephoneNumber 5353</PRE> 5354<P>is cacheable, because it matches the template <TT>(&(sn=)(givenName=))</TT> and its attributes are contained in proxyAttrset 0.</P> 5355<PRE> 5356 Filter: (&(sn=Richard*)(telephoneNumber)) 5357 Attrs: givenName 5358</PRE> 5359<P>is not cacheable, because the filter does not match the template, nor is the attribute givenName stored in the cache</P> 5360<PRE> 5361 Filter: (|(sn=Richard*)(givenName=jack)) 5362 Attrs: mail telephoneNumber 5363</PRE> 5364<P>is not cacheable, because the filter does not match the template ( logical OR "|" condition instead of logical AND "&" )</P> 5365<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.9.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5366<P><EM>slapo-pcache(5)</EM></P> 5367<H2><A NAME="Password Policies">12.10. Password Policies</A></H2> 5368<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.10.1. Overview</A></H3> 5369<P>This overlay follows the specifications contained in the draft RFC titled draft-behera-ldap-password-policy-09. While the draft itself is expired, it has been implemented in several directory servers, including slapd. Nonetheless, it is important to note that it is a draft, meaning that it is subject to change and is a work-in-progress.</P> 5370<P>The key abilities of the password policy overlay are as follows:</P> 5371<UL> 5372<LI>Enforce a minimum length for new passwords 5373<LI>Make sure passwords are not changed too frequently 5374<LI>Cause passwords to expire, provide warnings before they need to be changed, and allow a fixed number of 'grace' logins to allow them to be changed after they have expired 5375<LI>Maintain a history of passwords to prevent password re-use 5376<LI>Prevent password guessing by locking a password for a specified period of time after repeated authentication failures 5377<LI>Force a password to be changed at the next authentication 5378<LI>Set an administrative lock on an account 5379<LI>Support multiple password policies on a default or a per-object basis. 5380<LI>Perform arbitrary quality checks using an external loadable module. This is a non-standard extension of the draft RFC.</UL> 5381<H3><A NAME="Password Policy Configuration">12.10.2. Password Policy Configuration</A></H3> 5382<P>Instantiate the module in the database where it will be used, after adding the new ppolicy schema and loading the ppolicy module. The following example shows the ppolicy module being added to the database that handles the naming context "dc=example,dc=com". In this example we are also specifying the DN of a policy object to use if none other is specified in a user's object.</P> 5383<PRE> 5384 database bdb 5385 suffix "dc=example,dc=com" 5386 [...additional database configuration directives go here...] 5387 5388 overlay ppolicy 5389 ppolicy_default "cn=default,ou=policies,dc=example,dc=com" 5390</PRE> 5391<P>Now we need a container for the policy objects. In our example the password policy objects are going to be placed in a section of the tree called "ou=policies,dc=example,dc=com":</P> 5392<PRE> 5393 dn: ou=policies,dc=example,dc=com 5394 objectClass: organizationalUnit 5395 objectClass: top 5396 ou: policies 5397</PRE> 5398<P>The default policy object that we are creating defines the following policies:</P> 5399<UL> 5400<LI>The user is allowed to change his own password. Note that the directory ACLs for this attribute can also affect this ability (pwdAllowUserChange: TRUE). 5401<LI>The name of the password attribute is "userPassword" (pwdAttribute: userPassword). Note that this is the only value that is accepted by OpenLDAP for this attribute. 5402<LI>The server will check the syntax of the password. If the server is unable to check the syntax (i.e., it was hashed or otherwise encoded by the client) it will return an error refusing the password (pwdCheckQuality: 2). 5403<LI>When a client includes the Password Policy Request control with a bind request, the server will respond with a password expiration warning if it is going to expire in ten minutes or less (pwdExpireWarning: 600). The warnings themselves are returned in a Password Policy Response control. 5404<LI>When the password for a DN has expired, the server will allow five additional "grace" logins (pwdGraceAuthNLimit: 5). 5405<LI>The server will maintain a history of the last five passwords that were used for a DN (pwdInHistory: 5). 5406<LI>The server will lock the account after the maximum number of failed bind attempts has been exceeded (pwdLockout: TRUE). 5407<LI>When the server has locked an account, the server will keep it locked until an administrator unlocks it (pwdLockoutDuration: 0) 5408<LI>The server will reset its failed bind count after a period of 30 seconds. 5409<LI>Passwords will not expire (pwdMaxAge: 0). 5410<LI>Passwords can be changed as often as desired (pwdMinAge: 0). 5411<LI>Passwords must be at least 5 characters in length (pwdMinLength: 5). 5412<LI>The password does not need to be changed at the first bind or when the administrator has reset the password (pwdMustChange: FALSE) 5413<LI>The current password does not need to be included with password change requests (pwdSafeModify: FALSE) 5414<LI>The server will only allow five failed binds in a row for a particular DN (pwdMaxFailure: 5).</UL> 5415<P>The actual policy would be:</P> 5416<PRE> 5417 dn: cn=default,ou=policies,dc=example,dc=com 5418 cn: default 5419 objectClass: pwdPolicy 5420 objectClass: person 5421 objectClass: top 5422 pwdAllowUserChange: TRUE 5423 pwdAttribute: userPassword 5424 pwdCheckQuality: 2 5425 pwdExpireWarning: 600 5426 pwdFailureCountInterval: 30 5427 pwdGraceAuthNLimit: 5 5428 pwdInHistory: 5 5429 pwdLockout: TRUE 5430 pwdLockoutDuration: 0 5431 pwdMaxAge: 0 5432 pwdMaxFailure: 5 5433 pwdMinAge: 0 5434 pwdMinLength: 5 5435 pwdMustChange: FALSE 5436 pwdSafeModify: FALSE 5437 sn: dummy value 5438</PRE> 5439<P>You can create additional policy objects as needed.</P> 5440<P>There are two ways password policy can be applied to individual objects:</P> 5441<P>1. The pwdPolicySubentry in a user's object - If a user's object has a pwdPolicySubEntry attribute specifying the DN of a policy object, then the policy defined by that object is applied.</P> 5442<P>2. Default password policy - If there is no specific pwdPolicySubentry set for an object, and the password policy module was configured with the DN of a default policy object and if that object exists, then the policy defined in that object is applied.</P> 5443<P>Please see <EM>slapo-ppolicy(5)</EM> for complete explanations of features and discussion of "Password Management Issues" at <A HREF="http://www.symas.com/blog/?page_id=66">http://www.symas.com/blog/?page_id=66</A></P> 5444<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.10.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5445<P><EM>slapo-ppolicy(5)</EM></P> 5446<H2><A NAME="Referential Integrity">12.11. Referential Integrity</A></H2> 5447<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.11.1. Overview</A></H3> 5448<P>This overlay can be used with a backend database such as slapd-bdb(5) to maintain the cohesiveness of a schema which utilizes reference attributes.</P> 5449<P>Whenever a <EM>modrdn</EM> or <EM>delete</EM> is performed, that is, when an entry's DN is renamed or an entry is removed, the server will search the directory for references to this DN (in selected attributes: see below) and update them accordingly. If it was a <EM>delete</EM> operation, the reference is deleted. If it was a <EM>modrdn</EM> operation, then the reference is updated with the new DN.</P> 5450<P>For example, a very common administration task is to maintain group membership lists, specially when users are removed from the directory. When an user account is deleted or renamed, all groups this user is a member of have to be updated. LDAP administrators usually have scripts for that. But we can use the <TT>refint</TT> overlay to automate this task. In this example, if the user is removed from the directory, the overlay will take care to remove the user from all the groups he/she was a member of. No more scripting for this.</P> 5451<H3><A NAME="Referential Integrity Configuration">12.11.2. Referential Integrity Configuration</A></H3> 5452<P>The configuration for this overlay is as follows:</P> 5453<PRE> 5454 overlay refint 5455 refint_attributes <attribute [attribute ...]> 5456 refint_nothing <string> 5457</PRE> 5458<UL> 5459<LI><TT>refint_attributes</TT>: this parameter specifies a space separated list of attributes which will have the referential integrity maintained. When an entry is removed or has its DN renamed, the server will do an internal search for any of the <TT>refint_attributes</TT> that point to the affected DN and update them accordingly. IMPORTANT: the attributes listed here must have the <TT>distinguishedName</TT> syntax, that is, hold DNs as values. 5460<LI><TT>refint_nothing</TT>: some times, while trying to maintain the referential integrity, the server has to remove the last attribute of its kind from an entry. This may be prohibited by the schema: for example, the <TT>groupOfNames</TT> object class requires at least one member. In these cases, the server will add the attribute value specified in <TT>refint_nothing</TT> to the entry.</UL> 5461<P>To illustrate this overlay, we will use the group membership scenario.</P> 5462<P>In <TT>slapd.conf</TT>:</P> 5463<PRE> 5464 overlay refint 5465 refint_attributes member 5466 refint_nothing "cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com" 5467</PRE> 5468<P>This configuration tells the overlay to maintain the referential integrity of the <TT>member</TT> attribute. This attribute is used in the <TT>groupOfNames</TT> object class which always needs a member, so we add the <TT>refint_nothing</TT> directive to fill in the group with a standard member should all the members vanish.</P> 5469<P>If we have the following group membership, the refint overlay will automatically remove <TT>john</TT> from the group if his entry is removed from the directory:</P> 5470<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="refint.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 5471<P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Maintaining referential integrity in groups</P> 5472<P>Notice that if we rename (<TT>modrdn</TT>) the <TT>john</TT> entry to, say, <TT>jsmith</TT>, the refint overlay will also rename the reference in the <TT>member</TT> attribute, so the group membership stays correct.</P> 5473<P>If we removed all users from the directory who are a member of this group, then the end result would be a single member in the group: <TT>cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com</TT>. This is the <TT>refint_nothing</TT> parameter kicking into action so that the schema is not violated.</P> 5474<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.11.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5475<P><EM>slapo-refint(5)</EM></P> 5476<H2><A NAME="Return Code">12.12. Return Code</A></H2> 5477<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.12.1. Overview</A></H3> 5478<P>This overlay is useful to test the behavior of clients when server-generated erroneous and/or unusual responses occur, for example; error codes, referrals, excessive response times and so on.</P> 5479<P>This would be classed as a debugging tool whilst developing client software or additional Overlays.</P> 5480<P>For detailed information, please see the <EM>slapo-retcode(5)</EM> man page.</P> 5481<H3><A NAME="Return Code Configuration">12.12.2. Return Code Configuration</A></H3> 5482<P>The retcode overlay utilizes the "return code" schema described in the man page. This schema is specifically designed for use with this overlay and is not intended to be used otherwise.</P> 5483<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 5484<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The necessary schema is loaded automatically by the overlay. 5485<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 5486<P>An example configuration might be:</P> 5487<PRE> 5488 overlay retcode 5489 retcode-parent "ou=RetCodes,dc=example,dc=com" 5490 include ./retcode.conf 5491 5492 retcode-item "cn=Unsolicited" 0x00 unsolicited="0" 5493 retcode-item "cn=Notice of Disconnect" 0x00 unsolicited="1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.20036" 5494 retcode-item "cn=Pre-disconnect" 0x34 flags="pre-disconnect" 5495 retcode-item "cn=Post-disconnect" 0x34 flags="post-disconnect" 5496</PRE> 5497<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 5498<STRONG>Note: </STRONG><EM>retcode.conf</EM> can be found in the openldap source at: <TT>tests/data/retcode.conf</TT> 5499<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 5500<P>An excerpt of a <TT>retcode.conf</TT> would be something like:</P> 5501<PRE> 5502 retcode-item "cn=success" 0x00 5503 5504 retcode-item "cn=success w/ delay" 0x00 sleeptime=2 5505 5506 retcode-item "cn=operationsError" 0x01 5507 retcode-item "cn=protocolError" 0x02 5508 retcode-item "cn=timeLimitExceeded" 0x03 op=search 5509 retcode-item "cn=sizeLimitExceeded" 0x04 op=search 5510 retcode-item "cn=compareFalse" 0x05 op=compare 5511 retcode-item "cn=compareTrue" 0x06 op=compare 5512 retcode-item "cn=authMethodNotSupported" 0x07 5513 retcode-item "cn=strongAuthNotSupported" 0x07 text="same as authMethodNotSupported" 5514 retcode-item "cn=strongAuthRequired" 0x08 5515 retcode-item "cn=strongerAuthRequired" 0x08 text="same as strongAuthRequired" 5516</PRE> 5517<P>Please see <TT>tests/data/retcode.conf</TT> for a complete <TT>retcode.conf</TT></P> 5518<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.12.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5519<P><EM>slapo-retcode(5)</EM></P> 5520<H2><A NAME="Rewrite/Remap">12.13. Rewrite/Remap</A></H2> 5521<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.13.1. Overview</A></H3> 5522<P>It performs basic DN/data rewrite and objectClass/attributeType mapping. Its usage is mostly intended to provide virtual views of existing data either remotely, in conjunction with the proxy backend described in <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM>, or locally, in conjunction with the relay backend described in <EM>slapd-relay(5)</EM>.</P> 5523<P>This overlay is extremely configurable and advanced, therefore recommended reading is the <EM>slapo-rwm(5)</EM> man page.</P> 5524<H3><A NAME="Rewrite/Remap Configuration">12.13.2. Rewrite/Remap Configuration</A></H3> 5525<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.13.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5526<P><EM>slapo-rwm(5)</EM></P> 5527<H2><A NAME="Sync Provider">12.14. Sync Provider</A></H2> 5528<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.14.1. Overview</A></H3> 5529<P>This overlay implements the provider-side support for the LDAP Content Synchronization (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt">RFC4533</A>) as well as syncrepl replication support, including persistent search functionality.</P> 5530<H3><A NAME="Sync Provider Configuration">12.14.2. Sync Provider Configuration</A></H3> 5531<P>There is very little configuration needed for this overlay, in fact for many situations merely loading the overlay will suffice.</P> 5532<P>However, because the overlay creates a contextCSN attribute in the root entry of the database which is updated for every write operation performed against the database and only updated in memory, it is recommended to configure a checkpoint so that the contextCSN is written into the underlying database to minimize recovery time after an unclean shutdown:</P> 5533<PRE> 5534 overlay syncprov 5535 syncprov-checkpoint 100 10 5536</PRE> 5537<P>For every 100 operations or 10 minutes, which ever is sooner, the contextCSN will be checkpointed.</P> 5538<P>The four configuration directives available are <B>syncprov-checkpoint</B>, <B>syncprov-sessionlog</B>, <B>syncprov-nopresent</B> and <B>syncprov-reloadhint</B> which are covered in the man page discussing various other scenarios where this overlay can be used.</P> 5539<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.14.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5540<P>The <EM>slapo-syncprov(5)</EM> man page and the <A HREF="#Configuring the different replication types">Configuring the different replication types</A> section</P> 5541<H2><A NAME="Translucent Proxy">12.15. Translucent Proxy</A></H2> 5542<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.15.1. Overview</A></H3> 5543<P>This overlay can be used with a backend database such as <EM>slapd-bdb</EM>(5) to create a "translucent proxy".</P> 5544<P>Entries retrieved from a remote LDAP server may have some or all attributes overridden, or new attributes added, by entries in the local database before being presented to the client.</P> 5545<P>A search operation is first populated with entries from the remote LDAP server, the attributes of which are then overridden with any attributes defined in the local database. Local overrides may be populated with the add, modify, and modrdn operations, the use of which is restricted to the root user of the translucent local database.</P> 5546<P>A compare operation will perform a comparison with attributes defined in the local database record (if any) before any comparison is made with data in the remote database.</P> 5547<H3><A NAME="Translucent Proxy Configuration">12.15.2. Translucent Proxy Configuration</A></H3> 5548<P>There are various options available with this overlay, but for this example we will demonstrate adding new attributes to a remote entry and also searching against these newly added local attributes. For more information about overriding remote entries and search configuration, please see <EM>slapo-translucent(5)</EM></P> 5549<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 5550<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The Translucent Proxy overlay will disable schema checking in the local database, so that an entry consisting of overlay attributes need not adhere to the complete schema. 5551<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 5552<P>First we configure the overlay in the normal manner:</P> 5553<PRE> 5554 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.schema 5555 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/cosine.schema 5556 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/nis.schema 5557 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema 5558 5559 pidfile ./slapd.pid 5560 argsfile ./slapd.args 5561 5562 database bdb 5563 suffix "dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 5564 rootdn "cn=trans,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 5565 rootpw secret 5566 directory ./openldap-data 5567 5568 index objectClass eq 5569 5570 overlay translucent 5571 translucent_local carLicense 5572 5573 uri ldap://192.168.X.X:389 5574 lastmod off 5575 acl-bind binddn="cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" credentials="blahblah" 5576</PRE> 5577<P>You will notice the overlay directive and a directive to say what attribute we want to be able to search against in the local database. We must also load the ldap backend which will connect to the remote directory server.</P> 5578<P>Now we take an example LDAP group:</P> 5579<PRE> 5580 # itsupport, Groups, suretecsystems.com 5581 dn: cn=itsupport,ou=Groups,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5582 objectClass: posixGroup 5583 objectClass: sambaGroupMapping 5584 cn: itsupport 5585 gidNumber: 1000 5586 sambaSID: S-1-5-21-XXX 5587 sambaGroupType: 2 5588 displayName: itsupport 5589 memberUid: ghenry 5590 memberUid: joebloggs 5591</PRE> 5592<P>and create an LDIF file we can use to add our data to the local database, using some pretty strange choices of new attributes for demonstration purposes:</P> 5593<PRE> 5594 [ghenry@suretec test_configs]$ cat test-translucent-add.ldif 5595 dn: cn=itsupport,ou=Groups,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5596 businessCategory: frontend-override 5597 carLicense: LIVID 5598 employeeType: special 5599 departmentNumber: 9999999 5600 roomNumber: 41L-535 5601</PRE> 5602<P>Searching against the proxy gives:</P> 5603<PRE> 5604 [ghenry@suretec test_configs]$ ldapsearch -x -H ldap://127.0.0.1:9001 "(cn=itsupport)" 5605 # itsupport, Groups, OxObjects, suretecsystems.com 5606 dn: cn=itsupport,ou=Groups,ou=OxObjects,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5607 objectClass: posixGroup 5608 objectClass: sambaGroupMapping 5609 cn: itsupport 5610 gidNumber: 1003 5611 SAMBASID: S-1-5-21-XXX 5612 SAMBAGROUPTYPE: 2 5613 displayName: itsupport 5614 memberUid: ghenry 5615 memberUid: joebloggs 5616 roomNumber: 41L-535 5617 departmentNumber: 9999999 5618 employeeType: special 5619 carLicense: LIVID 5620 businessCategory: frontend-override 5621</PRE> 5622<P>Here we can see that the 5 new attributes are added to the remote entry before being returned to the our client.</P> 5623<P>Because we have configured a local attribute to search against:</P> 5624<PRE> 5625 overlay translucent 5626 translucent_local carLicense 5627</PRE> 5628<P>we can also search for that to return the completely fabricated entry:</P> 5629<PRE> 5630 ldapsearch -x -H ldap://127.0.0.1:9001 (carLicense=LIVID) 5631</PRE> 5632<P>This is an extremely feature because you can then extend a remote directory server locally and also search against the local entries.</P> 5633<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 5634<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Because the translucent overlay does not perform any DN rewrites, the local and remote database instances must have the same suffix. Other configurations will probably fail with No Such Object and other errors 5635<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 5636<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.15.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5637<P><EM>slapo-translucent(5)</EM></P> 5638<H2><A NAME="Attribute Uniqueness">12.16. Attribute Uniqueness</A></H2> 5639<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.16.1. Overview</A></H3> 5640<P>This overlay can be used with a backend database such as <EM>slapd-bdb(5)</EM> to enforce the uniqueness of some or all attributes within a subtree.</P> 5641<H3><A NAME="Attribute Uniqueness Configuration">12.16.2. Attribute Uniqueness Configuration</A></H3> 5642<P>This overlay is only effective on new data from the point the overlay is enabled. To check uniqueness for existing data, you can export and import your data again via the LDAP Add operation, which will not be suitable for large amounts of data, unlike <B>slapcat</B>.</P> 5643<P>For the following example, if uniqueness were enforced for the <B>mail</B> attribute, the subtree would be searched for any other records which also have a <B>mail</B> attribute containing the same value presented with an <B>add</B>, <B>modify</B> or <B>modrdn</B> operation which are unique within the configured scope. If any are found, the request is rejected.</P> 5644<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 5645<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>If no attributes are specified, for example <B>ldap:///??sub?</B>, then the URI applies to all non-operational attributes. However, the keyword <B>ignore</B> can be specified to exclude certain non-operational attributes. 5646<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 5647<P>To search at the base dn of the current backend database ensuring uniqueness of the <B>mail</B> attribute, we simply add the following configuration:</P> 5648<PRE> 5649 overlay unique 5650 unique_uri ldap:///?mail?sub? 5651</PRE> 5652<P>For an existing entry of:</P> 5653<PRE> 5654 dn: cn=gavin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5655 objectClass: top 5656 objectClass: inetorgperson 5657 cn: gavin 5658 sn: henry 5659 mail: ghenry@suretecsystems.com 5660</PRE> 5661<P>and we then try to add a new entry of:</P> 5662<PRE> 5663 dn: cn=robert,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5664 objectClass: top 5665 objectClass: inetorgperson 5666 cn: robert 5667 sn: jones 5668 mail: ghenry@suretecsystems.com 5669</PRE> 5670<P>would result in an error like so:</P> 5671<PRE> 5672 adding new entry "cn=robert,dc=example,dc=com" 5673 ldap_add: Constraint violation (19) 5674 additional info: some attributes not unique 5675</PRE> 5676<P>The overlay can have multiple URIs specified within a domain, allowing complex selections of objects and also have multiple <B>unique_uri</B> statements or <B>olcUniqueURI</B> attributes which will create independent domains.</P> 5677<P>For more information and details about the <B>strict</B> and <B>ignore</B> keywords, please see the <EM>slapo-unique(5)</EM> man page.</P> 5678<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.16.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5679<P><EM>slapo-unique(5)</EM></P> 5680<H2><A NAME="Value Sorting">12.17. Value Sorting</A></H2> 5681<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.17.1. Overview</A></H3> 5682<P>The Value Sorting overlay can be used with a backend database to sort the values of specific multi-valued attributes within a subtree. The sorting occurs whenever the attributes are returned in a search response.</P> 5683<H3><A NAME="Value Sorting Configuration">12.17.2. Value Sorting Configuration</A></H3> 5684<P>Sorting can be specified in ascending or descending order, using either numeric or alphanumeric sort methods. Additionally, a "weighted" sort can be specified, which uses a numeric weight prepended to the attribute values.</P> 5685<P>The weighted sort is always performed in ascending order, but may be combined with the other methods for values that all have equal weights. The weight is specified by prepending an integer weight {<weight>} in front of each value of the attribute for which weighted sorting is desired. This weighting factor is stripped off and never returned in search results.</P> 5686<P>Here are a few examples:</P> 5687<PRE> 5688 loglevel sync stats 5689 5690 database hdb 5691 suffix "dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 5692 directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data 5693 5694 ...... 5695 5696 overlay valsort 5697 valsort-attr memberUid ou=Groups,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com alpha-ascend 5698</PRE> 5699<P>For example, ascend:</P> 5700<PRE> 5701 # sharedemail, Groups, suretecsystems.com 5702 dn: cn=sharedemail,ou=Groups,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5703 objectClass: posixGroup 5704 objectClass: top 5705 cn: sharedemail 5706 gidNumber: 517 5707 memberUid: admin 5708 memberUid: dovecot 5709 memberUid: laura 5710 memberUid: suretec 5711</PRE> 5712<P>For weighted, we change our data to:</P> 5713<PRE> 5714 # sharedemail, Groups, suretecsystems.com 5715 dn: cn=sharedemail,ou=Groups,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5716 objectClass: posixGroup 5717 objectClass: top 5718 cn: sharedemail 5719 gidNumber: 517 5720 memberUid: {4}admin 5721 memberUid: {2}dovecot 5722 memberUid: {1}laura 5723 memberUid: {3}suretec 5724</PRE> 5725<P>and change the config to:</P> 5726<PRE> 5727 overlay valsort 5728 valsort-attr memberUid ou=Groups,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com weighted 5729</PRE> 5730<P>Searching now results in:</P> 5731<PRE> 5732 # sharedemail, Groups, OxObjects, suretecsystems.com 5733 dn: cn=sharedemail,ou=Groups,ou=OxObjects,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com 5734 objectClass: posixGroup 5735 objectClass: top 5736 cn: sharedemail 5737 gidNumber: 517 5738 memberUid: laura 5739 memberUid: dovecot 5740 memberUid: suretec 5741 memberUid: admin 5742</PRE> 5743<H3><A NAME="Further Information">12.17.3. Further Information</A></H3> 5744<P><EM>slapo-valsort(5)</EM></P> 5745<H2><A NAME="Overlay Stacking">12.18. Overlay Stacking</A></H2> 5746<H3><A NAME="Overview">12.18.1. Overview</A></H3> 5747<P>Overlays can be stacked, which means that more than one overlay can be instantiated for each database, or for the <TT>frontend</TT>. As a consequence, each overlays function is called, if defined, when overlay execution is invoked. Multiple overlays are executed in reverse order (as a stack) with respect to their definition in slapd.conf (5), or with respect to their ordering in the config database, as documented in slapd-config (5).</P> 5748<H3><A NAME="Example Scenarios">12.18.2. Example Scenarios</A></H3> 5749<H4><A NAME="Samba">12.18.2.1. Samba</A></H4> 5750<P></P> 5751<HR> 5752<H1><A NAME="Schema Specification">13. Schema Specification</A></H1> 5753<P>This chapter describes how to extend the user schema used by <EM>slapd</EM>(8). The chapter assumes the reader is familiar with the <TERM>LDAP</TERM>/<TERM>X.500</TERM> information model.</P> 5754<P>The first section, <A HREF="#Distributed Schema Files">Distributed Schema Files</A> details optional schema definitions provided in the distribution and where to obtain other definitions. The second section, <A HREF="#Extending Schema">Extending Schema</A>, details how to define new schema items.</P> 5755<P>This chapter does not discuss how to extend system schema used by <EM>slapd</EM>(8) as this requires source code modification. System schema includes all operational attribute types or any object class which allows or requires an operational attribute (directly or indirectly).</P> 5756<H2><A NAME="Distributed Schema Files">13.1. Distributed Schema Files</A></H2> 5757<P>OpenLDAP Software is distributed with a set of schema specifications for your use. Each set is defined in a file suitable for inclusion (using the <TT>include</TT> directive) in your <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file. These schema files are normally installed in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/schema</TT> directory.</P> 5758<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 5759<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 8.1: Provided Schema Specifications</CAPTION> 5760<TR CLASS="heading"> 5761<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5762<STRONG>File</STRONG> 5763</TD> 5764<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5765<STRONG>Description</STRONG> 5766</TD> 5767</TR> 5768<TR> 5769<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5770<TT>core.schema</TT> 5771</TD> 5772<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5773OpenLDAP <EM>core</EM> (required) 5774</TD> 5775</TR> 5776<TR> 5777<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5778<TT>cosine.schema</TT> 5779</TD> 5780<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5781Cosine and Internet X.500 (useful) 5782</TD> 5783</TR> 5784<TR> 5785<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5786<TT>inetorgperson.schema</TT> 5787</TD> 5788<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5789InetOrgPerson (useful) 5790</TD> 5791</TR> 5792<TR> 5793<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5794<TT>misc.schema</TT> 5795</TD> 5796<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5797Assorted (experimental) 5798</TD> 5799</TR> 5800<TR> 5801<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5802<TT>nis.schema</TT> 5803</TD> 5804<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5805Network Information Services (FYI) 5806</TD> 5807</TR> 5808<TR> 5809<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5810<TT>openldap.schema</TT> 5811</TD> 5812<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5813OpenLDAP Project (experimental) 5814</TD> 5815</TR> 5816</TABLE> 5817 5818<P>To use any of these schema files, you only need to include the desired file in the global definitions portion of your <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file. For example:</P> 5819<PRE> 5820 # include schema 5821 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.schema 5822 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/cosine.schema 5823 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema 5824</PRE> 5825<P>Additional files may be available. Please consult the OpenLDAP <TERM>FAQ</TERM> (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/">http://www.openldap.org/faq/</A>).</P> 5826<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 5827<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>You should not modify any of the schema items defined in provided files. 5828<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 5829<H2><A NAME="Extending Schema">13.2. Extending Schema</A></H2> 5830<P>Schema used by <EM>slapd</EM>(8) may be extended to support additional syntaxes, matching rules, attribute types, and object classes. This chapter details how to add user application attribute types and object classes using the syntaxes and matching rules already supported by slapd. slapd can also be extended to support additional syntaxes, matching rules and system schema, but this requires some programming and hence is not discussed here.</P> 5831<P>There are five steps to defining new schema:</P> 5832<OL> 5833<LI>obtain Object Identifier 5834<LI>choose a name prefix 5835<LI>create local schema file 5836<LI>define custom attribute types (if necessary) 5837<LI>define custom object classes</OL> 5838<H3><A NAME="Object Identifiers">13.2.1. Object Identifiers</A></H3> 5839<P>Each schema element is identified by a globally unique <TERM>Object Identifier</TERM> (OID). OIDs are also used to identify other objects. They are commonly found in protocols described by <TERM>ASN.1</TERM>. In particular, they are heavily used by the <TERM>Simple Network Management Protocol</TERM> (SNMP). As OIDs are hierarchical, your organization can obtain one OID and branch it as needed. For example, if your organization were assigned OID <TT>1.1</TT>, you could branch the tree as follows:</P> 5840<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 5841<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 8.2: Example OID hierarchy</CAPTION> 5842<TR CLASS="heading"> 5843<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5844<STRONG>OID</STRONG> 5845</TD> 5846<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5847<STRONG>Assignment</STRONG> 5848</TD> 5849</TR> 5850<TR> 5851<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5852<TT>1.1</TT> 5853</TD> 5854<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5855Organization's OID 5856</TD> 5857</TR> 5858<TR> 5859<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5860<TT>1.1.1</TT> 5861</TD> 5862<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5863SNMP Elements 5864</TD> 5865</TR> 5866<TR> 5867<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5868<TT>1.1.2</TT> 5869</TD> 5870<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5871LDAP Elements 5872</TD> 5873</TR> 5874<TR> 5875<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5876<TT>1.1.2.1</TT> 5877</TD> 5878<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5879AttributeTypes 5880</TD> 5881</TR> 5882<TR> 5883<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5884<TT>1.1.2.1.1</TT> 5885</TD> 5886<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5887x-my-Attribute 5888</TD> 5889</TR> 5890<TR> 5891<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5892<TT>1.1.2.2</TT> 5893</TD> 5894<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5895ObjectClasses 5896</TD> 5897</TR> 5898<TR> 5899<TD ALIGN='Left'> 5900<TT>1.1.2.2.1</TT> 5901</TD> 5902<TD ALIGN='Right'> 5903x-my-ObjectClass 5904</TD> 5905</TR> 5906</TABLE> 5907 5908<P>You are, of course, free to design a hierarchy suitable to your organizational needs under your organization's OID. No matter what hierarchy you choose, you should maintain a registry of assignments you make. This can be a simple flat file or something more sophisticated such as the <EM>OpenLDAP OID Registry</EM> (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/index.cgi?file=197">http://www.openldap.org/faq/index.cgi?file=197</A>).</P> 5909<P>For more information about Object Identifiers (and a listing service) see <A HREF="http://www.alvestrand.no/objectid/">http://www.alvestrand.no/objectid/</A>.</P> 5910<UL> 5911<EM>Under no circumstances should you hijack OID namespace!</EM></UL> 5912<P>To obtain a registered OID at <EM>no cost</EM>, apply for a OID under the <A HREF="http://www.iana.org/">Internet Assigned Numbers Authority</A> (ORG:IANA) maintained <EM>Private Enterprise</EM> arc. Any private enterprise (organization) may request a <TERM>Private Enterprise Number</TERM> (PEN) to be assigned under this arc. Just fill out the IANA form at <A HREF="http://pen.iana.org/pen/PenApplication.page">http://pen.iana.org/pen/PenApplication.page</A> and your official PEN will be sent to you usually within a few days. Your base OID will be something like <TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.X</TT> where <TT>X</TT> is an integer.</P> 5913<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 5914<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>PENs obtained using this form may be used for any purpose including identifying LDAP schema elements. 5915<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 5916<P>Alternatively, OID name space may be available from a national authority (e.g., <A HREF="http://www.ansi.org/">ANSI</A>, <A HREF="http://www.bsi-global.com/">BSI</A>).</P> 5917<H3><A NAME="Naming Elements">13.2.2. Naming Elements</A></H3> 5918<P>In addition to assigning a unique object identifier to each schema element, you should provide at least one textual name for each element. Names should be registered with the <A HREF="http://www.iana.org/">IANA</A> or prefixed with "x-" to place in the "private use" name space.</P> 5919<P>The name should be both descriptive and not likely to clash with names of other schema elements. In particular, any name you choose should not clash with present or future Standard Track names (this is assured if you registered names or use names beginning with "x-").</P> 5920<P>It is noted that you can obtain your own registered name prefix so as to avoid having to register your names individually. See <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4520.txt">RFC4520</A> for details.</P> 5921<P>In the examples below, we have used a short prefix '<TT>x-my-</TT>'. Such a short prefix would only be suitable for a very large, global organization. In general, we recommend something like '<TT>x-de-Firm-</TT>' (German company) or '<TT>x-com-Example</TT>' (elements associated with organization associated with <TT>example.com</TT>).</P> 5922<H3><A NAME="Local schema file">13.2.3. Local schema file</A></H3> 5923<P>The <TT>objectclass</TT> and <TT>attributeTypes</TT> configuration file directives can be used to define schema rules on entries in the directory. It is customary to create a file to contain definitions of your custom schema items. We recommend you create a file <TT>local.schema</TT> in <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/local.schema</TT> and then include this file in your <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file immediately after other schema <TT>include</TT> directives.</P> 5924<PRE> 5925 # include schema 5926 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.schema 5927 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/cosine.schema 5928 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema 5929 # include local schema 5930 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/local.schema 5931</PRE> 5932<H3><A NAME="Attribute Type Specification">13.2.4. Attribute Type Specification</A></H3> 5933<P>The <EM>attributetype</EM> directive is used to define a new attribute type. The directive uses the same Attribute Type Description (as defined in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A>) used by the attributeTypes attribute found in the subschema subentry, e.g.:</P> 5934<PRE> 5935 attributetype <<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> Attribute Type Description> 5936</PRE> 5937<P>where Attribute Type Description is defined by the following <TERM>ABNF</TERM>:</P> 5938<PRE> 5939 AttributeTypeDescription = "(" whsp 5940 numericoid whsp ; AttributeType identifier 5941 [ "NAME" qdescrs ] ; name used in AttributeType 5942 [ "DESC" qdstring ] ; description 5943 [ "OBSOLETE" whsp ] 5944 [ "SUP" woid ] ; derived from this other 5945 ; AttributeType 5946 [ "EQUALITY" woid ; Matching Rule name 5947 [ "ORDERING" woid ; Matching Rule name 5948 [ "SUBSTR" woid ] ; Matching Rule name 5949 [ "SYNTAX" whsp noidlen whsp ] ; Syntax OID 5950 [ "SINGLE-VALUE" whsp ] ; default multi-valued 5951 [ "COLLECTIVE" whsp ] ; default not collective 5952 [ "NO-USER-MODIFICATION" whsp ]; default user modifiable 5953 [ "USAGE" whsp AttributeUsage ]; default userApplications 5954 whsp ")" 5955 5956 AttributeUsage = 5957 "userApplications" / 5958 "directoryOperation" / 5959 "distributedOperation" / ; DSA-shared 5960 "dSAOperation" ; DSA-specific, value depends on server 5961 5962</PRE> 5963<P>where whsp is a space ('<TT> </TT>'), numericoid is a globally unique OID in dotted-decimal form (e.g. <TT>1.1.0</TT>), qdescrs is one or more names, woid is either the name or OID optionally followed by a length specifier (e.g <TT>{10</TT>}).</P> 5964<P>For example, the attribute types <TT>name</TT> and <TT>cn</TT> are defined in <TT>core.schema</TT> as:</P> 5965<PRE> 5966 attributeType ( 2.5.4.41 NAME 'name' 5967 DESC 'name(s) associated with the object' 5968 EQUALITY caseIgnoreMatch 5969 SUBSTR caseIgnoreSubstringsMatch 5970 SYNTAX 1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.15{32768} ) 5971 attributeType ( 2.5.4.3 NAME ( 'cn' 'commonName' ) 5972 DESC 'common name(s) assciated with the object' 5973 SUP name ) 5974</PRE> 5975<P>Notice that each defines the attribute's OID, provides a short name, and a brief description. Each name is an alias for the OID. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) returns the first listed name when returning results.</P> 5976<P>The first attribute, <TT>name</TT>, holds values of <TT>directoryString</TT> (<TERM>UTF-8</TERM> encoded Unicode) syntax. The syntax is specified by OID (1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.15 identifies the directoryString syntax). A length recommendation of 32768 is specified. Servers should support values of this length, but may support longer values. The field does NOT specify a size constraint, so is ignored on servers (such as slapd) which don't impose such size limits. In addition, the equality and substring matching uses case ignore rules. Below are tables listing commonly used syntax and matching rules (<EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports these and many more).</P> 5977<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 5978<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 8.3: Commonly Used Syntaxes</CAPTION> 5979<TR CLASS="heading"> 5980<TD> 5981<STRONG>Name</STRONG> 5982</TD> 5983<TD> 5984<STRONG>OID</STRONG> 5985</TD> 5986<TD> 5987<STRONG>Description</STRONG> 5988</TD> 5989</TR> 5990<TR> 5991<TD> 5992<TT>boolean</TT> 5993</TD> 5994<TD> 5995<TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.7</TT> 5996</TD> 5997<TD> 5998boolean value 5999</TD> 6000</TR> 6001<TR> 6002<TD> 6003<TT>directoryString</TT> 6004</TD> 6005<TD> 6006<TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.15</TT> 6007</TD> 6008<TD> 6009Unicode (UTF-8) string 6010</TD> 6011</TR> 6012<TR> 6013<TD> 6014<TT>distinguishedName</TT> 6015</TD> 6016<TD> 6017<TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.12</TT> 6018</TD> 6019<TD> 6020LDAP <TERM>DN</TERM> 6021</TD> 6022</TR> 6023<TR> 6024<TD> 6025<TT>integer</TT> 6026</TD> 6027<TD> 6028<TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.27</TT> 6029</TD> 6030<TD> 6031integer 6032</TD> 6033</TR> 6034<TR> 6035<TD> 6036<TT>numericString</TT> 6037</TD> 6038<TD> 6039<TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.36</TT> 6040</TD> 6041<TD> 6042numeric string 6043</TD> 6044</TR> 6045<TR> 6046<TD> 6047<TT>OID</TT> 6048</TD> 6049<TD> 6050<TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.38</TT> 6051</TD> 6052<TD> 6053object identifier 6054</TD> 6055</TR> 6056<TR> 6057<TD> 6058<TT>octetString</TT> 6059</TD> 6060<TD> 6061<TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.40</TT> 6062</TD> 6063<TD> 6064arbitrary octets 6065</TD> 6066</TR> 6067</TABLE> 6068 6069<PRE> 6070 6071</PRE> 6072<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 6073<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 8.4: Commonly Used Matching Rules</CAPTION> 6074<TR CLASS="heading"> 6075<TD> 6076<STRONG>Name</STRONG> 6077</TD> 6078<TD> 6079<STRONG>Type</STRONG> 6080</TD> 6081<TD> 6082<STRONG>Description</STRONG> 6083</TD> 6084</TR> 6085<TR> 6086<TD> 6087<TT>booleanMatch</TT> 6088</TD> 6089<TD> 6090equality 6091</TD> 6092<TD> 6093boolean 6094</TD> 6095</TR> 6096<TR> 6097<TD> 6098<TT>caseIgnoreMatch</TT> 6099</TD> 6100<TD> 6101equality 6102</TD> 6103<TD> 6104case insensitive, space insensitive 6105</TD> 6106</TR> 6107<TR> 6108<TD> 6109<TT>caseIgnoreOrderingMatch</TT> 6110</TD> 6111<TD> 6112ordering 6113</TD> 6114<TD> 6115case insensitive, space insensitive 6116</TD> 6117</TR> 6118<TR> 6119<TD> 6120<TT>caseIgnoreSubstringsMatch</TT> 6121</TD> 6122<TD> 6123substrings 6124</TD> 6125<TD> 6126case insensitive, space insensitive 6127</TD> 6128</TR> 6129<TR> 6130<TD> 6131<TT>caseExactMatch</TT> 6132</TD> 6133<TD> 6134equality 6135</TD> 6136<TD> 6137case sensitive, space insensitive 6138</TD> 6139</TR> 6140<TR> 6141<TD> 6142<TT>caseExactOrderingMatch</TT> 6143</TD> 6144<TD> 6145ordering 6146</TD> 6147<TD> 6148case sensitive, space insensitive 6149</TD> 6150</TR> 6151<TR> 6152<TD> 6153<TT>caseExactSubstringsMatch</TT> 6154</TD> 6155<TD> 6156substrings 6157</TD> 6158<TD> 6159case sensitive, space insensitive 6160</TD> 6161</TR> 6162<TR> 6163<TD> 6164<TT>distinguishedNameMatch</TT> 6165</TD> 6166<TD> 6167equality 6168</TD> 6169<TD> 6170distinguished name 6171</TD> 6172</TR> 6173<TR> 6174<TD> 6175<TT>integerMatch</TT> 6176</TD> 6177<TD> 6178equality 6179</TD> 6180<TD> 6181integer 6182</TD> 6183</TR> 6184<TR> 6185<TD> 6186<TT>integerOrderingMatch</TT> 6187</TD> 6188<TD> 6189ordering 6190</TD> 6191<TD> 6192integer 6193</TD> 6194</TR> 6195<TR> 6196<TD> 6197<TT>numericStringMatch</TT> 6198</TD> 6199<TD> 6200equality 6201</TD> 6202<TD> 6203numerical 6204</TD> 6205</TR> 6206<TR> 6207<TD> 6208<TT>numericStringOrderingMatch</TT> 6209</TD> 6210<TD> 6211ordering 6212</TD> 6213<TD> 6214numerical 6215</TD> 6216</TR> 6217<TR> 6218<TD> 6219<TT>numericStringSubstringsMatch</TT> 6220</TD> 6221<TD> 6222substrings 6223</TD> 6224<TD> 6225numerical 6226</TD> 6227</TR> 6228<TR> 6229<TD> 6230<TT>octetStringMatch</TT> 6231</TD> 6232<TD> 6233equality 6234</TD> 6235<TD> 6236octet string 6237</TD> 6238</TR> 6239<TR> 6240<TD> 6241<TT>octetStringOrderingMatch</TT> 6242</TD> 6243<TD> 6244ordering 6245</TD> 6246<TD> 6247octet string 6248</TD> 6249</TR> 6250<TR> 6251<TD> 6252<TT>octetStringSubstringsMatch ordering</TT> 6253</TD> 6254<TD> 6255octet st 6256</TD> 6257<TD> 6258ring 6259</TD> 6260</TR> 6261<TR> 6262<TD> 6263<TT>objectIdentiferMatch</TT> 6264</TD> 6265<TD> 6266equality 6267</TD> 6268<TD> 6269object identifier 6270</TD> 6271</TR> 6272</TABLE> 6273 6274<P>The second attribute, <TT>cn</TT>, is a subtype of <TT>name</TT> hence it inherits the syntax, matching rules, and usage of <TT>name</TT>. <TT>commonName</TT> is an alternative name.</P> 6275<P>Neither attribute is restricted to a single value. Both are meant for usage by user applications. Neither is obsolete nor collective.</P> 6276<P>The following subsections provide a couple of examples.</P> 6277<H4><A NAME="x-my-UniqueName">13.2.4.1. x-my-UniqueName</A></H4> 6278<P>Many organizations maintain a single unique name for each user. Though one could use <TT>displayName</TT> (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2798.txt">RFC2798</A>), this attribute is really meant to be controlled by the user, not the organization. We could just copy the definition of <TT>displayName</TT> from <TT>inetorgperson.schema</TT> and replace the OID, name, and description, e.g:</P> 6279<PRE> 6280 attributetype ( 1.1.2.1.1 NAME 'x-my-UniqueName' 6281 DESC 'unique name with my organization' 6282 EQUALITY caseIgnoreMatch 6283 SUBSTR caseIgnoreSubstringsMatch 6284 SYNTAX 1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.15 6285 SINGLE-VALUE ) 6286</PRE> 6287<P>However, if we want this name to be used in <TT>name</TT> assertions, e.g. <TT>(name=*Jane*)</TT>, the attribute could alternatively be defined as a subtype of <TT>name</TT>, e.g.:</P> 6288<PRE> 6289 attributetype ( 1.1.2.1.1 NAME 'x-my-UniqueName' 6290 DESC 'unique name with my organization' 6291 SUP name ) 6292</PRE> 6293<H4><A NAME="x-my-Photo">13.2.4.2. x-my-Photo</A></H4> 6294<P>Many organizations maintain a photo of each each user. A <TT>x-my-Photo</TT> attribute type could be defined to hold a photo. Of course, one could use just use <TT>jpegPhoto</TT> (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2798.txt">RFC2798</A>) (or a subtype) to hold the photo. However, you can only do this if the photo is in <EM>JPEG File Interchange Format</EM>. Alternatively, an attribute type which uses the <EM>Octet String</EM> syntax can be defined, e.g.:</P> 6295<PRE> 6296 attributetype ( 1.1.2.1.2 NAME 'x-my-Photo' 6297 DESC 'a photo (application defined format)' 6298 SYNTAX 1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.40 6299 SINGLE-VALUE ) 6300</PRE> 6301<P>In this case, the syntax doesn't specify the format of the photo. It's assumed (maybe incorrectly) that all applications accessing this attribute agree on the handling of values.</P> 6302<P>If you wanted to support multiple photo formats, you could define a separate attribute type for each format, prefix the photo with some typing information, or describe the value using <TERM>ASN.1</TERM> and use the <TT>;binary</TT> transfer option.</P> 6303<P>Another alternative is for the attribute to hold a <TERM>URI</TERM> pointing to the photo. You can model such an attribute after <TT>labeledURI</TT> (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2079.txt">RFC2079</A>) or simply create a subtype, e.g.:</P> 6304<PRE> 6305 attributetype ( 1.1.2.1.3 NAME 'x-my-PhotoURI' 6306 DESC 'URI and optional label referring to a photo' 6307 SUP labeledURI ) 6308</PRE> 6309<H3><A NAME="Object Class Specification">13.2.5. Object Class Specification</A></H3> 6310<P>The <EM>objectclasses</EM> directive is used to define a new object class. The directive uses the same Object Class Description (as defined in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A>) used by the objectClasses attribute found in the subschema subentry, e.g.:</P> 6311<PRE> 6312 objectclass <<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> Object Class Description> 6313</PRE> 6314<P>where Object Class Description is defined by the following <TERM>ABNF</TERM>:</P> 6315<PRE> 6316 ObjectClassDescription = "(" whsp 6317 numericoid whsp ; ObjectClass identifier 6318 [ "NAME" qdescrs ] 6319 [ "DESC" qdstring ] 6320 [ "OBSOLETE" whsp ] 6321 [ "SUP" oids ] ; Superior ObjectClasses 6322 [ ( "ABSTRACT" / "STRUCTURAL" / "AUXILIARY" ) whsp ] 6323 ; default structural 6324 [ "MUST" oids ] ; AttributeTypes 6325 [ "MAY" oids ] ; AttributeTypes 6326 whsp ")" 6327</PRE> 6328<P>where whsp is a space ('<TT> </TT>'), numericoid is a globally unique OID in dotted-decimal form (e.g. <TT>1.1.0</TT>), qdescrs is one or more names, and oids is one or more names and/or OIDs.</P> 6329<H4><A NAME="x-my-PhotoObject">13.2.5.1. x-my-PhotoObject</A></H4> 6330<P>To define an <EM>auxiliary</EM> object class which allows x-my-Photo to be added to any existing entry.</P> 6331<PRE> 6332 objectclass ( 1.1.2.2.1 NAME 'x-my-PhotoObject' 6333 DESC 'mixin x-my-Photo' 6334 AUXILIARY 6335 MAY x-my-Photo ) 6336</PRE> 6337<H4><A NAME="x-my-Person">13.2.5.2. x-my-Person</A></H4> 6338<P>If your organization would like have a private <EM>structural</EM> object class to instantiate users, you can subclass one of the existing person classes, such as <TT>inetOrgPerson</TT> (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2798.txt">RFC2798</A>), and add any additional attributes which you desire.</P> 6339<PRE> 6340 objectclass ( 1.1.2.2.2 NAME 'x-my-Person' 6341 DESC 'my person' 6342 SUP inetOrgPerson 6343 MUST ( x-my-UniqueName $ givenName ) 6344 MAY x-my-Photo ) 6345</PRE> 6346<P>The object class inherits the required/allowed attribute types of <TT>inetOrgPerson</TT> but requires <TT>x-my-UniqueName</TT> and <TT>givenName</TT> and allows <TT>x-my-Photo</TT>.</P> 6347<H3><A NAME="OID Macros">13.2.6. OID Macros</A></H3> 6348<P>To ease the management and use of OIDs, <EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports <EM>Object Identifier</EM> macros. The <TT>objectIdentifier</TT> directive is used to equate a macro (name) with a OID. The OID may possibly be derived from a previously defined OID macro. The <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) syntax is:</P> 6349<PRE> 6350 objectIdentifier <name> { <oid> | <name>[:<suffix>] } 6351</PRE> 6352<P>The following demonstrates definition of a set of OID macros and their use in defining schema elements:</P> 6353<PRE> 6354 objectIdentifier myOID 1.1 6355 objectIdentifier mySNMP myOID:1 6356 objectIdentifier myLDAP myOID:2 6357 objectIdentifier myAttributeType myLDAP:1 6358 objectIdentifier myObjectClass myLDAP:2 6359 attributetype ( myAttributeType:3 NAME 'x-my-PhotoURI' 6360 DESC 'URI and optional label referring to a photo' 6361 SUP labeledURI ) 6362 objectclass ( myObjectClass:1 NAME 'x-my-PhotoObject' 6363 DESC 'mixin x-my-Photo' 6364 AUXILIARY 6365 MAY x-my-Photo ) 6366</PRE> 6367<P></P> 6368<HR> 6369<H1><A NAME="Security Considerations">14. Security Considerations</A></H1> 6370<P>OpenLDAP Software is designed to run in a wide variety of computing environments from tightly-controlled closed networks to the global Internet. Hence, OpenLDAP Software supports many different security mechanisms. This chapter describes these mechanisms and discusses security considerations for using OpenLDAP Software.</P> 6371<H2><A NAME="Network Security">14.1. Network Security</A></H2> 6372<H3><A NAME="Selective Listening">14.1.1. Selective Listening</A></H3> 6373<P>By default, <EM>slapd</EM>(8) will listen on both the IPv4 and IPv6 "any" addresses. It is often desirable to have <EM>slapd</EM> listen on select address/port pairs. For example, listening only on the IPv4 address <TT>127.0.0.1</TT> will disallow remote access to the directory server. E.g.:</P> 6374<PRE> 6375 slapd -h ldap://127.0.0.1 6376</PRE> 6377<P>While the server can be configured to listen on a particular interface address, this doesn't necessarily restrict access to the server to only those networks accessible via that interface. To selective restrict remote access, it is recommend that an <A HREF="#IP Firewall">IP Firewall</A> be used to restrict access.</P> 6378<P>See <A HREF="#Command-line Options">Command-line Options</A> and <EM>slapd</EM>(8) for more information.</P> 6379<H3><A NAME="IP Firewall">14.1.2. IP Firewall</A></H3> 6380<P><TERM>IP</TERM> firewall capabilities of the server system can be used to restrict access based upon the client's IP address and/or network interface used to communicate with the client.</P> 6381<P>Generally, <EM>slapd</EM>(8) listens on port 389/tcp for <A HREF="ldap://">ldap://</A> sessions and port 636/tcp for <A HREF="ldaps://">ldaps://</A>) sessions. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) may be configured to listen on other ports.</P> 6382<P>As specifics of how to configure IP firewall are dependent on the particular kind of IP firewall used, no examples are provided here. See the document associated with your IP firewall.</P> 6383<H3><A NAME="TCP Wrappers">14.1.3. TCP Wrappers</A></H3> 6384<P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports <TERM>TCP</TERM> Wrappers. TCP Wrappers provide a rule-based access control system for controlling TCP/IP access to the server. For example, the <EM>host_options</EM>(5) rule:</P> 6385<PRE> 6386 slapd: 10.0.0.0/255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 : ALLOW 6387 slapd: ALL : DENY 6388</PRE> 6389<P>allows only incoming connections from the private network <TT>10.0.0.0</TT> and localhost (<TT>127.0.0.1</TT>) to access the directory service.</P> 6390<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6391<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>IP addresses are used as <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is not normally configured to perform reverse lookups. 6392<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6393<P>It is noted that TCP wrappers require the connection to be accepted. As significant processing is required just to deny a connection, it is generally advised that IP firewall protection be used instead of TCP wrappers.</P> 6394<P>See <EM>hosts_access</EM>(5) for more information on TCP wrapper rules.</P> 6395<H2><A NAME="Data Integrity and Confidentiality Protection">14.2. Data Integrity and Confidentiality Protection</A></H2> 6396<P><TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM> (TLS) can be used to provide data integrity and confidentiality protection. OpenLDAP supports negotiation of <TERM>TLS</TERM> (<TERM>SSL</TERM>) via both StartTLS and <A HREF="ldaps://">ldaps://</A>. See the <A HREF="#Using TLS">Using TLS</A> chapter for more information. StartTLS is the standard track mechanism.</P> 6397<P>A number of <TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM> (SASL) mechanisms, such as <TERM>DIGEST-MD5</TERM> and <TERM>GSSAPI</TERM>, also provide data integrity and confidentiality protection. See the <A HREF="#Using SASL">Using SASL</A> chapter for more information.</P> 6398<H3><A NAME="Security Strength Factors">14.2.1. Security Strength Factors</A></H3> 6399<P>The server uses <TERM>Security Strength Factor</TERM>s (SSF) to indicate the relative strength of protection. A SSF of zero (0) indicates no protections are in place. A SSF of one (1) indicates integrity protection are in place. A SSF greater than one (>1) roughly correlates to the effective encryption key length. For example, <TERM>DES</TERM> is 56, <TERM>3DES</TERM> is 112, and <TERM>AES</TERM> 128, 192, or 256.</P> 6400<P>A number of administrative controls rely on SSFs associated with TLS and SASL protection in place on an LDAP session.</P> 6401<P><TT>security</TT> controls disallow operations when appropriate protections are not in place. For example:</P> 6402<PRE> 6403 security ssf=1 update_ssf=112 6404</PRE> 6405<P>requires integrity protection for all operations and encryption protection, 3DES equivalent, for update operations (e.g. add, delete, modify, etc.). See <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) for details.</P> 6406<P>For fine-grained control, SSFs may be used in access controls. See the <A HREF="#Access Control">Access Control</A> section for more information.</P> 6407<H2><A NAME="Authentication Methods">14.3. Authentication Methods</A></H2> 6408<H3><A NAME=""simple" method">14.3.1. "simple" method</A></H3> 6409<P>The LDAP "simple" method has three modes of operation:</P> 6410<UL> 6411<LI>anonymous, 6412<LI>unauthenticated, and 6413<LI>user/password authenticated.</UL> 6414<P>Anonymous access is requested by providing no name and no password to the "simple" bind operation. Unauthenticated access is requested by providing a name but no password. Authenticated access is requested by providing a valid name and password.</P> 6415<P>An anonymous bind results in an <EM>anonymous</EM> authorization association. Anonymous bind mechanism is enabled by default, but can be disabled by specifying "<TT>disallow bind_anon</TT>" in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5).</P> 6416<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6417<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Disabling the anonymous bind mechanism does not prevent anonymous access to the directory. To require authentication to access the directory, one should instead specify "<TT>require authc</TT>". 6418<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6419<P>An unauthenticated bind also results in an <EM>anonymous</EM> authorization association. Unauthenticated bind mechanism is disabled by default, but can be enabled by specifying "<TT>allow bind_anon_cred</TT>" in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5). As a number of LDAP applications mistakenly generate unauthenticated bind request when authenticated access was intended (that is, they do not ensure a password was provided), this mechanism should generally remain disabled.</P> 6420<P>A successful user/password authenticated bind results in a user authorization identity, the provided name, being associated with the session. User/password authenticated bind is enabled by default. However, as this mechanism itself offers no eavesdropping protection (e.g., the password is set in the clear), it is recommended that it be used only in tightly controlled systems or when the LDAP session is protected by other means (e.g., TLS, <TERM>IPsec</TERM>). Where the administrator relies on TLS to protect the password, it is recommended that unprotected authentication be disabled. This is done using the <TT>security</TT> directive's <TT>simple_bind</TT> option, which provides fine grain control over the level of confidential protection to require for <EM>simple</EM> user/password authentication. E.g., using <TT>security simple_bind=56</TT> would require <EM>simple</EM> binds to use encryption of DES equivalent or better.</P> 6421<P>The user/password authenticated bind mechanism can be completely disabled by setting "<TT>disallow bind_simple</TT>".</P> 6422<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6423<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>An unsuccessful bind always results in the session having an <EM>anonymous</EM> authorization association. 6424<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6425<H3><A NAME="SASL method">14.3.2. SASL method</A></H3> 6426<P>The LDAP <TERM>SASL</TERM> method allows the use of any SASL authentication mechanism. The <A HREF="#Using SASL">Using SASL</A> section discusses the use of SASL.</P> 6427<H2><A NAME="Password Storage">14.4. Password Storage</A></H2> 6428<P>LDAP passwords are normally stored in the <EM>userPassword</EM> attribute. <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4519.txt">RFC4519</A> specifies that passwords are not stored in encrypted (or hashed) form. This allows a wide range of password-based authentication mechanisms, such as <TT>DIGEST-MD5</TT> to be used. This is also the most interoperable storage scheme.</P> 6429<P>However, it may be desirable to store a hash of password instead. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports a variety of storage schemes for the administrator to choose from.</P> 6430<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6431<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Values of password attributes, regardless of storage scheme used, should be protected as if they were clear text. Hashed passwords are subject to <EM>dictionary attacks</EM> and <EM>brute-force attacks</EM>. 6432<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6433<P>The <EM>userPassword</EM> attribute is allowed to have more than one value, and it is possible for each value to be stored in a different form. During authentication, <EM>slapd</EM> will iterate through the values until it finds one that matches the offered password or until it runs out of values to inspect. The storage scheme is stored as a prefix on the value, so a hashed password using the Salted SHA1 (<TT>SSHA</TT>) scheme looks like:</P> 6434<PRE> 6435 userPassword: {SSHA}DkMTwBl+a/3DQTxCYEApdUtNXGgdUac3 6436</PRE> 6437<P>The advantage of hashed passwords is that an attacker which discovers the hash does not have direct access to the actual password. Unfortunately, as dictionary and brute force attacks are generally quite easy for attackers to successfully mount, this advantage is marginal at best (this is why all modern Unix systems use shadow password files).</P> 6438<P>The disadvantages of hashed storage is that they are non-standard, may cause interoperability problem, and generally preclude the use of stronger than Simple (or SASL/PLAIN) password-based authentication mechanisms such as <TT>DIGEST-MD5</TT>.</P> 6439<H3><A NAME="SSHA password storage scheme">14.4.1. SSHA password storage scheme</A></H3> 6440<P>This is the salted version of the SHA scheme. It is believed to be the most secure password storage scheme supported by <EM>slapd</EM>.</P> 6441<P>These values represent the same password:</P> 6442<PRE> 6443 userPassword: {SSHA}DkMTwBl+a/3DQTxCYEApdUtNXGgdUac3 6444 userPassword: {SSHA}d0Q0626PSH9VUld7yWpR0k6BlpQmtczb 6445</PRE> 6446<H3><A NAME="CRYPT password storage scheme">14.4.2. CRYPT password storage scheme</A></H3> 6447<P>This scheme uses the operating system's <EM>crypt(3)</EM> hash function. It normally produces the traditional Unix-style 13 character hash, but on systems with <TT>glibc2</TT> it can also generate the more secure 34-byte MD5 hash.</P> 6448<PRE> 6449 userPassword: {CRYPT}aUihad99hmev6 6450 userPassword: {CRYPT}$1$czBJdDqS$TmkzUAb836oMxg/BmIwN.1 6451</PRE> 6452<P>The advantage of the CRYPT scheme is that passwords can be transferred to or from an existing Unix password file without having to know the cleartext form. Both forms of <EM>crypt</EM> include salt so they have some resistance to dictionary attacks.</P> 6453<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6454<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Since this scheme uses the operating system's <EM>crypt(3)</EM> hash function, it is therefore operating system specific. 6455<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6456<H3><A NAME="MD5 password storage scheme">14.4.3. MD5 password storage scheme</A></H3> 6457<P>This scheme simply takes the MD5 hash of the password and stores it in base64 encoded form:</P> 6458<PRE> 6459 userPassword: {MD5}Xr4ilOzQ4PCOq3aQ0qbuaQ== 6460</PRE> 6461<P>Although safer than cleartext storage, this is not a very secure scheme. The MD5 algorithm is fast, and because there is no salt the scheme is vulnerable to a dictionary attack.</P> 6462<H3><A NAME="SMD5 password storage scheme">14.4.4. SMD5 password storage scheme</A></H3> 6463<P>This improves on the basic MD5 scheme by adding salt (random data which means that there are many possible representations of a given plaintext password). For example, both of these values represent the same password:</P> 6464<PRE> 6465 userPassword: {SMD5}4QWGWZpj9GCmfuqEvm8HtZhZS6E= 6466 userPassword: {SMD5}g2/J/7D5EO6+oPdklp5p8YtNFk4= 6467</PRE> 6468<H3><A NAME="SHA password storage scheme">14.4.5. SHA password storage scheme</A></H3> 6469<P>Like the MD5 scheme, this simply feeds the password through an SHA hash process. SHA is thought to be more secure than MD5, but the lack of salt leaves the scheme exposed to dictionary attacks.</P> 6470<PRE> 6471 userPassword: {SHA}5en6G6MezRroT3XKqkdPOmY/BfQ= 6472</PRE> 6473<H3><A NAME="SASL password storage scheme">14.4.6. SASL password storage scheme</A></H3> 6474<P>This is not really a password storage scheme at all. It uses the value of the <EM>userPassword</EM> attribute to delegate password verification to another process. See below for more information.</P> 6475<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6476<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>This is not the same as using SASL to authenticate the LDAP session. 6477<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6478<H3><A NAME="KERBEROS password storage scheme">14.4.7. KERBEROS password storage scheme</A></H3> 6479<P>This is not really a password storage scheme at all. It uses the value of the <EM>userPassword</EM> attribute to delegate password verification to Kerberos.</P> 6480<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6481<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>This is not the same as using Kerberos authentication of the LDAP session. 6482<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6483<P>This scheme could be said to defeat the advantages of Kerberos by causing the Kerberos password to be exposed to the <EM>slapd</EM> server (and possibly on the network as well).</P> 6484<H2><A NAME="Pass-Through authentication">14.5. Pass-Through authentication</A></H2> 6485<P>Since OpenLDAP 2.0 <EM>slapd</EM> has had the ability to delegate password verification to a separate process. This uses the <EM>sasl_checkpass(3)</EM> function so it can use any back-end server that Cyrus SASL supports for checking passwords. The choice is very wide, as one option is to use <EM>saslauthd(8)</EM> which in turn can use local files, Kerberos, an IMAP server, another LDAP server, or anything supported by the PAM mechanism.</P> 6486<P>The server must be built with the <TT>--enable-spasswd</TT> configuration option to enable pass-through authentication.</P> 6487<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6488<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>This is not the same as using a SASL mechanism to authenticate the LDAP session. 6489<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6490<P>Pass-Through authentication works only with plaintext passwords, as used in the "simple bind" and "SASL PLAIN" authentication mechanisms.}}</P> 6491<P>Pass-Through authentication is selective: it only affects users whose <EM>userPassword</EM> attribute has a value marked with the "{SASL}" scheme. The format of the attribute is:</P> 6492<PRE> 6493 userPassword: {SASL}username@realm 6494</PRE> 6495<P>The <EM>username</EM> and <EM>realm</EM> are passed to the SASL authentication mechanism and are used to identify the account whose password is to be verified. This allows arbitrary mapping between entries in OpenLDAP and accounts known to the backend authentication service.</P> 6496<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6497<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>There is no support for changing passwords in the backend via <EM>slapd</EM>. 6498<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6499<P>It would be wise to use access control to prevent users from changing their passwords through LDAP where they have pass-through authentication enabled.</P> 6500<H3><A NAME="Configuring slapd to use an authentication provider">14.5.1. Configuring slapd to use an authentication provider</A></H3> 6501<P>Where an entry has a "{SASL}" password value, OpenLDAP delegates the whole process of validating that entry's password to Cyrus SASL. All the configuration is therefore done in SASL config files.</P> 6502<P>The first file to be considered is confusingly named <EM>slapd.conf</EM> and is typically found in the SASL library directory, often <TT>/usr/lib/sasl2/slapd.conf</TT> This file governs the use of SASL when talking LDAP to <EM>slapd</EM> as well as the use of SASL backends for pass-through authentication. See <TT>options.html</TT> in the <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">Cyrus SASL</A> docs for full details. Here is a simple example for a server that will use <EM>saslauthd</EM> to verify passwords:</P> 6503<PRE> 6504 mech_list: plain 6505 pwcheck_method: saslauthd 6506 saslauthd_path: /var/run/sasl2/mux 6507</PRE> 6508<H3><A NAME="Configuring saslauthd">14.5.2. Configuring saslauthd</A></H3> 6509<P><EM>saslauthd</EM> is capable of using many different authentication services: see <EM>saslauthd(8)</EM> for details. A common requirement is to delegate some or all authentication to another LDAP server. Here is a sample <TT>saslauthd.conf</TT> that uses Microsoft Active Directory (AD):</P> 6510<PRE> 6511 ldap_servers: ldap://dc1.example.com/ ldap://dc2.example.com/ 6512 6513 ldap_search_base: cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com 6514 ldap_filter: (userPrincipalName=%u) 6515 6516 ldap_bind_dn: cn=saslauthd,cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com 6517 ldap_password: secret 6518</PRE> 6519<P>In this case, <EM>saslauthd</EM> is run with the <TT>ldap</TT> authentication mechanism and is set to combine the SASL realm with the login name:</P> 6520<PRE> 6521 saslauthd -a ldap -r 6522</PRE> 6523<P>This means that the "username@realm" string from the <EM>userPassword</EM> attribute ends up being used to search AD for "userPrincipalName=username@realm" - the password is then verified by attempting to bind to AD using the entry found by the search and the password supplied by the LDAP client.</P> 6524<H3><A NAME="Testing pass-through authentication">14.5.3. Testing pass-through authentication</A></H3> 6525<P>It is usually best to start with the back-end authentication provider and work through <EM>saslauthd</EM> and <EM>slapd</EM> towards the LDAP client.</P> 6526<P>In the AD example above, first check that the DN and password that <EM>saslauthd</EM> will use when it connects to AD are valid:</P> 6527<PRE> 6528 ldapsearch -x -H ldap://dc1.example.com/ \ 6529 -D cn=saslauthd,cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com \ 6530 -w secret \ 6531 -b '' \ 6532 -s base 6533</PRE> 6534<P>Next check that a sample AD user can be found:</P> 6535<PRE> 6536 ldapsearch -x -H ldap://dc1.example.com/ \ 6537 -D cn=saslauthd,cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com \ 6538 -w secret \ 6539 -b cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com \ 6540 "(userPrincipalName=user@ad.example.com)" 6541</PRE> 6542<P>Check that the user can bind to AD:</P> 6543<PRE> 6544 ldapsearch -x -H ldap://dc1.example.com/ \ 6545 -D cn=user,cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com \ 6546 -w userpassword \ 6547 -b cn=user,cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com \ 6548 -s base \ 6549 "(objectclass=*)" 6550</PRE> 6551<P>If all that works then <EM>saslauthd</EM> should be able to do the same:</P> 6552<PRE> 6553 testsaslauthd -u user@ad.example.com -p userpassword 6554 testsaslauthd -u user@ad.example.com -p wrongpassword 6555</PRE> 6556<P>Now put the magic token into an entry in OpenLDAP:</P> 6557<PRE> 6558 userPassword: {SASL}user@ad.example.com 6559</PRE> 6560<P>It should now be possible to bind to OpenLDAP using the DN of that entry and the password of the AD user.</P> 6561<P></P> 6562<HR> 6563<H1><A NAME="Using SASL">15. Using SASL</A></H1> 6564<P>OpenLDAP clients and servers are capable of authenticating via the <TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM> (<TERM>SASL</TERM>) framework, which is detailed in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4422.txt">RFC4422</A>. This chapter describes how to make use of SASL in OpenLDAP.</P> 6565<P>There are several industry standard authentication mechanisms that can be used with SASL, including <TERM>GSSAPI</TERM> for <TERM>Kerberos</TERM> V, <TERM>DIGEST-MD5</TERM>, and <TERM>PLAIN</TERM> and <TERM>EXTERNAL</TERM> for use with <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM> (TLS).</P> 6566<P>The standard client tools provided with OpenLDAP Software, such as <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) and <EM>ldapmodify</EM>(1), will by default attempt to authenticate the user to the <TERM>LDAP</TERM> directory server using SASL. Basic authentication service can be set up by the LDAP administrator with a few steps, allowing users to be authenticated to the slapd server as their LDAP entry. With a few extra steps, some users and services can be allowed to exploit SASL's proxy authorization feature, allowing them to authenticate themselves and then switch their identity to that of another user or service.</P> 6567<P>This chapter assumes you have read <EM>Cyrus SASL for System Administrators</EM>, provided with the <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">Cyrus SASL</A> package (in <TT>doc/sysadmin.html</TT>) and have a working Cyrus SASL installation. You should use the Cyrus SASL <TT>sample_client</TT> and <TT>sample_server</TT> to test your SASL installation before attempting to make use of it with OpenLDAP Software.</P> 6568<P>Note that in the following text the term <EM>user</EM> is used to describe a person or application entity who is connecting to the LDAP server via an LDAP client, such as <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1). That is, the term <EM>user</EM> not only applies to both an individual using an LDAP client, but to an application entity which issues LDAP client operations without direct user control. For example, an e-mail server which uses LDAP operations to access information held in an LDAP server is an application entity.</P> 6569<H2><A NAME="SASL Security Considerations">15.1. SASL Security Considerations</A></H2> 6570<P>SASL offers many different authentication mechanisms. This section briefly outlines security considerations.</P> 6571<P>Some mechanisms, such as PLAIN and LOGIN, offer no greater security over LDAP <EM>simple</EM> authentication. Like LDAP <EM>simple</EM> authentication, such mechanisms should not be used unless you have adequate security protections in place. It is recommended that these mechanisms be used only in conjunction with <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM> (TLS). Use of PLAIN and LOGIN are not discussed further in this document.</P> 6572<P>The DIGEST-MD5 mechanism is the mandatory-to-implement authentication mechanism for LDAPv3. Though DIGEST-MD5 is not a strong authentication mechanism in comparison with trusted third party authentication systems (such as <TERM>Kerberos</TERM> or public key systems), it does offer significant protections against a number of attacks. Unlike the <TERM>CRAM-MD5</TERM> mechanism, it prevents chosen plaintext attacks. DIGEST-MD5 is favored over the use of plaintext password mechanisms. The CRAM-MD5 mechanism is deprecated in favor of DIGEST-MD5. Use of <A HREF="#DIGEST-MD5">DIGEST-MD5</A> is discussed below.</P> 6573<P>The GSSAPI mechanism utilizes <TERM>GSS-API</TERM> <TERM>Kerberos</TERM> V to provide secure authentication services. The KERBEROS_V4 mechanism is available for those using Kerberos IV. Kerberos is viewed as a secure, distributed authentication system suitable for both small and large enterprises. Use of <A HREF="#GSSAPI">GSSAPI</A> and <A HREF="#KERBEROS_V4">KERBEROS_V4</A> are discussed below.</P> 6574<P>The EXTERNAL mechanism utilizes authentication services provided by lower level network services such as <TERM>TLS</TERM> (TLS). When used in conjunction with <TERM>TLS</TERM> <TERM>X.509</TERM>-based public key technology, EXTERNAL offers strong authentication. Use of EXTERNAL is discussed in the <A HREF="#Using TLS">Using TLS</A> chapter.</P> 6575<P>There are other strong authentication mechanisms to choose from, including <TERM>OTP</TERM> (one time passwords) and <TERM>SRP</TERM> (secure remote passwords). These mechanisms are not discussed in this document.</P> 6576<H2><A NAME="SASL Authentication">15.2. SASL Authentication</A></H2> 6577<P>Getting basic SASL authentication running involves a few steps. The first step configures your slapd server environment so that it can communicate with client programs using the security system in place at your site. This usually involves setting up a service key, a public key, or other form of secret. The second step concerns mapping authentication identities to LDAP <TERM>DN</TERM>'s, which depends on how entries are laid out in your directory. An explanation of the first step will be given in the next section using Kerberos V4 as an example mechanism. The steps necessary for your site's authentication mechanism will be similar, but a guide to every mechanism available under SASL is beyond the scope of this chapter. The second step is described in the section <A HREF="#Mapping Authentication Identities">Mapping Authentication Identities</A>.</P> 6578<H3><A NAME="GSSAPI">15.2.1. GSSAPI</A></H3> 6579<P>This section describes the use of the SASL GSSAPI mechanism and Kerberos V with OpenLDAP. It will be assumed that you have Kerberos V deployed, you are familiar with the operation of the system, and that your users are trained in its use. This section also assumes you have familiarized yourself with the use of the GSSAPI mechanism by reading <EM>Configuring GSSAPI and Cyrus SASL</EM> (provided with Cyrus SASL in the <TT>doc/gssapi</TT> file) and successfully experimented with the Cyrus provided <TT>sample_server</TT> and <TT>sample_client</TT> applications. General information about Kerberos is available at <A HREF="http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/">http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/</A>.</P> 6580<P>To use the GSSAPI mechanism with <EM>slapd</EM>(8) one must create a service key with a principal for <EM>ldap</EM> service within the realm for the host on which the service runs. For example, if you run <EM>slapd</EM> on <TT>directory.example.com</TT> and your realm is <TT>EXAMPLE.COM</TT>, you need to create a service key with the principal:</P> 6581<PRE> 6582 ldap/directory.example.com@EXAMPLE.COM 6583</PRE> 6584<P>When <EM>slapd</EM>(8) runs, it must have access to this key. This is generally done by placing the key into a keytab file, <TT>/etc/krb5.keytab</TT>. See your Kerberos and Cyrus SASL documentation for information regarding keytab location settings.</P> 6585<P>To use the GSSAPI mechanism to authenticate to the directory, the user obtains a Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT) prior to running the LDAP client. When using OpenLDAP client tools, the user may mandate use of the GSSAPI mechanism by specifying <TT>-Y GSSAPI</TT> as a command option.</P> 6586<P>For the purposes of authentication and authorization, <EM>slapd</EM>(8) associates an authentication request DN of the form:</P> 6587<PRE> 6588 uid=<primary[/instance]>,cn=<realm>,cn=gssapi,cn=auth 6589</PRE> 6590<P>Continuing our example, a user with the Kerberos principal <TT>kurt@EXAMPLE.COM</TT> would have the associated DN:</P> 6591<PRE> 6592 uid=kurt,cn=example.com,cn=gssapi,cn=auth 6593</PRE> 6594<P>and the principal <TT>ursula/admin@FOREIGN.REALM</TT> would have the associated DN:</P> 6595<PRE> 6596 uid=ursula/admin,cn=foreign.realm,cn=gssapi,cn=auth 6597</PRE> 6598<P>The authentication request DN can be used directly ACLs and <TT>groupOfNames</TT> "member" attributes, since it is of legitimate LDAP DN format. Or alternatively, the authentication DN could be mapped before use. See the section <A HREF="#Mapping Authentication Identities">Mapping Authentication Identities</A> for details.</P> 6599<H3><A NAME="KERBEROS_V4">15.2.2. KERBEROS_V4</A></H3> 6600<P>This section describes the use of the SASL KERBEROS_V4 mechanism with OpenLDAP. It will be assumed that you are familiar with the workings of the Kerberos IV security system, and that your site has Kerberos IV deployed. Your users should be familiar with authentication policy, how to receive credentials in a Kerberos ticket cache, and how to refresh expired credentials.</P> 6601<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6602<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>KERBEROS_V4 and Kerberos IV are deprecated in favor of GSSAPI and Kerberos V. 6603<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6604<P>Client programs will need to be able to obtain a session key for use when connecting to your LDAP server. This allows the LDAP server to know the identity of the user, and allows the client to know it is connecting to a legitimate server. If encryption layers are to be used, the session key can also be used to help negotiate that option.</P> 6605<P>The slapd server runs the service called "<EM>ldap</EM>", and the server will require a srvtab file with a service key. SASL aware client programs will be obtaining an "ldap" service ticket with the user's ticket granting ticket (TGT), with the instance of the ticket matching the hostname of the OpenLDAP server. For example, if your realm is named <TT>EXAMPLE.COM</TT> and the slapd server is running on the host named <TT>directory.example.com</TT>, the <TT>/etc/srvtab</TT> file on the server will have a service key</P> 6606<PRE> 6607 ldap.directory@EXAMPLE.COM 6608</PRE> 6609<P>When an LDAP client is authenticating a user to the directory using the KERBEROS_IV mechanism, it will request a session key for that same principal, either from the ticket cache or by obtaining a new one from the Kerberos server. This will require the TGT to be available and valid in the cache as well. If it is not present or has expired, the client may print out the message:</P> 6610<PRE> 6611 ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Local error 6612</PRE> 6613<P>When the service ticket is obtained, it will be passed to the LDAP server as proof of the user's identity. The server will extract the identity and realm out of the service ticket using SASL library calls, and convert them into an <EM>authentication request DN</EM> of the form</P> 6614<PRE> 6615 uid=<username>,cn=<realm>,cn=<mechanism>,cn=auth 6616</PRE> 6617<P>So in our above example, if the user's name were "adamson", the authentication request DN would be:</P> 6618<PRE> 6619 uid=adamsom,cn=example.com,cn=kerberos_v4,cn=auth 6620</PRE> 6621<P>This authentication request DN can be used directly ACLs or, alternatively, mapped prior to use. See the section <A HREF="#Mapping Authentication Identities">Mapping Authentication Identities</A> for details.</P> 6622<H3><A NAME="DIGEST-MD5">15.2.3. DIGEST-MD5</A></H3> 6623<P>This section describes the use of the SASL DIGEST-MD5 mechanism using secrets stored either in the directory itself or in Cyrus SASL's own database. DIGEST-MD5 relies on the client and the server sharing a "secret", usually a password. The server generates a challenge and the client a response proving that it knows the shared secret. This is much more secure than simply sending the secret over the wire.</P> 6624<P>Cyrus SASL supports several shared-secret mechanisms. To do this, it needs access to the plaintext password (unlike mechanisms which pass plaintext passwords over the wire, where the server can store a hashed version of the password).</P> 6625<P>The server's copy of the shared-secret may be stored in Cyrus SASL's own <EM>sasldb</EM> database, in an external system accessed via <EM>saslauthd</EM>, or in LDAP database itself. In either case it is very important to apply file access controls and LDAP access controls to prevent exposure of the passwords. The configuration and commands discussed in this section assume the use of Cyrus SASL 2.1.</P> 6626<P>To use secrets stored in <EM>sasldb</EM>, simply add users with the <EM>saslpasswd2</EM> command:</P> 6627<PRE> 6628 saslpasswd2 -c <username> 6629</PRE> 6630<P>The passwords for such users must be managed with the <EM>saslpasswd2</EM> command.</P> 6631<P>To use secrets stored in the LDAP directory, place plaintext passwords in the <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute. It will be necessary to add an option to <TT>slapd.conf</TT> to make sure that passwords set using the LDAP Password Modify Operation are stored in plaintext:</P> 6632<PRE> 6633 password-hash {CLEARTEXT} 6634</PRE> 6635<P>Passwords stored in this way can be managed either with <EM>ldappasswd</EM>(1) or by simply modifying the <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute. Regardless of where the passwords are stored, a mapping will be needed from authentication request DN to user's DN.</P> 6636<P>The DIGEST-MD5 mechanism produces authentication IDs of the form:</P> 6637<PRE> 6638 uid=<username>,cn=<realm>,cn=digest-md5,cn=auth 6639</PRE> 6640<P>If the default realm is used, the realm name is omitted from the ID, giving:</P> 6641<PRE> 6642 uid=<username>,cn=digest-md5,cn=auth 6643</PRE> 6644<P>See <A HREF="#Mapping Authentication Identities">Mapping Authentication Identities</A> below for information on optional mapping of identities.</P> 6645<P>With suitable mappings in place, users can specify SASL IDs when performing LDAP operations, and the password stored in <EM>sasldb</EM> or in the directory itself will be used to verify the authentication. For example, the user identified by the directory entry:</P> 6646<PRE> 6647 dn: cn=Andrew Findlay+uid=u000997,dc=example,dc=com 6648 objectclass: inetOrgPerson 6649 objectclass: person 6650 sn: Findlay 6651 uid: u000997 6652 userPassword: secret 6653</PRE> 6654<P>can issue commands of the form:</P> 6655<PRE> 6656 ldapsearch -Y DIGEST-MD5 -U u000997 ... 6657</PRE> 6658<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6659<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>in each of the above cases, no authorization identity (e.g. <TT>-X</TT>) was provided. Unless you are attempting <A HREF="#SASL Proxy Authorization">SASL Proxy Authorization</A>, no authorization identity should be specified. The server will infer an authorization identity from authentication identity (as described below). 6660<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6661<H3><A NAME="Mapping Authentication Identities">15.2.4. Mapping Authentication Identities</A></H3> 6662<P>The authentication mechanism in the slapd server will use SASL library calls to obtain the authenticated user's "username", based on whatever underlying authentication mechanism was used. This username is in the namespace of the authentication mechanism, and not in the normal LDAP namespace. As stated in the sections above, that username is reformatted into an authentication request DN of the form</P> 6663<PRE> 6664 uid=<username>,cn=<realm>,cn=<mechanism>,cn=auth 6665</PRE> 6666<P>or</P> 6667<PRE> 6668 uid=<username>,cn=<mechanism>,cn=auth 6669</PRE> 6670<P>depending on whether or not <mechanism> employs the concept of "realms". Note also that the realm part will be omitted if the default realm was used in the authentication.</P> 6671<P>The <EM>ldapwhoami</EM>(1) command may be used to determine the identity associated with the user. It is very useful for determining proper function of mappings.</P> 6672<P>It is not intended that you should add LDAP entries of the above form to your LDAP database. Chances are you have an LDAP entry for each of the persons that will be authenticating to LDAP, laid out in your directory tree, and the tree does not start at cn=auth. But if your site has a clear mapping between the "username" and an LDAP entry for the person, you will be able to configure your LDAP server to automatically map a authentication request DN to the user's <EM>authentication DN</EM>.</P> 6673<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6674<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>it is not required that the authentication request DN nor the user's authentication DN resulting from the mapping refer to an entry held in the directory. However, additional capabilities become available (see below). 6675<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6676<P>The LDAP administrator will need to tell the slapd server how to map an authentication request DN to a user's authentication DN. This is done by adding one or more <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directives to the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file. This directive takes two arguments:</P> 6677<PRE> 6678 authz-regexp <search pattern> <replacement pattern> 6679</PRE> 6680<P>The authentication request DN is compared to the search pattern using the regular expression functions <EM>regcomp</EM>() and <EM>regexec</EM>(), and if it matches, it is rewritten as the replacement pattern. If there are multiple <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directives, only the first whose search pattern matches the authentication identity is used. The string that is output from the replacement pattern should be the authentication DN of the user or an LDAP URL. If replacement string produces a DN, the entry named by this DN need not be held by this server. If the replace string produces an LDAP URL, that LDAP URL must evaluate to one and only one entry held by this server.</P> 6681<P>The search pattern can contain any of the regular expression characters listed in <EM>regexec</EM>(3C). The main characters of note are dot ".", asterisk "*", and the open and close parenthesis "(" and ")". Essentially, the dot matches any character, the asterisk allows zero or more repeats of the immediately preceding character or pattern, and terms in parenthesis are remembered for the replacement pattern.</P> 6682<P>The replacement pattern will produce either a DN or URL referring to the user. Anything from the authentication request DN that matched a string in parenthesis in the search pattern is stored in the variable "$1". That variable "$1" can appear in the replacement pattern, and will be replaced by the string from the authentication request DN. If there were multiple sets of parentheses in the search pattern, the variables $2, $3, etc are used.</P> 6683<H3><A NAME="Direct Mapping">15.2.5. Direct Mapping</A></H3> 6684<P>Where possible, direct mapping of the authentication request DN to the user's DN is generally recommended. Aside from avoiding the expense of searching for the user's DN, it allows mapping to DNs which refer to entries not held by this server.</P> 6685<P>Suppose the authentication request DN is written as:</P> 6686<PRE> 6687 uid=adamson,cn=example.com,cn=gssapi,cn=auth 6688</PRE> 6689<P>and the user's actual LDAP entry is:</P> 6690<PRE> 6691 uid=adamson,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com 6692</PRE> 6693<P>then the following <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directive in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) would provide for direct mapping.</P> 6694<PRE> 6695 authz-regexp 6696 uid=([^,]*),cn=example.com,cn=gssapi,cn=auth 6697 uid=$1,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com 6698</PRE> 6699<P>An even more lenient rule could be written as</P> 6700<PRE> 6701 authz-regexp 6702 uid=([^,]*),cn=[^,]*,cn=auth 6703 uid=$1,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com 6704</PRE> 6705<P>Be careful about setting the search pattern too leniently, however, since it may mistakenly allow persons to become authenticated as a DN to which they should not have access. It is better to write several strict directives than one lenient directive which has security holes. If there is only one authentication mechanism in place at your site, and zero or one realms in use, you might be able to map between authentication identities and LDAP DN's with a single <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directive.</P> 6706<P>Don't forget to allow for the case where the realm is omitted as well as the case with an explicitly specified realm. This may well require a separate <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directive for each case, with the explicit-realm entry being listed first.</P> 6707<H3><A NAME="Search-based mappings">15.2.6. Search-based mappings</A></H3> 6708<P>There are a number of cases where mapping to a LDAP URL may be appropriate. For instance, some sites may have person objects located in multiple areas of the LDAP tree, such as if there were an <TT>ou=accounting</TT> tree and an <TT>ou=engineering</TT> tree, with persons interspersed between them. Or, maybe the desired mapping must be based upon information in the user's information. Consider the need to map the above authentication request DN to user whose entry is as follows:</P> 6709<PRE> 6710 dn: cn=Mark Adamson,ou=People,dc=Example,dc=COM 6711 objectclass: person 6712 cn: Mark Adamson 6713 uid: adamson 6714</PRE> 6715<P>The information in the authentication request DN is insufficient to allow the user's DN to be directly derived, instead the user's DN must be searched for. For these situations, a replacement pattern which produces a LDAP URL can be used in the <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directives. This URL will then be used to perform an internal search of the LDAP database to find the person's authentication DN.</P> 6716<P>An LDAP URL, similar to other URL's, is of the form</P> 6717<PRE> 6718 ldap://<host>/<base>?<attrs>?<scope>?<filter> 6719</PRE> 6720<P>This contains all of the elements necessary to perform an LDAP search: the name of the server <host>, the LDAP DN search base <base>, the LDAP attributes to retrieve <attrs>, the search scope <scope> which is one of the three options "base", "one", or "sub", and lastly an LDAP search filter <filter>. Since the search is for an LDAP DN within the current server, the <host> portion should be empty. The <attrs> field is also ignored since only the DN is of concern. These two elements are left in the format of the URL to maintain the clarity of what information goes where in the string.</P> 6721<P>Suppose that the person in the example from above did in fact have an authentication username of "adamson" and that information was kept in the attribute "uid" in their LDAP entry. The <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directive might be written as</P> 6722<PRE> 6723 authz-regexp 6724 uid=([^,]*),cn=example.com,cn=gssapi,cn=auth 6725 ldap:///ou=people,dc=example,dc=com??one?(uid=$1) 6726</PRE> 6727<P>This will initiate an internal search of the LDAP database inside the slapd server. If the search returns exactly one entry, it is accepted as being the DN of the user. If there are more than one entries returned, or if there are zero entries returned, the authentication fails and the user's connection is left bound as the authentication request DN.</P> 6728<P>The attributes that are used in the search filter <filter> in the URL should be indexed to allow faster searching. If they are not, the authentication step alone can take uncomfortably long periods, and users may assume the server is down.</P> 6729<P>A more complex site might have several realms in use, each mapping to a different subtree in the directory. These can be handled with statements of the form:</P> 6730<PRE> 6731 # Match Engineering realm 6732 authz-regexp 6733 uid=([^,]*),cn=engineering.example.com,cn=digest-md5,cn=auth 6734 ldap:///dc=eng,dc=example,dc=com??one?(&(uid=$1)(objectClass=person)) 6735 6736 # Match Accounting realm 6737 authz-regexp 6738 uid=([^,].*),cn=accounting.example.com,cn=digest-md5,cn=auth 6739 ldap:///dc=accounting,dc=example,dc=com??one?(&(uid=$1)(objectClass=person)) 6740 6741 # Default realm is customers.example.com 6742 authz-regexp 6743 uid=([^,]*),cn=digest-md5,cn=auth 6744 ldap:///dc=customers,dc=example,dc=com??one?(&(uid=$1)(objectClass=person)) 6745</PRE> 6746<P>Note that the explicitly-named realms are handled first, to avoid the realm name becoming part of the UID. Also note the use of scope and filters to limit matching to desirable entries.</P> 6747<P>Note as well that <TT>authz-regexp</TT> internal search are subject to access controls. Specifically, the authentication identity must have <TT>auth</TT> access.</P> 6748<P>See <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) for more detailed information.</P> 6749<H2><A NAME="SASL Proxy Authorization">15.3. SASL Proxy Authorization</A></H2> 6750<P>The SASL offers a feature known as <EM>proxy authorization</EM>, which allows an authenticated user to request that they act on the behalf of another user. This step occurs after the user has obtained an authentication DN, and involves sending an authorization identity to the server. The server will then make a decision on whether or not to allow the authorization to occur. If it is allowed, the user's LDAP connection is switched to have a binding DN derived from the authorization identity, and the LDAP session proceeds with the access of the new authorization DN.</P> 6751<P>The decision to allow an authorization to proceed depends on the rules and policies of the site where LDAP is running, and thus cannot be made by SASL alone. The SASL library leaves it up to the server to make the decision. The LDAP administrator sets the guidelines of who can authorize to what identity by adding information into the LDAP database entries. By default, the authorization features are disabled, and must be explicitly configured by the LDAP administrator before use.</P> 6752<H3><A NAME="Uses of Proxy Authorization">15.3.1. Uses of Proxy Authorization</A></H3> 6753<P>This sort of service is useful when one entity needs to act on the behalf of many other users. For example, users may be directed to a web page to make changes to their personal information in their LDAP entry. The users authenticate to the web server to establish their identity, but the web server CGI cannot authenticate to the LDAP server as that user to make changes for them. Instead, the web server authenticates itself to the LDAP server as a service identity, say,</P> 6754<PRE> 6755 cn=WebUpdate,dc=example,dc=com 6756</PRE> 6757<P>and then it will SASL authorize to the DN of the user. Once so authorized, the CGI makes changes to the LDAP entry of the user, and as far as the slapd server can tell for its ACLs, it is the user themself on the other end of the connection. The user could have connected to the LDAP server directly and authenticated as themself, but that would require the user to have more knowledge of LDAP clients, knowledge which the web page provides in an easier format.</P> 6758<P>Proxy authorization can also be used to limit access to an account that has greater access to the database. Such an account, perhaps even the root DN specified in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5), can have a strict list of people who can authorize to that DN. Changes to the LDAP database could then be only allowed by that DN, and in order to become that DN, users must first authenticate as one of the persons on the list. This allows for better auditing of who made changes to the LDAP database. If people were allowed to authenticate directly to the privileged account, possibly through the <TT>rootpw</TT> <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) directive or through a <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute, then auditing becomes more difficult.</P> 6759<P>Note that after a successful proxy authorization, the original authentication DN of the LDAP connection is overwritten by the new DN from the authorization request. If a service program is able to authenticate itself as its own authentication DN and then authorize to other DN's, and it is planning on switching to several different identities during one LDAP session, it will need to authenticate itself each time before authorizing to another DN (or use a different proxy authorization mechanism). The slapd server does not keep record of the service program's ability to switch to other DN's. On authentication mechanisms like Kerberos this will not require multiple connections being made to the Kerberos server, since the user's TGT and "ldap" session key are valid for multiple uses for the several hours of the ticket lifetime.</P> 6760<H3><A NAME="SASL Authorization Identities">15.3.2. SASL Authorization Identities</A></H3> 6761<P>The SASL authorization identity is sent to the LDAP server via the <TT>-X</TT> switch for <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) and other tools, or in the <TT>*authzid</TT> parameter to the <EM>lutil_sasl_defaults</EM>() call. The identity can be in one of two forms, either</P> 6762<PRE> 6763 u:<username> 6764</PRE> 6765<P>or</P> 6766<PRE> 6767 dn:<dn> 6768</PRE> 6769<P>In the first form, the <username> is from the same namespace as the authentication identities above. It is the user's username as it is referred to by the underlying authentication mechanism. Authorization identities of this form are converted into a DN format by the same function that the authentication process used, producing an <EM>authorization request DN</EM> of the form</P> 6770<PRE> 6771 uid=<username>,cn=<realm>,cn=<mechanism>,cn=auth 6772</PRE> 6773<P>That authorization request DN is then run through the same <TT>authz-regexp</TT> process to convert it into a legitimate authorization DN from the database. If it cannot be converted due to a failed search from an LDAP URL, the authorization request fails with "inappropriate access". Otherwise, the DN string is now a legitimate authorization DN ready to undergo approval.</P> 6774<P>If the authorization identity was provided in the second form, with a <TT>"dn:"</TT> prefix, the string after the prefix is already in authorization DN form, ready to undergo approval.</P> 6775<H3><A NAME="Proxy Authorization Rules">15.3.3. Proxy Authorization Rules</A></H3> 6776<P>Once slapd has the authorization DN, the actual approval process begins. There are two attributes that the LDAP administrator can put into LDAP entries to allow authorization:</P> 6777<PRE> 6778 authzTo 6779 authzFrom 6780</PRE> 6781<P>Both can be multivalued. The <TT>authzTo</TT> attribute is a source rule, and it is placed into the entry associated with the authentication DN to tell what authorization DNs the authenticated DN is allowed to assume. The second attribute is a destination rule, and it is placed into the entry associated with the requested authorization DN to tell which authenticated DNs may assume it.</P> 6782<P>The choice of which authorization policy attribute to use is up to the administrator. Source rules are checked first in the person's authentication DN entry, and if none of the <TT>authzTo</TT> rules specify the authorization is permitted, the <TT>authzFrom</TT> rules in the authorization DN entry are then checked. If neither case specifies that the request be honored, the request is denied. Since the default behavior is to deny authorization requests, rules only specify that a request be allowed; there are no negative rules telling what authorizations to deny.</P> 6783<P>The value(s) in the two attributes are of the same form as the output of the replacement pattern of a <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directive: either a DN or an LDAP URL. For example, if a <TT>authzTo</TT> value is a DN, that DN is one the authenticated user can authorize to. On the other hand, if the <TT>authzTo</TT> value is an LDAP URL, the URL is used as an internal search of the LDAP database, and the authenticated user can become ANY DN returned by the search. If an LDAP entry looked like:</P> 6784<PRE> 6785 dn: cn=WebUpdate,dc=example,dc=com 6786 authzTo: ldap:///dc=example,dc=com??sub?(objectclass=person) 6787</PRE> 6788<P>then any user who authenticated as <TT>cn=WebUpdate,dc=example,dc=com</TT> could authorize to any other LDAP entry under the search base <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> which has an objectClass of <TT>Person</TT>.</P> 6789<H4><A NAME="Notes on Proxy Authorization Rules">15.3.3.1. Notes on Proxy Authorization Rules</A></H4> 6790<P>An LDAP URL in a <TT>authzTo</TT> or <TT>authzFrom</TT> attribute will return a set of DNs. Each DN returned will be checked. Searches which return a large set can cause the authorization process to take an uncomfortably long time. Also, searches should be performed on attributes that have been indexed by slapd.</P> 6791<P>To help produce more sweeping rules for <TT>authzFrom</TT> and <TT>authzTo</TT>, the values of these attributes are allowed to be DNs with regular expression characters in them. This means a source rule like</P> 6792<PRE> 6793 authzTo: dn.regex:^uid=[^,]*,dc=example,dc=com$ 6794</PRE> 6795<P>would allow that authenticated user to authorize to any DN that matches the regular expression pattern given. This regular expression comparison can be evaluated much faster than an LDAP search for <TT>(uid=*)</TT>.</P> 6796<P>Also note that the values in an authorization rule must be one of the two forms: an LDAP URL or a DN (with or without regular expression characters). Anything that does not begin with "<TT>ldap://</TT>" is taken as a DN. It is not permissible to enter another authorization identity of the form "<TT>u:<username></TT>" as an authorization rule.</P> 6797<H4><A NAME="Policy Configuration">15.3.3.2. Policy Configuration</A></H4> 6798<P>The decision of which type of rules to use, <TT>authzFrom</TT> or <TT>authzTo</TT>, will depend on the site's situation. For example, if the set of people who may become a given identity can easily be written as a search filter, then a single destination rule could be written. If the set of people is not easily defined by a search filter, and the set of people is small, it may be better to write a source rule in the entries of each of those people who should be allowed to perform the proxy authorization.</P> 6799<P>By default, processing of proxy authorization rules is disabled. The <TT>authz-policy</TT> directive must be set in the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file to enable authorization. This directive can be set to <TT>none</TT> for no rules (the default), <TT>to</TT> for source rules, <TT>from</TT> for destination rules, or <TT>both</TT> for both source and destination rules.</P> 6800<P>Source rules are extremely powerful. If ordinary users have access to write the <TT>authzTo</TT> attribute in their own entries, then they can write rules that would allow them to authorize as anyone else. As such, when using source rules, the <TT>authzTo</TT> attribute should be protected with an ACL that only allows privileged users to set its values.</P> 6801<P></P> 6802<HR> 6803<H1><A NAME="Using TLS">16. Using TLS</A></H1> 6804<P>OpenLDAP clients and servers are capable of using the <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM> (<TERM>TLS</TERM>) framework to provide integrity and confidentiality protections and to support LDAP authentication using the <TERM>SASL</TERM> <TERM>EXTERNAL</TERM> mechanism. TLS is defined in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4346.txt">RFC4346</A>.</P> 6805<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6806<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>For generating certifcates, please reference <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/185.html">http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/185.html</A> 6807<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6808<H2><A NAME="TLS Certificates">16.1. TLS Certificates</A></H2> 6809<P>TLS uses <TERM>X.509</TERM> certificates to carry client and server identities. All servers are required to have valid certificates, whereas client certificates are optional. Clients must have a valid certificate in order to authenticate via SASL EXTERNAL. For more information on creating and managing certificates, see the <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL</A> documentation.</P> 6810<H3><A NAME="Server Certificates">16.1.1. Server Certificates</A></H3> 6811<P>The <TERM>DN</TERM> of a server certificate must use the <TT>CN</TT> attribute to name the server, and the <TT>CN</TT> must carry the server's fully qualified domain name. Additional alias names and wildcards may be present in the <TT>subjectAltName</TT> certificate extension. More details on server certificate names are in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4513.txt">RFC4513</A>.</P> 6812<H3><A NAME="Client Certificates">16.1.2. Client Certificates</A></H3> 6813<P>The DN of a client certificate can be used directly as an authentication DN. Since X.509 is a part of the <TERM>X.500</TERM> standard and LDAP is also based on X.500, both use the same DN formats and generally the DN in a user's X.509 certificate should be identical to the DN of their LDAP entry. However, sometimes the DNs may not be exactly the same, and so the mapping facility described in <A HREF="#Mapping Authentication Identities">Mapping Authentication Identities</A> can be applied to these DNs as well.</P> 6814<H2><A NAME="TLS Configuration">16.2. TLS Configuration</A></H2> 6815<P>After obtaining the required certificates, a number of options must be configured on both the client and the server to enable TLS and make use of the certificates. At a minimum, the clients must be configured with the name of the file containing all of the <TERM>Certificate Authority</TERM> (CA) certificates it will trust. The server must be configured with the <TERM>CA</TERM> certificates and also its own server certificate and private key.</P> 6816<P>Typically a single CA will have issued the server certificate and all of the trusted client certificates, so the server only needs to trust that one signing CA. However, a client may wish to connect to a variety of secure servers managed by different organizations, with server certificates generated by many different CAs. As such, a client is likely to need a list of many different trusted CAs in its configuration.</P> 6817<H3><A NAME="Server Configuration">16.2.1. Server Configuration</A></H3> 6818<P>The configuration directives for slapd belong in the global directives section of <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5).</P> 6819<H4><A NAME="TLSCACertificateFile <filename>">16.2.1.1. TLSCACertificateFile <filename></A></H4> 6820<P>This directive specifies the <TERM>PEM</TERM>-format file containing certificates for the CA's that slapd will trust. The certificate for the CA that signed the server certificate must be included among these certificates. If the signing CA was not a top-level (root) CA, certificates for the entire sequence of CA's from the signing CA to the top-level CA should be present. Multiple certificates are simply appended to the file; the order is not significant.</P> 6821<H4><A NAME="TLSCACertificatePath <path>">16.2.1.2. TLSCACertificatePath <path></A></H4> 6822<P>This directive specifies the path of a directory that contains individual <TERM>CA</TERM> certificates in separate files. In addition, this directory must be specially managed using the OpenSSL <EM>c_rehash</EM> utility. When using this feature, the OpenSSL library will attempt to locate certificate files based on a hash of their name and serial number. The <EM>c_rehash</EM> utility is used to generate symbolic links with the hashed names that point to the actual certificate files. As such, this option can only be used with a filesystem that actually supports symbolic links. In general, it is simpler to use the <TT>TLSCACertificateFile</TT> directive instead.</P> 6823<H4><A NAME="TLSCertificateFile <filename>">16.2.1.3. TLSCertificateFile <filename></A></H4> 6824<P>This directive specifies the file that contains the slapd server certificate. Certificates are generally public information and require no special protection.</P> 6825<H4><A NAME="TLSCertificateKeyFile <filename>">16.2.1.4. TLSCertificateKeyFile <filename></A></H4> 6826<P>This directive specifies the file that contains the private key that matches the certificate stored in the <TT>TLSCertificateFile</TT> file. Private keys themselves are sensitive data and are usually password encrypted for protection. However, the current implementation doesn't support encrypted keys so the key must not be encrypted and the file itself must be protected carefully.</P> 6827<H4><A NAME="TLSCipherSuite <cipher-suite-spec>">16.2.1.5. TLSCipherSuite <cipher-suite-spec></A></H4> 6828<P>This directive configures what ciphers will be accepted and the preference order. <TT><cipher-suite-spec></TT> should be a cipher specification for OpenSSL. You can use the command</P> 6829<PRE> 6830 openssl ciphers -v ALL 6831</PRE> 6832<P>to obtain a verbose list of available cipher specifications.</P> 6833<P>To obtain the list of ciphers in GNUtls use:</P> 6834<PRE> 6835 gnutls-cli -l 6836</PRE> 6837<P>Besides the individual cipher names, the specifiers <TT>HIGH</TT>, <TT>MEDIUM</TT>, <TT>LOW</TT>, <TT>EXPORT</TT>, and <TT>EXPORT40</TT> may be helpful, along with <TT>TLSv1</TT>, <TT>SSLv3</TT>, and <TT>SSLv2</TT>.</P> 6838<H4><A NAME="TLSRandFile <filename>">16.2.1.6. TLSRandFile <filename></A></H4> 6839<P>This directive specifies the file to obtain random bits from when <TT>/dev/urandom</TT> is not available. If the system provides <TT>/dev/urandom</TT> then this option is not needed, otherwise a source of random data must be configured. Some systems (e.g. Linux) provide <TT>/dev/urandom</TT> by default, while others (e.g. Solaris) require the installation of a patch to provide it, and others may not support it at all. In the latter case, EGD or PRNGD should be installed, and this directive should specify the name of the EGD/PRNGD socket. The environment variable <TT>RANDFILE</TT> can also be used to specify the filename. Also, in the absence of these options, the <TT>.rnd</TT> file in the slapd user's home directory may be used if it exists. To use the <TT>.rnd</TT> file, just create the file and copy a few hundred bytes of arbitrary data into the file. The file is only used to provide a seed for the pseudo-random number generator, and it doesn't need very much data to work.</P> 6840<H4><A NAME="TLSEphemeralDHParamFile <filename>">16.2.1.7. TLSEphemeralDHParamFile <filename></A></H4> 6841<P>This directive specifies the file that contains parameters for Diffie-Hellman ephemeral key exchange. This is required in order to use a DSA certificate on the server side (i.e. <TT>TLSCertificateKeyFile</TT> points to a DSA key). Multiple sets of parameters can be included in the file; all of them will be processed. Parameters can be generated using the following command</P> 6842<PRE> 6843 openssl dhparam [-dsaparam] -out <filename> <numbits> 6844</PRE> 6845<H4><A NAME="TLSVerifyClient { never | allow | try | demand }">16.2.1.8. TLSVerifyClient { never | allow | try | demand }</A></H4> 6846<P>This directive specifies what checks to perform on client certificates in an incoming TLS session, if any. This option is set to <TT>never</TT> by default, in which case the server never asks the client for a certificate. With a setting of <TT>allow</TT> the server will ask for a client certificate; if none is provided the session proceeds normally. If a certificate is provided but the server is unable to verify it, the certificate is ignored and the session proceeds normally, as if no certificate had been provided. With a setting of <TT>try</TT> the certificate is requested, and if none is provided, the session proceeds normally. If a certificate is provided and it cannot be verified, the session is immediately terminated. With a setting of <TT>demand</TT> the certificate is requested and a valid certificate must be provided, otherwise the session is immediately terminated.</P> 6847<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6848<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The server must request a client certificate in order to use the SASL EXTERNAL authentication mechanism with a TLS session. As such, a non-default <TT>TLSVerifyClient</TT> setting must be configured before SASL EXTERNAL authentication may be attempted, and the SASL EXTERNAL mechanism will only be offered to the client if a valid client certificate was received. 6849<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6850<H3><A NAME="Client Configuration">16.2.2. Client Configuration</A></H3> 6851<P>Most of the client configuration directives parallel the server directives. The names of the directives are different, and they go into <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) instead of <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5), but their functionality is mostly the same. Also, while most of these options may be configured on a system-wide basis, they may all be overridden by individual users in their <EM>.ldaprc</EM> files.</P> 6852<P>The LDAP Start TLS operation is used in LDAP to initiate TLS negotiation. All OpenLDAP command line tools support a <TT>-Z</TT> and <TT>-ZZ</TT> flag to indicate whether a Start TLS operation is to be issued. The latter flag indicates that the tool is to cease processing if TLS cannot be started while the former allows the command to continue.</P> 6853<P>In LDAPv2 environments, TLS is normally started using the LDAP Secure URI scheme (<TT>ldaps://</TT>) instead of the normal LDAP URI scheme (<TT>ldap://</TT>). OpenLDAP command line tools allow either scheme to used with the <TT>-H</TT> flag and with the <TT>URI</TT> <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) option.</P> 6854<H4><A NAME="TLS_CACERT <filename>">16.2.2.1. TLS_CACERT <filename></A></H4> 6855<P>This is equivalent to the server's <TT>TLSCACertificateFile</TT> option. As noted in the <A HREF="#TLS Configuration">TLS Configuration</A> section, a client typically may need to know about more CAs than a server, but otherwise the same considerations apply.</P> 6856<H4><A NAME="TLS_CACERTDIR <path>">16.2.2.2. TLS_CACERTDIR <path></A></H4> 6857<P>This is equivalent to the server's <TT>TLSCACertificatePath</TT> option. The specified directory must be managed with the OpenSSL <EM>c_rehash</EM> utility as well.</P> 6858<H4><A NAME="TLS_CERT <filename>">16.2.2.3. TLS_CERT <filename></A></H4> 6859<P>This directive specifies the file that contains the client certificate. This is a user-only directive and can only be specified in a user's <EM>.ldaprc</EM> file.</P> 6860<H4><A NAME="TLS_KEY <filename>">16.2.2.4. TLS_KEY <filename></A></H4> 6861<P>This directive specifies the file that contains the private key that matches the certificate stored in the <TT>TLS_CERT</TT> file. The same constraints mentioned for <TT>TLSCertificateKeyFile</TT> apply here. This is also a user-only directive.</P> 6862<H4><A NAME="TLS_RANDFILE <filename>">16.2.2.5. TLS_RANDFILE <filename></A></H4> 6863<P>This directive is the same as the server's <TT>TLSRandFile</TT> option.</P> 6864<H4><A NAME="TLS_REQCERT { never | allow | try | demand }">16.2.2.6. TLS_REQCERT { never | allow | try | demand }</A></H4> 6865<P>This directive is equivalent to the server's <TT>TLSVerifyClient</TT> option. However, for clients the default value is <TT>demand</TT> and there generally is no good reason to change this setting.</P> 6866<P></P> 6867<HR> 6868<H1><A NAME="Constructing a Distributed Directory Service">17. Constructing a Distributed Directory Service</A></H1> 6869<P>For many sites, running one or more <EM>slapd</EM>(8) that hold an entire subtree of data is sufficient. But often it is desirable to have one <EM>slapd</EM> refer to other directory services for a certain part of the tree (which may or may not be running <EM>slapd</EM>).</P> 6870<P><EM>slapd</EM> supports <EM>subordinate</EM> and <EM>superior</EM> knowledge information. Subordinate knowledge information is held in <TT>referral</TT> objects (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3296.txt">RFC3296</A>).</P> 6871<H2><A NAME="Subordinate Knowledge Information">17.1. Subordinate Knowledge Information</A></H2> 6872<P>Subordinate knowledge information may be provided to delegate a subtree. Subordinate knowledge information is maintained in the directory as a special <EM>referral</EM> object at the delegate point. The referral object acts as a delegation point, gluing two services together. This mechanism allows for hierarchical directory services to be constructed.</P> 6873<P>A referral object has a structural object class of <TT>referral</TT> and has the same <TERM>Distinguished Name</TERM> as the delegated subtree. Generally, the referral object will also provide the auxiliary object class <TT>extensibleObject</TT>. This allows the entry to contain appropriate <TERM>Relative Distinguished Name</TERM> values. This is best demonstrated by example.</P> 6874<P>If the server <TT>a.example.net</TT> holds <TT>dc=example,dc=net</TT> and wished to delegate the subtree <TT>ou=subtree,dc=example,dc=net</TT> to another server <TT>b.example.net</TT>, the following named referral object would be added to <TT>a.example.net</TT>:</P> 6875<PRE> 6876 dn: dc=subtree,dc=example,dc=net 6877 objectClass: referral 6878 objectClass: extensibleObject 6879 dc: subtree 6880 ref: ldap://b.example.net/dc=subtree,dc=example,dc=net 6881</PRE> 6882<P>The server uses this information to generate referrals and search continuations to subordinate servers.</P> 6883<P>For those familiar with <TERM>X.500</TERM>, a <EM>named referral</EM> object is similar to an X.500 knowledge reference held in a <EM>subr</EM> <TERM>DSE</TERM>.</P> 6884<H2><A NAME="Superior Knowledge Information">17.2. Superior Knowledge Information</A></H2> 6885<P>Superior knowledge information may be specified using the <TT>referral</TT> directive. The value is a list of <TERM>URI</TERM>s referring to superior directory services. For servers without immediate superiors, such as for <TT>a.example.net</TT> in the example above, the server can be configured to use a directory service with <EM>global knowledge</EM>, such as the <EM>OpenLDAP Root Service</EM> (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/index.cgi?file=393">http://www.openldap.org/faq/index.cgi?file=393</A>).</P> 6886<PRE> 6887 referral ldap://root.openldap.org/ 6888</PRE> 6889<P>However, as <TT>a.example.net</TT> is the <EM>immediate superior</EM> to <TT>b.example.net</TT>, <EM>b.example.net</EM> would be configured as follows:</P> 6890<PRE> 6891 referral ldap://a.example.net/ 6892</PRE> 6893<P>The server uses this information to generate referrals for operations acting upon entries not within or subordinate to any of the naming contexts held by the server.</P> 6894<P>For those familiar with <TERM>X.500</TERM>, this use of the <TT>ref</TT> attribute is similar to an X.500 knowledge reference held in a <EM>Supr</EM> <TERM>DSE</TERM>.</P> 6895<H2><A NAME="The ManageDsaIT Control">17.3. The ManageDsaIT Control</A></H2> 6896<P>Adding, modifying, and deleting referral objects is generally done using <EM>ldapmodify</EM>(1) or similar tools which support the ManageDsaIT control. The ManageDsaIT control informs the server that you intend to manage the referral object as a regular entry. This keeps the server from sending a referral result for requests which interrogate or update referral objects.</P> 6897<P>The ManageDsaIT control should not be specified when managing regular entries.</P> 6898<P>The <TT>-M</TT> option of <EM>ldapmodify</EM>(1) (and other tools) enables ManageDsaIT. For example:</P> 6899<PRE> 6900 ldapmodify -M -f referral.ldif -x -D "cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=net" -W 6901</PRE> 6902<P>or with <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1):</P> 6903<PRE> 6904 ldapsearch -M -b "dc=example,dc=net" -x "(objectclass=referral)" '*' ref 6905</PRE> 6906<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6907<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>the <TT>ref</TT> attribute is operational and must be explicitly requested when desired in search results. 6908<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6909<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6910<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>the use of referrals to construct a Distributed Directory Service is extremely clumsy and not well supported by common clients. If an existing installation has already been built using referrals, the use of the <EM>chain</EM> overlay to hide the referrals will greatly improve the usability of the Directory system. A better approach would be to use explicitly defined local and proxy databases in <EM>subordinate</EM> configurations to provide a seamless view of the Distributed Directory. 6911<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6912<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 6913<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>LDAP operations, even subtree searches, normally access only one database. That can be changed by gluing databases together with the <B>subordinate</B>/<B>olcSubordinate</B> keyword. Please see <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) and <EM>slapd-config</EM>(5). 6914<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 6915<P></P> 6916<HR> 6917<H1><A NAME="Replication">18. Replication</A></H1> 6918<P>Replicated directories are a fundamental requirement for delivering a resilient enterprise deployment.</P> 6919<P><A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">OpenLDAP</A> has various configuration options for creating a replicated directory. In previous releases, replication was discussed in terms of a <EM>master</EM> server and some number of <EM>slave</EM> servers. A master accepted directory updates from other clients, and a slave only accepted updates from a (single) master. The replication structure was rigidly defined and any particular database could only fulfill a single role, either master or slave.</P> 6920<P>As OpenLDAP now supports a wide variety of replication topologies, these terms have been deprecated in favor of <EM>provider</EM> and <EM>consumer</EM>: A provider replicates directory updates to consumers; consumers receive replication updates from providers. Unlike the rigidly defined master/slave relationships, provider/consumer roles are quite fluid: replication updates received in a consumer can be further propagated by that consumer to other servers, so a consumer can also act simultaneously as a provider. Also, a consumer need not be an actual LDAP server; it may be just an LDAP client.</P> 6921<P>The following sections will describe the replication technology and discuss the various replication options that are available.</P> 6922<H2><A NAME="Replication Technology">18.1. Replication Technology</A></H2> 6923<H3><A NAME="LDAP Sync Replication">18.1.1. LDAP Sync Replication</A></H3> 6924<P>The <TERM>LDAP Sync</TERM> Replication engine, <TERM>syncrepl</TERM> for short, is a consumer-side replication engine that enables the consumer <TERM>LDAP</TERM> server to maintain a shadow copy of a <TERM>DIT</TERM> fragment. A syncrepl engine resides at the consumer and executes as one of the <EM>slapd</EM>(8) threads. It creates and maintains a consumer replica by connecting to the replication provider to perform the initial DIT content load followed either by periodic content polling or by timely updates upon content changes.</P> 6925<P>Syncrepl uses the LDAP Content Synchronization protocol (or LDAP Sync for short) as the replica synchronization protocol. LDAP Sync provides a stateful replication which supports both pull-based and push-based synchronization and does not mandate the use of a history store. In pull-based replication the consumer periodically polls the provider for updates. In push-based replication the consumer listens for updates that are sent by the provider in realtime. Since the protocol does not require a history store, the provider does not need to maintain any log of updates it has received (Note that the syncrepl engine is extensible and additional replication protocols may be supported in the future.).</P> 6926<P>Syncrepl keeps track of the status of the replication content by maintaining and exchanging synchronization cookies. Because the syncrepl consumer and provider maintain their content status, the consumer can poll the provider content to perform incremental synchronization by asking for the entries required to make the consumer replica up-to-date with the provider content. Syncrepl also enables convenient management of replicas by maintaining replica status. The consumer replica can be constructed from a consumer-side or a provider-side backup at any synchronization status. Syncrepl can automatically resynchronize the consumer replica up-to-date with the current provider content.</P> 6927<P>Syncrepl supports both pull-based and push-based synchronization. In its basic refreshOnly synchronization mode, the provider uses pull-based synchronization where the consumer servers need not be tracked and no history information is maintained. The information required for the provider to process periodic polling requests is contained in the synchronization cookie of the request itself. To optimize the pull-based synchronization, syncrepl utilizes the present phase of the LDAP Sync protocol as well as its delete phase, instead of falling back on frequent full reloads. To further optimize the pull-based synchronization, the provider can maintain a per-scope session log as a history store. In its refreshAndPersist mode of synchronization, the provider uses a push-based synchronization. The provider keeps track of the consumer servers that have requested a persistent search and sends them necessary updates as the provider replication content gets modified.</P> 6928<P>With syncrepl, a consumer server can create a replica without changing the provider's configurations and without restarting the provider server, if the consumer server has appropriate access privileges for the DIT fragment to be replicated. The consumer server can stop the replication also without the need for provider-side changes and restart.</P> 6929<P>Syncrepl supports partial, sparse, and fractional replications. The shadow DIT fragment is defined by a general search criteria consisting of base, scope, filter, and attribute list. The replica content is also subject to the access privileges of the bind identity of the syncrepl replication connection.</P> 6930<H4><A NAME="The LDAP Content Synchronization Protocol">18.1.1.1. The LDAP Content Synchronization Protocol</A></H4> 6931<P>The LDAP Sync protocol allows a client to maintain a synchronized copy of a DIT fragment. The LDAP Sync operation is defined as a set of controls and other protocol elements which extend the LDAP search operation. This section introduces the LDAP Content Sync protocol only briefly. For more information, refer to <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt">RFC4533</A>.</P> 6932<P>The LDAP Sync protocol supports both polling and listening for changes by defining two respective synchronization operations: <EM>refreshOnly</EM> and <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM>. Polling is implemented by the <EM>refreshOnly</EM> operation. The consumer polls the provider using an LDAP Search request with an LDAP Sync control attached. The consumer copy is synchronized to the provider copy at the time of polling using the information returned in the search. The provider finishes the search operation by returning <EM>SearchResultDone</EM> at the end of the search operation as in the normal search. Listening is implemented by the <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM> operation. As the name implies, it begins with a search, like refreshOnly. Instead of finishing the search after returning all entries currently matching the search criteria, the synchronization search remains persistent in the provider. Subsequent updates to the synchronization content in the provider cause additional entry updates to be sent to the consumer.</P> 6933<P>The <EM>refreshOnly</EM> operation and the refresh stage of the <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM> operation can be performed with a present phase or a delete phase.</P> 6934<P>In the present phase, the provider sends the consumer the entries updated within the search scope since the last synchronization. The provider sends all requested attributes, be they changed or not, of the updated entries. For each unchanged entry which remains in the scope, the provider sends a present message consisting only of the name of the entry and the synchronization control representing state present. The present message does not contain any attributes of the entry. After the consumer receives all update and present entries, it can reliably determine the new consumer copy by adding the entries added to the provider, by replacing the entries modified at the provider, and by deleting entries in the consumer copy which have not been updated nor specified as being present at the provider.</P> 6935<P>The transmission of the updated entries in the delete phase is the same as in the present phase. The provider sends all the requested attributes of the entries updated within the search scope since the last synchronization to the consumer. In the delete phase, however, the provider sends a delete message for each entry deleted from the search scope, instead of sending present messages. The delete message consists only of the name of the entry and the synchronization control representing state delete. The new consumer copy can be determined by adding, modifying, and removing entries according to the synchronization control attached to the <EM>SearchResultEntry</EM> message.</P> 6936<P>In the case that the LDAP Sync provider maintains a history store and can determine which entries are scoped out of the consumer copy since the last synchronization time, the provider can use the delete phase. If the provider does not maintain any history store, cannot determine the scoped-out entries from the history store, or the history store does not cover the outdated synchronization state of the consumer, the provider should use the present phase. The use of the present phase is much more efficient than a full content reload in terms of the synchronization traffic. To reduce the synchronization traffic further, the LDAP Sync protocol also provides several optimizations such as the transmission of the normalized <TT>entryUUID</TT>s and the transmission of multiple <TT>entryUUIDs</TT> in a single <EM>syncIdSet</EM> message.</P> 6937<P>At the end of the <EM>refreshOnly</EM> synchronization, the provider sends a synchronization cookie to the consumer as a state indicator of the consumer copy after the synchronization is completed. The consumer will present the received cookie when it requests the next incremental synchronization to the provider.</P> 6938<P>When <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM> synchronization is used, the provider sends a synchronization cookie at the end of the refresh stage by sending a Sync Info message with refreshDone=TRUE. It also sends a synchronization cookie by attaching it to <EM>SearchResultEntry</EM> messages generated in the persist stage of the synchronization search. During the persist stage, the provider can also send a Sync Info message containing the synchronization cookie at any time the provider wants to update the consumer-side state indicator.</P> 6939<P>In the LDAP Sync protocol, entries are uniquely identified by the <TT>entryUUID</TT> attribute value. It can function as a reliable identifier of the entry. The DN of the entry, on the other hand, can be changed over time and hence cannot be considered as the reliable identifier. The <TT>entryUUID</TT> is attached to each <EM>SearchResultEntry</EM> or <EM>SearchResultReference</EM> as a part of the synchronization control.</P> 6940<H4><A NAME="Syncrepl Details">18.1.1.2. Syncrepl Details</A></H4> 6941<P>The syncrepl engine utilizes both the <EM>refreshOnly</EM> and the <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM> operations of the LDAP Sync protocol. If a syncrepl specification is included in a database definition, <EM>slapd</EM>(8) launches a syncrepl engine as a <EM>slapd</EM>(8) thread and schedules its execution. If the <EM>refreshOnly</EM> operation is specified, the syncrepl engine will be rescheduled at the interval time after a synchronization operation is completed. If the <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM> operation is specified, the engine will remain active and process the persistent synchronization messages from the provider.</P> 6942<P>The syncrepl engine utilizes both the present phase and the delete phase of the refresh synchronization. It is possible to configure a session log in the provider which stores the <TT>entryUUID</TT>s of a finite number of entries deleted from a database. Multiple replicas share the same session log. The syncrepl engine uses the delete phase if the session log is present and the state of the consumer server is recent enough that no session log entries are truncated after the last synchronization of the client. The syncrepl engine uses the present phase if no session log is configured for the replication content or if the consumer replica is too outdated to be covered by the session log. The current design of the session log store is memory based, so the information contained in the session log is not persistent over multiple provider invocations. It is not currently supported to access the session log store by using LDAP operations. It is also not currently supported to impose access control to the session log.</P> 6943<P>As a further optimization, even in the case the synchronization search is not associated with any session log, no entries will be transmitted to the consumer server when there has been no update in the replication context.</P> 6944<P>The syncrepl engine, which is a consumer-side replication engine, can work with any backends. The LDAP Sync provider can be configured as an overlay on any backend, but works best with the <EM>back-bdb</EM> or <EM>back-hdb</EM> backend.</P> 6945<P>The LDAP Sync provider maintains a <TT>contextCSN</TT> for each database as the current synchronization state indicator of the provider content. It is the largest <TT>entryCSN</TT> in the provider context such that no transactions for an entry having smaller <TT>entryCSN</TT> value remains outstanding. The <TT>contextCSN</TT> could not just be set to the largest issued <TT>entryCSN</TT> because <TT>entryCSN</TT> is obtained before a transaction starts and transactions are not committed in the issue order.</P> 6946<P>The provider stores the <TT>contextCSN</TT> of a context in the <TT>contextCSN</TT> attribute of the context suffix entry. The attribute is not written to the database after every update operation though; instead it is maintained primarily in memory. At database start time the provider reads the last saved <TT>contextCSN</TT> into memory and uses the in-memory copy exclusively thereafter. By default, changes to the <TT>contextCSN</TT> as a result of database updates will not be written to the database until the server is cleanly shut down. A checkpoint facility exists to cause the <TT>contextCSN</TT> to be written out more frequently if desired.</P> 6947<P>Note that at startup time, if the provider is unable to read a <TT>contextCSN</TT> from the suffix entry, it will scan the entire database to determine the value, and this scan may take quite a long time on a large database. When a <TT>contextCSN</TT> value is read, the database will still be scanned for any <TT>entryCSN</TT> values greater than it, to make sure the <TT>contextCSN</TT> value truly reflects the greatest committed <TT>entryCSN</TT> in the database. On databases which support inequality indexing, setting an eq index on the <TT>entryCSN</TT> attribute and configuring <EM>contextCSN</EM> checkpoints will greatly speed up this scanning step.</P> 6948<P>If no <TT>contextCSN</TT> can be determined by reading and scanning the database, a new value will be generated. Also, if scanning the database yielded a greater <TT>entryCSN</TT> than was previously recorded in the suffix entry's <TT>contextCSN</TT> attribute, a checkpoint will be immediately written with the new value.</P> 6949<P>The consumer also stores its replica state, which is the provider's <TT>contextCSN</TT> received as a synchronization cookie, in the <TT>contextCSN</TT> attribute of the suffix entry. The replica state maintained by a consumer server is used as the synchronization state indicator when it performs subsequent incremental synchronization with the provider server. It is also used as a provider-side synchronization state indicator when it functions as a secondary provider server in a cascading replication configuration. Since the consumer and provider state information are maintained in the same location within their respective databases, any consumer can be promoted to a provider (and vice versa) without any special actions.</P> 6950<P>Because a general search filter can be used in the syncrepl specification, some entries in the context may be omitted from the synchronization content. The syncrepl engine creates a glue entry to fill in the holes in the replica context if any part of the replica content is subordinate to the holes. The glue entries will not be returned in the search result unless <EM>ManageDsaIT</EM> control is provided.</P> 6951<P>Also as a consequence of the search filter used in the syncrepl specification, it is possible for a modification to remove an entry from the replication scope even though the entry has not been deleted on the provider. Logically the entry must be deleted on the consumer but in <EM>refreshOnly</EM> mode the provider cannot detect and propagate this change without the use of the session log on the provider.</P> 6952<P>For configuration, please see the <A HREF="#Syncrepl">Syncrepl</A> section.</P> 6953<H2><A NAME="Deployment Alternatives">18.2. Deployment Alternatives</A></H2> 6954<P>While the LDAP Sync specification only defines a narrow scope for replication, the OpenLDAP implementation is extremely flexible and supports a variety of operating modes to handle other scenarios not explicitly addressed in the spec.</P> 6955<H3><A NAME="Delta-syncrepl replication">18.2.1. Delta-syncrepl replication</A></H3> 6956<UL> 6957<LI>Disadvantages of LDAP Sync replication:</UL> 6958<P>LDAP Sync replication is an object-based replication mechanism. When any attribute value in a replicated object is changed on the provider, each consumer fetches and processes the complete changed object, including <B>both the changed and unchanged attribute values</B> during replication. One advantage of this approach is that when multiple changes occur to a single object, the precise sequence of those changes need not be preserved; only the final state of the entry is significant. But this approach may have drawbacks when the usage pattern involves single changes to multiple objects.</P> 6959<P>For example, suppose you have a database consisting of 100,000 objects of 1 KB each. Further, suppose you routinely run a batch job to change the value of a single two-byte attribute value that appears in each of the 100,000 objects on the master. Not counting LDAP and TCP/IP protocol overhead, each time you run this job each consumer will transfer and process <B>1 GB</B> of data to process <B>200KB of changes!</B></P> 6960<P>99.98% of the data that is transmitted and processed in a case like this will be redundant, since it represents values that did not change. This is a waste of valuable transmission and processing bandwidth and can cause an unacceptable replication backlog to develop. While this situation is extreme, it serves to demonstrate a very real problem that is encountered in some LDAP deployments.</P> 6961<UL> 6962<LI>Where Delta-syncrepl comes in:</UL> 6963<P>Delta-syncrepl, a changelog-based variant of syncrepl, is designed to address situations like the one described above. Delta-syncrepl works by maintaining a changelog of a selectable depth on the provider. The replication consumer checks the changelog for the changes it needs and, as long as the changelog contains the needed changes, the consumer fetches the changes from the changelog and applies them to its database. If, however, a replica is too far out of sync (or completely empty), conventional syncrepl is used to bring it up to date and replication then switches back to the delta-syncrepl mode.</P> 6964<P>For configuration, please see the <A HREF="#Delta-syncrepl">Delta-syncrepl</A> section.</P> 6965<H3><A NAME="N-Way Multi-Master replication">18.2.2. N-Way Multi-Master replication</A></H3> 6966<P>Multi-Master replication is a replication technique using Syncrepl to replicate data to multiple provider ("Master") Directory servers.</P> 6967<H4><A NAME="Valid Arguments for Multi-Master replication">18.2.2.1. Valid Arguments for Multi-Master replication</A></H4> 6968<UL> 6969<LI>If any provider fails, other providers will continue to accept updates 6970<LI>Avoids a single point of failure 6971<LI>Providers can be located in several physical sites i.e. distributed across the network/globe. 6972<LI>Good for Automatic failover/High Availability</UL> 6973<H4><A NAME="Invalid Arguments for Multi-Master replication">18.2.2.2. Invalid Arguments for Multi-Master replication</A></H4> 6974<P>(These are often claimed to be advantages of Multi-Master replication but those claims are false):</P> 6975<UL> 6976<LI>It has <B>NOTHING</B> to do with load balancing 6977<LI>Providers <B>must</B> propagate writes to <B>all</B> the other servers, which means the network traffic and write load spreads across all of the servers the same as for single-master. 6978<LI>Server utilization and performance are at best identical for Multi-Master and Single-Master replication; at worst Single-Master is superior because indexing can be tuned differently to optimize for the different usage patterns between the provider and the consumers.</UL> 6979<H4><A NAME="Arguments against Multi-Master replication">18.2.2.3. Arguments against Multi-Master replication</A></H4> 6980<UL> 6981<LI>Breaks the data consistency guarantees of the directory model 6982<LI><A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/1240.html">http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/1240.html</A> 6983<LI>If connectivity with a provider is lost because of a network partition, then "automatic failover" can just compound the problem 6984<LI>Typically, a particular machine cannot distinguish between losing contact with a peer because that peer crashed, or because the network link has failed 6985<LI>If a network is partitioned and multiple clients start writing to each of the "masters" then reconciliation will be a pain; it may be best to simply deny writes to the clients that are partitioned from the single provider</UL> 6986<P>For configuration, please see the <A HREF="#N-Way Multi-Master">N-Way Multi-Master</A> section below</P> 6987<H3><A NAME="MirrorMode replication">18.2.3. MirrorMode replication</A></H3> 6988<P>MirrorMode is a hybrid configuration that provides all of the consistency guarantees of single-master replication, while also providing the high availability of multi-master. In MirrorMode two providers are set up to replicate from each other (as a multi-master configuration), but an external frontend is employed to direct all writes to only one of the two servers. The second provider will only be used for writes if the first provider crashes, at which point the frontend will switch to directing all writes to the second provider. When a crashed provider is repaired and restarted it will automatically catch up to any changes on the running provider and resync.</P> 6989<H4><A NAME="Arguments for MirrorMode">18.2.3.1. Arguments for MirrorMode</A></H4> 6990<UL> 6991<LI>Provides a high-availability (HA) solution for directory writes (replicas handle reads) 6992<LI>As long as one provider is operational, writes can safely be accepted 6993<LI>Provider nodes replicate from each other, so they are always up to date and can be ready to take over (hot standby) 6994<LI>Syncrepl also allows the provider nodes to re-synchronize after any downtime</UL> 6995<H4><A NAME="Arguments against MirrorMode">18.2.3.2. Arguments against MirrorMode</A></H4> 6996<UL> 6997<LI>MirrorMode is not what is termed as a Multi-Master solution. This is because writes have to go to just one of the mirror nodes at a time 6998<LI>MirrorMode can be termed as Active-Active Hot-Standby, therefore an external server (slapd in proxy mode) or device (hardware load balancer) is needed to manage which provider is currently active 6999<LI>Backups are managed slightly differently<UL> 7000<LI>If backing up the Berkeley database itself and periodically backing up the transaction log files, then the same member of the mirror pair needs to be used to collect logfiles until the next database backup is taken 7001<LI>To ensure that both databases are consistent, each database might have to be put in read-only mode while performing a slapcat.</UL> 7002<LI>Delta-Syncrepl is not yet supported</UL> 7003<P>For configuration, please see the <A HREF="#MirrorMode">MirrorMode</A> section below</P> 7004<H3><A NAME="Syncrepl Proxy Mode">18.2.4. Syncrepl Proxy Mode</A></H3> 7005<P>While the LDAP Sync protocol supports both pull- and push-based replication, the push mode (refreshAndPersist) must still be initiated from the consumer before the provider can begin pushing changes. In some network configurations, particularly where firewalls restrict the direction in which connections can be made, a provider-initiated push mode may be needed.</P> 7006<P>This mode can be configured with the aid of the LDAP Backend (<A HREF="#Backends">Backends</A> and <EM>slapd-ldap(8)</EM>). Instead of running the syncrepl engine on the actual consumer, a slapd-ldap proxy is set up near (or collocated with) the provider that points to the consumer, and the syncrepl engine runs on the proxy.</P> 7007<P>For configuration, please see the <A HREF="#Syncrepl Proxy">Syncrepl Proxy</A> section.</P> 7008<H4><A NAME="Replacing Slurpd">18.2.4.1. Replacing Slurpd</A></H4> 7009<P>The old <EM>slurpd</EM> mechanism only operated in provider-initiated push mode. Slurpd replication was deprecated in favor of Syncrepl replication and has been completely removed from OpenLDAP 2.4.</P> 7010<P>The slurpd daemon was the original replication mechanism inherited from UMich's LDAP and operated in push mode: the master pushed changes to the slaves. It was replaced for many reasons, in brief:</P> 7011<UL> 7012<LI>It was not reliable<UL> 7013<LI>It was extremely sensitive to the ordering of records in the replog 7014<LI>It could easily go out of sync, at which point manual intervention was required to resync the slave database with the master directory 7015<LI>It wasn't very tolerant of unavailable servers. If a slave went down for a long time, the replog could grow to a size that was too large for slurpd to process</UL> 7016<LI>It only worked in push mode 7017<LI>It required stopping and restarting the master to add new slaves 7018<LI>It only supported single master replication</UL> 7019<P>Syncrepl has none of those weaknesses:</P> 7020<UL> 7021<LI>Syncrepl is self-synchronizing; you can start with a consumer database in any state from totally empty to fully synced and it will automatically do the right thing to achieve and maintain synchronization<UL> 7022<LI>It is completely insensitive to the order in which changes occur 7023<LI>It guarantees convergence between the consumer and the provider content without manual intervention 7024<LI>It can resynchronize regardless of how long a consumer stays out of contact with the provider</UL> 7025<LI>Syncrepl can operate in either direction 7026<LI>Consumers can be added at any time without touching anything on the provider 7027<LI>Multi-master replication is supported</UL> 7028<H2><A NAME="Configuring the different replication types">18.3. Configuring the different replication types</A></H2> 7029<H3><A NAME="Syncrepl">18.3.1. Syncrepl</A></H3> 7030<H4><A NAME="Syncrepl configuration">18.3.1.1. Syncrepl configuration</A></H4> 7031<P>Because syncrepl is a consumer-side replication engine, the syncrepl specification is defined in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) of the consumer server, not in the provider server's configuration file. The initial loading of the replica content can be performed either by starting the syncrepl engine with no synchronization cookie or by populating the consumer replica by loading an <TERM>LDIF</TERM> file dumped as a backup at the provider.</P> 7032<P>When loading from a backup, it is not required to perform the initial loading from the up-to-date backup of the provider content. The syncrepl engine will automatically synchronize the initial consumer replica to the current provider content. As a result, it is not required to stop the provider server in order to avoid the replica inconsistency caused by the updates to the provider content during the content backup and loading process.</P> 7033<P>When replicating a large scale directory, especially in a bandwidth constrained environment, it is advised to load the consumer replica from a backup instead of performing a full initial load using syncrepl.</P> 7034<H4><A NAME="Set up the provider slapd">18.3.1.2. Set up the provider slapd</A></H4> 7035<P>The provider is implemented as an overlay, so the overlay itself must first be configured in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) before it can be used. The provider has only two configuration directives, for setting checkpoints on the <TT>contextCSN</TT> and for configuring the session log. Because the LDAP Sync search is subject to access control, proper access control privileges should be set up for the replicated content.</P> 7036<P>The <TT>contextCSN</TT> checkpoint is configured by the</P> 7037<PRE> 7038 syncprov-checkpoint <ops> <minutes> 7039</PRE> 7040<P>directive. Checkpoints are only tested after successful write operations. If <EM><ops></EM> operations or more than <EM><minutes></EM> time has passed since the last checkpoint, a new checkpoint is performed.</P> 7041<P>The session log is configured by the</P> 7042<PRE> 7043 syncprov-sessionlog <size> 7044</PRE> 7045<P>directive, where <EM><size></EM> is the maximum number of session log entries the session log can record. When a session log is configured, it is automatically used for all LDAP Sync searches within the database.</P> 7046<P>Note that using the session log requires searching on the <EM>entryUUID</EM> attribute. Setting an eq index on this attribute will greatly benefit the performance of the session log on the provider.</P> 7047<P>A more complete example of the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) content is thus:</P> 7048<PRE> 7049 database bdb 7050 suffix dc=Example,dc=com 7051 rootdn dc=Example,dc=com 7052 directory /var/ldap/db 7053 index objectclass,entryCSN,entryUUID eq 7054 7055 overlay syncprov 7056 syncprov-checkpoint 100 10 7057 syncprov-sessionlog 100 7058</PRE> 7059<H4><A NAME="Set up the consumer slapd">18.3.1.3. Set up the consumer slapd</A></H4> 7060<P>The syncrepl replication is specified in the database section of <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) for the replica context. The syncrepl engine is backend independent and the directive can be defined with any database type.</P> 7061<PRE> 7062 database hdb 7063 suffix dc=Example,dc=com 7064 rootdn dc=Example,dc=com 7065 directory /var/ldap/db 7066 index objectclass,entryCSN,entryUUID eq 7067 7068 syncrepl rid=123 7069 provider=ldap://provider.example.com:389 7070 type=refreshOnly 7071 interval=01:00:00:00 7072 searchbase="dc=example,dc=com" 7073 filter="(objectClass=organizationalPerson)" 7074 scope=sub 7075 attrs="cn,sn,ou,telephoneNumber,title,l" 7076 schemachecking=off 7077 bindmethod=simple 7078 binddn="cn=syncuser,dc=example,dc=com" 7079 credentials=secret 7080</PRE> 7081<P>In this example, the consumer will connect to the provider <EM>slapd</EM>(8) at port 389 of <A HREF="ldap://provider.example.com">ldap://provider.example.com</A> to perform a polling (<EM>refreshOnly</EM>) mode of synchronization once a day. It will bind as <TT>cn=syncuser,dc=example,dc=com</TT> using simple authentication with password "secret". Note that the access control privilege of <TT>cn=syncuser,dc=example,dc=com</TT> should be set appropriately in the provider to retrieve the desired replication content. Also the search limits must be high enough on the provider to allow the syncuser to retrieve a complete copy of the requested content. The consumer uses the rootdn to write to its database so it always has full permissions to write all content.</P> 7082<P>The synchronization search in the above example will search for the entries whose objectClass is organizationalPerson in the entire subtree rooted at <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT>. The requested attributes are <TT>cn</TT>, <TT>sn</TT>, <TT>ou</TT>, <TT>telephoneNumber</TT>, <TT>title</TT>, and <TT>l</TT>. The schema checking is turned off, so that the consumer <EM>slapd</EM>(8) will not enforce entry schema checking when it processes updates from the provider <EM>slapd</EM>(8).</P> 7083<P>For more detailed information on the syncrepl directive, see the <A HREF="#syncrepl">syncrepl</A> section of <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> chapter of this admin guide.</P> 7084<H4><A NAME="Start the provider and the consumer slapd">18.3.1.4. Start the provider and the consumer slapd</A></H4> 7085<P>The provider <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is not required to be restarted. <EM>contextCSN</EM> is automatically generated as needed: it might be originally contained in the <TERM>LDIF</TERM> file, generated by <EM>slapadd</EM> (8), generated upon changes in the context, or generated when the first LDAP Sync search arrives at the provider. If an LDIF file is being loaded which did not previously contain the <EM>contextCSN</EM>, the <EM>-w</EM> option should be used with <EM>slapadd</EM> (8) to cause it to be generated. This will allow the server to startup a little quicker the first time it runs.</P> 7086<P>When starting a consumer <EM>slapd</EM>(8), it is possible to provide a synchronization cookie as the <EM>-c cookie</EM> command line option in order to start the synchronization from a specific state. The cookie is a comma separated list of name=value pairs. Currently supported syncrepl cookie fields are <EM>csn=<csn></EM> and <EM>rid=<rid></EM>. <EM><csn></EM> represents the current synchronization state of the consumer replica. <EM><rid></EM> identifies a consumer replica locally within the consumer server. It is used to relate the cookie to the syncrepl definition in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) which has the matching replica identifier. The <EM><rid></EM> must have no more than 3 decimal digits. The command line cookie overrides the synchronization cookie stored in the consumer replica database.</P> 7087<H3><A NAME="Delta-syncrepl">18.3.2. Delta-syncrepl</A></H3> 7088<H4><A NAME="Delta-syncrepl Provider configuration">18.3.2.1. Delta-syncrepl Provider configuration</A></H4> 7089<P>Setting up delta-syncrepl requires configuration changes on both the master and replica servers:</P> 7090<PRE> 7091 # Give the replica DN unlimited read access. This ACL needs to be 7092 # merged with other ACL statements, and/or moved within the scope 7093 # of a database. The "by * break" portion causes evaluation of 7094 # subsequent rules. See slapd.access(5) for details. 7095 access to * 7096 by dn.base="cn=replicator,dc=symas,dc=com" read 7097 by * break 7098 7099 # Set the module path location 7100 modulepath /opt/symas/lib/openldap 7101 7102 # Load the hdb backend 7103 moduleload back_hdb.la 7104 7105 # Load the accesslog overlay 7106 moduleload accesslog.la 7107 7108 #Load the syncprov overlay 7109 moduleload syncprov.la 7110 7111 # Accesslog database definitions 7112 database hdb 7113 suffix cn=accesslog 7114 directory /db/accesslog 7115 rootdn cn=accesslog 7116 index default eq 7117 index entryCSN,objectClass,reqEnd,reqResult,reqStart 7118 7119 overlay syncprov 7120 syncprov-nopresent TRUE 7121 syncprov-reloadhint TRUE 7122 7123 # Let the replica DN have limitless searches 7124 limits dn.exact="cn=replicator,dc=symas,dc=com" time.soft=unlimited time.hard=unlimited size.soft=unlimited size.hard=unlimited 7125 7126 # Primary database definitions 7127 database hdb 7128 suffix "dc=symas,dc=com" 7129 rootdn "cn=manager,dc=symas,dc=com" 7130 7131 ## Whatever other configuration options are desired 7132 7133 # syncprov specific indexing 7134 index entryCSN eq 7135 index entryUUID eq 7136 7137 # syncrepl Provider for primary db 7138 overlay syncprov 7139 syncprov-checkpoint 1000 60 7140 7141 # accesslog overlay definitions for primary db 7142 overlay accesslog 7143 logdb cn=accesslog 7144 logops writes 7145 logsuccess TRUE 7146 # scan the accesslog DB every day, and purge entries older than 7 days 7147 logpurge 07+00:00 01+00:00 7148 7149 # Let the replica DN have limitless searches 7150 limits dn.exact="cn=replicator,dc=symas,dc=com" time.soft=unlimited time.hard=unlimited size.soft=unlimited size.hard=unlimited 7151</PRE> 7152<P>For more information, always consult the relevant man pages (<EM>slapo-accesslog</EM>(5) and <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5))</P> 7153<H4><A NAME="Delta-syncrepl Consumer configuration">18.3.2.2. Delta-syncrepl Consumer configuration</A></H4> 7154<PRE> 7155 # Replica database configuration 7156 database hdb 7157 suffix "dc=symas,dc=com" 7158 rootdn "cn=manager,dc=symas,dc=com" 7159 7160 ## Whatever other configuration bits for the replica, like indexing 7161 ## that you want 7162 7163 # syncrepl specific indices 7164 index entryUUID eq 7165 7166 # syncrepl directives 7167 syncrepl rid=0 7168 provider=ldap://ldapmaster.symas.com:389 7169 bindmethod=simple 7170 binddn="cn=replicator,dc=symas,dc=com" 7171 credentials=secret 7172 searchbase="dc=symas,dc=com" 7173 logbase="cn=accesslog" 7174 logfilter="(&(objectClass=auditWriteObject)(reqResult=0))" 7175 schemachecking=on 7176 type=refreshAndPersist 7177 retry="60 +" 7178 syncdata=accesslog 7179 7180 # Refer updates to the master 7181 updateref ldap://ldapmaster.symas.com 7182</PRE> 7183<P>The above configuration assumes that you have a replicator identity defined in your database that can be used to bind to the provider. In addition, all of the databases (primary, replica, and the accesslog storage database) should also have properly tuned <EM>DB_CONFIG</EM> files that meet your needs.</P> 7184<H3><A NAME="N-Way Multi-Master">18.3.3. N-Way Multi-Master</A></H3> 7185<P>For the following example we will be using 3 Master nodes. Keeping in line with <B>test050-syncrepl-multimaster</B> of the OpenLDAP test suite, we will be configuring <EM>slapd(8)</EM> via <B>cn=config</B></P> 7186<P>This sets up the config database:</P> 7187<PRE> 7188 dn: cn=config 7189 objectClass: olcGlobal 7190 cn: config 7191 olcServerID: 1 7192 7193 dn: olcDatabase={0}config,cn=config 7194 objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig 7195 olcDatabase: {0}config 7196 olcRootPW: secret 7197</PRE> 7198<P>second and third servers will have a different olcServerID obviously:</P> 7199<PRE> 7200 dn: cn=config 7201 objectClass: olcGlobal 7202 cn: config 7203 olcServerID: 2 7204 7205 dn: olcDatabase={0}config,cn=config 7206 objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig 7207 olcDatabase: {0}config 7208 olcRootPW: secret 7209</PRE> 7210<P>This sets up syncrepl as a provider (since these are all masters):</P> 7211<PRE> 7212 dn: cn=module,cn=config 7213 objectClass: olcModuleList 7214 cn: module 7215 olcModulePath: /usr/local/libexec/openldap 7216 olcModuleLoad: syncprov.la 7217</PRE> 7218<P>Now we setup the first Master Node (replace $URI1, $URI2 and $URI3 etc. with your actual ldap urls):</P> 7219<PRE> 7220 dn: cn=config 7221 changetype: modify 7222 replace: olcServerID 7223 olcServerID: 1 $URI1 7224 olcServerID: 2 $URI2 7225 olcServerID: 3 $URI3 7226 7227 dn: olcOverlay=syncprov,olcDatabase={0}config,cn=config 7228 changetype: add 7229 objectClass: olcOverlayConfig 7230 objectClass: olcSyncProvConfig 7231 olcOverlay: syncprov 7232 7233 dn: olcDatabase={0}config,cn=config 7234 changetype: modify 7235 add: olcSyncRepl 7236 olcSyncRepl: rid=001 provider=$URI1 binddn="cn=config" bindmethod=simple 7237 credentials=secret searchbase="cn=config" type=refreshAndPersist 7238 retry="5 5 300 5" timeout=1 7239 olcSyncRepl: rid=002 provider=$URI2 binddn="cn=config" bindmethod=simple 7240 credentials=secret searchbase="cn=config" type=refreshAndPersist 7241 retry="5 5 300 5" timeout=1 7242 olcSyncRepl: rid=003 provider=$URI3 binddn="cn=config" bindmethod=simple 7243 credentials=secret searchbase="cn=config" type=refreshAndPersist 7244 retry="5 5 300 5" timeout=1 7245 - 7246 add: olcMirrorMode 7247 olcMirrorMode: TRUE 7248</PRE> 7249<P>Now start up the Master and a consumer/s, also add the above LDIF to the first consumer, second consumer etc. It will then replicate <B>cn=config</B>. You now have N-Way Multimaster on the config database.</P> 7250<P>We still have to replicate the actual data, not just the config, so add to the master (all active and configured consumers/masters will pull down this config, as they are all syncing). Also, replace all <EM>${</EM>} variables with whatever is applicable to your setup:</P> 7251<PRE> 7252 dn: olcDatabase={1}$BACKEND,cn=config 7253 objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig 7254 objectClass: olc${BACKEND}Config 7255 olcDatabase: {1}$BACKEND 7256 olcSuffix: $BASEDN 7257 olcDbDirectory: ./db 7258 olcRootDN: $MANAGERDN 7259 olcRootPW: $PASSWD 7260 olcLimits: dn.exact="$MANAGERDN" time.soft=unlimited time.hard=unlimited size.soft=unlimited size.hard=unlimited 7261 olcSyncRepl: rid=004 provider=$URI1 binddn="$MANAGERDN" bindmethod=simple 7262 credentials=$PASSWD searchbase="$BASEDN" type=refreshOnly 7263 interval=00:00:00:10 retry="5 5 300 5" timeout=1 7264 olcSyncRepl: rid=005 provider=$URI2 binddn="$MANAGERDN" bindmethod=simple 7265 credentials=$PASSWD searchbase="$BASEDN" type=refreshOnly 7266 interval=00:00:00:10 retry="5 5 300 5" timeout=1 7267 olcSyncRepl: rid=006 provider=$URI3 binddn="$MANAGERDN" bindmethod=simple 7268 credentials=$PASSWD searchbase="$BASEDN" type=refreshOnly 7269 interval=00:00:00:10 retry="5 5 300 5" timeout=1 7270 olcMirrorMode: TRUE 7271 7272 dn: olcOverlay=syncprov,olcDatabase={1}${BACKEND},cn=config 7273 changetype: add 7274 objectClass: olcOverlayConfig 7275 objectClass: olcSyncProvConfig 7276 olcOverlay: syncprov 7277</PRE> 7278<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 7279<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>All of your servers' clocks must be tightly synchronized using e.g. NTP <A HREF="http://www.ntp.org/">http://www.ntp.org/</A>, atomic clock, or some other reliable time reference. 7280<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 7281<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 7282<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>As stated in <EM>slapd-config</EM>(5), URLs specified in <EM>olcSyncRepl</EM> directives are the URLs of the servers from which to replicate. These must exactly match the URLs <EM>slapd</EM> listens on (<EM>-h</EM> in <A HREF="#Command-Line Options">Command-Line Options</A>). Otherwise slapd may attempt to replicate from itself, causing a loop. 7283<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 7284<H3><A NAME="MirrorMode">18.3.4. MirrorMode</A></H3> 7285<P>MirrorMode configuration is actually very easy. If you have ever setup a normal slapd syncrepl provider, then the only change is the following two directives:</P> 7286<PRE> 7287 mirrormode on 7288 serverID 1 7289</PRE> 7290<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 7291<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>You need to make sure that the <EM>serverID</EM> of each mirror node is different and add it as a global configuration option. 7292<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 7293<H4><A NAME="Mirror Node Configuration">18.3.4.1. Mirror Node Configuration</A></H4> 7294<P>The first step is to configure the syncrepl provider the same as in the <A HREF="#Set up the provider slapd">Set up the provider slapd</A> section.</P> 7295<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 7296<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Delta-syncrepl is not yet supported with MirrorMode. 7297<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 7298<P>Here's a specific cut down example using <A HREF="#LDAP Sync Replication">LDAP Sync Replication</A> in <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM> mode:</P> 7299<P>MirrorMode node 1:</P> 7300<PRE> 7301 # Global section 7302 serverID 1 7303 # database section 7304 7305 # syncrepl directive 7306 syncrepl rid=001 7307 provider=ldap://ldap-sid2.example.com 7308 bindmethod=simple 7309 binddn="cn=mirrormode,dc=example,dc=com" 7310 credentials=mirrormode 7311 searchbase="dc=example,dc=com" 7312 schemachecking=on 7313 type=refreshAndPersist 7314 retry="60 +" 7315 7316 mirrormode on 7317</PRE> 7318<P>MirrorMode node 2:</P> 7319<PRE> 7320 # Global section 7321 serverID 2 7322 # database section 7323 7324 # syncrepl directive 7325 syncrepl rid=001 7326 provider=ldap://ldap-sid1.example.com 7327 bindmethod=simple 7328 binddn="cn=mirrormode,dc=example,dc=com" 7329 credentials=mirrormode 7330 searchbase="dc=example,dc=com" 7331 schemachecking=on 7332 type=refreshAndPersist 7333 retry="60 +" 7334 7335 mirrormode on 7336</PRE> 7337<P>It's simple really; each MirrorMode node is setup <B>exactly</B> the same, except that the <EM>serverID</EM> is unique, and each consumer is pointed to the other server.</P> 7338<H5><A NAME="Failover Configuration">18.3.4.1.1. Failover Configuration</A></H5> 7339<P>There are generally 2 choices for this; 1. Hardware proxies/load-balancing or dedicated proxy software, 2. using a Back-LDAP proxy as a syncrepl provider</P> 7340<P>A typical enterprise example might be:</P> 7341<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="dual_dc.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 7342<P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: MirrorMode in a Dual Data Center Configuration</P> 7343<H5><A NAME="Normal Consumer Configuration">18.3.4.1.2. Normal Consumer Configuration</A></H5> 7344<P>This is exactly the same as the <A HREF="#Set up the consumer slapd">Set up the consumer slapd</A> section. It can either setup in normal <A HREF="#syncrepl replication">syncrepl replication</A> mode, or in <A HREF="#delta-syncrepl replication">delta-syncrepl replication</A> mode.</P> 7345<H4><A NAME="MirrorMode Summary">18.3.4.2. MirrorMode Summary</A></H4> 7346<P>You will now have a directory architecture that provides all of the consistency guarantees of single-master replication, while also providing the high availability of multi-master replication.</P> 7347<H3><A NAME="Syncrepl Proxy">18.3.5. Syncrepl Proxy</A></H3> 7348<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="push-based-complete.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 7349<P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Replacing slurpd</P> 7350<P>The following example is for a self-contained push-based replication solution:</P> 7351<PRE> 7352 ####################################################################### 7353 # Standard OpenLDAP Master/Provider 7354 ####################################################################### 7355 7356 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.schema 7357 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/cosine.schema 7358 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/nis.schema 7359 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema 7360 7361 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.acl 7362 7363 modulepath /usr/local/libexec/openldap 7364 moduleload back_hdb.la 7365 moduleload syncprov.la 7366 moduleload back_monitor.la 7367 moduleload back_ldap.la 7368 7369 pidfile /usr/local/var/slapd.pid 7370 argsfile /usr/local/var/slapd.args 7371 7372 loglevel sync stats 7373 7374 database hdb 7375 suffix "dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7376 directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data 7377 7378 checkpoint 1024 5 7379 cachesize 10000 7380 idlcachesize 10000 7381 7382 index objectClass eq 7383 # rest of indexes 7384 index default sub 7385 7386 rootdn "cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7387 rootpw testing 7388 7389 # syncprov specific indexing 7390 index entryCSN eq 7391 index entryUUID eq 7392 7393 # syncrepl Provider for primary db 7394 overlay syncprov 7395 syncprov-checkpoint 1000 60 7396 7397 # Let the replica DN have limitless searches 7398 limits dn.exact="cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" time.soft=unlimited time.hard=unlimited size.soft=unlimited size.hard=unlimited 7399 7400 database monitor 7401 7402 database config 7403 rootpw testing 7404 7405 ############################################################################## 7406 # Consumer Proxy that pulls in data via Syncrepl and pushes out via slapd-ldap 7407 ############################################################################## 7408 7409 database ldap 7410 # ignore conflicts with other databases, as we need to push out to same suffix 7411 hidden on 7412 suffix "dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7413 rootdn "cn=slapd-ldap" 7414 uri ldap://localhost:9012/ 7415 7416 lastmod on 7417 7418 # We don't need any access to this DSA 7419 restrict all 7420 7421 acl-bind bindmethod=simple 7422 binddn="cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7423 credentials=testing 7424 7425 syncrepl rid=001 7426 provider=ldap://localhost:9011/ 7427 binddn="cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7428 bindmethod=simple 7429 credentials=testing 7430 searchbase="dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7431 type=refreshAndPersist 7432 retry="5 5 300 5" 7433 7434 overlay syncprov 7435</PRE> 7436<P>A replica configuration for this type of setup could be:</P> 7437<PRE> 7438 ####################################################################### 7439 # Standard OpenLDAP Slave without Syncrepl 7440 ####################################################################### 7441 7442 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.schema 7443 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/cosine.schema 7444 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/nis.schema 7445 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema 7446 7447 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.acl 7448 7449 modulepath /usr/local/libexec/openldap 7450 moduleload back_hdb.la 7451 moduleload syncprov.la 7452 moduleload back_monitor.la 7453 moduleload back_ldap.la 7454 7455 pidfile /usr/local/var/slapd.pid 7456 argsfile /usr/local/var/slapd.args 7457 7458 loglevel sync stats 7459 7460 database hdb 7461 suffix "dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7462 directory /usr/local/var/openldap-slave/data 7463 7464 checkpoint 1024 5 7465 cachesize 10000 7466 idlcachesize 10000 7467 7468 index objectClass eq 7469 # rest of indexes 7470 index default sub 7471 7472 rootdn "cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7473 rootpw testing 7474 7475 # Let the replica DN have limitless searches 7476 limits dn.exact="cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" time.soft=unlimited time.hard=unlimited size.soft=unlimited size.hard=unlimited 7477 7478 updatedn "cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7479 7480 # Refer updates to the master 7481 updateref ldap://localhost:9011 7482 7483 database monitor 7484 7485 database config 7486 rootpw testing 7487</PRE> 7488<P>You can see we use the <EM>updatedn</EM> directive here and example ACLs (<TT>usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.acl</TT>) for this could be:</P> 7489<PRE> 7490 # Give the replica DN unlimited read access. This ACL may need to be 7491 # merged with other ACL statements. 7492 7493 access to * 7494 by dn.base="cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" write 7495 by * break 7496 7497 access to dn.base="" 7498 by * read 7499 7500 access to dn.base="cn=Subschema" 7501 by * read 7502 7503 access to dn.subtree="cn=Monitor" 7504 by dn.exact="uid=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" write 7505 by users read 7506 by * none 7507 7508 access to * 7509 by self write 7510 by * read 7511</PRE> 7512<P>In order to support more replicas, just add more <EM>database ldap</EM> sections and increment the <EM>syncrepl rid</EM> number accordingly.</P> 7513<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 7514<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>You must populate the Master and Slave directories with the same data, unlike when using normal Syncrepl 7515<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 7516<P>If you do not have access to modify the master directory configuration you can configure a standalone ldap proxy, which might look like:</P> 7517<P><CENTER><IMG SRC="push-based-standalone.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P> 7518<P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Replacing slurpd with a standalone version</P> 7519<P>The following configuration is an example of a standalone LDAP Proxy:</P> 7520<PRE> 7521 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.schema 7522 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/cosine.schema 7523 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/nis.schema 7524 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema 7525 7526 include /usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.acl 7527 7528 modulepath /usr/local/libexec/openldap 7529 moduleload syncprov.la 7530 moduleload back_ldap.la 7531 7532 ############################################################################## 7533 # Consumer Proxy that pulls in data via Syncrepl and pushes out via slapd-ldap 7534 ############################################################################## 7535 7536 database ldap 7537 # ignore conflicts with other databases, as we need to push out to same suffix 7538 hidden on 7539 suffix "dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7540 rootdn "cn=slapd-ldap" 7541 uri ldap://localhost:9012/ 7542 7543 lastmod on 7544 7545 # We don't need any access to this DSA 7546 restrict all 7547 7548 acl-bind bindmethod=simple 7549 binddn="cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7550 credentials=testing 7551 7552 syncrepl rid=001 7553 provider=ldap://localhost:9011/ 7554 binddn="cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7555 bindmethod=simple 7556 credentials=testing 7557 searchbase="dc=suretecsystems,dc=com" 7558 type=refreshAndPersist 7559 retry="5 5 300 5" 7560 7561 overlay syncprov 7562</PRE> 7563<P>As you can see, you can let your imagination go wild using Syncrepl and <EM>slapd-ldap(8)</EM> tailoring your replication to fit your specific network topology.</P> 7564<P></P> 7565<HR> 7566<H1><A NAME="Maintenance">19. Maintenance</A></H1> 7567<P>System Administration is all about maintenance, so it is only fair that we discuss how to correctly maintain an OpenLDAP deployment.</P> 7568<H2><A NAME="Directory Backups">19.1. Directory Backups</A></H2> 7569<P>Backup strategies largely depend on the amount of change in the database and how much of that change an administrator might be willing to lose in a catastrophic failure. There are two basic methods that can be used:</P> 7570<P>1. Backup the Berkeley database itself and periodically back up the transaction log files:</P> 7571<P>Berkeley DB produces transaction logs that can be used to reconstruct changes from a given point in time. For example, if an administrator were willing to only lose one hour's worth of changes, they could take down the server in the middle of the night, copy the Berkeley database files offsite, and bring the server back online. Then, on an hourly basis, they could force a database checkpoint, capture the log files that have been generated in the past hour, and copy them offsite. The accumulated log files, in combination with the previous database backup, could be used with db_recover to reconstruct the database up to the time the last collection of log files was copied offsite. This method affords good protection, with minimal space overhead.</P> 7572<P>2. Periodically run slapcat and back up the LDIF file:</P> 7573<P>Slapcat can be run while slapd is active. However, one runs the risk of an inconsistent database- not from the point of slapd, but from the point of the applications using LDAP. For example, if a provisioning application performed tasks that consisted of several LDAP operations, and the slapcat took place concurrently with those operations, then there might be inconsistencies in the LDAP database from the point of view of that provisioning application and applications that depended on it. One must, therefore, be convinced something like that won't happen. One way to do that would be to put the database in read-only mode while performing the slapcat. The other disadvantage of this approach is that the generated LDIF files can be rather large and the accumulation of the day's backups could add up to a substantial amount of space.</P> 7574<P>You can use <EM>slapcat</EM>(8) to generate an LDIF file for each of your <EM>slapd</EM>(8) back-bdb or back-hdb databases.</P> 7575<PRE> 7576 slapcat -f slapd.conf -b "dc=example,dc=com" 7577</PRE> 7578<P>For back-bdb and back-hdb, this command may be ran while slapd(8) is running.</P> 7579<P>MORE on actual Berkeley DB backups later covering db_recover etc.</P> 7580<H2><A NAME="Berkeley DB Logs">19.2. Berkeley DB Logs</A></H2> 7581<P>Berkeley DB log files grow, and the administrator has to deal with it. The procedure is known as log file archival or log file rotation.</P> 7582<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 7583<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The actual log file rotation is handled by the Berkeley DB engine. 7584<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 7585<P>Logs of current transactions need to be stored into files so that the database can be recovered in the event of an application crash. Administrators can change the size limit of a single log file (by default 10MB), and have old log files removed automatically, by setting up DB environment (see below). The reason Berkeley DB never deletes any log files by default is that the administrator may wish to backup the log files before removal to make database recovery possible even after a catastrophic failure, such as file system corruption.</P> 7586<P>Log file names are <TT>log.XXXXXXXXXX</TT> (X is a digit). By default the log files are located in the BDB backend directory. The <TT>db_archive</TT> tool knows what log files are used in current transactions, and what are not. Administrators can move unused log files to a backup media, and delete them. To have them removed automatically, place set_flags <EM>DB_LOG_AUTOREMOVE</EM> directive in <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT>.</P> 7587<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 7588<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>If the log files are removed automatically, recovery after a catastrophic failure is likely to be impossible. 7589<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 7590<P>The files with names <TT>__db.001</TT>, <TT>__db.002</TT>, etc are just shared memory regions (or whatever). These ARE NOT 'logs', they must be left alone. Don't be afraid of them, they do not grow like logs do.</P> 7591<P>To understand the <TT>db_archive</TT> interface, the reader should refer to chapter 9 of the Berkeley DB guide. In particular, the following chapters are recommended:</P> 7592<UL> 7593<LI>Database and log file archival - <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/archival.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/archival.html</A> 7594<LI>Log file removal - <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/logfile.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/logfile.html</A> 7595<LI>Recovery procedures - <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/recovery.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/recovery.html</A> 7596<LI>Hot failover - <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/hotfail.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/hotfail.html</A> 7597<LI>Complete list of Berkeley DB flags - <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/api_c/env_set_flags.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/api_c/env_set_flags.html</A></UL> 7598<P>Advanced installations can use special environment settings to fine-tune some Berkeley DB options (change the log file limit, etc). This can be done by using the <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT> file. This magic file can be created in BDB backend directory set up by <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5). More information on this file can be found in File naming chapter. Specific directives can be found in C Interface, look for <EM>DB_ENV->set_XXXX</EM> calls.</P> 7599<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 7600<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>options set in <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT> file override options set by OpenLDAP. Use them with extreme caution. Do not use them unless You know what You are doing. 7601<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 7602<P>The advantages of <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT> usage can be the following:</P> 7603<UL> 7604<LI>to keep data files and log files on different mediums (i.e. disks) to improve performance and/or reliability; 7605<LI>to fine-tune some specific options (such as shared memory region sizes); 7606<LI>to set the log file limit (please read Log file limits before doing this).</UL> 7607<P>To figure out the best-practice BDB backup scenario, the reader is highly recommended to read the whole Chapter 9: Berkeley DB Transactional Data Store Applications. This chapter is a set of small pages with examples in C language. Non-programming people can skip these examples without loss of knowledge.</P> 7608<H2><A NAME="Checkpointing">19.3. Checkpointing</A></H2> 7609<P>MORE/TIDY</P> 7610<P>If you put "checkpoint 1024 5" in slapd.conf (to checkpoint after 1024kb or 5 minutes, for example), this does not checkpoint every 5 minutes as you may think. The explanation from Howard is:</P> 7611<P>'In OpenLDAP 2.1 and 2.2 the checkpoint directive acts as follows - *when there is a write operation*, and more than <check> minutes have occurred since the last checkpoint, perform the checkpoint. If more than <check> minutes pass after a write without any other write operations occurring, no checkpoint is performed, so it's possible to lose the last write that occurred.''</P> 7612<P>In other words, a write operation occurring less than "check" minutes after the last checkpoint will not be checkpointed until the next write occurs after "check" minutes have passed since the checkpoint.</P> 7613<P>This has been modified in 2.3 to indeed checkpoint every so often; in the meantime a workaround is to invoke "db_checkpoint" from a cron script every so often, say 5 minutes.</P> 7614<H2><A NAME="Migration">19.4. Migration</A></H2> 7615<P>The simplest steps needed to migrate between versions or upgrade, depending on your deployment type are:</P> 7616<UL> 7617 </UL><OL> 7618<LI><B>Stop the current server when convenient</B> 7619<BR> 7620 7621<LI><B>slapcat the current data out</B> 7622<BR> 7623 7624<LI><B>Clear out the current data directory (/usr/local/var/openldap-data/) leaving DB_CONFIG in place</B> 7625<BR> 7626 7627<LI><B>Perform the software upgrades</B> 7628<BR> 7629 7630<LI><B>slapadd the exported data back into the directory</B> 7631<BR> 7632 7633<LI><B>Start the server</B></OL> 7634<P>Obviously this doesn't cater for any complicated deployments like <A HREF="#MirrorMode">MirrorMode</A> or <A HREF="#N-Way Multi-Master">N-Way Multi-Master</A>, but following the above sections and using either commercial support or community support should help. Also check the <A HREF="#Troubleshooting">Troubleshooting</A> section.</P> 7635<P></P> 7636<HR> 7637<H1><A NAME="Monitoring">20. Monitoring</A></H1> 7638<P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports an optional <TERM>LDAP</TERM> monitoring interface you can use to obtain information regarding the current state of your <EM>slapd</EM> instance. For instance, the interface allows you to determine how many clients are connected to the server currently. The monitoring information is provided by a specialized backend, the <EM>monitor</EM> backend. A manual page, <EM>slapd-monitor</EM>(5) is available.</P> 7639<P>When the monitoring interface is enabled, LDAP clients may be used to access information provided by the <EM>monitor</EM> backend, subject to access and other controls.</P> 7640<P>When enabled, the <EM>monitor</EM> backend dynamically generates and returns objects in response to search requests in the <EM>cn=Monitor</EM> subtree. Each object contains information about a particular aspect of the server. The information is held in a combination of user applications and operational attributes. This information can be access with <EM>ldapsearch(1)</EM>, with any general-purpose LDAP browser, or with specialized monitoring tools. The <A HREF="#Accessing Monitoring Information">Accessing Monitoring Information</A> section provides a brief tutorial on how to use <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) to access monitoring information, while the <A HREF="#Monitor information">Monitor information</A> section details monitoring information base and its organization.</P> 7641<P>While support for the monitor backend is included in default builds of slapd(8), this support requires some configuration to become active. This may be done using either <TT>cn=config</TT> or <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5). The former is discussed in the <A HREF="#Monitor configuration via cn=config">Monitor configuration via cn=config</A> section of this of this chapter. The latter is discussed in the <A HREF="#Monitor configuration via slapd.conf(5)">Monitor configuration via slapd.conf(5)</A> section of this chapter. These sections assume monitor backend is built into <EM>slapd</EM> (e.g., <TT>--enable-monitor=yes</TT>, the default). If the monitor backend was built as a module (e.g., <TT>--enable-monitor=mod</TT>, this module must loaded. Loading of modules is discussed in the <A HREF="#Configuring slapd">Configuring slapd</A> and <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> chapters.</P> 7642<H2><A NAME="Monitor configuration via cn=config(5)">20.1. Monitor configuration via cn=config(5)</A></H2> 7643<P><EM>This section has yet to be written.</EM></P> 7644<H2><A NAME="Monitor configuration via slapd.conf(5)">20.2. Monitor configuration via slapd.conf(5)</A></H2> 7645<P>Configuration of the slapd.conf(5) to support LDAP monitoring is quite simple.</P> 7646<P>First, ensure <EM>core.schema</EM> schema configuration file is included by your <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file. The <EM>monitor</EM> backend requires it.</P> 7647<P>Second, instantiate the <EM>monitor backend</EM> by adding a <EM>database monitor</EM> directive below your existing database sections. For instance:</P> 7648<PRE> 7649 database monitor 7650</PRE> 7651<P>Lastly, add additional global or database directives as needed.</P> 7652<P>Like most other database backends, the monitor backend does honor slapd(8) access and other administrative controls. As some monitor information may be sensitive, it is generally recommend access to cn=monitor be restricted to directory administrators and their monitoring agents. Adding an <EM>access</EM> directive immediately below the <EM>database monitor</EM> directive is a clear and effective approach for controlling access. For instance, the addition of the following <EM>access</EM> directive immediately below the <EM>database monitor</EM> directive restricts access to monitoring information to the specified directory manager.</P> 7653<PRE> 7654 access to * 7655 by dn.exact="cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com 7656 by * none 7657</PRE> 7658<P>More information on <EM>slapd</EM>(8) access controls, see <EM>The access Control Directive</EM> section of the <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> chapter and <EM>slapd.access</EM>(5).</P> 7659<P>After restarting <EM>slapd</EM>(8), you are ready to start exploring the monitoring information provided in <TT>cn=config</TT> as discussed in the <A HREF="#Accessing Monitoring Information">Accessing Monitoring Information</A> section of this chapter.</P> 7660<P>One can verify slapd(8) is properly configured to provide monitoring information by attempting to read the <TT>cn=monitor</TT> object. For instance, if the following <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) command returns the cn=monitor object (with, as requested, no attributes), it's working.</P> 7661<PRE> 7662 ldapsearch -x -D 'cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com' -W \ 7663 -b 'cn=Monitor' -s base 1.1 7664</PRE> 7665<P>Note that unlike general purpose database backends, the database suffix is hardcoded. It's always <TT>cn=Monitor</TT>. So no <EM>suffix</EM> directive should be provided. Also note that general purpose database backends, the monitor backend cannot be instantiated multiple times. That is, there can only be one (or zero) occurrences of <TT>database monitor</TT> in the server's configuration.</P> 7666<H2><A NAME="Accessing Monitoring Information">20.3. Accessing Monitoring Information</A></H2> 7667<P>As previously discussed, when enabled, the <EM>monitor</EM> backend dynamically generates and returns objects in response to search requests in the <EM>cn=Monitor</EM> subtree. Each object contains information about a particular aspect of the server. The information is held in a combination of user applications and operational attributes. This information can be access with <EM>ldapsearch(1)</EM>, with any general-purpose LDAP browser, or with specialized monitoring tools.</P> 7668<P>This section provides a provides a brief tutorial on how to use <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) to access monitoring information.</P> 7669<P>To inspect any particular monitor object, one performs search operation on the object with a baseObject scope and a <TT>(objectClass=*)</TT> filter. As the monitoring information is contained in a combination of user applications and operational attributes, the return all user applications attributes (e.g., <TT>'*'</TT>) and all operational attributes (e.g., <TT>'+'</TT>) should be requested. For instance, to read the <TT>cn=Monitor</TT> object itself, the <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) command (modified to fit your configuration) can be used:</P> 7670<PRE> 7671 ldapsearch -x -D 'cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com' -W \ 7672 -b 'cn=Monitor' -s base '(objectClass=*)' '*' '+' 7673</PRE> 7674<P>When run against your server, this should produce output similar to:</P> 7675<PRE> 7676 dn: cn=Monitor 7677 objectClass: monitorServer 7678 structuralObjectClass: monitorServer 7679 cn: Monitor 7680 creatorsName: 7681 modifiersName: 7682 createTimestamp: 20061208223558Z 7683 modifyTimestamp: 20061208223558Z 7684 description: This subtree contains monitoring/managing objects. 7685 description: This object contains information about this server. 7686 description: Most of the information is held in operational attributes, which 7687 must be explicitly requested. 7688 monitoredInfo: OpenLDAP: slapd 2.4 (Dec 7 2006 17:30:29) 7689 entryDN: cn=Monitor 7690 subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema 7691 hasSubordinates: TRUE 7692</PRE> 7693<P>To reduce the number of uninteresting attributes returned, one can be more selective when requesting which attributes are to be returned. For instance, one could request the return of all attributes allowed by the <EM>monitorServer</EM> object class (e.g., <TT>@objectClass</TT>) instead of all user and all operational attributes:</P> 7694<PRE> 7695 ldapsearch -x -D 'cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com' -W \ 7696 -b 'cn=Monitor' -s base '(objectClass=*)' '@monitorServer' 7697</PRE> 7698<P>This limits the output as follows:</P> 7699<PRE> 7700 dn: cn=Monitor 7701 objectClass: monitorServer 7702 cn: Monitor 7703 description: This subtree contains monitoring/managing objects. 7704 description: This object contains information about this server. 7705 description: Most of the information is held in operational attributes, which 7706 must be explicitly requested. 7707 monitoredInfo: OpenLDAP: slapd 2.X (Dec 7 2006 17:30:29) 7708</PRE> 7709<P>To return the names of all the monitoring objects, one performs a search of <TT>cn=Monitor</TT> with subtree scope and <TT>(objectClass=*)</TT> filter and requesting no attributes (e.g., <TT>1.1</TT>) be returned.</P> 7710<PRE> 7711 ldapsearch -x -D 'cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com' -W -b 'cn=Monitor' -s sub 1.1 7712</PRE> 7713<P>If you run this command you will discover that there are many objects in the <EM>cn=Monitor</EM> subtree. The following section describes some of the commonly available monitoring objects.</P> 7714<H2><A NAME="Monitor Information">20.4. Monitor Information</A></H2> 7715<P>The <EM>monitor</EM> backend provides a wealth of information useful for monitoring the slapd(8) contained in set of monitor objects. Each object contains information about a particular aspect of the server, such as a backends, a connection, or a thread. Some objects serve as containers for other objects and used to construct a hierarchy of objects.</P> 7716<P>In this hierarchy, the most superior object is {cn=Monitor}. While this object primarily serves as a container for other objects, most of which are containers, this object provides information about this server. In particular, it provides the slapd(8) version string. Example:</P> 7717<PRE> 7718 dn: cn=Monitor 7719 monitoredInfo: OpenLDAP: slapd 2.X (Dec 7 2006 17:30:29) 7720</PRE> 7721<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 7722<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Examples in this section (and its subsections) have been trimmed to show only key information. 7723<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 7724<H3><A NAME="Backends">20.4.1. Backends</A></H3> 7725<P>The <TT>cn=Backends,cn=Monitor</TT> object, itself, provides a list of available backends. The list of available backends all builtin backends, as well as backends loaded by modules. For example:</P> 7726<PRE> 7727 dn: cn=Backends,cn=Monitor 7728 monitoredInfo: config 7729 monitoredInfo: ldif 7730 monitoredInfo: monitor 7731 monitoredInfo: bdb 7732 monitoredInfo: hdb 7733</PRE> 7734<P>This indicates the <EM>config</EM>, <EM>ldif</EM>, <EM>monitor</EM>, <EM>bdb</EM>, and <EM>hdb</EM> backends are available.</P> 7735<P>The <TT>cn=Backends,cn=Monitor</TT> object is also a container for available backend objects. Each available backend object contains information about a particular backend. For example:</P> 7736<PRE> 7737 dn: cn=Backend 0,cn=Backends,cn=Monitor 7738 monitoredInfo: config 7739 monitorRuntimeConfig: TRUE 7740 supportedControl: 2.16.840.1.113730.3.4.2 7741 seeAlso: cn=Database 0,cn=Databases,cn=Monitor 7742 7743 dn: cn=Backend 1,cn=Backends,cn=Monitor 7744 monitoredInfo: ldif 7745 monitorRuntimeConfig: TRUE 7746 supportedControl: 2.16.840.1.113730.3.4.2 7747 7748 dn: cn=Backend 2,cn=Backends,cn=Monitor 7749 monitoredInfo: monitor 7750 monitorRuntimeConfig: TRUE 7751 supportedControl: 2.16.840.1.113730.3.4.2 7752 seeAlso: cn=Database 2,cn=Databases,cn=Monitor 7753 7754 dn: cn=Backend 3,cn=Backends,cn=Monitor 7755 monitoredInfo: bdb 7756 monitorRuntimeConfig: TRUE 7757 supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.1.12 7758 supportedControl: 2.16.840.1.113730.3.4.2 7759 supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.4.1.4203.666.5.2 7760 supportedControl: 1.2.840.113556.1.4.319 7761 supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.1.13.1 7762 supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.1.13.2 7763 supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.4.1.4203.1.10.1 7764 supportedControl: 1.2.840.113556.1.4.1413 7765 supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.4.1.4203.666.11.7.2 7766 seeAlso: cn=Database 1,cn=Databases,cn=Monitor 7767 7768 dn: cn=Backend 4,cn=Backends,cn=Monitor 7769 monitoredInfo: hdb 7770 monitorRuntimeConfig: TRUE 7771 supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.1.12 7772 supportedControl: 2.16.840.1.113730.3.4.2 7773 supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.4.1.4203.666.5.2 7774 supportedControl: 1.2.840.113556.1.4.319 7775 supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.1.13.1 7776 supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.1.13.2 7777 supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.4.1.4203.1.10.1 7778 supportedControl: 1.2.840.113556.1.4.1413 7779 supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.4.1.4203.666.11.7.2 7780</PRE> 7781<P>For each of these objects, monitorInfo indicates which backend the information in the object is about. For instance, the <TT>cn=Backend 3,cn=Backends,cn=Monitor</TT> object contains (in the example) information about the <EM>bdb</EM> backend.</P> 7782<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER> 7783<TR CLASS="heading"> 7784<TD> 7785<STRONG>Attribute</STRONG> 7786</TD> 7787<TD> 7788<STRONG>Description</STRONG> 7789</TD> 7790</TR> 7791<TR> 7792<TD> 7793monitoredInfo 7794</TD> 7795<TD> 7796Name of backend 7797</TD> 7798</TR> 7799<TR> 7800<TD> 7801supportedControl 7802</TD> 7803<TD> 7804supported LDAP control extensions 7805</TD> 7806</TR> 7807<TR> 7808<TD> 7809seeAlso 7810</TD> 7811<TD> 7812Database objects of instances of this backend 7813</TD> 7814</TR> 7815</TABLE> 7816 7817<H3><A NAME="Connections">20.4.2. Connections</A></H3> 7818<P>The main entry is empty; it should contain some statistics on the number of connections.</P> 7819<P>Dynamic child entries are created for each open connection, with stats on the activity on that connection (the format will be detailed later). There are two special child entries that show the number of total and current connections respectively.</P> 7820<P>For example:</P> 7821<P>Total Connections:</P> 7822<PRE> 7823 dn: cn=Total,cn=Connections,cn=Monitor 7824 structuralObjectClass: monitorCounterObject 7825 monitorCounter: 4 7826 entryDN: cn=Total,cn=Connections,cn=Monitor 7827 subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema 7828 hasSubordinates: FALSE 7829</PRE> 7830<P>Current Connections:</P> 7831<PRE> 7832 dn: cn=Current,cn=Connections,cn=Monitor 7833 structuralObjectClass: monitorCounterObject 7834 monitorCounter: 2 7835 entryDN: cn=Current,cn=Connections,cn=Monitor 7836 subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema 7837 hasSubordinates: FALSE 7838</PRE> 7839<H3><A NAME="Databases">20.4.3. Databases</A></H3> 7840<P>The main entry contains the naming context of each configured database; the child entries contain, for each database, the type and the naming context.</P> 7841<P>For example:</P> 7842<PRE> 7843 dn: cn=Database 2,cn=Databases,cn=Monitor 7844 structuralObjectClass: monitoredObject 7845 monitoredInfo: monitor 7846 monitorIsShadow: FALSE 7847 monitorContext: cn=Monitor 7848 readOnly: FALSE 7849 entryDN: cn=Database 2,cn=Databases,cn=Monitor 7850 subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema 7851 hasSubordinates: FALSE 7852</PRE> 7853<H3><A NAME="Listener">20.4.4. Listener</A></H3> 7854<P>It contains the description of the devices the server is currently listening on:</P> 7855<PRE> 7856 dn: cn=Listener 0,cn=Listeners,cn=Monitor 7857 structuralObjectClass: monitoredObject 7858 monitorConnectionLocalAddress: IP=0.0.0.0:389 7859 entryDN: cn=Listener 0,cn=Listeners,cn=Monitor 7860 subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema 7861 hasSubordinates: FALSE 7862</PRE> 7863<H3><A NAME="Log">20.4.5. Log</A></H3> 7864<P>It contains the currently active log items. The <EM>Log</EM> subsystem allows user modify operations on the <EM>description</EM> attribute, whose values <EM>MUST</EM> be in the list of admittable log switches:</P> 7865<PRE> 7866 Trace 7867 Packets 7868 Args 7869 Conns 7870 BER 7871 Filter 7872 Config 7873 ACL 7874 Stats 7875 Stats2 7876 Shell 7877 Parse 7878 Sync 7879</PRE> 7880<P>These values can be added, replaced or deleted; they affect what messages are sent to the syslog device. Custom values could be added by custom modules.</P> 7881<H3><A NAME="Operations">20.4.6. Operations</A></H3> 7882<P>It shows some statistics on the operations performed by the server:</P> 7883<PRE> 7884 Initiated 7885 Completed 7886</PRE> 7887<P>and for each operation type, i.e.:</P> 7888<PRE> 7889 Bind 7890 Unbind 7891 Add 7892 Delete 7893 Modrdn 7894 Modify 7895 Compare 7896 Search 7897 Abandon 7898 Extended 7899</PRE> 7900<P>There are too many types to list example here, so please try for yourself using <A HREF="#Monitor search example">Monitor search example</A></P> 7901<H3><A NAME="Overlays">20.4.7. Overlays</A></H3> 7902<P>The main entry contains the type of overlays available at run-time; the child entries, for each overlay, contain the type of the overlay.</P> 7903<P>It should also contain the modules that have been loaded if dynamic overlays are enabled:</P> 7904<PRE> 7905 # Overlays, Monitor 7906 dn: cn=Overlays,cn=Monitor 7907 structuralObjectClass: monitorContainer 7908 monitoredInfo: syncprov 7909 monitoredInfo: accesslog 7910 monitoredInfo: glue 7911 entryDN: cn=Overlays,cn=Monitor 7912 subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema 7913 hasSubordinates: TRUE 7914</PRE> 7915<H3><A NAME="SASL">20.4.8. SASL</A></H3> 7916<P>Currently empty.</P> 7917<H3><A NAME="Statistics">20.4.9. Statistics</A></H3> 7918<P>It shows some statistics on the data sent by the server:</P> 7919<PRE> 7920 Bytes 7921 PDU 7922 Entries 7923 Referrals 7924</PRE> 7925<P>e.g.</P> 7926<PRE> 7927 # Entries, Statistics, Monitor 7928 dn: cn=Entries,cn=Statistics,cn=Monitor 7929 structuralObjectClass: monitorCounterObject 7930 monitorCounter: 612248 7931 entryDN: cn=Entries,cn=Statistics,cn=Monitor 7932 subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema 7933 hasSubordinates: FALSE 7934</PRE> 7935<H3><A NAME="Threads">20.4.10. Threads</A></H3> 7936<P>It contains the maximum number of threads enabled at startup and the current backload.</P> 7937<P>e.g.</P> 7938<PRE> 7939 # Max, Threads, Monitor 7940 dn: cn=Max,cn=Threads,cn=Monitor 7941 structuralObjectClass: monitoredObject 7942 monitoredInfo: 16 7943 entryDN: cn=Max,cn=Threads,cn=Monitor 7944 subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema 7945 hasSubordinates: FALSE 7946</PRE> 7947<H3><A NAME="Time">20.4.11. Time</A></H3> 7948<P>It contains two child entries with the start time and the current time of the server.</P> 7949<P>e.g.</P> 7950<P>Start time:</P> 7951<PRE> 7952 dn: cn=Start,cn=Time,cn=Monitor 7953 structuralObjectClass: monitoredObject 7954 monitorTimestamp: 20061205124040Z 7955 entryDN: cn=Start,cn=Time,cn=Monitor 7956 subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema 7957 hasSubordinates: FALSE 7958</PRE> 7959<P>Current time:</P> 7960<PRE> 7961 dn: cn=Current,cn=Time,cn=Monitor 7962 structuralObjectClass: monitoredObject 7963 monitorTimestamp: 20061207120624Z 7964 entryDN: cn=Current,cn=Time,cn=Monitor 7965 subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema 7966 hasSubordinates: FALSE 7967</PRE> 7968<H3><A NAME="TLS">20.4.12. TLS</A></H3> 7969<P>Currently empty.</P> 7970<H3><A NAME="Waiters">20.4.13. Waiters</A></H3> 7971<P>It contains the number of current read waiters.</P> 7972<P>e.g.</P> 7973<P>Read waiters:</P> 7974<PRE> 7975 dn: cn=Read,cn=Waiters,cn=Monitor 7976 structuralObjectClass: monitorCounterObject 7977 monitorCounter: 7 7978 entryDN: cn=Read,cn=Waiters,cn=Monitor 7979 subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema 7980 hasSubordinates: FALSE 7981</PRE> 7982<P>Write waiters:</P> 7983<PRE> 7984 dn: cn=Write,cn=Waiters,cn=Monitor 7985 structuralObjectClass: monitorCounterObject 7986 monitorCounter: 0 7987 entryDN: cn=Write,cn=Waiters,cn=Monitor 7988 subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema 7989 hasSubordinates: FALSE 7990</PRE> 7991<P>Add new monitored things here and discuss, referencing man pages and present examples</P> 7992<P></P> 7993<HR> 7994<H1><A NAME="Tuning">21. Tuning</A></H1> 7995<P>This is perhaps one of the most important chapters in the guide, because if you have not tuned <EM>slapd</EM>(8) correctly or grasped how to design your directory and environment, you can expect very poor performance.</P> 7996<P>Reading, understanding and experimenting using the instructions and information in the following sections, will enable you to fully understand how to tailor your directory server to your specific requirements.</P> 7997<P>It should be noted that the following information has been collected over time from our community based FAQ. So obviously the benefit of this real world experience and advice should be of great value to the reader.</P> 7998<H2><A NAME="Performance Factors">21.1. Performance Factors</A></H2> 7999<P>Various factors can play a part in how your directory performs on your chosen hardware and environment. We will attempt to discuss these here.</P> 8000<H3><A NAME="Memory">21.1.1. Memory</A></H3> 8001<P>Scale your cache to use available memory and increase system memory if you can.</P> 8002<P>See <A HREF="#Caching">Caching</A></P> 8003<H3><A NAME="Disks">21.1.2. Disks</A></H3> 8004<P>Use fast subsystems. Put each database and logs on separate disks configurable via <EM>DB_CONFIG</EM>:</P> 8005<PRE> 8006 # Data Directory 8007 set_data_dir /data/db 8008 8009 # Transaction Log settings 8010 set_lg_dir /logs 8011</PRE> 8012<H3><A NAME="Network Topology">21.1.3. Network Topology</A></H3> 8013<P>http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/363.html</P> 8014<P>Drawing here.</P> 8015<H3><A NAME="Directory Layout Design">21.1.4. Directory Layout Design</A></H3> 8016<P>Reference to other sections and good/bad drawing here.</P> 8017<H3><A NAME="Expected Usage">21.1.5. Expected Usage</A></H3> 8018<P>Discussion.</P> 8019<H2><A NAME="Indexes">21.2. Indexes</A></H2> 8020<H3><A NAME="Understanding how a search works">21.2.1. Understanding how a search works</A></H3> 8021<P>If you're searching on a filter that has been indexed, then the search reads the index and pulls exactly the entries that are referenced by the index. If the filter term has not been indexed, then the search must read every single entry in the target scope and test to see if each entry matches the filter. Obviously indexing can save a lot of work when it's used correctly.</P> 8022<H3><A NAME="What to index">21.2.2. What to index</A></H3> 8023<P>You should create indices to match the actual filter terms used in search queries.</P> 8024<PRE> 8025 index cn,sn,givenname,mail eq 8026</PRE> 8027<P>Each attribute index can be tuned further by selecting the set of index types to generate. For example, substring and approximate search for organizations (o) may make little sense (and isn't like done very often). And searching for <EM>userPassword</EM> likely makes no sense what so ever.</P> 8028<P>General rule: don't go overboard with indexes. Unused indexes must be maintained and hence can only slow things down.</P> 8029<P>See <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(8) and <EM>slapdindex</EM>(8) for more information</P> 8030<H3><A NAME="Presence indexing">21.2.3. Presence indexing</A></H3> 8031<P>If your client application uses presence filters and if the target attribute exists on the majority of entries in your target scope, then all of those entries are going to be read anyway, because they are valid members of the result set. In a subtree where 100% of the entries are going to contain the same attributes, the presence index does absolutely NOTHING to benefit the search, because 100% of the entries match that presence filter.</P> 8032<P>So the resource cost of generating the index is a complete waste of CPU time, disk, and memory. Don't do it unless you know that it will be used, and that the attribute in question occurs very infrequently in the target data.</P> 8033<P>Almost no applications use presence filters in their search queries. Presence indexing is pointless when the target attribute exists on the majority of entries in the database. In most LDAP deployments, presence indexing should not be done, it's just wasted overhead.</P> 8034<P>See the <EM>Logging</EM> section below on what to watch our for if you have a frequently searched for attribute that is unindexed.</P> 8035<H2><A NAME="Logging">21.3. Logging</A></H2> 8036<H3><A NAME="What log level to use">21.3.1. What log level to use</A></H3> 8037<P>The default of <EM>loglevel stats</EM> (256) is really the best bet. There's a corollary to this when problems *do* arise, don't try to trace them using syslog. Use the debug flag instead, and capture slapd's stderr output. syslog is too slow for debug tracing, and it's inherently lossy - it will throw away messages when it can't keep up.</P> 8038<P>Contrary to popular belief, <EM>loglevel 0</EM> is not ideal for production as you won't be able to track when problems first arise.</P> 8039<H3><A NAME="What to watch out for">21.3.2. What to watch out for</A></H3> 8040<P>The most common message you'll see that you should pay attention to is:</P> 8041<PRE> 8042 "<= bdb_equality_candidates: (foo) index_param failed (18)" 8043</PRE> 8044<P>That means that some application tried to use an equality filter (<EM>foo=<somevalue></EM>) and attribute <EM>foo</EM> does not have an equality index. If you see a lot of these messages, you should add the index. If you see one every month or so, it may be acceptable to ignore it.</P> 8045<P>The default syslog level is stats (256) which logs the basic parameters of each request; it usually produces 1-3 lines of output. On Solaris and systems that only provide synchronous syslog, you may want to turn it off completely, but usually you want to leave it enabled so that you'll be able to see index messages whenever they arise. On Linux you can configure syslogd to run asynchronously, in which case the performance hit for moderate syslog traffic pretty much disappears.</P> 8046<H3><A NAME="Improving throughput">21.3.3. Improving throughput</A></H3> 8047<P>You can improve logging performance on some systems by configuring syslog not to sync the file system with every write (<EM>man syslogd/syslog.conf</EM>). In Linux, you can prepend the log file name with a "-" in <EM>syslog.conf</EM>. For example, if you are using the default LOCAL4 logging you could try:</P> 8048<PRE> 8049 # LDAP logs 8050 LOCAL4.* -/var/log/ldap 8051</PRE> 8052<P>For syslog-ng, add or modify the following line in <EM>syslog-ng.conf</EM>:</P> 8053<PRE> 8054 options { sync(n); }; 8055</PRE> 8056<P>where n is the number of lines which will be buffered before a write.</P> 8057<H2><A NAME="Caching">21.4. Caching</A></H2> 8058<P>We all know what caching is, don't we?</P> 8059<P>In brief, "A cache is a block of memory for temporary storage of data likely to be used again" - <A HREF="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cache">http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cache</A></P> 8060<P>There are 3 types of caches, BerkeleyDB's own cache, <EM>slapd</EM>(8) entry cache and <TERM>IDL</TERM> (IDL) cache.</P> 8061<H3><A NAME="Berkeley DB Cache">21.4.1. Berkeley DB Cache</A></H3> 8062<P>There are two ways to tune for the BDB cachesize:</P> 8063<P>(a) BDB cache size necessary to load the database via slapadd in optimal time</P> 8064<P>(b) BDB cache size necessary to have a high performing running slapd once the data is loaded</P> 8065<P>For (a), the optimal cachesize is the size of the entire database. If you already have the database loaded, this is simply a</P> 8066<PRE> 8067 du -c -h *.bdb 8068</PRE> 8069<P>in the directory containing the OpenLDAP (<EM>/usr/local/var/openldap-data</EM>) data.</P> 8070<P>For (b), the optimal cachesize is just the size of the <EM>id2entry.bdb</EM> file, plus about 10% for growth.</P> 8071<P>The tuning of <EM>DB_CONFIG</EM> should be done for each BDB type database instantiated (back-bdb, back-hdb).</P> 8072<P>Note that while the <TERM>BDB</TERM> cache is just raw chunks of memory and configured as a memory size, the <EM>slapd</EM>(8) entry cache holds parsed entries, and the size of each entry is variable.</P> 8073<P>There is also an IDL cache which is used for Index Data Lookups. If you can fit all of your database into slapd's entry cache, and all of your index lookups fit in the IDL cache, that will provide the maximum throughput.</P> 8074<P>If not, but you can fit the entire database into the BDB cache, then you should do that and shrink the slapd entry cache as appropriate.</P> 8075<P>Failing that, you should balance the BDB cache against the entry cache.</P> 8076<P>It is worth noting that it is not absolutely necessary to configure a BerkeleyDB cache equal in size to your entire database. All that you need is a cache that's large enough for your "working set."</P> 8077<P>That means, large enough to hold all of the most frequently accessed data, plus a few less-frequently accessed items.</P> 8078<P>For more information, please see: <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/am_conf/cachesize.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/am_conf/cachesize.html</A></P> 8079<H4><A NAME="Calculating Cachesize">21.4.1.1. Calculating Cachesize</A></H4> 8080<P>The back-bdb database lives in two main files, <TT>dn2id.bdb</TT> and <TT>id2entry.bdb</TT>. These are B-tree databases. We have never documented the back-bdb internal layout before, because it didn't seem like something anyone should have to worry about, nor was it necessarily cast in stone. But here's how it works today, in OpenLDAP 2.4.</P> 8081<P>A B-tree is a balanced tree; it stores data in its leaf nodes and bookkeeping data in its interior nodes (If you don't know what tree data structures look like in general, Google for some references, because that's getting far too elementary for the purposes of this discussion).</P> 8082<P>For decent performance, you need enough cache memory to contain all the nodes along the path from the root of the tree down to the particular data item you're accessing. That's enough cache for a single search. For the general case, you want enough cache to contain all the internal nodes in the database.</P> 8083<PRE> 8084 db_stat -d 8085</PRE> 8086<P>will tell you how many internal pages are present in a database. You should check this number for both dn2id and id2entry.</P> 8087<P>Also note that <EM>id2entry</EM> always uses 16KB per "page", while <EM>dn2id</EM> uses whatever the underlying filesystem uses, typically 4 or 8KB. To avoid thrashing the, your cache must be at least as large as the number of internal pages in both the <EM>dn2id</EM> and <EM>id2entry</EM> databases, plus some extra space to accommodate the actual leaf data pages.</P> 8088<P>For example, in my OpenLDAP 2.4 test database, I have an input LDIF file that's about 360MB. With the back-hdb backend this creates a <EM>dn2id.bdb</EM> that's 68MB, and an <EM>id2entry</EM> that's 800MB. db_stat tells me that <EM>dn2id</EM> uses 4KB pages, has 433 internal pages, and 6378 leaf pages. The id2entry uses 16KB pages, has 52 internal pages, and 45912 leaf pages. In order to efficiently retrieve any single entry in this database, the cache should be at least</P> 8089<PRE> 8090 (433+1) * 4KB + (52+1) * 16KB in size: 1736KB + 848KB =~ 2.5MB. 8091</PRE> 8092<P>This doesn't take into account other library overhead, so this is even lower than the barest minimum. The default cache size, when nothing is configured, is only 256KB.</P> 8093<P>This 2.5MB number also doesn't take indexing into account. Each indexed attribute uses another database file of its own, using a Hash structure.</P> 8094<P>Unlike the B-trees, where you only need to touch one data page to find an entry of interest, doing an index lookup generally touches multiple keys, and the point of a hash structure is that the keys are evenly distributed across the data space. That means there's no convenient compact subset of the database that you can keep in the cache to insure quick operation, you can pretty much expect references to be scattered across the whole thing. My strategy here would be to provide enough cache for at least 50% of all of the hash data.</P> 8095<PRE> 8096 (Number of hash buckets + number of overflow pages + number of duplicate pages) * page size / 2. 8097</PRE> 8098<P>The objectClass index for my example database is 5.9MB and uses 3 hash buckets and 656 duplicate pages. So:</P> 8099<PRE> 8100 ( 3 + 656 ) * 4KB / 2 =~ 1.3MB. 8101</PRE> 8102<P>With only this index enabled, I'd figure at least a 4MB cache for this backend. (Of course you're using a single cache shared among all of the database files, so the cache pages will most likely get used for something other than what you accounted for, but this gives you a fighting chance.)</P> 8103<P>With this 4MB cache I can slapcat this entire database on my 1.3GHz PIII in 1 minute, 40 seconds. With the cache doubled to 8MB, it still takes the same 1:40s. Once you've got enough cache to fit the B-tree internal pages, increasing it further won't have any effect until the cache really is large enough to hold 100% of the data pages. I don't have enough free RAM to hold all the 800MB id2entry data, so 4MB is good enough.</P> 8104<P>With back-bdb and back-hdb you can use "db_stat -m" to check how well the database cache is performing.</P> 8105<P>For more information on <EM>db_stat</EM>: <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/utility/db_stat.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/utility/db_stat.html</A></P> 8106<H3><A NAME="{{slapd}}(8) Entry Cache (cachesize)">21.4.2. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) Entry Cache (cachesize)</A></H3> 8107<P>The <EM>slapd</EM>(8) entry cache operates on decoded entries. The rationale - entries in the entry cache can be used directly, giving the fastest response. If an entry isn't in the entry cache but can be extracted from the BDB page cache, that will avoid an I/O but it will still require parsing, so this will be slower.</P> 8108<P>If the entry is in neither cache then BDB will have to flush some of its current cached pages and bring in the needed pages, resulting in a couple of expensive I/Os as well as parsing.</P> 8109<P>The most optimal value is of course, the entire number of entries in the database. However, most directory servers don't consistently serve out their entire database, so setting this to a lesser number that more closely matches the believed working set of data is sufficient. This is the second most important parameter for the DB.</P> 8110<P>As far as balancing the entry cache vs the BDB cache - parsed entries in memory are generally about twice as large as they are on disk.</P> 8111<P>As we have already mentioned, not having a proper database cache size will cause performance issues. These issues are not an indication of corruption occurring in the database. It is merely the fact that the cache is thrashing itself that causes performance/response time to slowdown.</P> 8112<H3><A NAME="{{TERM:IDL}} Cache (idlcachesize)">21.4.3. <TERM>IDL</TERM> Cache (idlcachesize)</A></H3> 8113<P>Each IDL holds the search results from a given query, so the IDL cache will end up holding the most frequently requested search results. For back-bdb, it is generally recommended to match the "cachesize" setting. For back-hdb, it is generally recommended to be 3x"cachesize".</P> 8114<P>{NOTE: The idlcachesize setting directly affects search performance}</P> 8115<H3><A NAME="{{slapd}}(8) Threads">21.4.4. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) Threads</A></H3> 8116<P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) can process requests via a configurable number of thread, which in turn affects the in/out rate of connections.</P> 8117<P>This value should generally be a function of the number of "real" cores on the system, for example on a server with 2 CPUs with one core each, set this to 8, or 4 threads per real core. This is a "read" maximized value. The more threads that are configured per core, the slower <EM>slapd</EM>(8) responds for "read" operations. On the flip side, it appears to handle write operations faster in a heavy write/low read scenario.</P> 8118<P>The upper bound for good read performance appears to be 16 threads (which also happens to be the default setting).</P> 8119<P></P> 8120<HR> 8121<H1><A NAME="Troubleshooting">22. Troubleshooting</A></H1> 8122<P>If you're having trouble using OpenLDAP, get onto the OpenLDAP-Software mailing list, or:</P> 8123<UL> 8124<LI>Browse the list archives at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/lists/#archives">http://www.openldap.org/lists/#archives</A> 8125<LI>Search the FAQ at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/">http://www.openldap.org/faq/</A> 8126<LI>Search the Issue Tracking System at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/its/">http://www.openldap.org/its/</A></UL> 8127<P>Chances are the problem has been solved and explained in detail many times before.</P> 8128<H2><A NAME="User or Software errors">22.1. User or Software errors?</A></H2> 8129<P>More often than not, an error is caused by a configuration problem or a misunderstanding of what you are trying to implement and/or achieve.</P> 8130<P>We will now attempt to discuss common user errors.</P> 8131<H2><A NAME="Checklist">22.2. Checklist</A></H2> 8132<P>The following checklist can help track down your problem. Please try to use if <B>before</B> posting to the list, or in the rare circumstances of reporting a bug.</P> 8133<UL> 8134 </UL><OL> 8135<LI><B>Use the <EM>slaptest</EM> tool to verify configurations before starting <EM>slapd</EM></B> 8136<BR> 8137 8138<LI><B>Verify that <EM>slapd</EM> is listening to the specified port(s) (389 and 636, generally) before trying the <EM>ldapsearch</EM></B> 8139<BR> 8140 8141<LI><B>Can you issue an <EM>ldapsearch</EM>?</B> 8142<BR> 8143 8144<LI><B>If not, have you enabled complex ACLs without fully understanding them?</B> 8145<BR> 8146 8147<LI><B>Do you have a system wide LDAP setting pointing to the wrong LDAP Directory?</B> 8148<BR> 8149 8150<LI><B>Are you using TLS?</B> 8151<BR> 8152 8153<LI><B>Have your certificates expired?</B></OL> 8154<H2><A NAME="OpenLDAP Bugs">22.3. OpenLDAP Bugs</A></H2> 8155<P>Sometimes you may encounter an actual OpenLDAP bug, in which case please visit our Issue Tracking system <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/its/">http://www.openldap.org/its/</A> and report it. However, make sure it's not already a known bug or a common user problem.</P> 8156<UL> 8157<LI>bugs in historic versions of OpenLDAP will not be considered; 8158<LI>bugs in released versions that are no longer present in HEAD code, either because they have been fixed or because they no longer apply, will not be considered as well; 8159<LI>bugs in distributions of OpenLDAP software that are not related to the software as provided by OpenLDAP will not be considered; in those cases please refer to the distributor.</UL> 8160<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 8161<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Our Issue Tracking system is <B>NOT</B> for OpenLDAP <B>Support</B>, please join our mailing Lists: <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/lists/">http://www.openldap.org/lists/</A> for that. 8162<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 8163<P>The information you should provide in your bug report is discussed in our FAQ-O-MATIC at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/59.html">http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/59.html</A></P> 8164<H2><A NAME="3rd party software error">22.4. 3rd party software error</A></H2> 8165<P>The OpenLDAP Project only supports OpenLDAP software.</P> 8166<P>You may however seek commercial support (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/support/">http://www.openldap.org/support/</A>) or join the general LDAP forum for non-commercial discussions and information relating to LDAP at: <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/mailinglist.html">http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/mailinglist.html</A></P> 8167<H2><A NAME="How to contact the OpenLDAP Project">22.5. How to contact the OpenLDAP Project</A></H2> 8168<UL> 8169<LI>Mailing Lists: <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/lists/">http://www.openldap.org/lists/</A> 8170<LI>Project: <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/project/">http://www.openldap.org/project/</A> 8171<LI>Issue Tracking: <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/its/">http://www.openldap.org/its/</A></UL> 8172<H2><A NAME="How to present your problem">22.6. How to present your problem</A></H2> 8173<H2><A NAME="Debugging {{slapd}}(8)">22.7. Debugging <EM>slapd</EM>(8)</A></H2> 8174<P>After reading through the above sections and before e-mailing the OpenLDAP lists, you might want to try out some of the following to track down the cause of your problems:</P> 8175<UL> 8176<LI>Loglevel stats (256) is generally a good first loglevel to try for getting information useful to list members on issues 8177<LI>Running <EM>slapd -d -1</EM> can often track down fairly simple issues, such as missing schemas and incorrect file permissions for the <EM>slapd</EM> user to things like certs 8178<LI>Check your logs for errors, as discussed at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/358.html">http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/358.html</A></UL> 8179<H2><A NAME="Commercial Support">22.8. Commercial Support</A></H2> 8180<P>The firms listed at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/support/">http://www.openldap.org/support/</A> offer technical support services catering to OpenLDAP community.</P> 8181<P>The listing of any given firm should not be viewed as an endorsement or recommendation of any kind, nor as otherwise indicating there exists a business relationship or an affiliation between any listed firm and the OpenLDAP Foundation or the OpenLDAP Project or its contributors.</P> 8182<P></P> 8183<HR> 8184<H1><A NAME="Changes Since Previous Release">A. Changes Since Previous Release</A></H1> 8185<P>The following sections attempt to summarize the new features and changes in OpenLDAP software since the 2.3.x release and the OpenLDAP Admin Guide.</P> 8186<H2><A NAME="New Guide Sections">A.1. New Guide Sections</A></H2> 8187<P>In order to make the Admin Guide more thorough and cover the majority of questions asked on the OpenLDAP mailing lists and scenarios discussed there, we have added the following new sections:</P> 8188<UL> 8189<LI><A HREF="#When should I use LDAP">When should I use LDAP?</A> 8190<LI><A HREF="#When should I not use LDAP">When should I not use LDAP?</A> 8191<LI><A HREF="#LDAP vs RDBMS">LDAP vs RDBMS</A> 8192<LI><A HREF="#Access Control">Access Control</A> 8193<LI><A HREF="#Backends">Backends</A> 8194<LI><A HREF="#Overlays">Overlays</A> 8195<LI><A HREF="#Replication">Replication</A> 8196<LI><A HREF="#Maintenance">Maintenance</A> 8197<LI><A HREF="#Monitoring">Monitoring</A> 8198<LI><A HREF="#Tuning">Tuning</A> 8199<LI><A HREF="#Troubleshooting">Troubleshooting</A> 8200<LI><A HREF="#Changes Since Previous Release">Changes Since Previous Release</A> 8201<LI><A HREF="#Upgrading from 2.3.x">Upgrading from 2.3.x</A> 8202<LI><A HREF="#Common errors encountered when using OpenLDAP Software">Common errors encountered when using OpenLDAP Software</A> 8203<LI><A HREF="#Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions">Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions</A> 8204<LI><A HREF="#Real World OpenLDAP Deployments and Examples">Real World OpenLDAP Deployments and Examples</A> 8205<LI><A HREF="#OpenLDAP Software Contributions">OpenLDAP Software Contributions</A> 8206<LI><A HREF="#Configuration File Examples">Configuration File Examples</A> 8207<LI><A HREF="#LDAP Result Codes">LDAP Result Codes</A> 8208<LI><A HREF="#Glossary">Glossary</A></UL> 8209<P>Also, the table of contents is now 3 levels deep to ease navigation.</P> 8210<H2><A NAME="New Features and Enhancements in 2.4">A.2. New Features and Enhancements in 2.4</A></H2> 8211<H3><A NAME="Better {{B:cn=config}} functionality">A.2.1. Better <B>cn=config</B> functionality</A></H3> 8212<P>There is a new slapd-config(5) manpage for the <B>cn=config</B> backend. The original design called for auto-renaming of config entries when you insert or delete entries with ordered names, but that was not implemented in 2.3. It is now in 2.4. This means, e.g., if you have</P> 8213<PRE> 8214 olcDatabase={1}bdb,cn=config 8215 olcSuffix: dc=example,dc=com 8216</PRE> 8217<P>and you want to add a new subordinate, now you can ldapadd:</P> 8218<PRE> 8219 olcDatabase={1}bdb,cn=config 8220 olcSuffix: dc=foo,dc=example,dc=com 8221</PRE> 8222<P>This will insert a new BDB database in slot 1 and bump all following databases down one, so the original BDB database will now be named:</P> 8223<PRE> 8224 olcDatabase={2}bdb,cn=config 8225 olcSuffix: dc=example,dc=com 8226</PRE> 8227<H3><A NAME="Better {{B:cn=schema}} functionality">A.2.2. Better <B>cn=schema</B> functionality</A></H3> 8228<P>In 2.3 you were only able to add new schema elements, not delete or modify existing elements. In 2.4 you can modify schema at will. (Except for the hardcoded system schema, of course.)</P> 8229<H3><A NAME="More sophisticated Syncrepl configurations">A.2.3. More sophisticated Syncrepl configurations</A></H3> 8230<P>The original implementation of Syncrepl in OpenLDAP 2.2 was intended to support multiple consumers within the same database, but that feature never worked and was removed from OpenLDAP 2.3; you could only configure a single consumer in any database.</P> 8231<P>In 2.4 you can configure multiple consumers in a single database. The configuration possibilities here are quite complex and numerous. You can configure consumers over arbitrary subtrees of a database (disjoint or overlapping). Any portion of the database may in turn be provided to other consumers using the Syncprov overlay. The Syncprov overlay works with any number of consumers over a single database or over arbitrarily many glued databases.</P> 8232<H3><A NAME="N-Way Multimaster Replication">A.2.4. N-Way Multimaster Replication</A></H3> 8233<P>As a consequence of the work to support multiple consumer contexts, the syncrepl system now supports full N-Way multimaster replication with entry-level conflict resolution. There are some important constraints, of course: In order to maintain consistent results across all servers, you must maintain tightly synchronized clocks across all participating servers (e.g., you must use NTP on all servers).</P> 8234<P>The entryCSNs used for replication now record timestamps with microsecond resolution, instead of just seconds. The delta-syncrepl code has not been updated to support multimaster usage yet, that will come later in the 2.4 cycle.</P> 8235<H3><A NAME="Replicating {{slapd}} Configuration (syncrepl and {{B:cn=config}})">A.2.5. Replicating <EM>slapd</EM> Configuration (syncrepl and <B>cn=config</B>)</A></H3> 8236<P>Syncrepl was explicitly disabled on cn=config in 2.3. It is now fully supported in 2.4; you can use syncrepl to replicate an entire server configuration from one server to arbitrarily many other servers. It's possible to clone an entire running slapd using just a small (less than 10 lines) seed configuration, or you can just replicate the schema subtrees, etc. Tests 049 and 050 in the test suite provide working examples of these capabilities.</P> 8237<H3><A NAME="Push-Mode Replication">A.2.6. Push-Mode Replication</A></H3> 8238<P>In 2.3 you could configure syncrepl as a full push-mode replicator by using it in conjunction with a back-ldap pointed at the target server. But because the back-ldap database needs to have a suffix corresponding to the target's suffix, you could only configure one instance per slapd.</P> 8239<P>In 2.4 you can define a database to be "hidden", which means that its suffix is ignored when checking for name collisions, and the database will never be used to answer requests received by the frontend. Using this "hidden" database feature allows you to configure multiple databases with the same suffix, allowing you to set up multiple back-ldap instances for pushing replication of a single database to multiple targets. There may be other uses for hidden databases as well (e.g., using a syncrepl consumer to maintain a *local* mirror of a database on a separate filesystem).</P> 8240<H3><A NAME="More extensive TLS configuration control">A.2.7. More extensive TLS configuration control</A></H3> 8241<P>In 2.3, the TLS configuration in slapd was only used by the slapd listeners. For outbound connections used by e.g. back-ldap or syncrepl their TLS parameters came from the system's ldap.conf file.</P> 8242<P>In 2.4 all of these sessions inherit their settings from the main slapd configuration, but settings can be individually overridden on a per-config-item basis. This is particularly helpful if you use certificate-based authentication and need to use a different client certificate for different destinations.</P> 8243<H3><A NAME="Performance enhancements">A.2.8. Performance enhancements</A></H3> 8244<P>Too many to list. Some notable changes - ldapadd used to be a couple of orders of magnitude slower than "slapadd -q". It's now at worst only about half the speed of slapadd -q. Some comparisons of all the 2.x OpenLDAP releases are available at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/pub/hyc/scale2007.pdf">http://www.openldap.org/pub/hyc/scale2007.pdf</A></P> 8245<P>That compared 2.0.27, 2.1.30, 2.2.30, 2.3.33, and HEAD). Toward the latter end of the "Cached Search Performance" chart it gets hard to see the difference because the run times are so small, but the new code is about 25% faster than 2.3, which was about 20% faster than 2.2, which was about 100% faster than 2.1, which was about 100% faster than 2.0, in that particular search scenario. That test basically searched a 1.3GB DB of 380836 entries (all in the slapd entry cache) in under 1 second. i.e., on a 2.4GHz CPU with DDR400 ECC/Registered RAM we can search over 500 thousand entries per second. The search was on an unindexed attribute using a filter that would not match any entry, forcing slapd to examine every entry in the DB, testing the filter for a match.</P> 8246<P>Essentially the slapd entry cache in back-bdb/back-hdb is so efficient the search processing time is almost invisible; the runtime is limited only by the memory bandwidth of the machine. (The search data rate corresponds to about 3.5GB/sec; the memory bandwidth on the machine is only about 4GB/sec due to ECC and register latency.)</P> 8247<H3><A NAME="New overlays">A.2.9. New overlays</A></H3> 8248<UL> 8249<LI>slapo-constraint (Attribute value constraints) 8250<LI>slapo-dds (Dynamic Directory Services, RFC 2589) 8251<LI>slapo-memberof (reverse group membership maintenance)</UL> 8252<H3><A NAME="New features in existing Overlays">A.2.10. New features in existing Overlays</A></H3> 8253<UL> 8254<LI>slapo-pcache<UL> 8255<LI>Inspection/Maintenance<UL> 8256<LI>the cache database can be directly accessed via LDAP by adding a specific control to each LDAP request; a specific extended operation allows to consistently remove cached entries and entire cached queries</UL> 8257<LI>Hot Restart<UL> 8258<LI>cached queries are saved on disk at shutdown, and reloaded if not expired yet at subsequent restart</UL></UL> 8259<LI>slapo-rwm can safely interoperate with other overlays 8260<LI>Dyngroup/Dynlist merge, plus security enhancements<UL> 8261<LI>added dgIdentity support (draft-haripriya-dynamicgroup)</UL></UL> 8262<H3><A NAME="New features in slapd">A.2.11. New features in slapd</A></H3> 8263<UL> 8264<LI>monitoring of back-{b,h}db: cache fill-in, non-indexed searches, 8265<LI>session tracking control (draft-wahl-ldap-session) 8266<LI>subtree delete in back-sql (draft-armijo-ldap-treedelete) 8267<LI>sorted values in multivalued attributes for faster matching 8268<LI>lightweight dispatcher for greater throughput under heavy load and on multiprocessor machines. (33% faster than 2.3 on AMD quad-socket dual-core server.)</UL> 8269<H3><A NAME="New features in libldap">A.2.12. New features in libldap</A></H3> 8270<UL> 8271<LI>ldap_sync client API (LDAP Content Sync Operation, RFC 4533)</UL> 8272<H3><A NAME="New clients, tools and tool enhancements">A.2.13. New clients, tools and tool enhancements</A></H3> 8273<UL> 8274<LI>ldapexop for arbitrary extended operations 8275<LI>Complete support of controls in request/response for all clients 8276<LI>LDAP Client tools now honor SRV records</UL> 8277<H3><A NAME="New build options">A.2.14. New build options</A></H3> 8278<UL> 8279<LI>Support for building against GnuTLS</UL> 8280<H2><A NAME="Obsolete Features Removed From 2.4">A.3. Obsolete Features Removed From 2.4</A></H2> 8281<P>These features were strongly deprecated in 2.3 and removed in 2.4.</P> 8282<H3><A NAME="Slurpd">A.3.1. Slurpd</A></H3> 8283<P>Please read the <A HREF="#Replication">Replication</A> section as to why this is no longer in OpenLDAP</P> 8284<H3><A NAME="back-ldbm">A.3.2. back-ldbm</A></H3> 8285<P>back-ldbm was both slow and unreliable. Its byzantine indexing code was prone to spontaneous corruption, as were the underlying database libraries that were commonly used (e.g. GDBM or NDBM). back-bdb and back-hdb are superior in every aspect, with simplified indexing to avoid index corruption, fine-grained locking for greater concurrency, hierarchical caching for greater performance, streamlined on-disk format for greater efficiency and portability, and full transaction support for greater reliability.</P> 8286<P></P> 8287<HR> 8288<H1><A NAME="Upgrading from 2.3.x">B. Upgrading from 2.3.x</A></H1> 8289<P>The following sections attempt to document the steps you will need to take in order to upgrade from the latest 2.3.x OpenLDAP version.</P> 8290<P>The normal upgrade procedure, as discussed in the <A HREF="#Maintenance">Maintenance</A> section, should of course still be followed prior to doing any of this.</P> 8291<H2><A NAME="{{B:cn=config}} olc* attributes">B.1. <B>cn=config</B> olc* attributes</A></H2> 8292<P>Quite a few <EM>olc*</EM> attributes have now become obsolete, if you see in your logs entries like below, just remove them from the relevant ldif file.</P> 8293<PRE> 8294 olcReplicationInterval: value #0: <olcReplicationInterval> keyword is obsolete (ignored) 8295</PRE> 8296<H2><A NAME="ACLs: searches require privileges on the search base">B.2. ACLs: searches require privileges on the search base</A></H2> 8297<P>Search operations now require "search" privileges on the "entry" pseudo-attribute of the search base. While upgrading from 2.3.x, make sure your ACLs grant such privileges to all desired search bases.</P> 8298<P>For example, assuming you have the following ACL:</P> 8299<PRE> 8300 access to dn.sub="ou=people,dc=example,dc=com" by * search 8301</PRE> 8302<P>Searches using a base of "dc=example,dc=com" will only be allowed if you add the following ACL:</P> 8303<PRE> 8304 access to dn.base="dc=example,dc=com" attrs=entry by * search 8305</PRE> 8306<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 8307<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The <EM>slapd.access</EM>(5) man page states that this requirement was introduced with OpenLDAP 2.3. However, it is the default behavior only since 2.4. 8308<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 8309<P>ADD MORE HERE</P> 8310<P></P> 8311<HR> 8312<H1><A NAME="Common errors encountered when using OpenLDAP Software">C. Common errors encountered when using OpenLDAP Software</A></H1> 8313<P>The following sections attempt to summarize the most common causes of LDAP errors when using OpenLDAP</P> 8314<H2><A NAME="Common causes of LDAP errors">C.1. Common causes of LDAP errors</A></H2> 8315<H3><A NAME="ldap_*: Can\'t contact LDAP server">C.1.1. ldap_*: Can't contact LDAP server</A></H3> 8316<P>The {[B:Can't contact LDAP server}} error is usually returned when the LDAP server cannot be contacted. This may occur for many reasons:</P> 8317<UL> 8318<LI>the LDAP server is not running; this can be checked by running, for example,</UL> 8319<PRE> 8320 telnet <host> <port> 8321</PRE> 8322<P>replacing <EM><host></EM> and <EM><port></EM> with the hostname and the port the server is supposed to listen on.</P> 8323<UL> 8324<LI>the client has not been instructed to contact a running server; with OpenLDAP command-line tools this is accomplished by providing the -H switch, whose argument is a valid LDAP url corresponding to the interface the server is supposed to be listening on.</UL> 8325<H3><A NAME="ldap_*: No such object">C.1.2. ldap_*: No such object</A></H3> 8326<P>The <B>no such object</B> error is generally returned when the target DN of the operation cannot be located. This section details reasons common to all operations. You should also look for answers specific to the operation (as indicated in the error message).</P> 8327<P>The most common reason for this error is non-existence of the named object. First, check for typos.</P> 8328<P>Also note that, by default, a new directory server holds no objects (except for a few system entries). So, if you are setting up a new directory server and get this message, it may simply be that you have yet to add the object you are trying to locate.</P> 8329<P>The error commonly occurs because a DN was not specified and a default was not properly configured.</P> 8330<P>If you have a suffix specified in slapd.conf eg.</P> 8331<PRE> 8332 suffix "dc=example,dc=com" 8333</PRE> 8334<P>You should use</P> 8335<PRE> 8336 ldapsearch -b 'dc=example,dc=com' '(cn=jane*)' 8337</PRE> 8338<P>to tell it where to start the search.</P> 8339<P>The <TT>-b</TT> should be specified for all LDAP commands unless you have an <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) default configured.</P> 8340<P>See <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1), <EM>ldapmodify</EM>(1)</P> 8341<P>Also, <EM>slapadd</EM>(8) and its ancillary programs are very strict about the syntax of the LDIF file.</P> 8342<P>Some liberties in the LDIF file may result in an apparently successful creation of the database, but accessing some parts of it may be difficult.</P> 8343<P>One known common error in database creation is putting a blank line before the first entry in the LDIF file. <B>There must be no leading blank lines in the LDIF file.</B></P> 8344<P>It is generally recommended that <EM>ldapadd</EM>(1) be used instead of <EM>slapadd</EM>(8) when adding new entries your directory. <EM>slapadd</EM>(8) should be used to bulk load entries known to be valid.</P> 8345<P>Another cause of this message is a referral ({SECT:Constructing a Distributed Directory Service}}) entry to an unpopulated directory.</P> 8346<P>Either remove the referral, or add a single record with the referral base DN to the empty directory.</P> 8347<P>This error may also occur when slapd is unable to access the contents of its database because of file permission problems. For instance, on a Red Hat Linux system, slapd runs as user 'ldap'. When slapadd is run as root to create a database from scratch, the contents of <TT>/var/lib/ldap</TT> are created with user and group root and with permission 600, making the contents inaccessible to the slapd server.</P> 8348<H3><A NAME="ldap_*: Can\'t chase referral">C.1.3. ldap_*: Can't chase referral</A></H3> 8349<P>This is caused by the line</P> 8350<PRE> 8351 referral ldap://root.openldap.org 8352</PRE> 8353<P>In <TT>slapd.conf</TT>, it was provided as an example for how to use referrals in the original file. However if your machine is not permanently connected to the Internet, it will fail to find the server, and hence produce an error message.</P> 8354<P>To resolve, just place a # in front of line and restart slapd or point it to an available ldap server.</P> 8355<P>See also: <EM>ldapadd</EM>(1), <EM>ldapmodify</EM>(1) and <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5)</P> 8356<H3><A NAME="ldap_*: server is unwilling to perform">C.1.4. ldap_*: server is unwilling to perform</A></H3> 8357<P>slapd will return an unwilling to perform error if the backend holding the target entry does not support the given operation.</P> 8358<P>The password backend is only willing to perform searches. It will return an unwilling to perform error for all other operations.</P> 8359<P>The shell backend is configurable and may support a limited subset of operations. Check for other errors indicating a shortage of resources required by the directory server. i.e. you may have a full disk etc</P> 8360<H3><A NAME="ldap_*: Insufficient access">C.1.5. ldap_*: Insufficient access</A></H3> 8361<P>This error occurs when server denies the operation due to insufficient access. This is usually caused by binding to a DN with insufficient privileges (or binding anonymously) to perform the operation.</P> 8362<P>You can bind as the rootdn/rootpw specified in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) to gain full access. Otherwise, you must bind to an entry which has been granted the appropriate rights through access controls.</P> 8363<H3><A NAME="ldap_*: Invalid DN syntax">C.1.6. ldap_*: Invalid DN syntax</A></H3> 8364<P>The target (or other) DN of the operation is invalid. This implies that either the string representation of the DN is not in the required form, one of the types in the attribute value assertions is not defined, or one of the values in the attribute value assertions does not conform to the appropriate syntax.</P> 8365<H3><A NAME="ldap_*: Referral hop limit exceeded">C.1.7. ldap_*: Referral hop limit exceeded</A></H3> 8366<P>This error generally occurs when the client chases a referral which refers itself back to a server it already contacted. The server responds as it did before and the client loops. This loop is detected when the hop limit is exceeded.</P> 8367<P>This is most often caused through misconfiguration of the server's default referral. The default referral should not be itself:</P> 8368<P>That is, on <A HREF="ldap://myldap/">ldap://myldap/</A> the default referral should not be <A HREF="ldap://myldap/">ldap://myldap/</A> (or any hostname/ip which is equivalent to myldap).</P> 8369<H3><A NAME="ldap_*: operations error">C.1.8. ldap_*: operations error</A></H3> 8370<P>In some versions of <EM>slapd</EM>(8), <EM>operationsError</EM> was returned instead of other.</P> 8371<H3><A NAME="ldap_*: other error">C.1.9. ldap_*: other error</A></H3> 8372<P>The other result code indicates an internal error has occurred. While the additional information provided with the result code might provide some hint as to the problem, often one will need to consult the server's log files.</P> 8373<H3><A NAME="ldap_add/modify: Invalid syntax">C.1.10. ldap_add/modify: Invalid syntax</A></H3> 8374<P>This error is reported when a value of an attribute does not conform to syntax restrictions. Additional information is commonly provided stating which value of which attribute was found to be invalid. Double check this value and other values (the server will only report the first error it finds).</P> 8375<P>Common causes include:</P> 8376<UL> 8377<LI>extraneous whitespace (especially trailing whitespace) 8378<LI>improperly encoded characters (LDAPv3 uses UTF-8 encoded Unicode) 8379<LI>empty values (few syntaxes allow empty values)</UL> 8380<P>For certain syntax, like OBJECT IDENTIFIER (OID), this error can indicate that the OID descriptor (a "short name") provided is unrecognized. For instance, this error is returned if the <EM>objectClass</EM> value provided is unrecognized.</P> 8381<H3><A NAME="ldap_add/modify: Object class violation">C.1.11. ldap_add/modify: Object class violation</A></H3> 8382<P>This error is returned with the entry to be added or the entry as modified violates the object class schema rules. Normally additional information is returned the error detailing the violation. Some of these are detailed below.</P> 8383<P>Violations related to the entry's attributes:</P> 8384<PRE> 8385 Attribute not allowed 8386</PRE> 8387<P>A provided attribute is not allowed by the entry's object class(es).</P> 8388<PRE> 8389 Missing required attribute 8390</PRE> 8391<P>An attribute required by the entry's object class(es) was not provided.</P> 8392<P>Violations related to the entry's class(es):</P> 8393<PRE> 8394 Entry has no objectClass attribute 8395</PRE> 8396<P>The entry did not state which object classes it belonged to.</P> 8397<PRE> 8398 Unrecognized objectClass 8399</PRE> 8400<P>One (or more) of the listed objectClass values is not recognized.</P> 8401<PRE> 8402 No structural object class provided 8403</PRE> 8404<P>None of the listed objectClass values is structural.</P> 8405<PRE> 8406 Invalid structural object class chain 8407</PRE> 8408<P>Two or more structural objectClass values are not in same structural object class chain.</P> 8409<PRE> 8410 Structural object class modification 8411</PRE> 8412<P>Modify operation attempts to change the structural class of the entry.</P> 8413<PRE> 8414 Instanstantiation of abstract objectClass. 8415</PRE> 8416<P>An abstract class is not subordinate to any listed structural or auxiliary class.</P> 8417<PRE> 8418 Invalid structural object class 8419</PRE> 8420<P>Other structural object class problem.</P> 8421<PRE> 8422 No structuralObjectClass operational attribute 8423</PRE> 8424<P>This is commonly returned when a shadow server is provided an entry which does not contain the structuralObjectClass operational attribute.</P> 8425<P>Note that the above error messages as well as the above answer assumes basic knowledge of LDAP/X.500 schema.</P> 8426<H3><A NAME="ldap_add: No such object">C.1.12. ldap_add: No such object</A></H3> 8427<P>The "ldap_add: No such object" error is commonly returned if parent of the entry being added does not exist. Add the parent entry first...</P> 8428<P>For example, if you are adding "cn=bob,dc=domain,dc=com" and you get:</P> 8429<PRE> 8430 ldap_add: No such object 8431</PRE> 8432<P>The entry "dc=domain,dc=com" likely doesn't exist. You can use ldapsearch to see if does exist:</P> 8433<PRE> 8434 ldapsearch -b 'dc=domain,dc=com' -s base '(objectclass=*)' 8435</PRE> 8436<P>If it doesn't, add it. See <A HREF="#A Quick-Start Guide">A Quick-Start Guide</A> for assistance.</P> 8437<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 8438<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>if the entry being added is the same as database suffix, it's parent isn't required. i.e.: if your suffix is "dc=domain,dc=com", "dc=com" doesn't need to exist to add "dc=domain,dc=com". 8439<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 8440<P>This error will also occur if you try to add any entry that the server is not configured to hold.</P> 8441<P>For example, if your database suffix is "dc=domain,dc=com" and you attempt to add "dc=domain2,dc=com", "dc=com", "dc=domain,dc=org", "o=domain,c=us", or an other DN in the "dc=domain,dc=com" subtree, the server will return a "No such object" (or referral) error.</P> 8442<P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) will generally return "no global superior knowledge" as additional information indicating its return noSuchObject instead of a referral as the server is not configured with knowledge of a global superior server.</P> 8443<H3><A NAME="ldap add: invalid structural object class chain">C.1.13. ldap add: invalid structural object class chain</A></H3> 8444<P>This particular error refers to the rule about STRUCTURAL objectclasses, which states that an object is of one STRUCTURAL class, the structural class of the object. The object is said to belong to this class, zero or more auxiliaries classes, and their super classes.</P> 8445<P>While all of these classes are commonly listed in the objectClass attribute of the entry, one of these classes is the structural object class of the entry. Thus, it is OK for an objectClass attribute to contain inetOrgPerson, organizationalPerson, and person because they inherit one from another to form a single super class chain. That is, inetOrgPerson SUPs organizationPerson SUPs person. On the other hand, it is invalid for both inetOrgPerson and account to be listed in objectClass as inetOrgPerson and account are not part of the same super class chain (unless some other class is also listed with is a subclass of both).</P> 8446<P>To resolve this problem, one must determine which class will better serve structural object class for the entry, adding this class to the objectClass attribute (if not already present), and remove any other structural class from the entry's objectClass attribute which is not a super class of the structural object class.</P> 8447<P>Which object class is better depends on the particulars of the situation. One generally should consult the documentation for the applications one is using for help in making the determination.</P> 8448<H3><A NAME="ldap_add: no structuralObjectClass operational attribute">C.1.14. ldap_add: no structuralObjectClass operational attribute</A></H3> 8449<P>ldapadd(1) may error:</P> 8450<PRE> 8451 adding new entry "uid=XXX,ou=People,o=campus,c=ru" 8452 ldap_add: Internal (implementation specific) error (80) 8453 additional info: no structuralObjectClass operational attribute 8454</PRE> 8455<P>when slapd(8) cannot determine, based upon the contents of the objectClass attribute, what the structural class of the object should be.</P> 8456<H3><A NAME="ldap_add/modify/rename: Naming violation">C.1.15. ldap_add/modify/rename: Naming violation</A></H3> 8457<P>OpenLDAP's slapd checks for naming attributes and distinguished values consistency, according to RFC 4512.</P> 8458<P>Naming attributes are those attributeTypes that appear in an entry's RDN; distinguished values are the values of the naming attributes that appear in an entry's RDN, e.g, in</P> 8459<PRE> 8460 cn=Someone+mail=someone@example.com,dc=example,dc=com 8461</PRE> 8462<P>the naming attributes are cn and mail, and the distinguished values are Someone and someone@example.com.</P> 8463<P>OpenLDAP's slapd checks for consistency when:</P> 8464<UL> 8465<LI>adding an entry 8466<LI>modifying an entry, if the values of the naming attributes are changed 8467<LI>renaming an entry, if the RDN of the entry changes</UL> 8468<P>Possible causes of error are:</P> 8469<UL> 8470<LI>the naming attributes are not present in the entry; for example:</UL> 8471<PRE> 8472 dn: dc=example,dc=com 8473 objectClass: organization 8474 o: Example 8475 # note: "dc: example" is missing 8476</PRE> 8477<UL> 8478<LI>the naming attributes are present in the entry, but in the attributeType definition they are marked as:<UL> 8479<LI>collective 8480<LI>operational 8481<LI>obsolete</UL> 8482<LI>the naming attributes are present in the entry, but the distinguished values are not; for example:</UL> 8483<PRE> 8484 dn: dc=example,dc=com 8485 objectClass: domain 8486 dc: foobar 8487 # note: "dc" is present, but the value is not "example" 8488</PRE> 8489<UL> 8490<LI>the naming attributes are present in the entry, with the distinguished values, but the naming attributes:<UL> 8491<LI>do not have an equality field, so equality cannot be asserted 8492<LI>the matching rule is not supported (yet) 8493<LI>the matching rule is not appropriate</UL> 8494<LI>the given distinguished values do not comply with their syntax 8495<LI>other errors occurred during the validation/normalization/match process; this is a catchall: look at previous logs for details in case none of the above apply to your case.</UL> 8496<P>In any case, make sure that the attributeType definition for the naming attributes contains an appropriate EQUALITY field; or that of the superior, if they are defined based on a superior attributeType (look at the SUP field). See RFC 4512 for details.</P> 8497<H3><A NAME="ldap_add/delete/modify/rename: no global superior knowledge">C.1.16. ldap_add/delete/modify/rename: no global superior knowledge</A></H3> 8498<P>If the target entry name places is not within any of the databases the server is configured to hold and the server has no knowledge of a global superior, the server will indicate it is unwilling to perform the operation and provide the text "no global superior knowledge" as additional text.</P> 8499<P>Likely the entry name is incorrect, or the server is not properly configured to hold the named entry, or, in distributed directory environments, a default referral was not configured.</P> 8500<H3><A NAME="ldap_bind: Insufficient access">C.1.17. ldap_bind: Insufficient access</A></H3> 8501<P>Current versions of slapd(8) requires that clients have authentication permission to attribute types used for authentication purposes before accessing them to perform the bind operation. As all bind operations are done anonymously (regardless of previous bind success), the auth access must be granted to anonymous.</P> 8502<P>In the example ACL below grants the following access:</P> 8503<UL> 8504<LI>to anonymous users:<UL> 8505<LI>permission to authenticate using values of userPassword</UL> 8506<LI>to authenticated users:<UL> 8507<LI>permission to update (but not read) their userPassword 8508<LI>permission to read any object excepting values of userPassword</UL></UL> 8509<P>All other access is denied.</P> 8510<PRE> 8511 access to attr=userPassword 8512 by self =w 8513 by anonymous auth 8514 access * 8515 by self write 8516 by users read 8517</PRE> 8518<H3><A NAME="ldap_bind: Invalid credentials">C.1.18. ldap_bind: Invalid credentials</A></H3> 8519<P>The error usually occurs when the credentials (password) provided does not match the userPassword held in entry you are binding to.</P> 8520<P>The error can also occur when the bind DN specified is not known to the server.</P> 8521<P>Check both! In addition to the cases mentioned above you should check if the server denied access to userPassword on selected parts of the directory. In fact, slapd always returns "Invalid credentials" in case of failed bind, regardless of the failure reason, since other return codes could reveal the validity of the user's name.</P> 8522<P>To debug access rules defined in slapd.conf, add "ACL" to log level.</P> 8523<H3><A NAME="ldap_bind: Protocol error">C.1.19. ldap_bind: Protocol error</A></H3> 8524<P>There error is generally occurs when the LDAP version requested by the client is not supported by the server.</P> 8525<P>The OpenLDAP Software 2.x server, by default, only accepts version 3 LDAP Bind requests but can be configured to accept a version 2 LDAP Bind request.</P> 8526<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 8527<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The 2.x server expects LDAPv3 [RFC4510] to be used when the client requests version 3 and expects a limited LDAPv3 variant (basically, LDAPv3 syntax and semantics in an LDAPv2 PDUs) to be used when version 2 is expected. 8528<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 8529<P>This variant is also sometimes referred to as LDAPv2+, but differs from the U-Mich LDAP variant in a number of ways.</P> 8530<H3><A NAME="ldap_modify: cannot modify object class">C.1.20. ldap_modify: cannot modify object class</A></H3> 8531<P>This message is commonly returned when attempting to modify the objectClass attribute in a manner inconsistent with the LDAP/X.500 information model. In particular, it commonly occurs when one tries to change the structure of the object from one class to another, for instance, trying to change an 'apple' into a 'pear' or a 'fruit' into a 'pear'.</P> 8532<P>Such changes are disallowed by the slapd(8) in accordance with LDAP and X.500 restrictions.</P> 8533<H3><A NAME="ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: ..">C.1.21. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: ...</A></H3> 8534<P>If you intended to bind using a DN and password and get an error from ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s, you likely forgot to provide a '-x' option to the command. By default, SASL authentication is used. '-x' is necessary to select "simple" authentication.</P> 8535<H3><A NAME="ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such Object">C.1.22. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such Object</A></H3> 8536<P>This indicates that LDAP SASL authentication function could not read the Root DSE. The error will occur when the server doesn't provide a root DSE. This may be due to access controls.</P> 8537<H3><A NAME="ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such attribute">C.1.23. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such attribute</A></H3> 8538<P>This indicates that LDAP SASL authentication function could read the Root DSE but it contained no supportedSASLMechanism attribute.</P> 8539<P>The supportedSASLmechanism attribute lists mechanisms currently available. The list may be empty because none of the supported mechanisms are currently available. For example, EXTERNAL is listed only if the client has established its identity by authenticating at a lower level (e.g. TLS).</P> 8540<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 8541<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>the attribute may not be visible due to access controls 8542<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 8543<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 8544<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>SASL bind is the default for all OpenLDAP tools, e.g. ldapsearch(1), ldapmodify(1). To force use of "simple" bind, use the "-x" option. Use of "simple" bind is not recommended unless one has adequate confidentiality protection in place (e.g. TLS/SSL, IPSEC). 8545<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 8546<H3><A NAME="ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Unknown authentication method">C.1.24. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Unknown authentication method</A></H3> 8547<P>This indicates that none of the SASL authentication supported by the server are supported by the client, or that they are too weak or otherwise inappropriate for use by the client. Note that the default security options disallows the use of certain mechanisms such as ANONYMOUS and PLAIN (without TLS).</P> 8548<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 8549<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>SASL bind is the default for all OpenLDAP tools. To force use of "simple" bind, use the "-x" option. Use of "simple" bind is not recommended unless one has adequate confidentiality protection in place (e.g. TLS/SSL, IPSEC). 8550<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 8551<H3><A NAME="ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Local error (82)">C.1.25. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Local error (82)</A></H3> 8552<P>Apparently not having forward and reverse DNS entries for the LDAP server can result in this error.</P> 8553<H3><A NAME="ldap_search: Partial results and referral received">C.1.26. ldap_search: Partial results and referral received</A></H3> 8554<P>This error is returned with the server responses to an LDAPv2 search query with both results (zero or more matched entries) and references (referrals to other servers). See also: ldapsearch(1).</P> 8555<P>If the updatedn on the replica does not exist, a referral will be returned. It may do this as well if the ACL needs tweaking.</P> 8556<H3><A NAME="ldap_start_tls: Operations error">C.1.27. ldap_start_tls: Operations error</A></H3> 8557<P>ldapsearch(1) and other tools will return</P> 8558<PRE> 8559 ldap_start_tls: Operations error (1) 8560 additional info: TLS already started 8561</PRE> 8562<P>When the user (though command line options and/or ldap.conf(5)) has requested TLS (SSL) be started twice. For instance, when specifying both "-H ldaps://server.do.main" and "-ZZ".</P> 8563<H2><A NAME="Other Errors">C.2. Other Errors</A></H2> 8564<H3><A NAME="ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=34 (Numerical result out of range)">C.2.1. ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=34 (Numerical result out of range)</A></H3> 8565<P>This slapd error generally indicates that the client sent a message that exceeded an administrative limit. See sockbuf_max_incoming and sockbuf_max_incoming_auth configuration directives in slapd.conf(5).</P> 8566<H3><A NAME="ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=11 (Resource temporarily unavailable)">C.2.2. ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=11 (Resource temporarily unavailable)</A></H3> 8567<P>This message is not indicative of abnormal behavior or error. It simply means that expected data is not yet available from the resource, in this context, a network socket. slapd(8) will process the data once it does becomes available.</P> 8568<H3><A NAME="daemon: socket() failed errno=97 (Address family not supported)">C.2.3. daemon: socket() failed errno=97 (Address family not supported)</A></H3> 8569<P>This message indicates that the operating system does not support one of the (protocol) address families which slapd(8) was configured to support. Most commonly, this occurs when slapd(8) was configured to support IPv6 yet the operating system kernel wasn't. In such cases, the message can be ignored.</P> 8570<H3><A NAME="GSSAPI: gss_acquire_cred: Miscellaneous failure; Permission denied;">C.2.4. GSSAPI: gss_acquire_cred: Miscellaneous failure; Permission denied;</A></H3> 8571<P>This message means that slapd is not running as root and, thus, it cannot get its Kerberos 5 key from the keytab, usually file /etc/krb5.keytab.</P> 8572<P>A keytab file is used to store keys that are to be used by services or daemons that are started at boot time. It is very important that these secrets are kept beyond reach of intruders.</P> 8573<P>That's why the default keytab file is owned by root and protected from being read by others. Do not mess with these permissions, build a different keytab file for slapd instead.</P> 8574<P>To do this, start kadmin, and enter the following commands:</P> 8575<PRE> 8576 addprinc -randkey ldap/ldap.example.com@EXAMPLE.COM 8577 ktadd -k /etc/openldap/ldap.keytab ldap/ldap.example.com@EXAMPLE.COM 8578</PRE> 8579<P>Then, on the shell, do:</P> 8580<PRE> 8581 chown ldap.ldap /etc/openldap/ldap.keytab 8582 chmod 600 /etc/openldap/ldap.keytab 8583</PRE> 8584<P>Now you have to tell slapd (well, actually tell the gssapi library in Kerberos 5 that is invoked by Cyrus SASL) where to find the new keytab. You do this by setting the environment variable KRB5_KTNAME like this:</P> 8585<PRE> 8586 export KRB5_KTNAME="FILE:/etc/openldap/ldap.keytab" 8587</PRE> 8588<P>Set that environment variable on the slapd start script (Red Hat users might find /etc/sysconfig/ldap a perfect place).</P> 8589<P>This only works if you are using MIT kerberos. It doesn't work with Heimdal, for instance.</P> 8590<P>In Heimdal there is a function gsskrb5_register_acceptor_identity() that sets the path of the keytab file you want to use. In Cyrus SASL 2 you can add</P> 8591<PRE> 8592 keytab: /path/to/file 8593</PRE> 8594<P>to your application's SASL config file to use this feature. This only works with Heimdal.</P> 8595<H3><A NAME="access from unknown denied">C.2.5. access from unknown denied</A></H3> 8596<P>This related to TCP wrappers. See hosts_access(5) for more information. in the log file: "access from unknown denied" This related to TCP wrappers. See hosts_access(5) for more information. for example: add the line "slapd: .hosts.you.want.to.allow" in /etc/hosts.allow to get rid of the error.</P> 8597<H3><A NAME="ldap_read: want=# error=Resource temporarily unavailable">C.2.6. ldap_read: want=# error=Resource temporarily unavailable</A></H3> 8598<P>This message occurs normally. It means that pending data is not yet available from the resource, a network socket. slapd(8) will process the data once it becomes available.</P> 8599<H3><A NAME="`make test\' fails">C.2.7. `make test' fails</A></H3> 8600<P>Some times, `make test' fails at the very first test with an obscure message like</P> 8601<PRE> 8602 make test 8603 make[1]: Entering directory `/ldap_files/openldap-2.4.6/tests' 8604 make[2]: Entering directory `/ldap_files/openldap-2.4.6/tests' 8605 Initiating LDAP tests for BDB... 8606 Cleaning up test run directory leftover from previous run. 8607 Running ./scripts/all... 8608 >>>>> Executing all LDAP tests for bdb 8609 >>>>> Starting test000-rootdse ... 8610 running defines.sh 8611 Starting slapd on TCP/IP port 9011... 8612 Using ldapsearch to retrieve the root DSE... 8613 Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start... 8614 ./scripts/test000-rootdse: line 40: 10607 Segmentation fault $SLAPD -f $CONF1 -h $URI1 -d $LVL $TIMING >$LOG1 2>&1 8615 Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start... 8616 Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start... 8617 Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start... 8618 Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start... 8619 Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start... 8620 ./scripts/test000-rootdse: kill: (10607) - No such pid 8621 ldap_sasl_bind_s: Can't contact LDAP server (-1) 8622 >>>>> Test failed 8623 >>>>> ./scripts/test000-rootdse failed (exit 1) 8624 make[2]: *** [bdb-yes] Error 1 8625 make[2]: Leaving directory `/ldap_files/openldap-2.4.6/tests' 8626 make[1]: *** [test] Error 2 8627 make[1]: Leaving directory `/ldap_files/openldap-2.4.6/tests' 8628 make: *** [test] Error 2 8629</PRE> 8630<P>or so. Usually, the five lines</P> 8631<P>Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start...</P> 8632<P>indicate that slapd didn't start at all.</P> 8633<P>In tests/testrun/slapd.1.log there is a full log of what slapd wrote while trying to start. The log level can be increased by setting the environment variable SLAPD_DEBUG to the corresponding value; see loglevel in slapd.conf(5) for the meaning of log levels.</P> 8634<P>A typical reason for this behavior is a runtime link problem, i.e. slapd cannot find some dynamic libraries it was linked against. Try running ldd(1) on slapd (for those architectures that support runtime linking).</P> 8635<P>There might well be other reasons; the contents of the log file should help clarifying them.</P> 8636<P>Tests that fire up multiple instances of slapd typically log to tests/testrun/slapd.<n>.log, with a distinct <n> for each instance of slapd; list tests/testrun/ for possible values of <n>.</P> 8637<H3><A NAME="ldap_*: Internal (implementation specific) error (80) - additional info: entry index delete failed">C.2.8. ldap_*: Internal (implementation specific) error (80) - additional info: entry index delete failed</A></H3> 8638<P>This seems to be related with wrong ownership of the BDB's dir (/var/lib/ldap) and files.</P> 8639<PRE> 8640 chmod -R openldap:openldap /var/lib/ldap 8641</PRE> 8642<P>fixes it in Debian</P> 8643<H3><A NAME="ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Can\'t contact LDAP server (-1)">C.2.9. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Can't contact LDAP server (-1)</A></H3> 8644<P>Using SASL, when a client contacts LDAP server, the slapd service dies immediately and client gets an error :</P> 8645<PRE> 8646 SASL/GSSAPI authentication started ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Can't contact LDAP server (-1) 8647</PRE> 8648<P>Then check the slapd service, it stopped.</P> 8649<P>This may come from incompatible of using different versions of BerkeleyDB for installing of SASL and installing of OpenLDAP. The problem arises in case of using multiple version of BerkeleyDB. Solution: - Check which version of BerkeleyDB when install Cyrus SASL.</P> 8650<P>Reinstall OpenLDAP with the version of BerkeleyDB above.</P> 8651<P></P> 8652<HR> 8653<H1><A NAME="Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions">D. Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions</A></H1> 8654<P>This appendix details the recommended versions of the software that OpenLDAP depends on.</P> 8655<P>Please read the <A HREF="#Prerequisite software">Prerequisite software</A> section for more information on the following software dependencies.</P> 8656<H2><A NAME="Dependency Versions">D.1. Dependency Versions</A></H2> 8657<TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'> 8658<CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 8.5: OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions</CAPTION> 8659<TR CLASS="heading"> 8660<TD> 8661<STRONG>Feature</STRONG> 8662</TD> 8663<TD> 8664<STRONG>Software</STRONG> 8665</TD> 8666<TD> 8667<STRONG>Version</STRONG> 8668</TD> 8669</TR> 8670<TR> 8671<TD> 8672 <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM>: 8673</TD> 8674<TD> 8675<TT> </TT> 8676</TD> 8677<TD> 8678<TT> </TT> 8679</TD> 8680</TR> 8681<TR> 8682<TD> 8683 8684</TD> 8685<TD> 8686<TT> <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL</A></TT> 8687</TD> 8688<TD> 8689<TT>0.9.7+</TT> 8690</TD> 8691</TR> 8692<TR> 8693<TD> 8694 8695</TD> 8696<TD> 8697<TT> <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/">GnuTLS</A></TT> 8698</TD> 8699<TD> 8700<TT>2.0.1</TT> 8701</TD> 8702</TR> 8703<TR> 8704<TD> 8705 <TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM> 8706</TD> 8707<TD> 8708<TT> <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">Cyrus SASL</A></TT> 8709</TD> 8710<TD> 8711<TT>2.1.21+</TT> 8712</TD> 8713</TR> 8714<TR> 8715<TD> 8716 <TERM>Kerberos Authentication Service</TERM>: 8717</TD> 8718<TD> 8719<TT> </TT> 8720</TD> 8721<TD> 8722<TT> </TT> 8723</TD> 8724</TR> 8725<TR> 8726<TD> 8727 8728</TD> 8729<TD> 8730<TT> <A HREF="http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/">Heimdal</A></TT> 8731</TD> 8732<TD> 8733<TT>Version</TT> 8734</TD> 8735</TR> 8736<TR> 8737<TD> 8738 8739</TD> 8740<TD> 8741<TT> <A HREF="http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/">MIT Kerberos</A></TT> 8742</TD> 8743<TD> 8744<TT>Version</TT> 8745</TD> 8746</TR> 8747<TR> 8748<TD> 8749Database Software 8750</TD> 8751<TD> 8752<TT> <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">Berkeley DB</A>:</TT> 8753</TD> 8754<TD> 8755<TT> </TT> 8756</TD> 8757</TR> 8758<TR> 8759<TD> 8760 8761</TD> 8762<TD> 8763<TT> </TT> 8764</TD> 8765<TD> 8766<TT>4.4</TT> 8767</TD> 8768</TR> 8769<TR> 8770<TD> 8771 8772</TD> 8773<TD> 8774<TT> </TT> 8775</TD> 8776<TD> 8777<TT>4.5</TT> 8778</TD> 8779</TR> 8780<TR> 8781<TD> 8782 8783</TD> 8784<TD> 8785<TT> </TT> 8786</TD> 8787<TD> 8788<TT>4.6</TT> 8789</TD> 8790</TR> 8791<TR> 8792<TD> 8793 8794</TD> 8795<TD> 8796<TT> </TT> 8797</TD> 8798<TD> 8799<TT>4.7</TT> 8800</TD> 8801</TR> 8802<TR> 8803<TD> 8804 8805</TD> 8806<TD> 8807<TT> </TT> 8808</TD> 8809<TD> 8810<TT>Note: It is highly recommended to apply the patches from Oracle for a given release.</TT> 8811</TD> 8812</TR> 8813<TR> 8814<TD> 8815Threads: 8816</TD> 8817<TD> 8818<TT> </TT> 8819</TD> 8820<TD> 8821<TT> </TT> 8822</TD> 8823</TR> 8824<TR> 8825<TD> 8826 8827</TD> 8828<TD> 8829<TT>POSIX <EM>pthreads</EM></TT> 8830</TD> 8831<TD> 8832<TT>Version</TT> 8833</TD> 8834</TR> 8835<TR> 8836<TD> 8837 8838</TD> 8839<TD> 8840<TT>Mach <EM>CThreads</EM></TT> 8841</TD> 8842<TD> 8843<TT>Version</TT> 8844</TD> 8845</TR> 8846<TR> 8847<TD> 8848TCP Wrappers 8849</TD> 8850<TD> 8851<TT>Name</TT> 8852</TD> 8853<TD> 8854<TT>Version</TT> 8855</TD> 8856</TR> 8857</TABLE> 8858 8859<P></P> 8860<HR> 8861<H1><A NAME="Real World OpenLDAP Deployments and Examples">E. Real World OpenLDAP Deployments and Examples</A></H1> 8862<P>Examples and discussions</P> 8863<P></P> 8864<HR> 8865<H1><A NAME="OpenLDAP Software Contributions">F. OpenLDAP Software Contributions</A></H1> 8866<P>The following sections attempt to summarize the various contributions in OpenLDAP software, as found in <TT>openldap_src/contrib</TT></P> 8867<H2><A NAME="Client APIs">F.1. Client APIs</A></H2> 8868<P>Intro and discuss</P> 8869<H3><A NAME="ldapc++">F.1.1. ldapc++</A></H3> 8870<P>Intro and discuss</P> 8871<H3><A NAME="ldaptcl">F.1.2. ldaptcl</A></H3> 8872<P>Intro and discuss</P> 8873<H2><A NAME="Overlays">F.2. Overlays</A></H2> 8874<H3><A NAME="acl">F.2.1. acl</A></H3> 8875<P>Plugins that implement access rules. Currently only posixGroup, which implements access control based on posixGroup membership.</P> 8876<H3><A NAME="addpartial">F.2.2. addpartial</A></H3> 8877<P>Treat Add requests as Modify requests if the entry exists.</P> 8878<H3><A NAME="allop">F.2.3. allop</A></H3> 8879<P>Return operational attributes for root DSE even when not requested, since some clients expect this.</P> 8880<H3><A NAME="autogroup">F.2.4. autogroup</A></H3> 8881<P>Automated updates of group memberships.</P> 8882<H3><A NAME="comp_match">F.2.5. comp_match</A></H3> 8883<P>Component Matching rules (RFC 3687).</P> 8884<H3><A NAME="denyop">F.2.6. denyop</A></H3> 8885<P>Deny selected operations, returning <EM>unwillingToPerform</EM>.</P> 8886<H3><A NAME="dsaschema">F.2.7. dsaschema</A></H3> 8887<P>Permit loading DSA-specific schema, including operational attrs.</P> 8888<H3><A NAME="lastmod">F.2.8. lastmod</A></H3> 8889<P>Track the time of the last write operation to a database.</P> 8890<H3><A NAME="nops">F.2.9. nops</A></H3> 8891<P>Remove null operations, e.g. changing a value to same as before.</P> 8892<H3><A NAME="nssov">F.2.10. nssov</A></H3> 8893<P>Handle NSS lookup requests through a local Unix Domain socket.</P> 8894<H3><A NAME="passwd">F.2.11. passwd</A></H3> 8895<P>Support additional password mechanisms.</P> 8896<H3><A NAME="proxyOld">F.2.12. proxyOld</A></H3> 8897<P>Proxy Authorization compatibility with obsolete internet-draft.</P> 8898<H3><A NAME="smbk5pwd">F.2.13. smbk5pwd</A></H3> 8899<P>Make the PasswordModify Extended Operation update Kerberos keys and Samba password hashes as well as <EM>userPassword</EM>.</P> 8900<H3><A NAME="trace">F.2.14. trace</A></H3> 8901<P>Trace overlay invocation.</P> 8902<H3><A NAME="usn">F.2.15. usn</A></H3> 8903<P>Maintain <EM>usnCreated</EM> and <EM>usnChanged</EM> attrs similar to Microsoft AD.</P> 8904<H2><A NAME="Tools">F.3. Tools</A></H2> 8905<P>Intro and discuss</P> 8906<H3><A NAME="Statistic Logging">F.3.1. Statistic Logging</A></H3> 8907<P>statslog</P> 8908<H2><A NAME="SLAPI Plugins">F.4. SLAPI Plugins</A></H2> 8909<P>Intro and discuss</P> 8910<H3><A NAME="addrdnvalues">F.4.1. addrdnvalues</A></H3> 8911<P>More</P> 8912<P></P> 8913<HR> 8914<H1><A NAME="Configuration File Examples">G. Configuration File Examples</A></H1> 8915<H2><A NAME="slapd.conf">G.1. slapd.conf</A></H2> 8916<H2><A NAME="ldap.conf">G.2. ldap.conf</A></H2> 8917<H2><A NAME="a-n-other.conf">G.3. a-n-other.conf</A></H2> 8918<P></P> 8919<HR> 8920<H1><A NAME="LDAP Result Codes">H. LDAP Result Codes</A></H1> 8921<P>For the purposes of this guide, we have incorporated the standard LDAP result codes from <EM>Appendix A. LDAP Result Codes</EM> of <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4511.txt">RFC4511</A>, a copy of which can be found in <TT>doc/rfc</TT> of the OpenLDAP source code.</P> 8922<P>We have expanded the description of each error in relation to the OpenLDAP toolsets. LDAP extensions may introduce extension-specific result codes, which are not part of RFC4511. OpenLDAP returns the result codes related to extensions it implements. Their meaning is documented in the extension they are related to.</P> 8923<H2><A NAME="Non-Error Result Codes">H.1. Non-Error Result Codes</A></H2> 8924<P>These result codes (called "non-error" result codes) do not indicate an error condition:</P> 8925<PRE> 8926 success (0), 8927 compareFalse (5), 8928 compareTrue (6), 8929 referral (10), and 8930 saslBindInProgress (14). 8931</PRE> 8932<P>The <EM>success</EM>, <EM>compareTrue</EM>, and <EM>compareFalse</EM> result codes indicate successful completion (and, hence, are referred to as "successful" result codes).</P> 8933<P>The <EM>referral</EM> and <EM>saslBindInProgress</EM> result codes indicate the client needs to take additional action to complete the operation.</P> 8934<H2><A NAME="Result Codes">H.2. Result Codes</A></H2> 8935<P>Existing LDAP result codes are described as follows:</P> 8936<H2><A NAME="success (0)">H.3. success (0)</A></H2> 8937<P>Indicates the successful completion of an operation.</P> 8938<P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"> 8939<STRONG>Note: </STRONG>this code is not used with the Compare operation. See <A HREF="#compareFalse (5)">compareFalse (5)</A> and <A HREF="#compareTrue (6)">compareTrue (6)</A>. 8940<HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P> 8941<H2><A NAME="operationsError (1)">H.4. operationsError (1)</A></H2> 8942<P>Indicates that the operation is not properly sequenced with relation to other operations (of same or different type).</P> 8943<P>For example, this code is returned if the client attempts to StartTLS (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4511.txt">RFC4511</A> Section 4.14) while there are other uncompleted operations or if a TLS layer was already installed.</P> 8944<H2><A NAME="protocolError (2)">H.5. protocolError (2)</A></H2> 8945<P>Indicates the server received data that is not well-formed.</P> 8946<P>For Bind operation only, this code is also used to indicate that the server does not support the requested protocol version.</P> 8947<P>For Extended operations only, this code is also used to indicate that the server does not support (by design or configuration) the Extended operation associated with the <EM>requestName</EM>.</P> 8948<P>For request operations specifying multiple controls, this may be used to indicate that the server cannot ignore the order of the controls as specified, or that the combination of the specified controls is invalid or unspecified.</P> 8949<H2><A NAME="timeLimitExceeded (3)">H.6. timeLimitExceeded (3)</A></H2> 8950<P>Indicates that the time limit specified by the client was exceeded before the operation could be completed.</P> 8951<H2><A NAME="sizeLimitExceeded (4)">H.7. sizeLimitExceeded (4)</A></H2> 8952<P>Indicates that the size limit specified by the client was exceeded before the operation could be completed.</P> 8953<H2><A NAME="compareFalse (5)">H.8. compareFalse (5)</A></H2> 8954<P>Indicates that the Compare operation has successfully completed and the assertion has evaluated to FALSE or Undefined.</P> 8955<H2><A NAME="compareTrue (6)">H.9. compareTrue (6)</A></H2> 8956<P>Indicates that the Compare operation has successfully completed and the assertion has evaluated to TRUE.</P> 8957<H2><A NAME="authMethodNotSupported (7)">H.10. authMethodNotSupported (7)</A></H2> 8958<P>Indicates that the authentication method or mechanism is not supported.</P> 8959<H2><A NAME="strongerAuthRequired (8)">H.11. strongerAuthRequired (8)</A></H2> 8960<P>Indicates the server requires strong(er) authentication in order to complete the operation.</P> 8961<P>When used with the Notice of Disconnection operation, this code indicates that the server has detected that an established security association between the client and server has unexpectedly failed or been compromised.</P> 8962<H2><A NAME="referral (10)">H.12. referral (10)</A></H2> 8963<P>Indicates that a referral needs to be chased to complete the operation (see <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4511.txt">RFC4511</A> Section 4.1.10).</P> 8964<H2><A NAME="adminLimitExceeded (11)">H.13. adminLimitExceeded (11)</A></H2> 8965<P>Indicates that an administrative limit has been exceeded.</P> 8966<H2><A NAME="unavailableCriticalExtension (12)">H.14. unavailableCriticalExtension (12)</A></H2> 8967<P>Indicates a critical control is unrecognized (see <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4511.txt">RFC4511</A> Section 4.1.11).</P> 8968<H2><A NAME="confidentialityRequired (13)">H.15. confidentialityRequired (13)</A></H2> 8969<P>Indicates that data confidentiality protections are required.</P> 8970<H2><A NAME="saslBindInProgress (14)">H.16. saslBindInProgress (14)</A></H2> 8971<P>Indicates the server requires the client to send a new bind request, with the same SASL mechanism, to continue the authentication process (see <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4511.txt">RFC4511</A> Section 4.2).</P> 8972<H2><A NAME="noSuchAttribute (16)">H.17. noSuchAttribute (16)</A></H2> 8973<P>Indicates that the named entry does not contain the specified attribute or attribute value.</P> 8974<H2><A NAME="undefinedAttributeType (17)">H.18. undefinedAttributeType (17)</A></H2> 8975<P>Indicates that a request field contains an unrecognized attribute description.</P> 8976<H2><A NAME="inappropriateMatching (18)">H.19. inappropriateMatching (18)</A></H2> 8977<P>Indicates that an attempt was made (e.g., in an assertion) to use a matching rule not defined for the attribute type concerned.</P> 8978<H2><A NAME="constraintViolation (19)">H.20. constraintViolation (19)</A></H2> 8979<P>Indicates that the client supplied an attribute value that does not conform to the constraints placed upon it by the data model.</P> 8980<P>For example, this code is returned when multiple values are supplied to an attribute that has a SINGLE-VALUE constraint.</P> 8981<H2><A NAME="attributeOrValueExists (20)">H.21. attributeOrValueExists (20)</A></H2> 8982<P>Indicates that the client supplied an attribute or value to be added to an entry, but the attribute or value already exists.</P> 8983<H2><A NAME="invalidAttributeSyntax (21)">H.22. invalidAttributeSyntax (21)</A></H2> 8984<P>Indicates that a purported attribute value does not conform to the syntax of the attribute.</P> 8985<H2><A NAME="noSuchObject (32)">H.23. noSuchObject (32)</A></H2> 8986<P>Indicates that the object does not exist in the DIT.</P> 8987<H2><A NAME="aliasProblem (33)">H.24. aliasProblem (33)</A></H2> 8988<P>Indicates that an alias problem has occurred. For example, the code may used to indicate an alias has been dereferenced that names no object.</P> 8989<H2><A NAME="invalidDNSyntax (34)">H.25. invalidDNSyntax (34)</A></H2> 8990<P>Indicates that an LDAPDN or RelativeLDAPDN field (e.g., search base, target entry, ModifyDN newrdn, etc.) of a request does not conform to the required syntax or contains attribute values that do not conform to the syntax of the attribute's type.</P> 8991<H2><A NAME="aliasDereferencingProblem (36)">H.26. aliasDereferencingProblem (36)</A></H2> 8992<P>Indicates that a problem occurred while dereferencing an alias. Typically, an alias was encountered in a situation where it was not allowed or where access was denied.</P> 8993<H2><A NAME="inappropriateAuthentication (48)">H.27. inappropriateAuthentication (48)</A></H2> 8994<P>Indicates the server requires the client that had attempted to bind anonymously or without supplying credentials to provide some form of credentials.</P> 8995<H2><A NAME="invalidCredentials (49)">H.28. invalidCredentials (49)</A></H2> 8996<P>Indicates that the provided credentials (e.g., the user's name and password) are invalid.</P> 8997<H2><A NAME="insufficientAccessRights (50)">H.29. insufficientAccessRights (50)</A></H2> 8998<P>Indicates that the client does not have sufficient access rights to perform the operation.</P> 8999<H2><A NAME="busy (51)">H.30. busy (51)</A></H2> 9000<P>Indicates that the server is too busy to service the operation.</P> 9001<H2><A NAME="unavailable (52)">H.31. unavailable (52)</A></H2> 9002<P>Indicates that the server is shutting down or a subsystem necessary to complete the operation is offline.</P> 9003<H2><A NAME="unwillingToPerform (53)">H.32. unwillingToPerform (53)</A></H2> 9004<P>Indicates that the server is unwilling to perform the operation.</P> 9005<H2><A NAME="loopDetect (54)">H.33. loopDetect (54)</A></H2> 9006<P>Indicates that the server has detected an internal loop (e.g., while dereferencing aliases or chaining an operation).</P> 9007<H2><A NAME="namingViolation (64)">H.34. namingViolation (64)</A></H2> 9008<P>Indicates that the entry's name violates naming restrictions.</P> 9009<H2><A NAME="objectClassViolation (65)">H.35. objectClassViolation (65)</A></H2> 9010<P>Indicates that the entry violates object class restrictions.</P> 9011<H2><A NAME="notAllowedOnNonLeaf (66)">H.36. notAllowedOnNonLeaf (66)</A></H2> 9012<P>Indicates that the operation is inappropriately acting upon a non-leaf entry.</P> 9013<H2><A NAME="notAllowedOnRDN (67)">H.37. notAllowedOnRDN (67)</A></H2> 9014<P>Indicates that the operation is inappropriately attempting to remove a value that forms the entry's relative distinguished name.</P> 9015<H2><A NAME="entryAlreadyExists (68)">H.38. entryAlreadyExists (68)</A></H2> 9016<P>Indicates that the request cannot be fulfilled (added, moved, or renamed) as the target entry already exists.</P> 9017<H2><A NAME="objectClassModsProhibited (69)">H.39. objectClassModsProhibited (69)</A></H2> 9018<P>Indicates that an attempt to modify the object class(es) of an entry's 'objectClass' attribute is prohibited.</P> 9019<P>For example, this code is returned when a client attempts to modify the structural object class of an entry.</P> 9020<H2><A NAME="affectsMultipleDSAs (71)">H.40. affectsMultipleDSAs (71)</A></H2> 9021<P>Indicates that the operation cannot be performed as it would affect multiple servers (DSAs).</P> 9022<H2><A NAME="other (80)">H.41. other (80)</A></H2> 9023<P>Indicates the server has encountered an internal error.</P> 9024<P></P> 9025<HR> 9026<H1><A NAME="Glossary">I. Glossary</A></H1> 9027<H2><A NAME="Terms">I.1. Terms</A></H2> 9028<TABLE CLASS="plain"> 9029<TR CLASS="heading"> 9030<TD> 9031<STRONG>Term</STRONG> 9032</TD> 9033<TD> 9034<STRONG>Definition</STRONG> 9035</TD> 9036</TR> 9037<TR> 9038<TD> 90393DES 9040</TD> 9041<TD> 9042Triple DES 9043</TD> 9044</TR> 9045<TR> 9046<TD> 9047ABNF 9048</TD> 9049<TD> 9050Augmented Backus-Naur Form 9051</TD> 9052</TR> 9053<TR> 9054<TD> 9055ACDF 9056</TD> 9057<TD> 9058Access Control Decision Function 9059</TD> 9060</TR> 9061<TR> 9062<TD> 9063ACE 9064</TD> 9065<TD> 9066ASCII Compatible Encoding 9067</TD> 9068</TR> 9069<TR> 9070<TD> 9071ASCII 9072</TD> 9073<TD> 9074American Standard Code for Information Interchange 9075</TD> 9076</TR> 9077<TR> 9078<TD> 9079ACID 9080</TD> 9081<TD> 9082Atomicity, Consistency, Isolation, and Durability 9083</TD> 9084</TR> 9085<TR> 9086<TD> 9087ACI 9088</TD> 9089<TD> 9090Access Control Information 9091</TD> 9092</TR> 9093<TR> 9094<TD> 9095ACL 9096</TD> 9097<TD> 9098Access Control List 9099</TD> 9100</TR> 9101<TR> 9102<TD> 9103AES 9104</TD> 9105<TD> 9106Advance Encryption Standard 9107</TD> 9108</TR> 9109<TR> 9110<TD> 9111ABI 9112</TD> 9113<TD> 9114Application Binary Interface 9115</TD> 9116</TR> 9117<TR> 9118<TD> 9119API 9120</TD> 9121<TD> 9122Application Program Interface 9123</TD> 9124</TR> 9125<TR> 9126<TD> 9127ASN.1 9128</TD> 9129<TD> 9130Abstract Syntax Notation - One 9131</TD> 9132</TR> 9133<TR> 9134<TD> 9135AVA 9136</TD> 9137<TD> 9138Attribute Value Assertion 9139</TD> 9140</TR> 9141<TR> 9142<TD> 9143AuthcDN 9144</TD> 9145<TD> 9146Authentication DN 9147</TD> 9148</TR> 9149<TR> 9150<TD> 9151AuthcId 9152</TD> 9153<TD> 9154Authentication Identity 9155</TD> 9156</TR> 9157<TR> 9158<TD> 9159AuthzDN 9160</TD> 9161<TD> 9162Authorization DN 9163</TD> 9164</TR> 9165<TR> 9166<TD> 9167AuthzId 9168</TD> 9169<TD> 9170Authorization Identity 9171</TD> 9172</TR> 9173<TR> 9174<TD> 9175BCP 9176</TD> 9177<TD> 9178Best Current Practice 9179</TD> 9180</TR> 9181<TR> 9182<TD> 9183BDB 9184</TD> 9185<TD> 9186Berkeley DB (Backend) 9187</TD> 9188</TR> 9189<TR> 9190<TD> 9191BER 9192</TD> 9193<TD> 9194Basic Encoding Rules 9195</TD> 9196</TR> 9197<TR> 9198<TD> 9199BNF 9200</TD> 9201<TD> 9202Backus-Naur Form 9203</TD> 9204</TR> 9205<TR> 9206<TD> 9207C 9208</TD> 9209<TD> 9210The C Programming Language 9211</TD> 9212</TR> 9213<TR> 9214<TD> 9215CA 9216</TD> 9217<TD> 9218Certificate Authority 9219</TD> 9220</TR> 9221<TR> 9222<TD> 9223CER 9224</TD> 9225<TD> 9226Canonical Encoding Rules 9227</TD> 9228</TR> 9229<TR> 9230<TD> 9231CLDAP 9232</TD> 9233<TD> 9234Connection-less LDAP 9235</TD> 9236</TR> 9237<TR> 9238<TD> 9239CN 9240</TD> 9241<TD> 9242Common Name 9243</TD> 9244</TR> 9245<TR> 9246<TD> 9247CRAM-MD5 9248</TD> 9249<TD> 9250SASL MD5 Challenge/Response Authentication Mechanism 9251</TD> 9252</TR> 9253<TR> 9254<TD> 9255CRL 9256</TD> 9257<TD> 9258Certificate Revocation List 9259</TD> 9260</TR> 9261<TR> 9262<TD> 9263DAP 9264</TD> 9265<TD> 9266Directory Access Protocol 9267</TD> 9268</TR> 9269<TR> 9270<TD> 9271DC 9272</TD> 9273<TD> 9274Domain Component 9275</TD> 9276</TR> 9277<TR> 9278<TD> 9279DER 9280</TD> 9281<TD> 9282Distinguished Encoding Rules 9283</TD> 9284</TR> 9285<TR> 9286<TD> 9287DES 9288</TD> 9289<TD> 9290Data Encryption Standard 9291</TD> 9292</TR> 9293<TR> 9294<TD> 9295DIB 9296</TD> 9297<TD> 9298Directory Information Base 9299</TD> 9300</TR> 9301<TR> 9302<TD> 9303DIGEST-MD5 9304</TD> 9305<TD> 9306SASL Digest MD5 Authentication Mechanism 9307</TD> 9308</TR> 9309<TR> 9310<TD> 9311DISP 9312</TD> 9313<TD> 9314Directory Information Shadowing Protocol 9315</TD> 9316</TR> 9317<TR> 9318<TD> 9319DIT 9320</TD> 9321<TD> 9322Directory Information Tree 9323</TD> 9324</TR> 9325<TR> 9326<TD> 9327DNS 9328</TD> 9329<TD> 9330Domain Name System 9331</TD> 9332</TR> 9333<TR> 9334<TD> 9335DN 9336</TD> 9337<TD> 9338Distinguished Name 9339</TD> 9340</TR> 9341<TR> 9342<TD> 9343DOP 9344</TD> 9345<TD> 9346Directory Operational Binding Management Protocol 9347</TD> 9348</TR> 9349<TR> 9350<TD> 9351DSAIT 9352</TD> 9353<TD> 9354DSA Information Tree 9355</TD> 9356</TR> 9357<TR> 9358<TD> 9359DSA 9360</TD> 9361<TD> 9362Directory System Agent 9363</TD> 9364</TR> 9365<TR> 9366<TD> 9367DSE 9368</TD> 9369<TD> 9370DSA-specific Entry 9371</TD> 9372</TR> 9373<TR> 9374<TD> 9375DSP 9376</TD> 9377<TD> 9378Directory System Protocol 9379</TD> 9380</TR> 9381<TR> 9382<TD> 9383DS 9384</TD> 9385<TD> 9386Draft Standard 9387</TD> 9388</TR> 9389<TR> 9390<TD> 9391DUA 9392</TD> 9393<TD> 9394Directory User Agent 9395</TD> 9396</TR> 9397<TR> 9398<TD> 9399EXTERNAL 9400</TD> 9401<TD> 9402SASL External Authentication Mechanism 9403</TD> 9404</TR> 9405<TR> 9406<TD> 9407FAQ 9408</TD> 9409<TD> 9410Frequently Asked Questions 9411</TD> 9412</TR> 9413<TR> 9414<TD> 9415FTP 9416</TD> 9417<TD> 9418File Transfer Protocol 9419</TD> 9420</TR> 9421<TR> 9422<TD> 9423FYI 9424</TD> 9425<TD> 9426For Your Information 9427</TD> 9428</TR> 9429<TR> 9430<TD> 9431GSER 9432</TD> 9433<TD> 9434Generic String Encoding Rules 9435</TD> 9436</TR> 9437<TR> 9438<TD> 9439GSS-API 9440</TD> 9441<TD> 9442Generic Security Service Application Program Interface 9443</TD> 9444</TR> 9445<TR> 9446<TD> 9447GSSAPI 9448</TD> 9449<TD> 9450SASL Kerberos V GSS-API Authentication Mechanism 9451</TD> 9452</TR> 9453<TR> 9454<TD> 9455HDB 9456</TD> 9457<TD> 9458Hierarchical Database (Backend) 9459</TD> 9460</TR> 9461<TR> 9462<TD> 9463I-D 9464</TD> 9465<TD> 9466Internet-Draft 9467</TD> 9468</TR> 9469<TR> 9470<TD> 9471IA5 9472</TD> 9473<TD> 9474International Alphabet 5 9475</TD> 9476</TR> 9477<TR> 9478<TD> 9479IDNA 9480</TD> 9481<TD> 9482Internationalized Domain Names in Applications 9483</TD> 9484</TR> 9485<TR> 9486<TD> 9487IDN 9488</TD> 9489<TD> 9490Internationalized Domain Name 9491</TD> 9492</TR> 9493<TR> 9494<TD> 9495ID 9496</TD> 9497<TD> 9498Identifier 9499</TD> 9500</TR> 9501<TR> 9502<TD> 9503IDL 9504</TD> 9505<TD> 9506Index Data Lookups 9507</TD> 9508</TR> 9509<TR> 9510<TD> 9511IP 9512</TD> 9513<TD> 9514Internet Protocol 9515</TD> 9516</TR> 9517<TR> 9518<TD> 9519IPC 9520</TD> 9521<TD> 9522Inter-process communication 9523</TD> 9524</TR> 9525<TR> 9526<TD> 9527IPsec 9528</TD> 9529<TD> 9530Internet Protocol Security 9531</TD> 9532</TR> 9533<TR> 9534<TD> 9535IPv4 9536</TD> 9537<TD> 9538Internet Protocol, version 4 9539</TD> 9540</TR> 9541<TR> 9542<TD> 9543IPv6 9544</TD> 9545<TD> 9546Internet Protocol, version 6 9547</TD> 9548</TR> 9549<TR> 9550<TD> 9551ITS 9552</TD> 9553<TD> 9554Issue Tracking System 9555</TD> 9556</TR> 9557<TR> 9558<TD> 9559JPEG 9560</TD> 9561<TD> 9562Joint Photographic Experts Group 9563</TD> 9564</TR> 9565<TR> 9566<TD> 9567Kerberos 9568</TD> 9569<TD> 9570Kerberos Authentication Service 9571</TD> 9572</TR> 9573<TR> 9574<TD> 9575LBER 9576</TD> 9577<TD> 9578Lightweight BER 9579</TD> 9580</TR> 9581<TR> 9582<TD> 9583LDAP 9584</TD> 9585<TD> 9586Lightweight Directory Access Protocol 9587</TD> 9588</TR> 9589<TR> 9590<TD> 9591LDAP Sync 9592</TD> 9593<TD> 9594LDAP Content Synchronization 9595</TD> 9596</TR> 9597<TR> 9598<TD> 9599LDAPv3 9600</TD> 9601<TD> 9602LDAP, version 3 9603</TD> 9604</TR> 9605<TR> 9606<TD> 9607LDIF 9608</TD> 9609<TD> 9610LDAP Data Interchange Format 9611</TD> 9612</TR> 9613<TR> 9614<TD> 9615MD5 9616</TD> 9617<TD> 9618Message Digest 5 9619</TD> 9620</TR> 9621<TR> 9622<TD> 9623MIB 9624</TD> 9625<TD> 9626Management Information Base 9627</TD> 9628</TR> 9629<TR> 9630<TD> 9631MODDN 9632</TD> 9633<TD> 9634Modify DN 9635</TD> 9636</TR> 9637<TR> 9638<TD> 9639MODRDN 9640</TD> 9641<TD> 9642Modify RDN 9643</TD> 9644</TR> 9645<TR> 9646<TD> 9647NSSR 9648</TD> 9649<TD> 9650Non-specific Subordinate Reference 9651</TD> 9652</TR> 9653<TR> 9654<TD> 9655OID 9656</TD> 9657<TD> 9658Object Identifier 9659</TD> 9660</TR> 9661<TR> 9662<TD> 9663OSI 9664</TD> 9665<TD> 9666Open Systems Interconnect 9667</TD> 9668</TR> 9669<TR> 9670<TD> 9671OTP 9672</TD> 9673<TD> 9674One Time Password 9675</TD> 9676</TR> 9677<TR> 9678<TD> 9679PDU 9680</TD> 9681<TD> 9682Protocol Data Unit 9683</TD> 9684</TR> 9685<TR> 9686<TD> 9687PEM 9688</TD> 9689<TD> 9690Privacy Enhanced eMail 9691</TD> 9692</TR> 9693<TR> 9694<TD> 9695PEN 9696</TD> 9697<TD> 9698Private Enterprise Number 9699</TD> 9700</TR> 9701<TR> 9702<TD> 9703PKCS 9704</TD> 9705<TD> 9706Public Key Cryptosystem 9707</TD> 9708</TR> 9709<TR> 9710<TD> 9711PKI 9712</TD> 9713<TD> 9714Public Key Infrastructure 9715</TD> 9716</TR> 9717<TR> 9718<TD> 9719PKIX 9720</TD> 9721<TD> 9722Public Key Infrastructure (X.509) 9723</TD> 9724</TR> 9725<TR> 9726<TD> 9727PLAIN 9728</TD> 9729<TD> 9730SASL Plaintext Password Authentication Mechanism 9731</TD> 9732</TR> 9733<TR> 9734<TD> 9735POSIX 9736</TD> 9737<TD> 9738Portable Operating System Interface 9739</TD> 9740</TR> 9741<TR> 9742<TD> 9743PS 9744</TD> 9745<TD> 9746Proposed Standard 9747</TD> 9748</TR> 9749<TR> 9750<TD> 9751RDN 9752</TD> 9753<TD> 9754Relative Distinguished Name 9755</TD> 9756</TR> 9757<TR> 9758<TD> 9759RFC 9760</TD> 9761<TD> 9762Request for Comments 9763</TD> 9764</TR> 9765<TR> 9766<TD> 9767RPC 9768</TD> 9769<TD> 9770Remote Procedure Call 9771</TD> 9772</TR> 9773<TR> 9774<TD> 9775RXER 9776</TD> 9777<TD> 9778Robust XML Encoding Rules 9779</TD> 9780</TR> 9781<TR> 9782<TD> 9783SASL 9784</TD> 9785<TD> 9786Simple Authentication and Security Layer 9787</TD> 9788</TR> 9789<TR> 9790<TD> 9791SDF 9792</TD> 9793<TD> 9794Simple Document Format 9795</TD> 9796</TR> 9797<TR> 9798<TD> 9799SDSE 9800</TD> 9801<TD> 9802Shadowed DSE 9803</TD> 9804</TR> 9805<TR> 9806<TD> 9807SHA1 9808</TD> 9809<TD> 9810Secure Hash Algorithm 1 9811</TD> 9812</TR> 9813<TR> 9814<TD> 9815SLAPD 9816</TD> 9817<TD> 9818Standalone LDAP Daemon 9819</TD> 9820</TR> 9821<TR> 9822<TD> 9823SLURPD 9824</TD> 9825<TD> 9826Standalone LDAP Update Replication Daemon 9827</TD> 9828</TR> 9829<TR> 9830<TD> 9831SMTP 9832</TD> 9833<TD> 9834Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 9835</TD> 9836</TR> 9837<TR> 9838<TD> 9839SNMP 9840</TD> 9841<TD> 9842Simple Network Management Protocol 9843</TD> 9844</TR> 9845<TR> 9846<TD> 9847SQL 9848</TD> 9849<TD> 9850Structured Query Language 9851</TD> 9852</TR> 9853<TR> 9854<TD> 9855SRP 9856</TD> 9857<TD> 9858Secure Remote Password 9859</TD> 9860</TR> 9861<TR> 9862<TD> 9863SSF 9864</TD> 9865<TD> 9866Security Strength Factor 9867</TD> 9868</TR> 9869<TR> 9870<TD> 9871SSL 9872</TD> 9873<TD> 9874Secure Socket Layer 9875</TD> 9876</TR> 9877<TR> 9878<TD> 9879STD 9880</TD> 9881<TD> 9882Internet Standard 9883</TD> 9884</TR> 9885<TR> 9886<TD> 9887TCP 9888</TD> 9889<TD> 9890Transmission Control Protocol 9891</TD> 9892</TR> 9893<TR> 9894<TD> 9895TLS 9896</TD> 9897<TD> 9898Transport Layer Security 9899</TD> 9900</TR> 9901<TR> 9902<TD> 9903UCS 9904</TD> 9905<TD> 9906Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set 9907</TD> 9908</TR> 9909<TR> 9910<TD> 9911UDP 9912</TD> 9913<TD> 9914User Datagram Protocol 9915</TD> 9916</TR> 9917<TR> 9918<TD> 9919UID 9920</TD> 9921<TD> 9922User Identifier 9923</TD> 9924</TR> 9925<TR> 9926<TD> 9927Unicode 9928</TD> 9929<TD> 9930The Unicode Standard 9931</TD> 9932</TR> 9933<TR> 9934<TD> 9935UNIX 9936</TD> 9937<TD> 9938Unix 9939</TD> 9940</TR> 9941<TR> 9942<TD> 9943URI 9944</TD> 9945<TD> 9946Uniform Resource Identifier 9947</TD> 9948</TR> 9949<TR> 9950<TD> 9951URL 9952</TD> 9953<TD> 9954Uniform Resource Locator 9955</TD> 9956</TR> 9957<TR> 9958<TD> 9959URN 9960</TD> 9961<TD> 9962Uniform Resource Name 9963</TD> 9964</TR> 9965<TR> 9966<TD> 9967UTF-8 9968</TD> 9969<TD> 99708-bit UCS/Unicode Transformation Format 9971</TD> 9972</TR> 9973<TR> 9974<TD> 9975UTR 9976</TD> 9977<TD> 9978Unicode Technical Report 9979</TD> 9980</TR> 9981<TR> 9982<TD> 9983UUID 9984</TD> 9985<TD> 9986Universally Unique Identifier 9987</TD> 9988</TR> 9989<TR> 9990<TD> 9991WWW 9992</TD> 9993<TD> 9994World Wide Web 9995</TD> 9996</TR> 9997<TR> 9998<TD> 9999X.500 10000</TD> 10001<TD> 10002X.500 Directory Services 10003</TD> 10004</TR> 10005<TR> 10006<TD> 10007X.509 10008</TD> 10009<TD> 10010X.509 Public Key and Attribute Certificate Frameworks 10011</TD> 10012</TR> 10013<TR> 10014<TD> 10015XED 10016</TD> 10017<TD> 10018XML Enabled Directory 10019</TD> 10020</TR> 10021<TR> 10022<TD> 10023XER 10024</TD> 10025<TD> 10026XML Encoding Rules 10027</TD> 10028</TR> 10029<TR> 10030<TD> 10031XML 10032</TD> 10033<TD> 10034Extensible Markup Language 10035</TD> 10036</TR> 10037<TR> 10038<TD> 10039syncrepl 10040</TD> 10041<TD> 10042LDAP Sync-based Replication 10043</TD> 10044</TR> 10045</TABLE> 10046 10047<H2><A NAME="Related Organizations">I.2. Related Organizations</A></H2> 10048<TABLE CLASS="plain"> 10049<TR CLASS="heading"> 10050<TD> 10051<STRONG>Name</STRONG> 10052</TD> 10053<TD> 10054<STRONG>Long</STRONG> 10055</TD> 10056<TD> 10057<STRONG>Jump</STRONG> 10058</TD> 10059</TR> 10060<TR> 10061<TD> 10062<A HREF="http://www.ansi.org/">ANSI</A> 10063</TD> 10064<TD> 10065American National Standards Institute 10066</TD> 10067<TD> 10068<A HREF="http://www.ansi.org/">http://www.ansi.org/</A> 10069</TD> 10070</TR> 10071<TR> 10072<TD> 10073<A HREF="http://www.bsi-global.com/">BSI</A> 10074</TD> 10075<TD> 10076British Standards Institute 10077</TD> 10078<TD> 10079<A HREF="http://www.bsi-global.com/">http://www.bsi-global.com/</A> 10080</TD> 10081</TR> 10082<TR> 10083<TD> 10084<ORG>COSINE</ORG> 10085</TD> 10086<TD> 10087Co-operation and Open Systems Interconnection in Europe 10088</TD> 10089<TD> 10090<JUMP> </JUMP> 10091</TD> 10092</TR> 10093<TR> 10094<TD> 10095<A HREF="http://cpan.org/">CPAN</A> 10096</TD> 10097<TD> 10098Comprehensive Perl Archive Network 10099</TD> 10100<TD> 10101<A HREF="http://cpan.org/">http://cpan.org/</A> 10102</TD> 10103</TR> 10104<TR> 10105<TD> 10106<A HREF="http://cyrusimap.web.cmu.edu/">Cyrus</A> 10107</TD> 10108<TD> 10109Project Cyrus 10110</TD> 10111<TD> 10112<A HREF="http://cyrusimap.web.cmu.edu/">http://cyrusimap.web.cmu.edu/</A> 10113</TD> 10114</TR> 10115<TR> 10116<TD> 10117<A HREF="http://www.fsf.org/">FSF</A> 10118</TD> 10119<TD> 10120Free Software Foundation 10121</TD> 10122<TD> 10123<A HREF="http://www.fsf.org/">http://www.fsf.org/</A> 10124</TD> 10125</TR> 10126<TR> 10127<TD> 10128<A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/">GNU</A> 10129</TD> 10130<TD> 10131GNU Not Unix Project 10132</TD> 10133<TD> 10134<A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/">http://www.gnu.org/</A> 10135</TD> 10136</TR> 10137<TR> 10138<TD> 10139<A HREF="http://www.iab.org/">IAB</A> 10140</TD> 10141<TD> 10142Internet Architecture Board 10143</TD> 10144<TD> 10145<A HREF="http://www.iab.org/">http://www.iab.org/</A> 10146</TD> 10147</TR> 10148<TR> 10149<TD> 10150<A HREF="http://www.iana.org/">IANA</A> 10151</TD> 10152<TD> 10153Internet Assigned Numbers Authority 10154</TD> 10155<TD> 10156<A HREF="http://www.iana.org/">http://www.iana.org/</A> 10157</TD> 10158</TR> 10159<TR> 10160<TD> 10161<A HREF="http://www.ieee.org">IEEE</A> 10162</TD> 10163<TD> 10164Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 10165</TD> 10166<TD> 10167<A HREF="http://www.ieee.org">http://www.ieee.org</A> 10168</TD> 10169</TR> 10170<TR> 10171<TD> 10172<A HREF="http://www.ietf.org/iesg/">IESG</A> 10173</TD> 10174<TD> 10175Internet Engineering Steering Group 10176</TD> 10177<TD> 10178<A HREF="http://www.ietf.org/iesg/">http://www.ietf.org/iesg/</A> 10179</TD> 10180</TR> 10181<TR> 10182<TD> 10183<A HREF="http://www.ietf.org/">IETF</A> 10184</TD> 10185<TD> 10186Internet Engineering Task Force 10187</TD> 10188<TD> 10189<A HREF="http://www.ietf.org/">http://www.ietf.org/</A> 10190</TD> 10191</TR> 10192<TR> 10193<TD> 10194<A HREF="http://www.irtf.org/">IRTF</A> 10195</TD> 10196<TD> 10197Internet Research Task Force 10198</TD> 10199<TD> 10200<A HREF="http://www.irtf.org/">http://www.irtf.org/</A> 10201</TD> 10202</TR> 10203<TR> 10204<TD> 10205<A HREF="http://www.iso.org/">ISO</A> 10206</TD> 10207<TD> 10208International Standards Organisation 10209</TD> 10210<TD> 10211<A HREF="http://www.iso.org/">http://www.iso.org/</A> 10212</TD> 10213</TR> 10214<TR> 10215<TD> 10216<A HREF="http://www.isoc.org/">ISOC</A> 10217</TD> 10218<TD> 10219Internet Society 10220</TD> 10221<TD> 10222<A HREF="http://www.isoc.org/">http://www.isoc.org/</A> 10223</TD> 10224</TR> 10225<TR> 10226<TD> 10227<A HREF="http://www.itu.int/">ITU</A> 10228</TD> 10229<TD> 10230International Telephone Union 10231</TD> 10232<TD> 10233<A HREF="http://www.itu.int/">http://www.itu.int/</A> 10234</TD> 10235</TR> 10236<TR> 10237<TD> 10238<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/foundation/">OLF</A> 10239</TD> 10240<TD> 10241OpenLDAP Foundation 10242</TD> 10243<TD> 10244<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/foundation/">http://www.openldap.org/foundation/</A> 10245</TD> 10246</TR> 10247<TR> 10248<TD> 10249<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/project/">OLP</A> 10250</TD> 10251<TD> 10252OpenLDAP Project 10253</TD> 10254<TD> 10255<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/project/">http://www.openldap.org/project/</A> 10256</TD> 10257</TR> 10258<TR> 10259<TD> 10260<A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL</A> 10261</TD> 10262<TD> 10263OpenSSL Project 10264</TD> 10265<TD> 10266<A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">http://www.openssl.org/</A> 10267</TD> 10268</TR> 10269<TR> 10270<TD> 10271<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/">RFC Editor</A> 10272</TD> 10273<TD> 10274RFC Editor 10275</TD> 10276<TD> 10277<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/">http://www.rfc-editor.org/</A> 10278</TD> 10279</TR> 10280<TR> 10281<TD> 10282<A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/">Oracle</A> 10283</TD> 10284<TD> 10285Oracle Corporation 10286</TD> 10287<TD> 10288<A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/">http://www.oracle.com/</A> 10289</TD> 10290</TR> 10291<TR> 10292<TD> 10293<A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/">UM</A> 10294</TD> 10295<TD> 10296University of Michigan 10297</TD> 10298<TD> 10299<A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/">http://www.umich.edu/</A> 10300</TD> 10301</TR> 10302<TR> 10303<TD> 10304<A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html">UMLDAP</A> 10305</TD> 10306<TD> 10307University of Michigan LDAP Team 10308</TD> 10309<TD> 10310<A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html">http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html</A> 10311</TD> 10312</TR> 10313</TABLE> 10314 10315<H2><A NAME="Related Products">I.3. Related Products</A></H2> 10316<TABLE CLASS="plain"> 10317<TR CLASS="heading"> 10318<TD> 10319<STRONG>Name</STRONG> 10320</TD> 10321<TD> 10322<STRONG>Jump</STRONG> 10323</TD> 10324</TR> 10325<TR> 10326<TD> 10327<A HREF="http://search.cpan.org/src/IANC/sdf-2.001/doc/catalog.html">SDF</A> 10328</TD> 10329<TD> 10330<A HREF="http://search.cpan.org/src/IANC/sdf-2.001/doc/catalog.html">http://search.cpan.org/src/IANC/sdf-2.001/doc/catalog.html</A> 10331</TD> 10332</TR> 10333<TR> 10334<TD> 10335<A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">Berkeley DB</A> 10336</TD> 10337<TD> 10338<A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html</A> 10339</TD> 10340</TR> 10341<TR> 10342<TD> 10343<A HREF="http://www.cvshome.org/">CVS</A> 10344</TD> 10345<TD> 10346<A HREF="http://www.cvshome.org/">http://www.cvshome.org/</A> 10347</TD> 10348</TR> 10349<TR> 10350<TD> 10351<A HREF="http://cyrusimap.web.cmu.edu/generalinfo.html">Cyrus</A> 10352</TD> 10353<TD> 10354<A HREF="http://cyrusimap.web.cmu.edu/generalinfo.html">http://cyrusimap.web.cmu.edu/generalinfo.html</A> 10355</TD> 10356</TR> 10357<TR> 10358<TD> 10359<A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">Cyrus SASL</A> 10360</TD> 10361<TD> 10362<A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html</A> 10363</TD> 10364</TR> 10365<TR> 10366<TD> 10367<A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/">GNU</A> 10368</TD> 10369<TD> 10370<A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/">http://www.gnu.org/software/</A> 10371</TD> 10372</TR> 10373<TR> 10374<TD> 10375<A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/">GnuTLS</A> 10376</TD> 10377<TD> 10378<A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/">http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/</A> 10379</TD> 10380</TR> 10381<TR> 10382<TD> 10383<A HREF="http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/">Heimdal</A> 10384</TD> 10385<TD> 10386<A HREF="http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/">http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/</A> 10387</TD> 10388</TR> 10389<TR> 10390<TD> 10391<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/jldap/">JLDAP</A> 10392</TD> 10393<TD> 10394<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/jldap/">http://www.openldap.org/jldap/</A> 10395</TD> 10396</TR> 10397<TR> 10398<TD> 10399<A HREF="http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/">MIT Kerberos</A> 10400</TD> 10401<TD> 10402<A HREF="http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/">http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/</A> 10403</TD> 10404</TR> 10405<TR> 10406<TD> 10407<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">OpenLDAP</A> 10408</TD> 10409<TD> 10410<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">http://www.openldap.org/</A> 10411</TD> 10412</TR> 10413<TR> 10414<TD> 10415<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/">OpenLDAP FAQ</A> 10416</TD> 10417<TD> 10418<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/">http://www.openldap.org/faq/</A> 10419</TD> 10420</TR> 10421<TR> 10422<TD> 10423<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/its/">OpenLDAP ITS</A> 10424</TD> 10425<TD> 10426<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/its/">http://www.openldap.org/its/</A> 10427</TD> 10428</TR> 10429<TR> 10430<TD> 10431<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/software/">OpenLDAP Software</A> 10432</TD> 10433<TD> 10434<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/software/">http://www.openldap.org/software/</A> 10435</TD> 10436</TR> 10437<TR> 10438<TD> 10439<A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL</A> 10440</TD> 10441<TD> 10442<A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">http://www.openssl.org/</A> 10443</TD> 10444</TR> 10445<TR> 10446<TD> 10447<A HREF="http://www.perl.org/">Perl</A> 10448</TD> 10449<TD> 10450<A HREF="http://www.perl.org/">http://www.perl.org/</A> 10451</TD> 10452</TR> 10453<TR> 10454<TD> 10455<A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html">UMLDAP</A> 10456</TD> 10457<TD> 10458<A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html">http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html</A> 10459</TD> 10460</TR> 10461</TABLE> 10462 10463<H2><A NAME="References">I.4. References</A></H2> 10464<TABLE CLASS="plain"> 10465<TR CLASS="heading"> 10466<TD> 10467<STRONG>Reference</STRONG> 10468</TD> 10469<TD> 10470<STRONG>Document</STRONG> 10471</TD> 10472<TD> 10473<STRONG>Status</STRONG> 10474</TD> 10475<TD> 10476<STRONG>Jump</STRONG> 10477</TD> 10478</TR> 10479<TR> 10480<TD> 10481<A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/doc/guides/slapd/guide.pdf">UM-GUIDE</A> 10482</TD> 10483<TD> 10484The SLAPD and SLURPD Administrators Guide 10485</TD> 10486<TD> 10487O 10488</TD> 10489<TD> 10490<A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/doc/guides/slapd/guide.pdf">http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/doc/guides/slapd/guide.pdf</A> 10491</TD> 10492</TR> 10493<TR> 10494<TD> 10495<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2079.txt">RFC2079</A> 10496</TD> 10497<TD> 10498Definition of an X.500 Attribute Type and an Object Class to Hold Uniform Resource Identifers 10499</TD> 10500<TD> 10501PS 10502</TD> 10503<TD> 10504<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2079.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2079.txt</A> 10505</TD> 10506</TR> 10507<TR> 10508<TD> 10509<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2296.txt">RFC2296</A> 10510</TD> 10511<TD> 10512Use of Language Codes in LDAP 10513</TD> 10514<TD> 10515PS 10516</TD> 10517<TD> 10518<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2296.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2296.txt</A> 10519</TD> 10520</TR> 10521<TR> 10522<TD> 10523<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2307.txt">RFC2307</A> 10524</TD> 10525<TD> 10526An Approach for Using LDAP as a Network Information Service 10527</TD> 10528<TD> 10529X 10530</TD> 10531<TD> 10532<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2307.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2307.txt</A> 10533</TD> 10534</TR> 10535<TR> 10536<TD> 10537<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2589.txt">RFC2589</A> 10538</TD> 10539<TD> 10540Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Extensions for Dynamic Directory Services 10541</TD> 10542<TD> 10543PS 10544</TD> 10545<TD> 10546<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2589.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2589.txt</A> 10547</TD> 10548</TR> 10549<TR> 10550<TD> 10551<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2798.txt">RFC2798</A> 10552</TD> 10553<TD> 10554Definition of the inetOrgPerson LDAP Object Class 10555</TD> 10556<TD> 10557I 10558</TD> 10559<TD> 10560<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2798.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2798.txt</A> 10561</TD> 10562</TR> 10563<TR> 10564<TD> 10565<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2831.txt">RFC2831</A> 10566</TD> 10567<TD> 10568Using Digest Authentication as a SASL Mechanism 10569</TD> 10570<TD> 10571PS 10572</TD> 10573<TD> 10574<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2831.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2831.txt</A> 10575</TD> 10576</TR> 10577<TR> 10578<TD> 10579<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2849.txt">RFC2849</A> 10580</TD> 10581<TD> 10582The LDAP Data Interchange Format 10583</TD> 10584<TD> 10585PS 10586</TD> 10587<TD> 10588<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2849.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2849.txt</A> 10589</TD> 10590</TR> 10591<TR> 10592<TD> 10593<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3088.txt">RFC3088</A> 10594</TD> 10595<TD> 10596OpenLDAP Root Service 10597</TD> 10598<TD> 10599X 10600</TD> 10601<TD> 10602<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3088.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3088.txt</A> 10603</TD> 10604</TR> 10605<TR> 10606<TD> 10607<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3296.txt">RFC3296</A> 10608</TD> 10609<TD> 10610Named Subordinate References in LDAP 10611</TD> 10612<TD> 10613PS 10614</TD> 10615<TD> 10616<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3296.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3296.txt</A> 10617</TD> 10618</TR> 10619<TR> 10620<TD> 10621<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3384.txt">RFC3384</A> 10622</TD> 10623<TD> 10624Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (version 3) Replication Requirements 10625</TD> 10626<TD> 10627I 10628</TD> 10629<TD> 10630<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3384.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3384.txt</A> 10631</TD> 10632</TR> 10633<TR> 10634<TD> 10635<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3494.txt">RFC3494</A> 10636</TD> 10637<TD> 10638Lightweight Directory Access Protocol version 2 (LDAPv2) to Historic Status 10639</TD> 10640<TD> 10641I 10642</TD> 10643<TD> 10644<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3494.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3494.txt</A> 10645</TD> 10646</TR> 10647<TR> 10648<TD> 10649<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4013.txt">RFC4013</A> 10650</TD> 10651<TD> 10652SASLprep: Stringprep Profile for User Names and Passwords 10653</TD> 10654<TD> 10655PS 10656</TD> 10657<TD> 10658<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4013.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4013.txt</A> 10659</TD> 10660</TR> 10661<TR> 10662<TD> 10663<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4346.txt">RFC4346</A> 10664</TD> 10665<TD> 10666The Transport Layer Security (TLS) Protocol, Version 1.1 10667</TD> 10668<TD> 10669PS 10670</TD> 10671<TD> 10672<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4346.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4346.txt</A> 10673</TD> 10674</TR> 10675<TR> 10676<TD> 10677<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4422.txt">RFC4422</A> 10678</TD> 10679<TD> 10680Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL) 10681</TD> 10682<TD> 10683PS 10684</TD> 10685<TD> 10686<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4422.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4422.txt</A> 10687</TD> 10688</TR> 10689<TR> 10690<TD> 10691<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4510.txt">RFC4510</A> 10692</TD> 10693<TD> 10694Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Technical Specification Roadmap 10695</TD> 10696<TD> 10697PS 10698</TD> 10699<TD> 10700<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4510.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4510.txt</A> 10701</TD> 10702</TR> 10703<TR> 10704<TD> 10705<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4511.txt">RFC4511</A> 10706</TD> 10707<TD> 10708Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): The Protocol 10709</TD> 10710<TD> 10711PS 10712</TD> 10713<TD> 10714<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4511.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4511.txt</A> 10715</TD> 10716</TR> 10717<TR> 10718<TD> 10719<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> 10720</TD> 10721<TD> 10722Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Directory Information Models 10723</TD> 10724<TD> 10725PS 10726</TD> 10727<TD> 10728<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt</A> 10729</TD> 10730</TR> 10731<TR> 10732<TD> 10733<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4513.txt">RFC4513</A> 10734</TD> 10735<TD> 10736Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Authentication Methods and Security Mechanisms 10737</TD> 10738<TD> 10739PS 10740</TD> 10741<TD> 10742<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4513.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4513.txt</A> 10743</TD> 10744</TR> 10745<TR> 10746<TD> 10747<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4514.txt">RFC4514</A> 10748</TD> 10749<TD> 10750Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): String Representation of Distinguished Names 10751</TD> 10752<TD> 10753PS 10754</TD> 10755<TD> 10756<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4514.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4514.txt</A> 10757</TD> 10758</TR> 10759<TR> 10760<TD> 10761<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4515.txt">RFC4515</A> 10762</TD> 10763<TD> 10764Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): String Representation of Search Filters 10765</TD> 10766<TD> 10767PS 10768</TD> 10769<TD> 10770<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4515.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4515.txt</A> 10771</TD> 10772</TR> 10773<TR> 10774<TD> 10775<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4516.txt">RFC4516</A> 10776</TD> 10777<TD> 10778Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Uniform Resource Locator 10779</TD> 10780<TD> 10781PS 10782</TD> 10783<TD> 10784<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4516.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4516.txt</A> 10785</TD> 10786</TR> 10787<TR> 10788<TD> 10789<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4517.txt">RFC4517</A> 10790</TD> 10791<TD> 10792Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Syntaxes and Matching Rules 10793</TD> 10794<TD> 10795PS 10796</TD> 10797<TD> 10798<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4517.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4517.txt</A> 10799</TD> 10800</TR> 10801<TR> 10802<TD> 10803<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4518.txt">RFC4518</A> 10804</TD> 10805<TD> 10806Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Internationalized String Preparation 10807</TD> 10808<TD> 10809PS 10810</TD> 10811<TD> 10812<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4518.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4518.txt</A> 10813</TD> 10814</TR> 10815<TR> 10816<TD> 10817<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4519.txt">RFC4519</A> 10818</TD> 10819<TD> 10820Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Schema for User Applications 10821</TD> 10822<TD> 10823PS 10824</TD> 10825<TD> 10826<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4519.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4519.txt</A> 10827</TD> 10828</TR> 10829<TR> 10830<TD> 10831<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4520.txt">RFC4520</A> 10832</TD> 10833<TD> 10834IANA Considerations for LDAP 10835</TD> 10836<TD> 10837BCP 10838</TD> 10839<TD> 10840<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4520.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4520.txt</A> 10841</TD> 10842</TR> 10843<TR> 10844<TD> 10845<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt">RFC4533</A> 10846</TD> 10847<TD> 10848The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) Content Synchronization Operation 10849</TD> 10850<TD> 10851X 10852</TD> 10853<TD> 10854<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt</A> 10855</TD> 10856</TR> 10857</TABLE> 10858 10859<P></P> 10860<HR> 10861<H1><A NAME="Generic configure Instructions">J. Generic configure Instructions</A></H1> 10862<PRE> 10863Basic Installation 10864================== 10865 10866 These are generic installation instructions. 10867 10868 The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for 10869various system-dependent variables used during compilation. It uses 10870those values to create a `Makefile' in each directory of the package. 10871It may also create one or more `.h' files containing system-dependent 10872definitions. Finally, it creates a shell script `config.status' that 10873you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, a file 10874`config.cache' that saves the results of its tests to speed up 10875reconfiguring, and a file `config.log' containing compiler output 10876(useful mainly for debugging `configure'). 10877 10878 If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try 10879to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and mail 10880diffs or instructions to the address given in the `README' so they can 10881be considered for the next release. If at some point `config.cache' 10882contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it. 10883 10884 The file `configure.in' is used to create `configure' by a program 10885called `autoconf'. You only need `configure.in' if you want to change 10886it or regenerate `configure' using a newer version of `autoconf'. 10887 10888The simplest way to compile this package is: 10889 10890 1. `cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type 10891 `./configure' to configure the package for your system. If you're 10892 using `csh' on an old version of System V, you might need to type 10893 `sh ./configure' instead to prevent `csh' from trying to execute 10894 `configure' itself. 10895 10896 Running `configure' takes awhile. While running, it prints some 10897 messages telling which features it is checking for. 10898 10899 2. Type `make' to compile the package. 10900 10901 3. Optionally, type `make check' to run any self-tests that come with 10902 the package. 10903 10904 4. Type `make install' to install the programs and any data files and 10905 documentation. 10906 10907 5. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the 10908 source code directory by typing `make clean'. To also remove the 10909 files that `configure' created (so you can compile the package for 10910 a different kind of computer), type `make distclean'. There is 10911 also a `make maintainer-clean' target, but that is intended mainly 10912 for the package's developers. If you use it, you may have to get 10913 all sorts of other programs in order to regenerate files that came 10914 with the distribution. 10915 10916Compilers and Options 10917===================== 10918 10919 Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that 10920the `configure' script does not know about. You can give `configure' 10921initial values for variables by setting them in the environment. Using 10922a Bourne-compatible shell, you can do that on the command line like 10923this: 10924 CC=c89 CFLAGS=-O2 LIBS=-lposix ./configure 10925 10926Or on systems that have the `env' program, you can do it like this: 10927 env CPPFLAGS=-I/usr/local/include LDFLAGS=-s ./configure 10928 10929Compiling For Multiple Architectures 10930==================================== 10931 10932 You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the 10933same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their 10934own directory. To do this, you must use a version of `make' that 10935supports the `VPATH' variable, such as GNU `make'. `cd' to the 10936directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run 10937the `configure' script. `configure' automatically checks for the 10938source code in the directory that `configure' is in and in `..'. 10939 10940 If you have to use a `make' that does not supports the `VPATH' 10941variable, you have to compile the package for one architecture at a time 10942in the source code directory. After you have installed the package for 10943one architecture, use `make distclean' before reconfiguring for another 10944architecture. 10945 10946Installation Names 10947================== 10948 10949 By default, `make install' will install the package's files in 10950`/usr/local/bin', `/usr/local/man', etc. You can specify an 10951installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving `configure' the 10952option `--prefix=PATH'. 10953 10954 You can specify separate installation prefixes for 10955architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files. If you 10956give `configure' the option `--exec-prefix=PATH', the package will use 10957PATH as the prefix for installing programs and libraries. 10958Documentation and other data files will still use the regular prefix. 10959 10960 In addition, if you use an unusual directory layout you can give 10961options like `--bindir=PATH' to specify different values for particular 10962kinds of files. Run `configure --help' for a list of the directories 10963you can set and what kinds of files go in them. 10964 10965 If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed 10966with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving `configure' the 10967option `--program-prefix=PREFIX' or `--program-suffix=SUFFIX'. 10968 10969Optional Features 10970================= 10971 10972 Some packages pay attention to `--enable-FEATURE' options to 10973`configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package. 10974They may also pay attention to `--with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE 10975is something like `gnu-as' or `x' (for the X Window System). The 10976`README' should mention any `--enable-' and `--with-' options that the 10977package recognizes. 10978 10979 For packages that use the X Window System, `configure' can usually 10980find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't, 10981you can use the `configure' options `--x-includes=DIR' and 10982`--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations. 10983 10984Specifying the System Type 10985========================== 10986 10987 There may be some features `configure' can not figure out 10988automatically, but needs to determine by the type of host the package 10989will run on. Usually `configure' can figure that out, but if it prints 10990a message saying it can not guess the host type, give it the 10991`--host=TYPE' option. TYPE can either be a short name for the system 10992type, such as `sun4', or a canonical name with three fields: 10993 CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM 10994 10995See the file `config.sub' for the possible values of each field. If 10996`config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't 10997need to know the host type. 10998 10999 If you are building compiler tools for cross-compiling, you can also 11000use the `--target=TYPE' option to select the type of system they will 11001produce code for and the `--build=TYPE' option to select the type of 11002system on which you are compiling the package. 11003 11004Sharing Defaults 11005================ 11006 11007 If you want to set default values for `configure' scripts to share, 11008you can create a site shell script called `config.site' that gives 11009default values for variables like `CC', `cache_file', and `prefix'. 11010`configure' looks for `PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then 11011`PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists. Or, you can set the 11012`CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script. 11013A warning: not all `configure' scripts look for a site script. 11014 11015Operation Controls 11016================== 11017 11018 `configure' recognizes the following options to control how it 11019operates. 11020 11021`--cache-file=FILE' 11022 Use and save the results of the tests in FILE instead of 11023 `./config.cache'. Set FILE to `/dev/null' to disable caching, for 11024 debugging `configure'. 11025 11026`--help' 11027 Print a summary of the options to `configure', and exit. 11028 11029`--quiet' 11030`--silent' 11031`-q' 11032 Do not print messages saying which checks are being made. To 11033 suppress all normal output, redirect it to `/dev/null' (any error 11034 messages will still be shown). 11035 11036`--srcdir=DIR' 11037 Look for the package's source code in directory DIR. Usually 11038 `configure' can determine that directory automatically. 11039 11040`--version' 11041 Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure' 11042 script, and exit. 11043 11044`configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options. 11045 11046</PRE> 11047<P></P> 11048<HR> 11049<H1><A NAME="OpenLDAP Software Copyright Notices">K. OpenLDAP Software Copyright Notices</A></H1> 11050<H2><A NAME="OpenLDAP Copyright Notice">K.1. OpenLDAP Copyright Notice</A></H2> 11051<P>Copyright 1998-2008 The OpenLDAP Foundation.<BR><EM>All rights reserved.</EM></P> 11052<P>Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted <EM>only as authorized</EM> by the <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Public License">OpenLDAP Public License</A>.</P> 11053<P>A copy of this license is available in file <TT>LICENSE</TT> in the top-level directory of the distribution or, alternatively, at <<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/license.html">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/license.html</A>>.</P> 11054<P>OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.</P> 11055<P>Individual files and/or contributed packages may be copyright by other parties and their use subject to additional restrictions.</P> 11056<P>This work is derived from the University of Michigan LDAP v3.3 distribution. Information concerning this software is available at <<A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html">http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html</A>>.</P> 11057<P>This work also contains materials derived from public sources.</P> 11058<P>Additional information about OpenLDAP software can be obtained at <<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/</A>>.</P> 11059<H2><A NAME="Additional Copyright Notices">K.2. Additional Copyright Notices</A></H2> 11060<P>Portions Copyright 1998-2008 Kurt D. Zeilenga.<BR>Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Net Boolean Incorporated.<BR>Portions Copyright 2001-2006 IBM Corporation.<BR><EM>All rights reserved.</EM></P> 11061<P>Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted only as authorized by the <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Public License">OpenLDAP Public License</A>.</P> 11062<P>Portions Copyright 1999-2007 Howard Y.H. Chu.<BR>Portions Copyright 1999-2007 Symas Corporation.<BR>Portions Copyright 1998-2003 Hallvard B. Furuseth.<BR>Portions Copyright 2007-2009 Gavin Henry.<BR>Portions Copyright 2007-2009 Suretec Systems Limited.<BR><EM>All rights reserved.</EM></P> 11063<P>Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that this notice is preserved. The names of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without their specific prior written permission. This software is provided ``as is'' without express or implied warranty.</P> 11064<H2><A NAME="University of Michigan Copyright Notice">K.3. University of Michigan Copyright Notice</A></H2> 11065<P>Portions Copyright 1992-1996 Regents of the University of Michigan.<BR><EM>All rights reserved.</EM></P> 11066<P>Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this notice is preserved and that due credit is given to the University of Michigan at Ann Arbor. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. This software is provided ``as is'' without express or implied warranty.</P> 11067<P></P> 11068<HR> 11069<H1><A NAME="OpenLDAP Public License">L. OpenLDAP Public License</A></H1> 11070<PRE> 11071The OpenLDAP Public License 11072 Version 2.8, 17 August 2003 11073 11074Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation 11075("Software"), with or without modification, are permitted provided 11076that the following conditions are met: 11077 110781. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements 11079 and notices, 11080 110812. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright 11082 statements and notices, this list of conditions, and the following 11083 disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided 11084 with the distribution, and 11085 110863. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document. 11087 11088The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. 11089Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use 11090this Software under terms of this license revision or under the 11091terms of any subsequent revision of the license. 11092 11093THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS 11094CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, 11095INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY 11096AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT 11097SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) 11098OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, 11099INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, 11100BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; 11101LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER 11102CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT 11103LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN 11104ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE 11105POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 11106 11107The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in 11108advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing 11109in this Software without specific, written prior permission. Title 11110to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright 11111holders. 11112 11113OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation. 11114 11115Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, 11116California, USA. All Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and 11117distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted. 11118</PRE> 11119</DIV> 11120<DIV CLASS="footer"> 11121<HR> 11122<DIV CLASS="navigate"> 11123<P ALIGN="Center"><A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">Home</A> | <A HREF="../index.html">Catalog</A></P> 11124</DIV> 11125<P> 11126<FONT COLOR="#808080" FACE="Arial,Verdana,Helvetica" SIZE="1"><B> 11127________________<BR> 11128<SMALL>© Copyright 2008, <A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/foundation/">OpenLDAP Foundation</A>, <A HREF="mailto:info@OpenLDAP.org">info@OpenLDAP.org</A></SMALL></B></FONT> 11129 11130</DIV> 11131 11132</BODY> 11133</HTML> 11134
